Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series

MPE720
Software for Programming Device
USER'S MANUAL
Model　CPMC-MPE720

Outline of the MPE720 1

Manager Functions 2
System Configuration Definitions 3
Definition Folder 1:
Application Information Definitions 4
Definition Folder 2: 5
System Configuration
MP2300
RDY
ALM
RUN
ERR
RUN
STRX
TX
ERR
COL
RX
Definition Folder 3: 6
TX

STOP
BAT
Scan Time Definitions
SUP INIT
INT TEST
CNFG
MON
TEST
OFF　ON
　 SW1
OFF 　ON
PORT
Definition Folder 4: 7
　
M-4/10
Data Trace Definitions
Definition Folder 5:
8
BATTERY

CPU　
I/O
Module Configuration Definitions
DC24V

Program Folder 1: 9
DC 0V
10Base-T

Ladder Programming
Program Folder 2:
Motion Programming 10
Creating Table Data 11

Tools 12
Appendices App

MANUAL NO. SIEP C880700 05E

Copyright © 2003 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed
with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this
manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is
any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this
publication.
 Using this Manual

„ About this Manual

This manual describes the installation and operation of the MPE720, a programming software package that
aids in the design and maintenance of MP900-series and MP2000-series Machine Controllers.
This manual is written for readers with a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista.
Refer to Windows documentation provided with your computer for information on basic operations, such as
opening and closing windows and mouse operations.
Read this manual carefully to ensure the proper use of the MPE720. Also, keep this manual in a safe place so
that it can be referred to whenever necessary.

„ Basic Terms
MP series: Four models of MP900 series, MP910, MP920, MP930, MP940 and six models of MP2000 series
MP2100, MP2200, MP2300, MP2300S, MP2310, and MP2400

„ Abbreviations
In this manual, the following terms are defined as follows:
• PLC = Machine Controller
• MPE720 = MPE720 software

„ Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following users.
• Those responsible for designing the MP900/MP2000 System
• Those responsible for writing MP900/MP2000 motion programs
• Those responsible for writing MP900/MP2000 ladder programs

„ Visual Aids
The following aids are used to indicate certain types of information for easier reference.

IMPORTANT Indicates important information that should be memorized.

INFO Indicates supplemental information.

EXAMPLE Indicates application examples.

TERMS Describes technical terms that are difficult to understand, or appear in the text without an
explanation being given.

iii
 „ Copyrights
• Windows and Windows 2000, XP, and Vista are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
• Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
• MECHATROLINK is a trademark of the MECHATROLINK Members Association.
• Adobe Reader is a trademark or a registered trademark of the Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• InstallShield is a trademark of the InstallShield Software Corporation.
• Other product names and company names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective
company. “TM” and the ® mark do not appear with product or company names in this manual.

„ About the Software

• This software is to be installed on only one specified computer. You must purchase another copy of the
software to install it on another computer.
• This software is not to be copied for any reason other than when installing it on the computer.
• Store the CD-ROM containing the software in a safe place.
• This software is not to be decompiled, disassembled, or reverse engineered.
• This software is not to be given to, rent to, exchanged with, or otherwise released to a third party without
the prior permission of Yaskawa Electric Corporation.

iv
„ Related Manuals
Refer to the following related manuals as required.

Manual Name Manual Number Contents

Machine Controller MP930 SIEZ-C887-1.1 Describes the design and maintenance of the
User's Manual MP930 Machine Controller.
Design and Maintenance
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEZ-C887-1.2 Describes the instructions used in MP900/
MP2000 Series User's Manual MP2000 ladder programming.
Ladder Programming
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEZ-C887-1.3 Describes the instructions used in MP900/
MP2000 Series User's Manual MP2000 motion programming.
Motion Programming
Machine Controller MP900 SIEZ-C887-1.6 Describes the details of the teach pendant for
Series Teach Pendant MP900 Machine Controllers.
User’s Manual
Machine Controller MP920 SIEZ-C887-2.1 Describes the design and maintenance of the
User's Manual MP920 Machine Controller.
Design and Maintenance
Machine Controller MP9†† SIEZ-C887-2.3 Describes the simple operation methods of
Programming Panel Software the software for the MP900-series program-
User’s Manual ming device (CP-717).
for Simple Operation Version
MP900 Series Machine SIEZ-C887-2.4 Describes the installation and operating pro-
Controller User’s Manual: cedures for the CP-717 Programming Panel
Programming Panel Software Software used for MP900 Machine Control-
(for standard operation) lers.
Machine Controller MP920 SIEZ-C887-2.5 Describes the functions, specifications, and
User's Manual application methods of the MP920 Motion
Motion Module Modules (SVA-01A, SVB-01, and PO-01).
Machine Controller MP920 SIEZ-C887-2.6 Describes the functions, specifications, and
User's Manual application methods of the MP920 Commu-
Communications Module nication Modules (217IF, 215IF, and
218IFA).
Machine Controller MP940 SIEZ-C887-4.1 Describes the design and maintenance of the
User's Manual MP940 Machine Controller.
Design and Maintenance
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEZ-C887-5.1 Describes the functions, specifications, and
MP2000 Series User's Manual application methods of the MECHA-
MECHATROLINK System TROLINK Modules for MP900/MP2000
Machine Controllers.
Machine Controller MP900 SIEZ-C887-5.2 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series 260IF DeviceNet System application methods of the MP920
User's Manual DeviceNet Module (260IF).
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEZ-C887-13.1 Describes the programming instructions of
MP2000 Series New Ladder the New Ladder Editor, which assists
Editor User’s Manual MP900/MP2000-series design and mainte-
Programming Manual nance.
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEZ-C887-13.2 Describes the operating methods of the New
MP2000 Series New Ladder Ladder Editor, which assists MP900/
Editor User’s Manual MP2000-series design and maintenance.
Operation
Machine Controller MP2100/ SIEPC88070001 Describes the design and maintenance of the
MP2100M User's Manual MP2100/MP2100M Machine Controller.
Design and Maintenance

v
 Manual Name Manual Number Contents
Machine Controller MP2300 SIEPC88070003 Describes how to use the MP2300 Basic
Basic Module Module and the modules that can be con-
User’s Manual nected.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEPC88070004 Provides the information on the Communi-
Series Communication Module cation Module that can be connected to
User's Manual MP2000 series Machine Controller and the
communication methods.
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEP C880700 06 Describes the connection methods, setting
MP2000 Series Linear methods, and other information for Linear
Servomotor Manual Servomotors.
Machine Controller MP2200 SIEPC88070014 Describes how to use the MP2200 Machine
User's Manual Controller and the modules that can be con-
nected.
Machine Controller MP900/ SIEPC88070018 Describes how to use the electronic cam data
MP2000 Series Electronic Cam creating tool.
Data Preparation Tool Operation
Manual
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEP C880700 26 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series Analog Input/Analog Out- application methods of the Analog Input
put Module AI-01/AO-01 Module AI-01 and Analog Output Module
User’s Manual AO-01 for the MP2000 Series.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEP C880700 27 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series Counter Module CNTR-01 application methods of the Counter Module
User’s Manual CNTR-01 for the MP2000 Series.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEP C880700 28 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series Pulse Output Motion application methods of the PO-01, Pulse
Module PO-01 User’s Manual Output Motion Module for the MP2000
Series.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEP C880700 32 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series Built-in SVA-01 Motion application methods of the SVA-01, SVA
Module User’s Manual Motion Module for the MP2000 Series.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEP C880700 33 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 application methods of the MP2000 Series
Motion Module User’s Manual Motion Module that is built into the SVB,
SVB-01, and SVR Module.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEP C880700 34 Describes the functions, specifications, and
Series I/O Module application methods of the I/O Module for
User’s Manual the MP2000 Series.
Machine Controller MP2000 SIEPC88070038 Describes the instructions used in MP2000
Series User’s Manual motion programming.
for Motion Programming
Machine Controller MP2300S SIEPC88073200 Describes the application methods and con-
Basic Module User’s Manual nectable modules of the MP2300S basic
modules.
Machine Controller MP2310 SIEPC88073201 Describes the application methods and con-
Basic Module User’s Manual nectable modules of the MP2310 basic mod-
ules.

vi
Contents
Using this Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - iii

1 Outline of the MPE720

1.1 MPE720 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.1.1 Recommended PC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.1.2 Version Applicability- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.1.3 Main Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.1.4 Function Tree - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
1.1.5 System Configuration Example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5

1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6

1.2.1 Simple Development Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.2.2 Environment Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8
1.2.3 Self-configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
1.2.4 Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.2.5 Registering a Machine Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.2.6 Setting Machine Controller’s Definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.2.7 Creating Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
1.2.8 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.2.9 Starting the Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.2.10 Saving to Flash Memory- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15

1.3 Installing the MPE720 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16

1.3.1 Installation Disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.3.2 Starting the Installer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.3.3 Preparing Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-17
1.3.4 Starting Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
1.3.5 Entering Customer Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.3.6 Selecting Installation Destination- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.3.7 Selecting Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
1.3.8 Selecting Program Folder- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
1.3.9 Copying Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21
1.3.10 Completing Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-22
1.3.11 Verifying Setup Contents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
1.3.12 Folders Created at Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23

2 Manager Functions
2.1 Communication Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.1 Starting the Communication Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.2 Communication Manager Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

2.2 File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8

2.2.1 File Manager Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
2.2.2 Basic Tree Concepts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
2.2.3 Command Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
2.2.4 Creating PLC Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13

vii
 2.2.5 User Management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
2.2.6 Switching between Online and Offline Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.2.7 Logging On and Logging Off the CPU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.2.8 Switching the CPU Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-22
2.2.9 Program File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
2.2.10 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25
2.2.11 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39
2.2.12 Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-43
2.2.13 PLC Import Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59

2.3 Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63

2.3.1 Automatic Startup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63
2.3.2 Basic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-64
2.3.3 Basic Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-65
2.3.4 Function Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66
2.3.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-67

2.4 List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68

2.4.1 Outline- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68
2.4.2 List Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69
2.4.3 Print Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-70

2.5 User Menu Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-78

2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-78
2.5.2 Starting Up from a Shortcut Icon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-79

3 System Configuration Definitions

3.1 Outline of System Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4

4 Definition Folder 1:
Application Information Definitions
4.1 Opening the Application Information Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.2 Application Information Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.3 Setting Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.4 Saving Application Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.5 Closing Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3

5 Definition Folder 2:
System Configuration
5.1 Opening the System Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.2 System Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
5.3 System Configuration Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
5.4 Changing Machine Controller Status- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6

viii
 5.5 Saving System Configuration- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
5.6 Closing System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7

6 Definition Folder 3:
Scan Time Definitions
6.1 Opening the Scan Time Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2 Scan Time Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.3 Setting the System Scan Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.6 Closing Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5

7 Definition Folder 4:
Data Trace Definitions
7.1 Data Trace - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 Opening the Data Trace Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.2 Data Trace Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
7.1.4 Data Trace Setup Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.1.5 List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
7.1.6 Graph Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.1.7 Closing Data Trace Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19

7.2 Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20

7.2.1 Before Using the Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.2.2 Starting the Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.2.3 Trace Operations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
7.2.4 Graph- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
7.2.5 List- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30
7.2.6 Other Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-47

8 Definition Folder 5:
Module Configuration Definitions
8.1 Machine Controller Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.1.1 Machine Controller MP Series Module Configurations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2

8.2 Basic Operation of Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4

8.2.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.2.2 Basic Flowchart- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
8.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6
8.2.4 Module Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7
8.2.5 Setting Items for Module Configuration Definition Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-8

8.3 Basic Operation of Individual Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9

8.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9

ix
 9 Program Folder 1:
Ladder Programming
9.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3
9.1.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-3

9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5

9.2.1 Outline of Properties Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-5
9.2.2 Opening Drawing Properties Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-5
9.2.3 Drawing Properties Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-6
9.2.4 Drawing Properties Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-7
9.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-8
9.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-9
9.2.7 # Register List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12
9.2.8 Update History Tab Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13
9.2.9 Saving Property Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14

9.3 Creating Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15

9.3.1 Outline of Creating Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15
9.3.2 LADDER Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15
9.3.3 LADDER Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18
9.3.4 LADDER Window Display Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.3.5 Inputting Ladder Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21
9.3.6 Editing Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-27
9.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-32
9.3.8 Disabling Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-38
9.3.9 Displaying Current Values - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-39
9.3.10 Creating Comments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-40
9.3.11 Saving Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-41
9.3.12 Printing Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42
9.3.13 Closing Ladder Program Editing- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42

9.4 Creating Table Programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43

9.4.1 Outline of Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
9.4.2 Table Program Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
9.4.3 Table Program Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-44
9.4.4 Switching Input Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45
9.4.5 Entering # Register Constant Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45
9.4.6 Entering M Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-46
9.4.7 Entering I/O Conversion Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47
9.4.8 Entering Interlock Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47
9.4.9 Entering Part Composition Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49
9.4.10 Entering Data in C Constant Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-51
9.4.11 Editing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-57
9.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-60
9.4.13 Printing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-60

x
10 Program Folder 2:
Motion Programming
10.1 Developing Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.1.1 Outline of Developing Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2

10.2 Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3

10.2.1 Outline of Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
10.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
10.2.3 Group Definition Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.2.4 Setting Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.2.5 Saving Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
10.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
10.2.7 Closing Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10

10.3 Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11

10.3.1 Outline of Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-11
10.3.2 Setting the Number of Common Registers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12
10.3.3 Setting Motion Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-13
10.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15
10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-17
10.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-20
10.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-24
10.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-25

10.4 Compiling Motion Programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26

10.4.1 Compile Execution- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26
10.4.2 Compile Execution Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26
10.4.3 Normal Completion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-27
10.4.4 Error Completion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-27

10.5 Debugging Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-28

10.5.1 Outline of Debug Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-28
10.5.2 Opening the Debug Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-28
10.5.3 Debug Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-31

11 Creating Table Data

11.1 Creating Table Data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
11.1.1 Outline of Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
11.1.2 Table Data Definition List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-3
11.1.3 Table Data Definition List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4
11.1.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data Definition List Windows- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
11.1.5 Opening Column Attribute Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6
11.1.6 Data Table Column Attribute Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-7
11.1.7 Setting Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-8
11.1.8 Editing Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-9
11.1.9 Saving Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-10
11.1.10 Opening Table Data Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-10
11.1.11 Table Data Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-11
11.1.12 Setting Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-12

xi
 11.1.13 Editing Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
11.1.14 Saving and Closing Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12

12 Tools
12.1 Outline of the Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3
12.2 Tuning Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.2.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.2.2 Opening the Tuning Panel Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.2.3 Tuning Panel Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-5
12.2.4 Configuration and Operation of the Tuning Panel Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-6
12.2.5 Exiting Tuning Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-7

12.3 Quick Reference- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8

12.3.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
12.3.2 Opening the Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
12.3.3 Quick Reference Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-9
12.3.4 Quick Reference Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-11
12.3.5 Editing Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15
12.3.6 Closing the Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-20

12.4 Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21

12.4.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21
12.4.2 Opening a Register List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21
12.4.3 Register List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-22
12.4.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Data Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-23
12.4.5 Exiting the Register List- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-25

12.5 Cross References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26

12.5.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26
12.5.2 Opening the Cross Reference Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26
12.5.3 Cross Reference Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-27
12.5.4 Configuration and Operation of the Cross Reference Condition Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-27
12.5.5 Closing Cross References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-29

12.6 Disable Coil Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30

12.6.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
12.6.2 Opening the Disable Coil List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
12.6.3 Disable Coil List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
12.6.4 Configuration and Operation of the Disable Coil List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-31
12.6.5 Exiting Disable Coil Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-31

12.7 Comment Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32

12.7.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
12.7.2 Opening Comment List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
12.7.3 Comment List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
12.7.4 Configuration and Operation of the Comment List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33
12.7.5 Exiting the Comment Creation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33

xii
 12.8 Replacing Register Numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34
12.8.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34
12.8.2 Opening the Register No. Replacement Cross Reference Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34
12.8.3 Register Number Replacement Cross Reference Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-35
12.8.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Number Replacement Cross
Reference Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-36
12.8.5 Closing Register Number Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-38

12.9 Motion Program Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39

12.9.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39
12.9.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39
12.9.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-41

12.10 Position Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42

12.10.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42
12.10.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42
12.10.3 Position Monitor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43
12.10.4 Configuration of the Position Monitor Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43
12.10.5 Closing Position Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-45

12.11 Task Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46

12.11.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46
12.11.2 Opening the Task Monitor Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46
12.11.3 Task Monitor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-47
12.11.4 Task Monitor Display Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-47
12.11.5 Task Monitor Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-48
12.11.6 Closing Task Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-49

12.12 Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50

12.12.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50
12.12.2 Opening the Motion Alarm Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50
12.12.3 Motion Alarm Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-51
12.12.4 Motion Alarm Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-51
12.12.5 Closing Motion Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-54

Appendices
A Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2
A.1 System Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2
A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-8

B File Manager Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-10

B.1 Common Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-10
B.2 Individual Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-11

C Drawing and Function Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-21

D MECHATROLINK Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-26
E Remote Operation Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27
E.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27
E.2 Modem Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27
E.3 Communication Process Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27

xiii
 E.4 Remote Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-34

F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-40

F.1 Error List- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-40
F.2 Error Detail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-41
F.3 Warning List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-68
F.4 Details of Warnings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-69

G Operations Possible with the Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-78

G.1 Cancelling Display in Red of Conversion Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-78
G.2 Rules for Module Conversion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-78

INDEX

Revision History

xiv
 1
Outline of the MPE720

This chapter introduces the MPE720 for the Machine Controllers.

1.1 MPE720 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2

1.1.1 Recommended PC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.1.2 Version Applicability - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3

Outline of the MPE720

1.1.3 Main Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.1.4 Function Tree - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
1.1.5 System Configuration Example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5

1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6

1.2.1 Simple Development Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.2.2 Environment Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8
1.2.3 Self-configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
1.2.4 Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.2.5 Registering a Machine Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11 1
1.2.6 Setting Machine Controller’s Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.2.7 Creating Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
1.2.8 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.2.9 Starting the Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.2.10 Saving to Flash Memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15

1.3 Installing the MPE720 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16

1.3.1 Installation Disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.3.2 Starting the Installer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.3.3 Preparing Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-17
1.3.4 Starting Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
1.3.5 Entering Customer Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.3.6 Selecting Installation Destination - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.3.7 Selecting Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
1.3.8 Selecting Program Folder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
1.3.9 Copying Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21
1.3.10 Completing Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-22
1.3.11 Verifying Setup Contents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
1.3.12 Folders Created at Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23

1-1
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.1.1 Recommended PC

1.1 MPE720
The MPE720 is a programming device software used to control and monitor Machine Controllers. (Model:
CPMC-MPE720)
The MPE720 runs on Windows 2000, XP, or Vista. In general, a personal computer (PC) where the MPE720 is
installed is called a Programming Device.
A Programming Device and a Machine Controller are normally connected by an RS-232C communication inter-
face. A CP-215 high-speed communication interface and CP-218 Ethernet interface are also available depending
on the MP-series model.
Installation disk

CD-ROM

MP2300
Installation YASKAWA RDY

ALM
RUN

ERR
TX BAT

STOP
SUP
INT
CNFG
MON
SW1

MPE720
TEST

OFF ON

M-4/10
Option
Option
Option
BATTERY

Communication CPU I/O

interface DC24V

DC 0V

Programming Device MP2300

1.1.1 Recommended PC
The Programming Device performs high-speed data communication with the Machine Controller and must pro-
vide control, monitoring, and many other functions. The system requirements for the PC to ensure easy MPE720
operation are given below. Check the PC system before installing the MPE720.

Item Specifications
CPU Pentium 800 MHz min. or equivalent. (1 GHz or faster is recommended.)
Memory Capacity 128 MB min. (256 MB or larger is recommended.)
Display Resolution: 1,024 x 768 min., 16-bit High Color
Notebook PC Available HDD Space 200 MB min.
CD Drive One CD drive (Required only for installation.)

or Communication Ports Serial, Ethernet, MP2100 bus, or USB

Operating System Windows 2000 (service pack 1 or later)
Windows XP
Windows Vista
Windows 7 (32 bit version)

Other Adobe Reader version 6.00 or later

(Required for help displays.)
Internet Explorer version 5.5 or later
Desktop PC (Required for displaying online help for ladder instructions.)

1-2
 1.1 MPE720

1.1.2 Version Applicability

The Machine Controllers and OS types applicable to each MPE720 version are shown below.
Applicable Machine
Applicable OS
MPE720 Controllers
Version MP900 MP2000 Windows Windows Windows Windows Windows
Series Series 2000 XP or SP1 XP or SP2 Vista 7
Ver.4.50A
Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
or later
Ver.5.30
Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable
or later
Ver.5.40A
Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Not Applicable
or later
Ver.5.60
Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable
or later

„ Restrictions on Simultaneous Installation of the CP-717 and MPE720

INFO
Both programs can be installed together on one PC if the following software versions are used.
• CP-717: version 4.20 or later
• MPE720: version 4.30 or later
Operation may not be stable if any other versions are installed simultaneously.

Outline of the MPE720

1.1.3 Main Functions
The MPE720 is configured from five management programs called the Managers. The Managers are used to
manage and control MP-series systems. The main functions provided by these Managers are listed below.
Manager Function Outline
Displays the MPE720 system and file configuration as a tree diagram, and provides file
management functions. The File Manager can be used both online and offline.
Provides folders and files necessary for system configuration 1
File operations
structured in a tree hierarchy.
File Manager
User management Provides user security functions, mainly for logon and logoff.
Provides functions for data transmission between the Program-
File transfers
ming Device and Machine Controllers.
Commands Starts the tools.
Accesses the engineering tools. When online with a Machine Controller, monitoring is
also possible.
Provides all of the programming functions.
Commands
The File Manager can also be accessed.
Provides functions for defining Module configurations, systems,
Definitions scan times, application information, data traces, groups, and
Engineering Man- motion parameters.
ager Provides functions for new programs, properties, constant tables,
Ladder programming I/O conversion tables, interlock tables, part composition tables,
and tuning panels as the programming environment.
Provides register lists, cross-references, disable coil lists, com-
Utilities
ment lists, and register number replacement tools.
Accesses the motion programming environment using the
Motion programs
Motion Editor.
List and Print Displays the status of jobs that are printing and jobs that are
Print processing
Manager queued. Can also be used to cancel print commands.
User Menu Man-
Shortcut registration Creates a shortcut icon on the desktop.
ager
Communication Communication pro- Sets the communication ports and their parameters and manages
Process Manager cessing communication with Machine Controllers.

1-3
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.1.4 Function Tree

1.1.4 Function Tree

The following schematic diagram shows the commands activated by each Manager. The first window displayed
by the MPE720 is the File Manager Window.

Configuration

File Manager Print Manager User Manager

Communication Process List Manager

Transfer Online/Offline

User Menu Manager Engineering Manager

Register Lists Properties

Menu Lists

Definitions Motion Tools C Register Tables Programs

Group Definitions New Programs Register Lists C Register Lists Table Lists New Drawings

Scan Setting Existing Programs Cross-Reference Properties

Data Trace Position Monitoring Disable Lists Main Programs

Task Monitoring Comments Constant Tables

Motion Alarm Replace Register No. I/O Conversion Table

Module Configuration Interlock Tables

SERIAL LIO SVA CNTR MLINK Part Composition Table

System Definitions
Tuning Panel

Application Settings

1-4
 1.1 MPE720

1.1.5 System Configuration Example

The following figure shows the system configuration.

MP2300 218IF LIO-01

24-VDC
power External I/O
supply

HMI
External I/O RS-232C

MECHATROLINK-II
MPE720
PL2910

PL2900

IO2310

SGDH

SGDS
NS115
Ethernet

M M

I/O Modules for Servodrive

Outline of the MPE720

MECHATROLINK

Note: 1. Up to 21 devices can be connected to MECHATROLINK-II (The SERVOPACKs can be connected up to 16

axes).
2. Up to 32 I/O points (16 inputs and 16 outputs) can be used with the LIO-01 Module and up to 12 I/O points
(8 inputs and 4 outputs) can be used with the CPU I/O Module.
3. Communication Modules can be used to connect to Ethernet, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, RS-232C, and RS-
422/485 open networks.
4. In the above example, a 218IF-01 Module is used. The Programming Device is connected to Ethernet and a
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) is connected to RS-232C. 1

1-5
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.2.1 Simple Development Flowchart

1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure

This section explains the standard procedure and points for developing an application program.

1.2.1 Simple Development Flowchart

The basic procedure is as follows: After installing the MPE720, create a PLC folder, and then define the Machine
Controller and servos before starting programming.
When using an MP2000-series Machine Controller with all peripheral devices, refer to (2) Procedure with All
MP2000-series Machine Controller Peripheral Devices Connected.
To convert application programs developed for the MP900-series Machine Controllers into programs for
MP2000-series Machine Controllers, refer to (3) Procedure when Converting MP900-series Machine Controller
Application Program for Use with the MP2000-series Machine Controllers.
(1) Basic Procedure
The procedure for developing a new application program is shown in the following flow chart.

Make environment (See 1.2.2.) • Set up hardware.

settings. • Install the MPE720.
• Make communication settings.

(See 1.2.5.) • Create group folder.

Create PLC folder. • Create order folder.
• Create PLC folder.

• Log offline.
• Define module configuration.
Create definition (See 1.2.6.) • Define group.
data. • Define scan time.
• Define motion parameters.

(See 1.2.7.)
• Create motion control ladder programs.
Create program.
• Create motion programs.

(See 1.2.8.) • Log online.

Transfer files.* • Stop the CPU.
• Transfer files.

(See 1.2.9.)
Run the program.* • Start the CPU.

(See 1.2.7.)
Debug.* • Monitoring tool

* These are online operations.

1-6
 1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure

(2) Procedure with All MP2000-series Machine Controller Peripheral Devices Connected
When an MP2000-series Machine Controller application program is being created, the creation of definition data
can be simplified if peripheral devices, such as SERVOPACKs, have been prepared in advance.

(See 1.2.2.) • Set up hardware.

Make environment
• Install the MPE720.
settings.
• Make communication settings.

• Self-configuration
(See 1.2.3.)
Self-configuration • Save to flash memory (see 1.2.10).
• Turn OFF and then ON power supply.

(See 1.2.5.) • Create group folder.

Create PLC folder. • Create order folder.
• Create PLC folder.

(See 1.2.8.) • Log online.

Transfer files.* • Stop the CPU.
• Dump files.

Outline of the MPE720

• Log offline.
• Define module configuration.
Create definition (See 1.2.6.) • Define scan time.
data. • Define group.
• Define motion parameters.

(See 1.2.7.) • Create motion control ladder programs.

Create program.
• Create motion programs.

(See 1.2.8.) • Log online.

Transfer files.* • Stop the CPU.
• Transfer files.

(See 1.2.9.)
Run the program.* • Start the CPU.

(See 1.2.7.)
Debug.* • Monitoring tool

* These are online operations.

1-7
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.2.2 Environment Settings

(3) Procedure when Converting MP900-series Machine Controller Application Program

for Use with the MP2000-series Machine Controllers
Existing MP900-series Machine Controller application program can be converted to MP2000-series Machine
Controller application program.

(See 1.2.2.) • Set up hardware.

Make environment
• Install the MPE720.
settings.
• Make communication settings.

(See 1.2.5.) • Create group folder.

Create PLC folder. • Create order folder.
• Create PLC folder.

• Prepare PLC data for conversion.

Application (See 1.2.4.) • Log offline.
Converter • Convert application program.
• Confirm.

(See 1.2.7.) • Edit motion control ladder programs.

Edit program.*1 • Edit motion programs.

• Log online.
(See 1.2.8.)
Transfer files.*2 • Stop the CPU.
• Transfer files.

(See 1.2.9.)
Run the program.*2 • Start the CPU.

(See 1.2.7.)
Debug.*2 • Monitoring tool

* 1. If the system configuration has not been changed, it may be possible to skip the program editing step.
* 2. These are online operations.

1.2.2 Environment Settings

The environment settings regulate the hardware, software, and communication environments.
(1) Hardware Installation
This section assumes that hardware installation has been completed. If the hardware has not yet been installed,
refer to the user’s manual for the Machine Controller that you are using, and install the required hardware.
Defining systems and creating programs offline, however, can be performed before the hardware has been
installed.

(2) MPE720 Installation

Install the MPE720 on the personal computer to be used as a Programming Device.
For details, refer to 1.3 Installing the MPE720.

1-8
 1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure

(3) Communication Settings

Set the communication conditions for communication between the Programming Device and the Machine Con-
troller.
The following example shows the connection between a Programming Device and an MP2300 using the 217IF
Module and an RS-232C communication cable.

MPE720 MP2300 217IF-01

RUN ERR
YASKAWA RDY
ERR
RUN
ALM STRX TRX
TRX BAT

SW
-
485
INIT
TEST

PORT

M-4/10

Communication
cable I/O
RS422/485

Programming Device MP2300

The following example shows the connection using the 218IF Module and an Ethernet cross-over cable.

Outline of the MPE720

218IF-01

YASKAWA RDY

MPE720
RUN
ERR ALM RDY ERR
TRX BAT STRX COL
TX RX
SW
BATTERY

INIT
TEST

Option

Option
PORT

M-4/10

POWER

1
I/O 10BaseT
24V
0V
FG
Cross-over
cable
Programming Device MP2300

For details, refer to 2.1 Communication Manager.

1.2.3 Self-configuration
When an MP2000-series Machine Controller is being used, the definition data can be created automatically. This
feature can simplify system startup operations and reduce the time required. Self-configuration can be executed
when the MP2000-series Machine Controller’s power supply is turned ON or it can be executed from the
MPE720. The peripheral devices must be readied and connected before performing self-configuration.
When self-configuration has been completed, save the data in flash memory and turn ON the MP2000-series
Machine Controller.
(1) Self-configuration with Power ON
Complete connection of the peripheral devices and turn ON the power supplies to the peripheral devices. After
setting the CNFG switch to ON on the front of the MP2000-series Machine Controller and turning ON the
MP2000-series Machine Controller, self-configuration will start and the RUN indicator will blink. When self-
configuration has been completed, the RDY indicator will light.

1-9
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.2.4 Application Converter

The following figure shows the layout of the DIP switches and LED indicators on the MP2300 Machine
Controller.
STOP
SUP
INIT
CNFG
MON RDY RUN
TEST ALM ERR
OFF ON TX BAT

DIP switch LED indicators

After self-configuration has been completed, the status of the RUN indicator depends on the setting of the STOP
switch when power was turned ON.
CNFG Switch STOP Switch Status after Self-configuration Has Been Completed
RDY indicator: Lit
RUN indicator: Not lit
ON
After self-configuration has been completed, the MP2000-
series Machine Controller will be in stopped status.
ON
RDY indicator: Lit
RUN indicator: Lit
OFF
After self-configuration has been completed, the MP2000-
series Machine Controller will be in operating status.
RDY indicator: Lit
RUN indicator: Not lit
ON
Self-configuration will not be executed and the MP2000-
series Machine Controller will be in stopped status.
OFF
RDY indicator: Lit
RUN indicator: Lit
OFF
Self-configuration will not be executed and the MP2000-
series Machine Controller will be in operating status.

If an error occurs during self-configuration, the ERR indicator will light.

1.2.4 Application Converter

The Application Converter is a software tool that converts application data created for an MP900-series Machine
Controller to the equivalent data for use in an MP2000-series Machine Controller.
MPE720
MP2300
MP930 MP2300
MP930 ladder programs
ladder programs

MP930 RDY RUN

MP2300
YASKAWA ERR ALM
YASKAWA RDY RUN
PRT1 PRT
ALM ERR
BAT 2

MP930 MP2300
TX BAT

STOP
SUP

motion programs motion programs

INT
CNFG
MON
SW1
SW1 TEST
OFF ON

M-4/10
Option

Option

Option

BATTERY

CPU I/O

DC24V

DC 0V

• Self-configuration from the MPE720

Complete connection of the peripheral devices and turn ON the power supplies to the peripheral devices.
After the MPE720 has been installed, it is possible to execute self-configuration by logging online to the
MP2000-series Machine Controller’s PLC folder.

1-10
 1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure

In the following example, the MPE720 is connected to an MP2300 and the required peripheral devices are
connected.

MP2300
218IF-01
RUN ERR
MPE720
RDY RUN
STRX COL
ALM ERR
TX RX
TX BAT

STOP
SUP INIT
INT TEST
CNFG
MON OFF ON
TEST SW1
PORT
OFF ON

M-4/10

Option
Option
BATTERY

CPU I/O

DC24V

DC 0V
10Base-T

MECHATROLINK

YASKAWA 200 YASKAWA 200

SERVOPACK V SERVOPACK V
SGDS-02A12A SGDS-02A12A

Outline of the MPE720

U U
V V
W W
C C
N N
2 2

Remote I/O Servodrive Servodrive

1
If self-configuration is executed from the Order Menu in the Module Configuration Window, self-configura-
tion will start after a confirmation message is displayed. The RUN indicator will blink while self-configura-
tion is being executed. If the self-configuration has been completed normally, the LED indicators will return
to their previous status. If an error occurs during self-configuration, the ERR indicator will be lit.
For details, refer to Chapter 8 Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions.

1.2.5 Registering a Machine Controller

Create folders in the following order to register a new Machine Controller. The newly registered Machine Con-
troller will be registered as a PLC folder, and the relevant data folders will be created automatically. At this time,
the programming environment will be set up. The group folder and order folder are provided to organize the PLC
folder.
Refer to 2.2 File Manager for details.
(root)

Group Group Folder

System Order Folder

Machine PLC Folder

1-11
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.2.6 Setting Machine Controller’s Definitions

(1) Creating a Group Folder

The group folder is used to freely divide the order folder into groups. For example, if each factory were to be
organized into a group, all of the systems installed in the factory would be registered below the group folder.
Group folders can be created only under the root folder, or under another group folder.

(2) Creating an Order Folder

The order folder is used to organize the PLC folder. For example, when organizing in units of systems, all of the
Machine Controllers used in each system are registered under a single order folder.
Order folders can be created only under the root folder, or under a group folder.

(3) Creating a PLC Folder

Each Machine Controller is represented by a PLC folder. Information concerning the Machine Controller is auto-
matically generated below the PLC folder. By logging on to the PLC folder, you can proceed with the subsequent
development procedure.
PLC folders can be created only under an order folder.
Group folders, order folders, and PLC folders are called user folders.

1.2.6 Setting Machine Controller’s Definitions

This section describes the following Machine Controller’s definitions.
• Module Configuration Definitions
• Scan Time Definitions
• Group Definitions
• Motion Parameters
Each of these is described below.
(1) Module Configuration Definitions
Set the Machine Controller Module configurations. These settings are essential. Set the Machine Controller Mod-
ule configurations, the communication port, network, and I/O for each Module. Refer to Chapter 8 Definition
Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions for details.

(2) Scan Time Definitions

Set the scan times for both high and low speed for the system. Refer to the user’s manual for the Machine Con-
troller that you are using for details on scan processing.
The low-speed scan process is executed in the unused time of the high-speed scan process. Therefore, as a guide-
line, set a time that is twice the execution time of all the DWG.H drawings as the high-speed scan time.
Refer to Chapter 6 Definition Folder 3: Scan Time Definitions for information on acquiring and setting the scan
time current value.

1-12
 1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure

(3) Group Definitions

Set the group definitions while offline. These definitions cannot be set online.
Use group definitions to set the signals for controlling the machine, number of axes, number of parallel pro-
cesses, etc. The MPE720 provides standard control signals that enable automatic generation. When PGM Auto
Generation is enabled, the motion control ladder program, which is required for program operation, will be gen-
erated automatically. PGM Auto Generation functions only on the MP900 Series.
For example, if operating multiple machines using a single Machine Controller, it is easier to consider allocating
one group to each machine. Assuming that currently there are two machines operating independently, set the def-
initions for each by allocating group names Machine 1 and Machine 2.
Group name
Machine 1 Machine 2
Definition

Operation control signal Operation control signal

Axis allocation Axis allocation

Axis input signal allocation Axis input signal allocation

Override signal Override signal

Outline of the MPE720

No. of parallel processes No. of parallel processes

Automatic generation Automatic generation

One machine is usually operated by one group.

(4) Motion Parameters

Motion parameter settings are required to adjust the initial setting parameters for the servo amplifier and motor. 1
Refer to the user’s manual for the Machine Controller that you are using, and set the parameters depending on the
type of servo and its application.

„ Offline Logon
INFO
Because the group definition that will be subsequently be set is an important definition file for the operating environment
of the motion program, it cannot be done online. When setting the first definition, log on and execute the setting offline.

TERMS Logon
Logging on is necessary from the viewpoint of safety and confidentiality using functions that identify the user operating
the Machine Controller. Unless logged on, Machine Controller operations cannot be performed.

1-13
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.2.7 Creating Programs

1.2.7 Creating Programs

The procedure performed up to this point completes the settings required for programming. This section explains
the procedure for actual programming.
Create motion control ladder program

Create motion program

Debug online

Log off

(1) Creating Motion Control Ladder Programs

A motion program is controlled by the motion control ladder program. The motion control ladder program is gen-
erated automatically if automatic generation is enabled in the group definitions.
If using a unique control signal system, however, disable automatic generation and create a new motion control
ladder program. Be sure to read and understand ladder programs and motion programs in the relevant Machine
Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance before creating new motion control ladder programs.
Refer to the Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIE-C887-1.2)
for details on ladder programs.
If automatically generated motion control ladder programs require considerable revision, use the ladder editor for
easy revision. Refer to Chapter 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming for details.

(2) Creating Motion Programs

Create motion programs using the motion editor. Refer to Chapter 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
for details of editor operations, and refer to the Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series User's Manual:
Motion Programming (SIEZ-C887-1.3) for individual move commands.

(3) Debugging Tool

The Debugging Tool is a testing tool for motion programs. It cannot be used offline.
The Debugging Tool monitors program execution in addition to step commands that execute the program one
step at a time, and brake point setting commands that specify steps to stop execution.

(4) Logoff
Check that the program is operating normally before logging off. All data (including program data) created while
online is also written to the hard disk.
To quit operations, including debugging programs, be sure to log off. Debugging can be continued by logging on
again.

1-14
 1.2 Outline of the Application Program Development Procedure

1.2.8 Transferring Files

Transfer the data that has been defined to the Machine Controller.
Log online

Transfer files

(1) Logging Online

Communication is required between the MPE720 and the Machine Controller, so log on in online mode.
If you are logged on in offline mode, log off first, and then log on again in online mode.

(2) Transferring Data

Normally, set the definition data and create programs in offline mode, and then log online and transfer the defini-
tion data and programs that have been generated to the Machine Controller.
Be sure to edit the group definition in offline mode for MP900 Machine Controllers. Other Machine Controllers
can be edited in online mode.
Refer to 2.2.10 Transferring Files for the operations required.
MP940
TX
BAT
RX

RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
PRT2 M
E

Outline of the MPE720

C
RUN

1 2 3 4 5 6
LOAD
H
INIT A

MPE720
TEST T
FLASH R
2 O
PP
COPY L
→ NO I
N
PORT1 K

I/O

PORT2

DUMP
POWER
LE
+24V
D
GND
FG

1.2.9 Starting the Operation 1

The Machine Controller is now ready to operate machines.

1.2.10 Saving to Flash Memory

Save to Flash Memory is a function for writing the user application data for the Machine Controller into flash
memory. User applications written to flash memory are saved even without battery back-up.

Since the MP2000-series Machine Controller starts up from flash memory, when changing a user application
IMPORTANT
online, be sure to save it to flash memory. If the power supply to the Machine Controller is turned ON or OFF
without saving this data to flash memory, all changes to the user application will be lost.

1-15
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.3.1 Installation Disk

1.3 Installing the MPE720

This section explains the procedure for installing the MPE720.

1.3.1 Installation Disk

The MPE720 installation disk is provided on a CD-ROM.

1.3.2 Starting the Installer

1. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The following window will appear.
Click the Install button.

2. Click the MPE720 button to start the Installer.

• Double-clicking Launch.exe in the CD-ROM drive on Explorer can also start the Installer.
INFO
• Unless Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later is installed on the PC, the following error message will appear when
Installer starts.

Click the OK button and install Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or later, then install MPE720 again.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 can be installed from the CD-ROM for the MPE720.

1-16
 1.3 Installing the MPE720

1.3.3 Preparing Setup

The window for setup preparation will appear as shown below. While this window is shown, installation is being
prepared.

1. When installation preparations have been completed, the following window will appear. Click the Next
Button after verifying the message.

Outline of the MPE720

1
2. Click the Finish button after checking the message.

1-17
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.3.4 Starting Setup

3. Check the installation environment.

1.3.4 Starting Setup

The following window will appear when preparation for setup has been completed, and installation can be
started.

1. Click the Next button after verifying the message. The following window will appear.

2. Click the Yes button after verifying the message. Setup will start and the Customer Information window
will appear.

„ The following buttons can be used in all of the following operations.

INFO
• Clicking the Next button executes the process and moves to the next window.
Clicking the Back button returns to the previous window.
• Clicking the Cancel button terminates processing.

1-18
 1.3 Installing the MPE720

1.3.5 Entering Customer Information

In the Customer Information window, enter the user name (customer name), company name, and serial number
as the customer information.
After entering the data, click the Next button.

Outline of the MPE720

1.3.6 Selecting Installation Destination
Select the installation destination directory. C:\YeTools is the MPE720 default directory.
Click the Browse button to change the installation destination directory. It is recommended, however, that
C:\YeTools be used.

1-19
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.3.7 Selecting Options

1.3.7 Selecting Options

In this window, select the options to install.
It is recommended to select both the Ladder Works and Electronic Cam Tool Options to install the Ladder
Works and the Electronic Cam Tool as MPE720 standard options.

After selecting the options, click the Next button.

• Ladder Works: Ladder Works for Windows with the MPE720 installed
INFO
• Electronic Cam Tool: Electronic cam data preparation tool

1.3.8 Selecting Program Folder

In this window, specify and register the program folder to register the application group. The default is
YE_Applications. Any existing folder other than the default can be selected. It is recommended, however, that
YE_Applications be used.

When selecting the program folder, click the Next button.

1-20
 1.3 Installing the MPE720

1.3.9 Copying Files

1. In this window, the information that has been input is displayed. To correct something, click the Back
button to return to the previous window and correct the relevant part.

After setting has been completed, click the Next button to start copying a file.

Outline of the MPE720

2. File copying will start. The following windows will appear in order. 1
The copy progress status can be checked in the progress bar dialog box.
Wait until copying has been completed.

1-21
 1 Outline of the MPE720
1.3.10 Completing Setup

The following messages may appear when installing the MPE720.

INFO

These messages appear when the optional software

with the older version has not been uninstalled suc-
cessfully. Verify the message and click the OK but-
ton to continue the installation and update the
version. Clicking the Cancel button stops installing
the optional software. It is recommended to update
the optional software version when updating the
MPE720 version.

1.3.10 Completing Setup

When setup has been completed, the MPE720 Setup window will appear.
There are two options in this window. Select the desired option, and click the Finish button.
• If you select Open the ReadMe file right away, the ReadMe file that describes the Software License
Agreement will be displayed. If display is not necessary, clear the check mark.
• If you select Start the application program right away, the application will start after completion of the
setup.

1-22
 1.3 Installing the MPE720

1.3.11 Verifying Setup Contents

When setup has been completed, the common program folder (default name: YE_Applications, YASKAWA
CamTool), which forms the platform for the application groups, will have been created on the desktop.

Perform the following steps to verify that installation and setup were completed successfully.
1. Double-click the YE_Applications program folder. The program folder will be opened and the contents
will be displayed as shown below.

Outline of the MPE720

2. Double-click the MPE720 icon and verify that the application starts correctly.

The application can also be started up by selecting this application from the Program Menu under the Windows Start but-
INFO
ton.
1

1.3.12 Folders Created at Installation

The Installer creates folders for file components, and the relevant files are copied to the folders.
File Component Folder That Is Created
1 ReadMe (latest information) file, etc. \...\YeTools
2 MPE720 program file \...\YeTools\MPE720\Cp717sys
3 MPE720 data file \...\YeTools\MPE720\Cp717Usr
4 Windows communication driver \...\WINDIR\System
5 Common DLL \...\WINDIR\system
6 MPE720 communication program file \...\YeTools\CpComSys

Note: 1. \...\YeTools
Indicates the basic folder of the MPE720 system. Most files are installed in this folder. The folder name
can be changed. It is recommended, however, that the standard folder name YeTools be used.
2. \...\WINDIR
Indicates the folder where the Windows system has been installed. C:\Windows is used for the standard
installation of Windows. Files depending on the Windows system are installed, such as communication
driver module or common DLLs, for the MPE720 data communication with the Machine Controller.

TERMS File component

Files classified into groups in the units of functions

1-23
 2
Manager Functions

This chapter explains each manager window in the MPE720.

2.1 Communication Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

2.1.1 Starting the Communication Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.2 Communication Manager Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2

2.2 File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8

2.2.1 File Manager Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8

Manager Functions
2.2.2 Basic Tree Concepts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
2.2.3 Command Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
2.2.4 Creating PLC Folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
2.2.5 User Management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
2.2.6 Switching between Online and Offline Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.2.7 Logging On and Logging Off the CPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
2.2.8 Switching the CPU Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-22
2.2.9 Program File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
2.2.10 Transferring Files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25 2
2.2.11 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39
2.2.12 Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-43
2.2.13 PLC Import Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59

2.3 Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63

2.3.1 Automatic Startup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63
2.3.2 Basic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-64
2.3.3 Basic Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-65
2.3.4 Function Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66
2.3.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-67

2.4 List and Print Managers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68

2.4.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68
2.4.2 List Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69
2.4.3 Print Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-70

2.5 User Menu Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-78

2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-78
2.5.2 Starting Up from a Shortcut Icon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-79

2-1
 2 Manager Functions
2.1.1 Starting the Communication Manager

2.1 Communication Manager

The Communication Manager function provides communication services between the Programming Device and
the Machine Controller. The Communication Manager is called the Communication Process in the MPE720.
The Communication Manager itself supports various physical lines, but the Machine Controller supports only
serial and Ethernet communications.

2.1.1 Starting the Communication Manager

Start the Communication Manager by double-clicking the Communication Manager icon in the applications
folder set during installation.
Normally, however, there is no need to start the Communication Manager manually, as it starts automatically
when the MPE720 is started.

2.1.2 Communication Manager Operations

Click the Communication Process icon on the task bar to display the Communication Process window.

Use the Communication Manager to update and check the communication parameters and to check the communi-
cation status.

Do not close the Communication Manager by selecting File - Exit during online communication, because a communica-
INFO
tion error will occur.

(1) Outline of Communication Settings

When installation has been completed, be sure to make settings for communication of the MPE720. Select the
right communication interface from the following three interfaces for communication medium and set the com-
munication conditions.
• Serial interface
• CP-215 high-speed communication interface
• Ethernet interface
Once the settings have been made, they are stored as MPE720 system information. No settings need to be made
from the next operation, unless the settings need to be changed.
MP2300
YASKAWA RDY RUN
ALM ERR
TX BAT

STOP
SUP
INT
CNFG
MON
TEST SW1 MPE720
OFF ON

M-4/10
Option

Option
Option

BATTERY

CPU I/O

DC24V

DC 0V

MP2300 Set the communication port of

the Programming Device.

2-2
 2.1 Communication Manager

(2) Calling the Communication Process

1. Double-click the Communication Manager icon of the communication process in the YE_Applications
program folder.

2. The Communication Process window will appear. For the communication processes, logical ports for up
to 16 channels can be operated. Select and set an unused logical port in order from the top.

Manager Functions
2

3. Double-click the relevant logical port number, or select relevant logical port number and then select File -
Setting. When logical port number 1 has been selected, the window will be as follows:

2-3
 2 Manager Functions
2.1.2 Communication Manager Operations

4. The Logical Port Setting window will appear.

Select the relevant communication interface for the Port Kind and click the OK button.
When Serial, CP218, or Ethernet (LP) is selected, proceed to (3) or (4) respectively.

Do not set the logical port to any communication device (e.g., CP-215) that is not connected to the
IMPORTANT
Programming Device. Failure to observe this precaution may make hardware operations unstable.

(3) Setting the Serial Communication Port

(a) Setting Procedure
Set the serial communication port using the following procedure.
1. Select Serial as the Port Kind in the Logical Port Setting window.

2-4
 2.1 Communication Manager

2. Clicking the Detail button to display the Serial Port Setting window showing the setting information.
Click the OK button after setting the serial port parameters. Normally, the following defaults are entered.

3. The Logical Port Setting window will appear again. Click the OK button again. The Communication
Process window will appear again, so that you can verify that Serial has been assigned to logical port 1.

Manager Functions
This completes setting the serial communication port. The setting contents must be saved in a file.

(b) Saving Communication Port Settings

Save the set values of the communication port in a file. After that, this data is supplied as the communication 2
port information when the communication process starts up.
Save the communication port set values in a file using the following procedure.
1. Select File - Save.

2-5
 2 Manager Functions
2.1.2 Communication Manager Operations

2. A confirmation message will appear to verify whether the information is to be saved. Click the Yes button
to save the information.

(c) Completing Communication Process

Select File - Exit to close the Communication Process window.

The communication port settings will be valid when the communication process is restarted after the setting
IMPORTANT
have been saved in a file.

(4) Setting the CP-218/Ethernet (LP) Communication Port

Ethernet is used for communication via the 218IF-02 Module mounted in the Machine Controller. For this con-
figuration, the Programming Device must be equipped with a general-purpose Ethernet board and PCMCIA card.
(a) Setting Procedure
Set the CP-218/Ethernet (LP) communication port using the following procedure.
1. Select Ethernet (LP) as the Port Kind in the Logical Port Setting window.

2-6
 2.1 Communication Manager

2. Click the Detail button to display the CP-218/Ethernet (LP) Port Setting window. Set only the IP
Address (First).
Use the default values for other parameters.
Select the IP address from the following:
• IP address assigned to the Ethernet board or the PCMCIA card mounted on the PC that works as a
Programming Device
• The automatically set IP address i.e., either one of private addresses 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 of
class C
Select the IP address following the instructions of the network administrator. IP addresses, including that
of the Machine Controller, must be managed.

Manager Functions
3. The Logical Port Setting window will appear again. Click the OK button. The Communication Process
window will appear again so that you can verify that the CP-218 has been assigned to logical port number 2
3.

This completes setting the CP-218/Ethernet (LP) communication port. The setting contents must be saved
in a file.

(b) Saving Communication Port Set Value and Completing Communication Process
Refer to (b) and (c) in (3) Setting the Serial Communication Port.

2-7
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.1 File Manager Window

2.2 File Manager

The File Manager window is the first window that opens when the MPE720 is started. All MPE720 operations
are started from this window, which provides a user interface mainly for files.
This section explains the File Manager window configuration and menus.

2.2.1 File Manager Window

The File Manager window is made up of three sections to enable easy comprehension of the Machine Control-
ler’s system configuration. The three sections are the Directory Tree, List, and Details.

Directory Tree List Details

Fig 2.1 File Manager Window

The following table gives an outline of each section of the File Manager window.
Section Outline
This section shows the system configuration using folders in a hierarchi-
Directory Tree
cal structure.
List This section shows the files contained in each folder.
Details This section shows the attributes of each file.

(1) Directory Tree Section

The Directory Tree shows the system configuration using folders in a hierarchical structure. The program and
definition data lists saved in the system are displayed in the Directory Tree by group or order name.
Hard disk folders are displayed when in offline mode, and the files saved in the Machine Controller are displayed
when in online mode.
(a) Opening Folders
A small symbol in front of the folder icon means that the folder contains other folders.
Symbol Meaning
• This symbol indicates that the folder is closed. Click the + symbol and it
will change to a symbol, and the folders inside will be displayed.
• The same operation can be performed by double-clicking the folder name.
• This symbol indicates that the folder is open. Click the symbol and it
will change to the + symbol, and the folders inside will no longer be dis-
played.
• The same operation can be performed by double-clicking the folder name.

2-8
 2.2 File Manager

(b) Folder Icons and File Icons

Different types of folders can be distinguished by the folder icons shown in the following table. These icons
appear in the Directory Tree.
Icon Meaning

Root folder. This is a fixed folder, and is the first icon in the Directory Tree.

Group folders (group names), order folders (order names), program folders,
interrupt programs folders, function programs folders, initialization pro-
grams folders, high scan programs folders, low scan programs folders, defi-
nition folders, table data folders, motion program folders, and motion group
folders

PLC folders (Machine Controller names)

CPU folders

Files (programs, definitions, etc.)

(2) List Section

The List shows the folders and files contained within the folder selected with the cursor in the Directory Tree.
The detailed information displayed will differ depending on the type of folder or file selected.
• Changing the List Display Mode

Manager Functions
The list display mode can be changed. Select between list and detailed display, and change the icon size,
using the View (V) Menu in the File Manager.

(3) Details Section

The Details shows detailed data for each folder and file selected with the cursor in the Directory Tree. The details
displayed will differ depending on the type of folder or file selected. If (root) (root folder) is selected with the
cursor, nothing will be displayed.
2
• Displaying/Hiding Details
Select View - Detail Window from the File Manager Menu to display/hide the Details.

2-9
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.2 Basic Tree Concepts

2.2.2 Basic Tree Concepts

This section explains the configuration of folders displayed in the Directory Tree. The Directory Tree has a root
folder under which multiple systems can be created by job.
(1) Folder Configuration
The root folder is displayed as the top branch of the tree, and contains group folders, order folders, PLC folders,
and the data folders.
The MPE720 is designed to handle multiple systems and Machine Controllers, so logically, a group folder and
order folder are above the PLC folder, which defines the MP Series.

(root)

Group

Order

PLC

Data

Fig 2.2 Folder Tree Branches

(a) Root Folder

User-defined folders are managed under the root folder, which is the only folder provided by default by the
MPE720. The MPE720 can manage multiple group folders and order folders.

(b) Group Folders

Group folders indicate large job units such as projects.
Order folders, in which one job can be broken down into multiple tasks, can be created under the group
folder. The group folder can be omitted, however, if the entire job can fit into one order folder.
A maximum of 20 group folders can be defined for large-scale projects, but their management is compli-
cated.

The group folder names are not connected to the group definitions in the PLC folder. Allocate group names in control units
INFO
related to the relevant Machine Controller in the group definitions.

(c) Order Folders

Order folders indicate task units such as systems included in a project, and can contain PLC folders, each of
which defines multiple Machine Controllers.
Order folders cannot be branched on their own, but at least one order folder must be created.

(d) PLC Folders

A PLC folder defines a Machine Controller. Multiple data folders are created automatically under the PLC
folder.
PLC folders cannot be branched on their own, but at least one PLC folder must be created.
Specifically, connect online to the MP Series from the PLC folder. Multiple PLC folders can be defined, but
only one Machine Controller can be connected online at a time, so do not try to connect online to multiple
Machine Controllers.

2-10
 2.2 File Manager

(e) Folder Configuration Example

An example of a folder configuration is shown below. Refer to the example that resembles the system to be
created.
(root) Root folder

Project1 Group folder name

System10 Order folder name

Machine1 PLC folder name

Machine2 PLC folder name

System11 Order folder name

Machine3 PLC folder name

Machine4 PLC folder name

Project2 Group folder name

System20 Order folder name

Machine5 PLC folder name

System30 Basic Order folder name

configuration (group folder omitted)
Machine6 PLC folder name

Manager Functions
Project4 Group folder name
(with branching)
Proj40 Group folder name

Proj400 Group folder name

System40 Order folder name

2
Machine7 PLC folder name

Proj41 Group folder name

System41 Order folder name

Machine8 PLC folder name

2-11
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.3 Command Menus

(2) Expanded PLC Folder Diagram

When creating a new PLC folder, the data folder groups under the PLC folder are generated automatically as
shown below. The following figure shows the standard tree diagram when logged on to the MP Series.
Root folder
Group folder
Order folder
PLC folder
C register folder
Constant register definition file
Definition folder

Definition files

Program folder
Function folder
High-speed scan programs folder

High-speed scan files

Motion folder
Motion group folder
Motion program file
Group definitions file
Motion parameter file
Initialization programs folder
Low-speed scan programs folder
Table data folder

2.2.3 Command Menus

Select commands from the pull-down menus or pop-up menus.
The contents of the menu depends on the type of folder or file selected with the cursor in both Directory Tree and
List.
(1) Selecting from the Pull-down Menu
Click the File Manager Menu bar to display the pull-down menu.
The following example shows the differences in the File Menu when the group folder and the PLC folder are
selected with the cursor.
Group Folder PLC Folder

2-12
 2.2 File Manager

(2) Selecting from the Pop-up Menus

Right-click a folder or file to display the pop-up menu.

Manager Functions
Fig 2.3 Pop-up Menus
For details regarding these menus, refer to B File Manager Menus.

2.2.4 Creating PLC Folders

This section explains the operating procedure to create new PLC folders, which are necessary to create the pro-
gram.
2
(1) Creating New Group Folders
Create new group folders using the following procedure.
1. Select the root folder with the cursor.
2. Select File - New - Group Folder from the File Manager Menu.
3. Alternatively, right-click the root folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
4. Enter the group folder name in the input field dialog box that will be displayed, and then click the OK
button. Group folder names must be 8 characters maximum.
5. A new group folder will be created.

Path names for group folders must be 64 characters maximum.

INFO
Example: When Group 2 is created under Group 1, the path name will be 17 characters.
C:\GROUP1\GROUP2\

2-13
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.4 Creating PLC Folders

• Changing Folder Names

Change group folder names using the following procedure.
1. Select the group folder whose name you want to change with the cursor.
2. Select File - Rename from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the group folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter the new file name in the input field dialog box that will be displayed, and then click the OK button.
Group folder names must be 8 characters maximum.

4. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button. The file name will be changed.

Names cannot be changed while logged on to the CPU. Names can be changed for folders and files created by the user.
INFO

(2) Deleting Folders

Delete group folders using the following procedure.
1. Select the group folder to be deleted with the cursor.
2. Select File - Delete from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the group folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. A confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the Yes button to delete the group folder. The folder
and its files will be deleted.

• Deleting files and folders while the system is operating may cause the currently operating device to
IMPORTANT
malfunction. Be sure to check before deleting.
• The delete function deletes files and folders created by the user. Consequently, folders (including program
folders and definition folders) created by the MPE720 cannot be deleted.

(3) Order Folders

Create new order folders using the following procedure.
1. Select the group folder in which to create the root folder or order folder with the cursor.
2. Select File - New - Order Folder from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the group folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. Enter the new order folder name in the input field dialog box that will be displayed, and then click the OK
button.
4. The new order folder will be created.

Order folder names must be 8 characters maximum.

INFO

(4) Changing and Deleting Folders

Refer to (1) and (2).

2-14
 2.2 File Manager

(5) Creating New PLC Folders

Create new PLC folders using the following procedure.
1. Select the order folder in which to create the new PLC folder with the cursor.
2. Select File - New - Controller Folder from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the order folder and make the selection using the pop-up menu.
3. Set the information for each Machine Controller in the Controller Configuration window, and then click
the OK button. Change the Machine Controller information using the following three tabs in the
Controller Configuration window: Information tab, Network tab, and Application tab.

Manager Functions
4. The new PLC folder will be created.
(a) Information Tab Page Settings
Setting Details
Order Name Displays the order folder name. The order folder name cannot be changed. 2
Controller Name Enter the Machine Controller name up to 8 characters maximum.
CPU Name CPU names can be set only for the MP920.
Comment Enter comments for the Machine Controller and CPU up to 32 characters maximum.
Controller Type Select the MP Series.
Multi-CPU Multi-CPU can be set only for the MP920.

(b) Network Tab Page Settings

Set the communication port for the Machine Controller to which the MPE720 will log on.
Setting Details
Online Set whether or not the MPE720 and the Machine Controller will be connected online.
Logical Port No. Specify the logical port number set using the communication process.
Port Type Displays the Communication Module type.
Unit No. If the MPE720 is connected to a serial port, specify the serial port device address.

2-15
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.4 Creating PLC Folders

(c) Application Tab Page Settings

Setting Details
Customer Enter the client name up to 32 characters maximum.
Used at (User) Enter the user name up to 32 characters maximum.
Equipment Enter the facilities name up to 32 characters maximum.
Usage Enter the application name up to 32 characters maximum.
Date Enter the date of creation. The current date will be displayed as the default.
When creating a new Machine Controller, a revision history cannot be entered. To
Revision history
enter the revision history information, refer to the following page.

(6) Changing PLC Folder Information

Change PLC folder information using the following procedure.
1. Select the PLC folder to be changed with the cursor.
2. Select File - Properties from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. The Controller Configuration Window will be displayed. Refer to (a) for the Information tab page,
Network tab page, and Application tab page settings.

When logged on to the Machine Controller or CPU, the Machine Controller information cannot be changed.
INFO

(a) Information Tab Page

Set the new PLC information, and then click the OK button.

(b) Network Tab Page

Set the new network information, and then click the OK button.

(c) Application Tab Page

Double-click.

Double-click a number entered in the revision history to display the Controller Configuration window.
Next, enter the revision history information up to 50 characters maximum, and click the OK button to set the
revised data of the Application tab page.

• Deleting files and folders while the system is operating may cause the currently operating device to
IMPORTANT
malfunction. Be sure to check before deleting.
• If the user's write privileges are set lower than the write privileges of the deleted programs, the program
cannot be deleted.
• When a program is deleted, all the sub-programs pertaining to the main program (SFC program, table
format program, etc.) will also be deleted at the same time.
• The delete function deletes files and folders created by the user. Consequently, folders (including program
folders and definition folders) created by the MPE720 cannot be deleted.

2-16
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.5 User Management

This function manages the registration of users who can access the PLC folders. Users are managed by user ID
and password, and a privilege level can be set individually for each user.
In online mode, the user management data stored in the Machine Controller used, and in offline mode, the user
management data stored in the Programming Device hard disk is used.
(1) User Management Window
Register new user information, and change and delete existing information in the User Management window.
1. Select the PLC folder with the cursor. Next, select Edit - User Manager from the File Manager Menu.
2. The User Management window will be displayed.

Manager Functions
Display Details
Two asterisks (**) are displayed for the current user. User-A is
Active
shown as logged on in the dialog box shown above.
Displays the current user and users with privileges lower than the
User Name
current user. 2
Password Displays the password corresponding to each user name.
User privileges enable reading and writing to existing programs. The
higher the number, the higher the privilege. The user privilege and
the privilege of the file for each program are compared, and if the
User Privilege user's read (R) privilege is the same or greater than the program's
read (R) privilege, the user can read the program. Similarly, if the
user's write (W) privilege is the same or greater than the program's
write (W) privilege, the user can save or update the program.
When a user creates a new program, the privilege for the new pro-
gram is set. The default privilege is set automatically for the new
Default Privilege
program, so if you set the privileges most often used, there is nor-
mally no need to change the program privileges afterwards.

2-17
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.5 User Management

(2) Relationship between User and File Privileges

A user privilege level is given to each user, but the user can allocate any file privileges within their user privilege
range to files they have created.
For example, if the user privileges granted to USER-M are R7W7, the default privileges can be set in between R0
to R7 and W0 to W7. The file privileges are set automatically by default privileges when the file is created, how-
ever, they can be reset within the user privilege range by manipulating the sequence or motion program proper-
ties.
Example:
User privilege: R7W7 Default privilege: R3W3 File 1 privilege: R0W1
File 2 privilege: R2W2
File 3 privilege: R4W2
File 4 privilege: R3W3
......

In the above example, the file privileges for Files 1 to 3 created by USER-M are different from the default privi-
leges. This indicates that the properties for each program file have been manipulated and the file privileges
changed. The default privileges are used for File 4.

User privileges

File 1 privileges

Default privileges File 2 privileges File 4 privileges

File 2 privileges

The read (R) and write (W) privilege values in the user privileges are the maximum values that the user can allo-
cate as file privileges.

• Log on the PLC folder before opening the User Management window. The User Management window cannot be
INFO
opened if the user is not logged on to the PLC folder.
• The first user in User Name is the current user, followed by users with lower privileges. Information on users with
higher privileges will not be displayed.
• Program file privileges can be set and browsed via the drawing program or motion program properties.

2-18
 2.2 File Manager

(3) Registering New Users

Up to 20 users can be registered.
Register new users in the User Management window using the following procedure.
1. Click the New button in the User Management window. Input the new user information in the User Info-
New dialog box that is displayed, and click the OK button.

Setting Details
Input a user name of up to 16 characters. Spaces, comma (,), and an existing
User Name user name cannot be used. USER-A, USER-B, and USER-C are already reg-
istered in the MPE720, and cannot be used.
Input a password of up to 16 characters. Passwords can be the same as long as
Password
the user name is not.

Manager Functions
Input the program file's read privilege in the R column, and the write privilege
User Privilege in the W column as numbers between 0 and 7. The higher the number, the
higher the privilege.
Input the new program file's read privilege in the R column, and the write
Default User
privilege in the W column as numbers between 0 and 7. The higher the num-
(Default Privileges)
ber, the higher the privilege.

2. When the settings have been completed, click the OK button. The new user that has been set will be
registered. 2

„ Standard Registered Users

INFO
• The MPE720 has users that are registered beforehand for each Machine Controller. Standard user privileges and default
privileges are also registered for each of these users.
• The following table shows the standard registered users.

User Default
User Name Password Remarks
Privileges Privileges
USER-A USER-A R7W7 R0W1 For system administrator
USER-B USER-B R1W1 R0W1 For maintenance administrator
USER-C USER-C R0W0 R0W1 For operators

(4) Changing User Information

The registered user information can be changed from the User Management window.
Change the user information using the following procedure.
1. In the No. column, click the number of the user to be changed.
2. Click the Modify button. User Info-New window will be displayed. Set the new user information, and
then click the OK button. The information for the selected user will be changed.

2-19
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.5 User Management

(5) Deleting Users

The registered user information can be deleted from the User Management window.
Delete users using the following procedure.
1. In the No. column, click the number of the user to be deleted.
2. Click the Delete button. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button after confirming
that the user is to be deleted. The user will be deleted.

The current user cannot be deleted. The current user is indicated by ** in the Active column.
INFO

(6) Saving User Management Data

Save user management data using the following procedure.
1. Click the OK button in the User Management window to save user management data.
When in online mode, the data is saved to both the Machine Controller and the Programming Device’s
hard disk. When in offline mode, the data is saved only to the Programming Device hard disk.
2. The User Management window closes once the data has been saved.

The Error Detected Message is displayed if the data was not saved successfully.
INFO
Refer to Appendix A Error Messages, eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.

(7) Setting the Default User

Normally, a user name and password must be input when logging on to a PLC folder. This step can be omitted by
setting a default user. The default user will then be logged on automatically.
Set and delete the default user using the following procedure.
1. Select the PLC folder to set the default user with the cursor, and select Edit - Set Default User.
2. Input the user name and password in the Default User Set window, and then click the OK button. The
default user will be set.

(8) Deleting Default Users

The default user can be deleted by clearing the user name and password in the Default User Set window and
clicking the OK button.

The default user is not saved on the Machine Controller or Programming Device hard disk, and, therefore, is deleted if the
INFO
File Manager is closed or the system rebooted. The default user must be reset if the MPE720 is restarted.

2-20
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.6 Switching between Online and Offline Modes

Once a PLC folder has been registered, logging on to the CPU is possible, but always be aware of whether log-
ging on is being performed online or offline.
When online, the Programming Device hard disk and the Machine Controller data are both updated simulta-
neously, but when offline, only the Programming Device hard disk is updated. Consequently, caution is required.
Switch between online and offline modes using the following procedure.
1. Select the PLC folder which is to be switched to either online or offline mode.
2. Select File - Properties from the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder and make
the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Select either Yes or No for Online on the Network tab page in the Controller Configuration window,
and then click the OK button.

The user cannot switch between online and offline mode when logged on to the CPU. Set whether to use online or offline
INFO
mode before logging on.

2.2.7 Logging On and Logging Off the CPU

Manager Functions
The user must log on to the PLC folder’s CPU to operate or reference data in the PLC folder, such as Machine
Controller programs and definition settings.
The data to be handled is important, so security management using user IDs and passwords is provided for log-
ging on. The management of the privilege levels set for each user ID is also supported.
(1) Logging On to the CPU
Log on to the CPU using the following procedure. 2
1. Double-click the PLC folder to be logged on to.

Online Mode
TERMS
The Programming Device and the Machine Controller are connected and data is transferred back and forth between them
via the MPE720. The MPE720 must be online to display or update Machine Controller data. When the data is updated,
both the Programming Device hard disk and the Machine Controller data are updated.
Offline Mode
The Programming Device is operated independently. Machine Controller data cannot be referred or updated. Only data
stored on the Programming Device hard disk can be accessed.

2-21
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.8 Switching the CPU Status

2. The CPU Log On dialog box is displayed. Input the user name and password, and click the OK button.

3. A plus (+) mark will appear in front of the PLC folder. The logon process has now been completed.
The programs and definition data in the PLC folder that has been logged on to can now be referenced or
edited.

The user name and password do not need to be input when a default user has been set. The default user setting, however,
INFO
will be deleted when the File Manager is closed.

(2) Logging Off from the CPU

Log off from the CPU using the following procedure.
1. Select the PLC folder to be logged off from the CPU.
2. Select File - Log Off from the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder, and make the
selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the Yes button in the Logoff Confirmation dialog box.
4. The plus (+) mark in front of the selected folder name (the minus (−) mark if the folder is open) will
disappear. The logoff process has now been completed.

2.2.8 Switching the CPU Status

The CPU status refers to the operating status of the Machine Controller. RUN means the Machine Controller is
operating, and STOP means it is not operating. The CPU status is valid in online mode.
Normally, the CPU can be in RUN mode, but must be in STOP mode in some cases, for example, when transfer-
ring files, or the command will not operate.
Switch the CPU status using the following procedure.
1. Select the PLC or CPU folder for which the CPU status is to be switched with the cursor.
2. Select Edit - Controller Operation from the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC or
CPU folder and make the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Click either the RUN button to start operation, or the STOP button to stop operation, in the Controller
Running Status dialog box.

4. The CPU status will be switched.

The current CPU status is indicated by a black dot. The CPU status cannot be switched in offline mode or if the user has
INFO
not logged on to the CPU.

2-22
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.9 Program File Operations

(1) Copying Drawing (DWG) Program Files
Copy DWG program files using the following procedure.
1. Right-click the DWG program file to be copied.
2. Select Copy DWG from the pop-up menu.
3. Input the Copy Destination DWG No. and Copy Destination DWG Name, and click the OK button.

4. The specified program will be saved as a new program under Copy Destination DWG No.

• If the copied drawing file has a child drawing, the child drawing number will be converted in accordance with the copy
INFO
destination drawing number.
• The program name must be 48 characters maximum.
• If a main program is copied, all associated subroutines, such as table format programs, will be copied at the same time.

(2) Enabling and Disabling DWG Programs

Manager Functions
The DWG program can be set to enable or disable in online/offline mode.
Enable and disable DWG programs using the following procedure.
1. Select the DWG program to be disabled with the cursor.
2. Select Edit - Enable/Disable from the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-click the DWG program
and make the selections from the pop-up menu.
3. Select Enable or Disable. A confirmation window will be displayed. Click the Yes button in the
confirmation window. 2
An X will appear on the icon for the disabled program file. This means this file will not be executed.

• If the selected program is already disabled, the disable setting will be cancelled. If the selected program is not disabled,
INFO
it will be disabled.
• Only DWG or function programs can be enabled or disabled.

(3) Switching Display between Subroutines

This function can be used in all interrupt program, function program, high-speed scan program, startup program,
and low-speed scan program folders that have been selected. File types displayed in the List Section of the File
Manager Window can be designated.
Select the type of subroutine to be displayed after selecting View - List Display from the File Manager Menu.
Alternatively, right-click the subroutine and make the selection from the pop-up menu.

2-23
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.9 Program File Operations

(4) Updating Information

When executing motion programs and DWG/function program files, display the latest information by selecting
View - Refresh from the File Manager Menu.

(5) Copying Motion Programs

Copy motion programs using the following procedure.
1. Select the motion program file to be copied with the cursor.

2. Select File - Copy to from the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, right-click the motion program file to be
copied and make the selection from the pop-up menu.
3. Input the name of the copy destination motion program and click the OK button.

4. A program will be correctly created at the copy destination.

Existing motion programs cannot be copied to or overwritten.

INFO

2-24
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.10 Transferring Files

This function reads and writes data between the Programming Device and the Machine Controllers using the
MPE720.
(1) Outline of File Transfers
All data in the PLC folder can be transferred at one time, or individual files can be designated for transfer.
The Transfer To Controller, Transfer From Controller, and Compare functions can be used only when the user is
logged on in online mode. The transfer source and destination will be either the Programming Device hard disk
or the Machine Controller.
File transfer
MP2300
YASKAWA RDY RUN
ALM ERR
TX BAT

STOP

MPE720
SUP

Load INT
CNFG
MON

FD TEST SW1

OFF ON

M-4/10

HD

Option

Option
Option
Compare BATTERY

Dump
CPU I/O

DC24V

DC 0V

MP2300
File
transfer

USB

Manager Functions
Generally, the Load1 Function is used to register or update data or programs that have been defined or developed
using the MPE720 on the Machine Controller. The Dump2 Function is used when Machine Controller data is to
be saved in the MPE720. The Compare3 Function is used to compare data stored on both the MPE720 and the
Machine Controller to see if it is the same. In addition, there are functions to register, update, and store data on
Programming Device using USB.

1
TERMS Load
Function to transfer data from the MPE720 to the Machine Controller.
2
Dump
Function to transfer data from the Machine Controller to the MPE720.
3
Compare
Function to compare data of the MPE720 and the Machine Controller.

2-25
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

The following table outlines the transfer functions.

Transfer Type Transfer Function Function
Transfer to Controller [MPE720 to CPU]
Transfer from Controller [CPU to MPE720]
Compare [between CPU and MPE720] Transfers all programs or definition
All Files
File Transfer [MPE720 to Media] data.
File Transfer [Media to MPE720]
Compare [between Media and MPE720]
Transfer to Controller [MPE720 to CPU]
Transfer from Controller [CPU to MPE720]
Compare [between CPU and MPE720] Transfers individual designated pro-
Selected Files
File Transfer [MPE720 to Media] grams or definition data.
File Transfer [Media to MPE720]
Compare [between Media and MPE720]
Transfer to Controller [MPE720 to CPU] Transfers multiple Machine Control-
Continuous File Transfer
Transfer from Controller [CPU to MPE720] ler programs or definition data.
Save to Flash Transfers programs or definition
data between flash memory and the
Flash Compare Machine Controller.
Others Card Write [MPE720 to Card] Transfers programs or definition
data between a CF card and the
Card Read [Card to MPE720] Machine Controller.
Card Compare [between Card and MPE720] (Only when using MP2200 CPU-02)

(2) Opening the Transfer Window

Open the Transfer window using the following procedure.
1. Select the PLC folder with the cursor.
2. Select File - Transfer from the File Manager menu, and then click the required file transfer function.
Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder, point to Transfer from the pop-up menu, and select from the
range of transfer functions All Files, Selected Files, Continuous File Transfer, and Other.
The window for the selected Transfer will be displayed.

• For file transfer to and from controller, and Flash save, you can open the Transfer window by clicking on the following
INFO
icons in the Tool Bar.

File transfer to controller

File transfer from control-
ler
Flash save

• Transfer cannot be executed if the user is not logged onto the Machine Controller.

2-26
 2.2 File Manager

(3) Transferring All Files

All files, including programs and definition data, are transferred.
If this function is used to transfer all files to the Machine Controller, the Machine Controller operation status (i.e.
CPU status) must be set to STOP mode first. Refer to 2.2.8 Switching the CPU Status.
(a) Switching the CPU Status
Switch the CPU status to RUN or STOP by using the following procedure.
1. Select Edit - Controller Operation from the File Manager menu.
2. In the Controller running status dialog box, click either the Run button to start operation or the Stop
button to stop operation.

3. The Machine Controller status will be switched.

The active Machine Controller status is indicated by a black dot. The Machine Controller status cannot be switched in
INFO
offline mode or if the user has not logged onto to the Machine Controller.

Manager Functions
When transferring all files to the Machine Controller, set the Machine Controller in STOP mode to stop pro-
IMPORTANT
gram operation before executing the transfer.

2-27
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

(b) Opening the Execute Window for Transferring the All Files
Open the Execute window to start to transfer the All Files.
1. Select File − Transfer − All Files from the File Manager menu, then the following Execute window will
be displayed. Make the required settings.

Setting Details
If the transfer source is media, the path name of the transfer source is displayed.
Source If the transfer source is a Machine Controller, the communication address and Machine
Controller type of the source Machine Controller will be displayed.
If the transfer destination is media, the path name of the transfer destination is displayed.
Destination If the transfer destination is a Machine Controller, the communication address and
Machine Controller type of the destination Machine Controller will be displayed.
Select the write mode for the destination.
Change: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, it will be overwritten.
New: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, the folder and its contents
Transfer Mode
will be deleted, a new folder created, and then the file transferred.
The transfer mode will be Change if the destination is a Machine Controller. The mode
cannot be changed to New.
Select the type of file to be transferred. Program and register files are already specified
Type of File to be for transfer. These specifications can be cancelled. Refer to Table 2.1 Transfer File List
Transferred in (5) (e)Starting Transfer to see specifically which file is transferred. Normally, the
default settings should be used.
Select this option to transfer compressed data.
Compression When transferring compressed files (***.MAL), be sure to check this checkbox.
Transmission Use the Detail button when using MAL files for the MPLoader.
(Effective only between MPE720 and media)

2. Click the OK button once the settings have been checked. The transfer will start. A confirmation message
will be displayed when transfer has been completed. Click the OK button.
The All Files window will be displayed. The All Files window will appear if the operation is cancelled or
an error is generated before the transfer has been completed.

2-28
 2.2 File Manager

(4) All Files Windows

The title of the Load All window will change depending on the function to be performed: loading, dumping, or
file transferring. The procedure, however, is the same.

The process of transferring all files can be continued or stopped on the Load All window. To stop Transfer, select
File − Exit and return to the File Manager window.
To continue Transfer, perform the procedures explained below.

Manager Functions
(a) All Files Menus
The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for transferring all files.
Menu Command Function
File
Execute Starts transfer of all files.
Clear Cancels the settings for the transfer files.
Exit Closes the All Files Window.
2
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Error List Reopens the Error List Window.
PLC Running Status Changes the status of the Machine Controller.
Change Source Changes the transfer source.
Change Destination Changes the transfer destination.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

2-29
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

(b) Changing Transfer Source and Destination

Check and set the transfer source and destination. Skip this step if no changes are required.
Change transfer source and transfer destination using the following procedure.
1. Changing the CPU
If the transfer source or destination is a Machine Controller, the communication settings or CPU used in
the transfer can be changed.
a) Select View − Change Source or Change Destination from the Transfer Menu. The transfer source and
transfer destination can also be changed by clicking the Change button in the Transfer window.
b) Input the communication information in the Select CPU dialog box, and click the OK button.

2. Changing Transfer Directories

If the transfer source or destination is a device such as a USB drive, the drive number and the PLC folder
name can be changed.
a) Select View − Change Source or Change Destination on the Transfer menu. The transfer directory can
also be changed by clicking the Change button in the Transfer window.
b) The Transfer Path Change window will be displayed. Enter the driver number and PLC name, and click
the OK button. Enter the directory name (max. 8 alphanumeric characters) as the PLC name.

(c) Starting Transfer

Start transfer using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Execute from the Transfer Menu.
2. A File Transfer confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to continue.
3. Once the transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message will be displayed. Click
the OK button.

The screen display will return to the Transfer window when the Transfer has been completed.
INFO

(d) Stopping Transfers

The Execute Status window will be displayed while files are being transferred. Click the Cancel button to
stop the transfer.

2-30
 2.2 File Manager

(e) Transfer Errors

The Error List window will be displayed if an error is generated after transfer. Click the Cancel button to
close this window, and select View − Error List from the Transfer Menus to display this window again.
Data listed in the Data Name in the Error List window must be transferred again. Check the error and
retransfer the data.

(5) Transferring Individual File

This function differs from All Files in that individual files are selected for transfer.
(a) Selected Files Window
Select File − Transfer − Selected Files from the File Manager Menu, and then select the required Transfer
function. The window for the selected Transfer will be displayed.

Manager Functions
Setting Details 2
If the transfer source is media, the path name of the transfer source is displayed.
Source If the transfer source is a Machine Controller, the communication address and
Machine Controller type of the source Machine Controller will be displayed.
If the transfer destination is media, the path name of the transfer destination is
displayed.
Destination If the transfer destination is a Machine Controller, the communication address
and Machine Controller type of the destination Machine Controller will be dis-
played.
Select the write mode for the destination.
Change: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, it will be over-
written.
Transfer Mode New: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, the folder and its
contents will be deleted, a new folder created, and then the file transferred.
The transfer mode will be Change if the destination is a Machine Controller.
The mode cannot be changed to New.
Selects the type of file to be transferred.
Type of File to be
Select File - Clear from the Selected Files menu to clear all the transfer file type
Transferred (DWG to
settings.
C Language Function)

Select this option to transfer compressed data.

Compression When transferring compressed files (***.MAL), be sure to check this checkbox.
transmission Use the Detail button when using MAL files for the MPLoader.
(Effective only between MPE720 and media)

2-31
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

(b) Selected Files Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for transferring individual files.
Menu Command Function
File
Execute Starts transfer of individual files.
Clear Cancels the settings for the transfer files.
Exit Closes the Selected Files Window.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Error List Reopens the Error List Window.
Change Source Changes the transfer source.
Change Destination Changes the transfer destination.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(c) Changing Transfer Source and Destination

The Machine Controller or media used in the transfer can be changed. Refer to (d) in (3) Transferring All
Files.

(d) Detailed Data Settings

If a Details button is displayed to the right of a file type, detailed data settings must be made for that type of
file.
Click the Details button to display the Set Drawing Details window for that type of file. Make the data set-
tings and click the OK button to save the settings.
Make detailed data settings in each Set Drawing Details window using the following procedure.
1. DWG
Select the DWG program to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all DWG programs for transfer.
2. FUNC
Select the function programs to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all function programs for transfer.
3. Table Data
Select the table data to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all table data for transfer.
If Table Data Transfer is selected, column attribute definitions and table data will be transferred. If not
selected, only column attribute definitions are transferred.
4. Constant Tables (C registers)
Select the C register tables to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all C register tables for transfer.
5. Motion Main Program
Select the motion main programs to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all motion main programs for transfer.
6. Motion Sub Program
Select the motion subroutines to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all motion subprograms for transfer.
7. Sequence Program (MP2300S, MP2310 only)
Select the sequence program to be transferred.
Select the Select All check box to select all sequence programs for transfer.

2-32
 2.2 File Manager

(e) Starting Transfer

Start individual file transfers using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Execute from the Selected Files Menu.
2. A File Transfer confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to continue.
3. When transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message will be displayed. Click
the OK button to finish.

Manager Functions
2

2-33
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

Table 2.1 Transfer File List

All Files Individual File
Transfer File Transfer to Transfer from Transfer to Transfer from
File Transfer File Transfer
Controller Controller Controller Controller
DWG (Program) Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
FUNC (Program) Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Table Data Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Constant Table
Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
(C Register)
System Definition Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Application
Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Information
Module
Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Configuration
Type Definition No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
Scan Time Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Data Trace Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Fault Monitor
Definitions (MP900 Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Series Only)
Group Definition Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Motion Parame-
Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
ters (MP930 Only)
Motion Main
Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Program
Motion
Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Subprogram
Sequence Program
(MP2300S and Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
MP2310 Only)
Symbol Database
(When New Ladder Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
Selected Only)
M Register Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
S Register No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
I Register No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
O Register No Yes Yes No (Yes) (Yes)
D Register Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
C Register Yes Yes (Yes) (Yes)
DWG (Comments) No (Yes) No (Yes)
FUNC (Comments) No (Yes) No (Yes)
User Menu − − − −

Note: Yes : Selected from the start, but selection by the user is possible.
(Yes) : Selection is necessary.
No : Transfer is not possible.
- : Cannot be used with the current version.

2-34
 2.2 File Manager

(6) Transferring Files Continuously

Multiple Machine Controller programs or definition data files can be transferred.
(a) Continuous Transfer Window
Select File − Transfer − Continuous File Transfer from the File Manager Menu, and then click the required
Transfer function. The window for the selected Transfer will be displayed.

Setting Details
Select the write mode for the destination.
Change: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, it
will be overwritten.
New: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, that
Transfer Mode
folder and its contents will be deleted, a new folder created, and then
the file transferred.
The transfer mode will be Change if the transfer is for a Machine

Manager Functions
Controller. The mode cannot be changed to New.
Select the type of file to be transferred.
Type of File to be
All of the files on the selected Machine Controller will be selected
Transferred
for transfer.

(b) Continuous File Transfer Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for transferring continuous file.
2
Menu Command Function
File
Execute Starts continuous file transfer.
Exit Closes the Continuous File Transfer Window.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Error List Reopens the Error List Window.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(c) Starting a Transfer

Start continuous file transfers using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Execute from the Continuous File Transfer Menu.
2. A Transfer start confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to continue.
3. When transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message will be displayed.
Click the OK button to finish.

2-35
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

(7) Saving in and Comparing with Flash Memory

(a) Save/Compare Flash Memory Content Window
The window used to transfer files between the Machine Controller RAM and the flash memory is shown
below.

Setting Details
The communication information for the transfer CPU and the type of
CPU
Machine Controller is displayed.
When transfer is being executed, the status will be Running. When transfer
Status
has been completed, the status will be Completed Normally.

The Transfer between the Machine Controller RAM and flash memory is not available in offline mode.
INFO

(b) Save/Compare Flash Memory Content Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for saving and comparing with flash
memory.
Menu Command Function
File
Execute Starts saving to flash memory or comparing to flash memory.
Exit Closes the Save/Compare File Memory Content Window.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Change Controller Changes the transfer CPU.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(c) Changing the Transfer CPU

The communication information and the transfer CPU can be changed. For details, refer to (c) in (3) Trans-
ferring All Files.
Select File − Change Controller from the Save/Compare Flash Memory Content Menu.

(d) Starting a Transfer

Start Transfer between the Machine Controller and the flash memory using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Execute from the Save/Compare Flash Memory Content Menu.
2. A Transfer start confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button.
3. When transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message will be displayed. Click
the OK button.

To compare RAM with flash memory, stop Machine Controller operation and start the comparison immediately after sav-
INFO
ing the flash memory. Comparison errors may be generated for the D register if the comparison is executed while the
Machine Controller is operating.

2-36
 2.2 File Manager

(8) CF Card Transfer (Only Supported by MP2200, CPU-02 Module)

Start CF card transfer using the following procedure.
1. Click File - Transfer - Other - Card Write [MPE720->CARD]. The Execute window will be displayed.

Setting Meaning
Source If the transfer source is the CF card, the drive name of the transfer source is displayed.
Destination If the transfer destination is the CF card, the drive name of the transfer destination is displayed.

Select the write mode for the destination.

Transfer Change: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, it will be overwritten.
Mode New: If a folder with the same name exists at the destination, the folder and its contents will be
deleted, a new folder created, and then the file transferred.

Manager Functions
2. After checking the details of the operation to be performed, click the OK button. Transfer will start.
On completion of transfer, the transfer completion message box will be displayed. Click the OK button in
this message box.
On clicking the OK button, the MPE720 to CF Card window will be displayed.
Note that this transition to the MPE720 to CF Card window will still take place even if the transfer is
cancelled part-way through or if an error occurs.
2

When this window is displayed, you can continue CF card transfer processing or end it. To end it, close
the window and return to the File Manager.
To continue Transfer, perform the procedures explained below.

2-37
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.10 Transferring Files

(a) Menus of the MPE720 to CF Card Window

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the MPE720 to CF Card win-
dow.
Menu Command Function
File
Execute Starts transfer to the CF card.
Exit Closes the file transfer window.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Error List Reopens the Error List window.
Change Source Changes the transfer source.
Change Destination Changes the transfer destination.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(b) Changing Transfer Source and Destination

Change the CF card that is the transfer destination using the following procedure.
1. Select View - Change Source or Change Destination from the Transfer menu. The transfer source and
transfer destination can also be changed by clicking the Change button.
2. Select the drive from the Select Drive dialog box and click the OK button.

(c) Starting Transfer

Start transfer using the following procedure.
1. Select File - Execute from the Transfer menu.
2. A File Transfer confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to continue.
3. Once the transfer has been completed, a transfer completed confirmation message will be displayed.
Click the OK button.

The screen display will return to the MPE720 to CF Card window when the transfer has been completed.
INFO

(9) Closing the Transfer Window

Close the Transfer Window using the following procedure.
Select Exit - Transfer Completed from the Transfer Menu.
The Transfer window will be closed.

Log on again to the CPU when files that may change the User Management file are transferred.
INFO

2-38
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.11 Configuration
The Configuration Window is used to set the MPE720 system environment.
(1) Opening the Configuration Window
Select View − Configuration from the File Manager Menu. The following Configuration window will be dis-
played.

Manager Functions
(2) Configuration of the Configuration Window
The Configuration window consists of tab pages and operation buttons for each function.
Tab Page Details
Controller type Displays the types of Machine Controller compatible with the MPE720.
Start up Sets the operating environment. 2
Functional setup Sets functions such as write protect.
Engineering
Sets the conditions for the Engineering Manager.
manager
User menu Sets the method for registering User Menu Manager functions.
User management Enables you to register the default user name and password at logon.
File transfer Sets the default drive letter for other transfer destinations.
Other Sets the communication process timeout value.
C Language Sets the C language environment.
Ladder Editor Sets the selection of the new or former Ladder Editor.
Flash Memory Save Sets whether the data is to be saved to flash memory or not at log-off.
Data Trace Sets the selection of the new or former trace function.

Operation Button Details

Updates system environment information.
OK
Enabled from the next time the system is started.
Cancel Disables the operation.
Reset Resets all set values to their initial values.

2-39
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.11 Configuration

(3) Controller Type Tab Page

The type of Machine Controller that can be currently operated is selected.

(4) Start up Tab Page

Sets whether the CAM tool is used or not used.

(5) Functional Setup Tab Page

Setting Details Default
Monitor Mode When turned On, the user cannot write files to the
Off
(Write protected) Machine Controller.
Server
Not currently supported. −
appointment
Client
Not currently supported. −
appointment
Ladder conver-
Not currently supported. −
sion function
Function Key Set whether to enable or disable the function keys. On
Total number of Select the number of function keys on the keyboard
12
function Keys (10 or 12).

(6) Engineering Manager Tab Page

Setting Details Default
Default Not currently supported. −
Retain settings
Not currently supported. −
after closing
Set whether to enable or disable the Get Current
Monitor ON/OFF Value ON/OFF function while the ladder program is Enable
open.
Monitor start
Set whether or not to get current value when ladder
when open Yes
program is open.
window
The number of
Set the number of ladder programs that can be
ladder program 16
opened simultaneously (2 to 16).
windows

2-40
 2.2 File Manager

„ Get Current Value

INFO
This function reads and displays the current value in the register when online. Although a real-time system is required, a
load is applied to the system when multiple ladder programs are open. For example, when multiple ladder programs are
open, attempting to open a queued ladder may require more time than expected.
This phenomenon can be avoided by using the Display Current Value ON/OFF function.
When the Get Current Value ON/OFF function is enabled and a ladder program is opened in online mode, the Get Current
Value Start/Stop Button is displayed in the top right of the Ladder Program Editing Window.
Use these buttons to turn ON and OFF get current value processing.
DWG No.
Online display

Stop

Ladder program Start

When the ladder program is open, the ON/OFF function can be specified using Monitor ON/OFF.
„ Number of Open Ladder Program Editing Windows
A maximum of 16 ladder programs can be open simultaneously, but time may be required to open them, depending on the
personal computer's memory resources.

Manager Functions
(7) User menu Tab Page
Sets the method for registering User Menu Manager functions and the creation of shortcuts for them.
The default settings are as follows.
• Registration method: Insert at Head
• User menu operation at registration: No Change
• Shortcut creation: No
2
(8) User Management Tab Page
Register the default user name and password.
When logging on to the Machine Controller from the MPE720, the user name and password registered using this
tab page will be used unless a default user has been specified.
This value is normally enabled, so once registered, there is no need to enter a user name and password when log-
ging on.

(9) Transfer Tab Page

(a) Alternative Default Drive for All Transfers
Set the drive letter for other transfer destinations, such as a magneto-optical disk.

(b) M Register Clearing Setup During All Transfer To Controller

Set whether or not to clear the contents of the M registers to zero when Transfering all files to Controller.

(c) Overwrite Message

Set whether to enable or disable the Overwrite message when transferring files.

2-41
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.11 Configuration

(10) Other Tab Page

(a) Hard Disc Capacity Monitor
Sets the check value for monitoring the computer's available hard disc capacity. The unit for the setting is
MB.

(b) Communication Timeout

Set the communication process timeout value in milliseconds.

(c) Logon Timeout

Set the logon communication timeout value in milliseconds.

(d) Path for Online Monitor Animation File

The animation file, which shows that the system is connected online, is displayed. The animation file name is
displayed here.

(11) C Language Tab Page

Sets whether the C language environment is used or not used here.
The default setting is not used.

(12) Ladder Editor Tab Page

Set whether the new or former Ladder Editor is to be used.
The default setting is new ladder.

(13) Flash Memory Save Tab Page

Set On or Off for the operation to save data into flash memory when logging off.
The default setting is Off.

(14) Data Trace Tab Page

Set whether the new or former trace function is to be used.
The default setting is Trace Manager (New Trace).

2-42
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.12 Application Converter

This section describes the Application Converter.
(1) Outline
The Application Converter is a software tool that converts/substitutes application data created for the MP900-
series Machine Controller so that it can be used with the MP2000-series Machine Controller. The Application
Converter is equipped with the following functions.
This wizard batch converts the MP900-series application data for use by the MP2000 series. It
enables conversion with the minimum effort in terms of operation.
Automatic
Note: Normally, you should use the Automatic Conversion Wizard for conversion.
Conversion Wizard
However, when using a Machine Controller that doesn't support the Automatic
Conversion Wizard, use the Manual Conversion Wizard.
Manual Conversion This wizard converts all data, excluding the module configuration, from the MP900-series for-
Wizard mat to the MP2000-series format.
This function enables you to batch replace registers in MP900-series PLC folders before conver-
sion with the Conversion Wizard, and to batch replace registers in MP2000-series PLC folders
after conversion by a conversion wizard.
Multi-register This is a function that can be widely applied during operation of MPE720 Ver. 5.
Replace Apart from operations before and after conversions, it can also be used to replace registers in
ordinary operation.
Note: The PLC folder where the multi-register replace function has been started and the
folders below it will be the replace source and replace target.

MPE720
MP2300

Manager Functions
MP930 MP2300
MP930 ladder programs
ladder programs

MP930 RDY RUN

MP2300
YASKAWA ERR ALM
YASKAWA RDY RUN
PRT1 PRT
ALM ERR
BAT 2

MP930
TX BAT

MP2300 STOP
SUP

motion programs motion programs

INT
CNFG
MON
SW1
SW1 TEST
OFF ON

M-4/10
Option

Option

Option
BATTERY

DC24V

DC 0V
CPU I/O

2-43
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

(2) Before Using the Application Converter

Pay attention to the following points when using the application converter.
• The conversion source/target selection screen in the Automatic Conversion Wizard and Manual
Conversion Wizard displays only offline PLC folders.
• The function can only be used if the ladder editor modes of the conversion source and conversion target
PLC folders are the same.
Conversion Target
Conversion
Source Former Ladder
New Ladder Mode
Mode
New ladder Enable Disable
Former ladder Disable Enable

• The symbols and comments set in the MP900-series program can be passed on to MP2000 series
unchanged.
• S registers are not subject to conversion either by the Automatic Conversion Wizard or the Manual
Conversion Wizard.
• The multi-register replace function can only be used with offline PLC folders.

Conversion of application data using the Automatic Conversion Wizard or Manual Conversion Wizard is not
IMPORTANT
guaranteed to achieve 100% conversion.

(3) Automatic Conversion Wizard

(a) Compatible Machine Controllers
The MP900-series Machine Controller models that can be used to convert application data using the Auto-
matic Conversion Wizard are listed in the following table.
The MP2000-series models that can be selected as the conversion target differ depending on the source
model.
MP900 Series MP2000 Series Default
Machine Controller Machine Controller Selection
MP2200 9
MP920 MP2200-02 −
MP920-02 MP2300 −
MP2310 −
MP930 MP2300 9
MP930-02 MP2310 −
MP930-03 MP2300S −
MP2300 −
MP940
MP2310 −
MP940M
MP2300S 9
MP2300 −
MP940D
MP2310 9
9: Conversion possible −: Conversion not possible

Note: The MP910 Machine Controller doesn't support the Automatic Conversion Wizard. Use the Manual
Conversion Wizard with it.

2-44
 2.2 File Manager

(b) Operation Sequence for the Automatic Conversion Wizard

When the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used, the application data is converted in accordance with the
operation sequence indicated below.

1. Select the model of machine controller that is to be the conversion target.

2. Create a new PLC folder.

Right-click the conversion target order folder and select New from the pop-up menu.
Note: If you are using an existing PLC folder, select a PLC folder from among those displayed in the
Conversion target pane.

Manager Functions
3. Check the configuration and start conversion.
2

↓ Conversion in progress

2-45
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

4. This completes the conversion.

(c) Operating procedure for the Automatic Conversion Wizard

Using the Automatic Conversion Wizard, MP900-series application data is converted to MP2000-series data.
1. In offline mode, log on to the MP900-series PLC folder whose application data you want to convert.
2. Select Tool - Automatic Conversion Wizard from the main menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC
folder and select Application Converter - Automatic Conversion Wizard from the pop-up menu. The
Machine Controller type selection screen will be displayed.
3. Select the type of the Machine Controller that you want to specify as the conversion target, then click
Next.

Import the
Reads log data that has been saved under an assigned name, and displays the log.
log file
Help Displays the help information for the application converter.
Next > Displays the Conversion source/target selection screen.
Stops the Automatic Conversion Wizard and closes the Application Converter screen.
Cancel
The Conversion source/target selection screen will be displayed.

2-46
 2.2 File Manager

4. Right-click the order folder. Select New - Controller Folder from the pop-up menu and create a new PLC
folder.
Note: Only the type of Machine Controller selected on the Machine Controller type selection screen is
displayed for the PLC folder.

5. Enter the PLC name and comment (when necessary), and click the OK button.

A new PLC folder will be created in the order folder specified in the Conversion target pane.

Manager Functions
6. Select the newly created PLC folder and click Next.

Note: You can select an existing PLC folder as the conversion target. However, care is required since data
such as programs will be merged.

2-47
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

7. A screen for confirming the conversion configuration will be displayed.

The information for the conversion source will be displayed on this screen: check this information and
click Execute.

8. A dialog box to confirm that you want to execute automatic conversion is displayed. Check the details and
click the Yes button.

Automatic conversion starts.

2-48
 2.2 File Manager

9. During conversion, the status is indicated on the Status tab page.

Status Shows the execution status of the Automatic Conversion Wizard.

Conversion is
Displays the log of the Automatic Conversion Wizard.
completed

Manager Functions
Displays the warning log. This is data that has been automatically converted by MP720 Ver. 5
Warning
and is to be checked by the user.
Displays a log of the errors that have occurred in the Automatic Conversion Wizard. This is data
Error that has been automatically converted by MP720 Ver. 5, and comprises errors that are more seri-
ous than warnings and need to be checked and corrected.
Check Shows the locations where motion registers are used.

10. Check the information in the Error tab and Warning tab pages, which are displayed on top. 2
If the same error has occurred at multiple locations, the instances are presented in a hierarchical format.

2-49
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

11. To save the converted log, click Save the log file.
Note: On assigning the file name of your choice and clicking the Save button, the log is saved at the
specified location in the .ycl file format.
This enables you to read the log file, which means that you can suspend the correction of errors or
warnings and then continue it later.

Be sure to follow up with the Mandatory procedure after automatic conversion, set out on the next page.

„ Mandatory procedure after automatic conversion

IMPORTANT
On completion of automatic conversion, an error or warning may be displayed.
This happens because the configuration of the Machine Controller application is different for the MP900 series
and the MP2000 series.
If an error or warning is displayed, check the details and correct it if necessary.
The difference between errors and warnings is explained in the following table.
Points that must be corrected are displayed. Correct errors by referring to „Checking the
Error locations where errors and warnings have occurred.
Note: Errors are only displayed if motion parameters have been saved.
Points where the data after conversion should be checked are displayed. Only correct those
Warning
points where you judge that correction is necessary.

Check the locations where errors have occurred in the log on the Error tab page and the locations where warn-
ings have occurred in the log on the Warning tab page.
Errors and warnings occur in the module configuration, motion parameters, ladder program, and motion pro-
gram.
The information displayed is as shown below.
<Example Error Display>

2-50
 2.2 File Manager

<Example Warning Display>

„ Checking the locations where errors and warnings have occurred

Check the details of the errors and warnings and correct them.
• For details on module configuration, refer to (a) Module Configuration.
• For details on motion parameters, refer to (b) Motion Parameters.
• For details on ladder programs, refer to (c) Ladder Programs and Motion Programs.
• For details on motion programs, refer to (c) Ladder Programs and Motion Programs.

Manager Functions
(a) Module Configuration
Check these if a warning has occurred in relation to the module configuration.
For details on warnings, refer to Appendix F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter.

2-51
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

(b) Motion Parameters

Check these if an error or warning has occurred in relation to the motion parameters that are set in the module
configuration definitions.
For details on errors and warnings, refer to the error list on the Application Converter help screen, and to
Appendix F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter.

Errors and warnings that relate to motion parameters are displayed in either of the following orders:
• Module classification, rack number, slot number, circuit number, axis number for the conversion source
axis
• Module classification, rack number, slot number, circuit number, axis number for the conversion target
axis
1. Double-click the log record that you want to check.
The cursor jumps to the relevant parameter (fixed parameter or setup parameter).
2. Check the details. Correct the parameters that need to be corrected and save the data.
3. Check the checkboxes of parameters whose details have been checked and corrected in the Application
Converter log.
Striking-out lines are drawn to make it easy to see at a glance that the checking of a log record has been
completed.
Note: You can choose to collectively display either all log records with striking-out lines or all log records
without striking-out lines by selection from the pop-up menu.

Display All
Displays all conversion error log records.
Drawings
Checked Displays log records with striking-out lines only.
Not checked Displays log records without striking-out lines only.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3.

2-52
 2.2 File Manager

(c) Ladder Programs and Motion Programs

Check these if an error or warning has occurred in relation to the motion registers used with the conversion
source ladder program or motion program.
For details on errors and warnings, refer to Appendix F Error and Warning List for the Application Con-
verter.

Motion registers that are subject to an error are automatically replaced with M registers. Replaced registers
are shown in red. Correct these registers and save them.
Note that the range of M registers used is the range that has not been used for MP900-series W addresses
(32768 to 65535).
Note: Registers that are subject to a warning are not shown in red.

Manager Functions
With a new ladder:

With a CP ladder:

With a motion program:

Check the motion registers where errors or warnings have occurred.

2-53
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

1. Double-click the log record that you want to check.

The cursor jumps to the relevant program (ladder program or motion program).
The step where the error occurred and the register names before and after conver-
Ladder program sion are displayed. The ladder program that uses the relevant register opens and
the cursor moves to the step concerned.
The line number where the error occurred, the register name before conversion
Motion program and the register name after conversion are displayed. The motion program that
uses the relevant register opens and the cursor moves to the line concerned.

2. Check the data. Correct any program that needs to be corrected, and save or compile it.
Registers that have been displayed in red will turn black.

3. Check the checkboxes of programs that have been checked and corrected in the Application Converter
log.
Striking-out lines are drawn to make it easy to see at a glance that the checking of a log record has been
completed.
Note: You can choose to collectively display either all log records with striking-out lines or all log records
without striking-out lines by selection from the pop-up menu.

Display All
Displays all conversion error log records.
Drawings
Checked Displays log records with striking-out lines only.
Not checked Displays log records without striking-out lines only.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3.

• Saving the Log

If you stop the correction work part way through, you can save the conversion log to a file at a partway point.
You can then resume the correction work by reading the log next time.
1. After automatic conversion is completed, click Save the log file.
The Save As dialog box will be displayed.
2. Enter the filename of your choice and click the Save button.

The file is saved at the specified location in the .ycl format.

2-54
 2.2 File Manager

• Reading an Existing Log

Log data that has been output to a file can be read again with the Application Converter. This means that you
can resume conversion work from the status at the point when the log was saved in the file.

The procedure is as follows.

1. In offline mode, log on to the MP900-series PLC folder whose application data you want to convert.
2. Select Tool - Automatic Conversion Wizard from the main menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC
folder and select Application Converter - Automatic Conversion Wizard from the pop-up menu.
3. Click Import the log file on the Machine Controller type selection screen or conversion source/target
selection screen to display the Open dialog box.

Manager Functions
4. Select the log file that was saved (*.ycl) and click the Open button.
The log information in the selected log file is read into the Application Converter.
Note: 1. Log files that have been created using MPE720 Ver. 5.38 or earlier versions cannot be read and the
following message dialog box is displayed.

2. Log files that have been created with the Manual Conversion Wizard cannot be read and the
following message dialog box is displayed. Note also that log files created with the Automatic
Conversion Wizard cannot be read while the Manual Conversion Wizard is running.

2-55
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

(4) Manual Conversion Wizard

With the previous MPE720 Ver. 5, the Manual Conversion Wizard was called the "Conversion Wizard."
IMPORTANT
Due to the addition of the Automatic Conversion Wizard, the name was changed from "Conversion Wizard" to
"Manual Conversion Wizard" from this version.

The procedure for starting the Manual Conversion Wizard is given below.
1. In offline mode, log on to the MP900-series PLC folder whose application data you want to convert.
2. Create the conversion target MP2000-series PLC folder.
3. Select Tool - Manual Conversion Wizard from the main menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder
and select Application Converter - Manual Conversion Wizard from the pop-up menu.
The Conversion source/target selection screen will be displayed.

For details on the method of operation of the Manual Conversion Wizard, refer to the Application Converter
help screen.

2-56
 2.2 File Manager

4. Click Help on the Conversion source/target selection screen. The help information for the Manual
Conversion Wizard will be displayed.

Manager Functions
(5) Multi-register Replace
The procedure for starting the multi-register replace function is given below.
1. In offline mode, log on to the MP900-series PLC folder whose application data you want to convert.
2. Create the conversion target MP2000-series PLC folder.
2
3. Select Tool - Multi-Register Replace from the main menu. Alternatively, right-click the PLC folder and
select Application Converter - Multi-Register Replace from the pop-up menu.
4. The Register replace set screen will be displayed.

For details on the method of operation for the multi-register replace function, refer to Application
Converter help.

2-57
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.12 Application Converter

5. Click Help on the Register replace set screen. The multi-register replace help information will be
displayed.

2-58
 2.2 File Manager

2.2.13 PLC Import Tool

This section describes the PLC Import Tool.
(1) PLC Import Tool Window
When both CP-717 and MPE720 are installed in one personal computer, the PLC Import Tool can be used to
import a CP-717 user folder into MPE720. The PLC Import Tool can import user folders only for Machine Con-
troller types supported by the MPE720.
Start the PLC Import Tool from the MPE720.

Manager Functions
CP-717 Directory Tree Output window MPE720 Directory Tree

Setting Details
CP-717 Directory
Tree
Displays the user folders in the CP-717. 2
MPE720 Directory
Displays the user folders in the MPE720.
Tree
Output window Displays the import completion status and error status.
Pre-imports* the group folder, order folder, or PLC folder selected in
Select the CP-717 Directory Tree to the location selected in the MPE720
Directory Tree.
Import Executes the PLC Import operation.
Abort Cancels the PLC Import operation.

* The pre-import operation creates a folder in the MPE720 Directory Tree, that will be imported from the
CP-717 Directory Tree to the MPE720 Directory Tree, before the import operation itself is executed. In
the pre-import status, the user folder in the CP-717 is not actually imported to the MPE720.

2-59
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.13 PLC Import Tool

(2) Starting the PLC Import Tool

Start the PLC Import Tool using the following procedure. There are two ways to start the PLC Import Tool.
(a) Starting from the File Manager
Select Tool − PLC Import Tool from the File Manager Menu.

The following message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to continue.

(b) Automatic Start

The following message will be displayed when the MPE720 is started. Click the Yes button to continue.

This message will be displayed the first time that the MPE720 is started after installation.
INFO
This message will be displayed every time the MPE720 is started if you clear the Don’t show this dialog in the future.
Option.

2-60
 2.2 File Manager

(3) PLC Import Tool Menu

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for PLC Import Tool.
Menu Command Function
File
New Creates a new group folder or order folder in the MPE720.
Changes the name of a group folder or order folder. Only group folders or order
Rename folders newly created by the PLC Import Tool can be renamed. Existing group fold-
ers and order folders cannot be renamed.
Exit Exits the PLC Import Tool.
Edit
Pre-imports the group folder, order folder, or PLC folder selected in the CP-717
Select
Directory Tree to the location selected in the MPE720 Directory Tree.
Deletes the folder selected in the MPE720 Directory Tree. Only group folders or
Delete order folders newly created by the PLC Import Tool can be deleted. Existing group
folders and order folders cannot be deleted.
Import Executes the PLC Import operation.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Output Window Displays the Output window.
Help
Contents and Index Displays help information.
About Application Displays the version information.

Manager Functions
(4) PLC Import Tool Operations
This section explains the operation of the PLC Import Tool.
(a) Executing Pre-import
Select the group folder, order folder, or PLC folder in the CP-717 Directory Tree that will be the import
source folder. Select the group folder or order folder in the MPE720 Directory Tree that will be the import
target folder. Select Edit − Select from the menu. Alternatively, click the Select button.
The following screen shows an example of pre-importing from the CP-717’s PLC environment to the 2
MPE720 environment. In this case, the group folder named “GROUP1” in the CP-717 environment has been
pre-imported to the MPE720’s root folder “Root.”

The pre-imported folder is displayed in a light color.

2-61
 2 Manager Functions
2.2.13 PLC Import Tool

• A group folder cannot be pre-imported into an order folder. Also, a PLC folder cannot be pre-imported
INFO
directly below a group folder.
• The pre-import can also be performed by dragging and dropping the import source folder from the CP-717 Directory
Tree to the import target location in the MPE720 Directory Tree.

(b) Executing the Import Operation

To execute the Import operation, select Edit − Import from the menu. Alternatively, click the Import button.
When the import operation has been completed, the import completion status will be displayed in the Output
window. Also, the display of the imported folder will change from a light color to normal text. The following
screen shows the display after the import operation was completed properly.

The import status is displayed. The display of the imported folder will
change from a light color to normal text.

(5) Exiting the PLC Import Tool

To close the PLC Import Tool, select File − Exit from the menu.

The following message will be displayed if you exit the PLC Import Tool while a folder is pre-imported.
INFO

2-62
 2.3 Engineering Manager

2.3 Engineering Manager

This section explains how to start the Engineering Manger and the role it plays.

2.3.1 Automatic Startup

The Engineering Manager is automatically started as a result of operations performed in the File Manager. It can-
not be started independently. If certain programming tools are called from the File Manager, the Engineering
Manager is started first, and then the function window for the programming tool is opened in the Engineering
Manager. All function windows are managed under the Engineering Manager.
MPE720 File Manager

Directory
tree

Select File − Open,* or double-click

a file in the Directory Tree.

MPE720 File Manager

Directory Engineering Manager

Tree
. . . (Function window) The programming tool allocated
PT#... (Login information) to the specified file is opened,
and the contents of the file are

Manager Functions
The contents of the file are displayed.
displayed. (This area will be
blank for new files.)

* The file program that is opened from the File Manager Menu will depend on the type of file or folder that
was selected.

EXAMPLE The following screens are displayed when the Motion Editor is opened from the File Manager. 2

1. Select File − Open − Motion Editor from the File Manager Menu. Alternatively, double-click the Motion
Group1 Folder.

Select

2-63
 2 Manager Functions
2.3.2 Basic Functions

2. The Motion Editor window will open in the Engineering Manager window as shown below.

3. If the Motion Editor is closed at this stage, only the Engineering Manager window will be displayed.

2.3.2 Basic Functions

All of the functions called using the Engineering Manager can be selected by selecting File − Open.

Position Monitor
is displayed only
when online.

Several function windows can be open at once, and the window to be used can be activated as needed.

2-64
 2.3 Engineering Manager

2.3.3 Basic Menus

The basic menus are active when no function windows are open in the Engineering Manager Window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open
Definition
Module Configuration
System Configuration
Scan Time Setting
Application Info.
Define the Modules.
Data Trace
Fault Monitor
Definition Group
Motion Parameters *1
Program
New Drawing
Properties
Main Program
SFC Flow Chart
SFC Time Chart
SFC Action Box
Calls programming tools.
Constant Table (# Reg)

Manager Functions
Constant Table (M Reg)
I/O Conversion Table
Interlock Table
Part Composition Table
Tuning Panel
Tool
Register List
Cross Reference 2
Disable Coil List Calls programming support tools.
Comment List
Register Replace
C Register
C Register List Displays C registers.
Define Data Table
Table Data List Displays table data.
Motion Program
Motion Editor
Position Monitor *2
Calls motion programming tools.
Task Monitor *2
Motion Alarm *2
Print Prints data.
Exit Closes the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

* 1. Motion Parameters is only displayed when the MP930 is used.

* 2. Position Monitor, Task Monitor, and Motion Alarm are active only when online.

2-65
 2 Manager Functions
2.3.4 Function Windows

2.3.4 Function Windows

The function windows are used to create, edit, and debug application programs.
More than one function window can be open at the same time in the Engineering Manager. The menus differ for
each function window. The menu for the active function window will be displayed. Refer to the explanations for
each function window menu.
In the following figure, the Motion Editor and Scan Time windows are open. The Engineering Manager uses the
Motion Editor menu because the Motion Editor is the active function window. The menu will switch to the Scan
Time Menu if the Scan Time window is made active.

Currently displaying the main

menu for the Motion Editor.

The Motion Editor is

active function window.

(1) Window Configuration

This section explains the basic configuration of function windows.

Window Title System Path PLC name Online/Offline Title bar

PT#: UT#: ... Indicator Login information

Client area

(a) Title Bar

Display Details
Window Title Displays the title of the function window to the right of the icon.
Displays the path information from the group name to the PLC
System Path
folder.
PLC Name Displays the connected Machine Controller name.
Online/Offline Displays whether currently online or offline.

(b) Login Information

The login information is displayed under the title bar. When logging in while offline, hyphens are displayed
for the number.
Display Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port number.
UT# Displays the Machine Controller unit number.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU currently logged in.
Indicators Displays the animation data when online.

2-66
 2.3 Engineering Manager

(c) Client Area

The function window internal information is displayed in the Client area. Refer to Chapter 3 System Config-
uration Definitions.

2.3.5 Exiting the Engineering Manager

Exit the Engineering Manager using the following procedure.
1. Close all open function windows.
2. Close the Engineering Manager by selecting File − Exit.
No confirmation message will be displayed.
If you log off while the Engineering Manager is open, the Engineering Manager automatically closes and logs
off.

Manager Functions
2

2-67
 2 Manager Functions
2.4.1 Outline

2.4 List and Print Managers

2.4.1 Outline
Use this manager to print lists and details of motion programs, ladder programs, registers, and definition files
managed by the MPE720.
Print processing is executed by the List Manager and Print Manager.
The List Manager is equipped with a print cancellation function for print jobs that are queued, and a print status
is displayed at the same time as actually printing data requested from the Print Manager.
*1

Print
List Manager

*2
Program file Print Manager Machine Controller
definition file

Programming
Device hard disk
(Data transfer)

* 1. The List Manager starts when the Print Manager Window is opened. The List Manager is an independent win-
dow, as print jobs can also be requested from applications other than the MPE720. Consequently, when the
MPE720 finishes, the List Manager must be closed manually.
The Print Manager edits data selected via the user interface and requests print jobs to the List Manager.
* 2. Data for printing is stored on the Programming Device hard disk. To print data stored on the Machine Control-
ler, the data must be transferred to the hard disk using the transfer function. In normal operations, however,
Machine Controller and hard disk data are the same, so no transfer is necessary.

2-68
 2.4 List and Print Managers

2.4.2 List Manager

The List Manager is used to print the data and display the printing status and cancel printing jobs.
(1) Opening the List Manager Window
The List Manager can be opened from the Print Manager.
To open the List Manager, select Print − Printing Status from the Print Manager menu, or click the List Man-
ager icon on the task bar. The Print Status window will open.

List Manager icon

The List Manager is started automatically when the Print Manager is opened. If the Print Manager has never been opened,
INFO
the List Manager will not have been started, and so will not be registered on the task bar. The List Manager cannot be
started independently.

Manager Functions
(2) List Manager Menus
The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for List Manager.
Menu Command Function
File
Cancel Cancels printing jobs.
Exit Exits the List Manager.
2
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(3) Displaying Printing Status

The current printing status is displayed in the List Manager window.
Display Details
No. Displays the queue number of queued printing jobs.
Preparing for print.: The printing data is being converted to a print-
Status ing image.
Print job cancelled.: The printing job has been cancelled.
Group name, order name, PLC name, CPU number, and print setting
Print Folder
file title are all displayed.

2-69
 2 Manager Functions
2.4.3 Print Manager

(4) Cancelling Printing Jobs

Cancel printing jobs using the following procedure.
1. Select the printing job to be cancelled.
2. Select File − Cancel from the List Manager menu.
3. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button.
The printing job selected in step 1. will be cancelled.

2.4.3 Print Manager

(1) Opening the Print Manager Window
(a) Opening from the File Manager
Select a PLC Folder, CPU Folder, or a drawing folder under within these folders on the Directory Tree. Select
File − Print from the File Manager menu. The Print Manager is started and the Print Manager window is
opened.

(b) Opening from the Engineering Manager

Select File − Print from the Engineering Manager menu. The Print Manager will start and the Print Manager
window will open.

The Print Manager cannot be started in the LADDER Windows. Select File − Print Program from the menu to print the
INFO
main program.

2-70
 2.4 List and Print Managers

(2) Print Manager Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed for the Print Manager.
Menu Command Function
File
Read Reads printing settings files.
Save Saves printing settings data.
Delete Deletes printing settings files.
Exit Exits the Print Manager.
Edit
Date Sets the current date.
Copy History Copies revision history data.
Print
Execute Print Executes printing.
Printing Status Displays the printing status.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Next Page Displays the next tab page.
Back Page Displays the previous tab page.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(3) Tab Pages

Manager Functions
The Print Manager Window has the four tab pages shown below.
Tab Page Details
Program Sets the printing data for DWG and function programs.
Register Sets printing data for S, I, O, M, and D registers.
Sets printing data for system definitions, transfer definitions, and
Definition
other definitions.
Motion Sets printing data for motion programs. 2

2-71
 2 Manager Functions
2.4.3 Print Manager

(4) Program Tab Page

(a) Program Print Settings

Setting Details
Displays the data from the Order No. column in the Application Information Window.
O/# This data cannot be changed.
This information is printed on the cover page and in the footer of the document.
Enter a drawing number of up to 16 characters.
DWG No.
This data is printed in the header and footer of the documents.
Enter a name of up to 16 characters of the person who created the drawing.
Draw
This data is printed in the Draw column of the document footer.
Enter a date of up to 16 characters for when the drawing was created.
Date
This data is printed in the Date column of the document footer.
Displays the data from the User column in the Application Information Window.
User This data cannot be changed.
This data is printed in the User column on the document cover page.
Displays the data from the Used column in the Application Information Window.
Used At This data cannot be changed.
This data is printed in the Used At column on the document cover page.
Displays the data from the Equip. column in the Application Information Window.
Equipment This data cannot be changed.
This data is printed in the Equipment column on the document cover page.
Displays the data from the Usage column in the Application Information Window.
Usage This data cannot be changed.
This data is printed in the Usage column on the document cover page.
Displayed between No. and Item. The items to be printed are selected and the selection sta-
tus indicated.
Selection Status • : Indicates items that have not been selected for printing.
• : Indicates items that have been selected for printing.
Item (Print Items) Displays printing items. This data is printed in the Draw column of the document footer.
Enter the first and last page numbers to be printed for the printing item. If the document has
Page No. more pages than the number of pages specified, the pages following the page designated as
the last page will also be printed.
Detail printing item selections can be made.
Details
Refer to the next section for information on the Details button.

2-72
 2.4 List and Print Managers

Setting Details
Enter revision history data for the printing settings file of up to 64 characters.
Up to 20 pieces of revision history data can be entered. Select Edit − Copy History from
History
the Print Manager Menu to copy revision history data from the current tab page to revision
history data on another tab page.

(b) Detailed Settings

Detailed printing settings are required for items that have a Details button to the right of the printing item.
Click the Details button and make the detailed settings.
1. DWG List
Select either drawing trees or drawing lists for printing in the Select the Print Class window.
Setting Details
Print drawing trees, which are drawing levels displayed in a
DWG Tree
directory tree format.
DWG List Print a list of drawings.

2. DWG Program
Select either Select All or Individual Select in the DWG Program List Detail window.
Setting Details
Select All Print all drawing programs.
Individual Select Select and prints individual drawing programs from the list box.
Print All Print all drawing programs in the list box.
Cancel All Cancel all drawing program settings in the list box.

Manager Functions
Displays the Select the Print Class window to select the type of
Type drawing program to be printed. Only the selected data will be
printed.

3. Function Programs
Select either Select All or Individual Select in the Function Program List Details window.
Setting Details
Select All Print all function programs. 2
Individual Select Select individual function programs from the list box.
Displays the Select the Print Class window to select the type of
Type function program to be printed. Only the selected data will be
printed.

4. C Register Constant Tables

Select either Select All or Individual Select in the C Register Constant Table (Creg) Detail window.
Setting Details
Select All Print all C register constant tables.
Individual Select Select individual C register constant tables from the list box.
Print Cross Print the C register cross information.

5. Table Data
Select either Select All or Individual Select in the Table Data Detail window.
Setting Details
Select All Select all the table data.
Select individual table data from the list box. If the table data
exceeds 501, switch the displayed lists of table data in the list box
Individual Select
in units of 500 by pressing the PageUp key and the PageDown
key.

2-73
 2 Manager Functions
2.4.3 Print Manager

(5) Register Tab Page

(a) Register Printing Settings

Window displays are the same as those for program print settings. For program print settings, refer to (a) Pro-
gram Print Settings in (4) Program Tab Page.

(b) Detailed Settings

Detailed printing settings are required for items that have a Details button to the right of the printing item.
Click the Details button and make the detailed settings.
1. S Register
The whole register range can be selected at a time, and the registers can be sorted and displayed in the S
Register List Details window.
Setting Details
Designates all the S registers. When the Select All button is
Select All clicked, all bit, integer, double-length integer, and real-number
registers will be set.
Select the register range to be deleted with the cursor and click
Delete
the Delete button to delete the selected register range.
Sort Sorts the entered register range by register number.

2. I Register
Enter in hexadecimal the leading and ending numbers of the I registers to be printed in the I Register List
Details window.
The method for selecting the register range is the same as for S registers.
3. O Registers
Enter in hexadecimal the leading and ending numbers of the O registers to be printed in the O Register
List Details window.
The method for selecting the register range is the same as for S registers.
4. M Registers
Enter in hexadecimal the leading and ending numbers of the M registers to be printed in the M Register
List Details window.
The method for selecting the register range is the same as for S registers.
Setting Details
Map List Prints the M register utilization status list before the M registers.

2-74
 2.4 List and Print Managers

5. D Registers
Select either Select All or Individual Select in the D Register List Details window.
Setting Details
Map List Prints the D register utilization status list before the D registers.
Select All Prints all drawing and function program D registers.
Selects individual drawing or function programs, and prints the D
Individual Select
registers used in the selected programs.

6. # Registers
Select either Select All or Individual Select in the # Register List Details window.
Setting Details
Prints the # register cross-reference information before the # reg-
Print Cross
isters.
Print Data Prints the # register data.
Select All Prints all drawing and function program # registers.
Selects individual drawing or function programs, and prints the #
Individual Select
registers used in the selected programs.

(6) Definitions Tab Page

System definition, scan time, module configuration definition, failure monitor definition, and data trace printing
data can be selected.
(a) Definition Printing Settings

Manager Functions
2

Window displays are the same as those for program print settings. For program print settings, refer to (a) Pro-
gram Print Settings in (4) Program Tab Page.

(b) Detailed Settings

Detailed printing settings are required for items that have a Details button to the right of the printing item.
Click the Details button and make the detailed settings.
• Module Configuration
Select the slot numbers for the definition data to be printed using the Select the Print Class window, and
then click the OK button.

Data at RESERVED or UNDEFINED slot numbers is invalid even if selected.

INFO

2-75
 2 Manager Functions
2.4.3 Print Manager

(7) Motion Tab Page

Motion program and motion parameter printing data can be selected.
(a) Motion Printing Settings

Setting Details
Select a group. The motion program and other data for the desig-
Group
nated group will be printed.
Displayed between No. and Item. Select the items to be printed.
Selection Status • : Indicates items that have not been selected for printing.
• : Indicates items that have been selected for printing.
Displays the items to be printed. The items will be printed in the
Item (Print Item)
Draw column in the document footer.
Enter the first and last page numbers to be printed for the printing
item. If the document has more pages than the number of pages
Page No.
entered, the pages following the page designated as the last page will
also be printed.
Details Printing item details are selected.

(b) Detailed Settings

Detailed printing settings are required for items that have a Details button to the right of the printing item.
Click the Details button and make the detailed settings.
• Motion Program
Select either Select All or Individual Select in the Motion Program List Details window.
Setting Details
Select All Prints all motion programs.
Individual Select Selects and prints individual motion programs from the list box.
Print Cross Prints the motion program cross-reference information.
Select individual MP configuration definitions, MP texts, and
Type Button
revision histories from the Select the Print Class window.

2-76
 2.4 List and Print Managers

(8) Printing
The Print command is executed according to the Program, Register, Definition, and Motion tab page settings.
The current printing status can be displayed during printing.
• Printing Procedure
Print the data using the following procedure.
1. Select Print − Execute Print from the Print Manager menu.
2. Set the file to be printed and the printing margins in the Execute Print window, and click the Execute
button.

Manager Functions
3. Set the printer in the Print window and click the OK button.

Refer to individual printer manuals for information on printing setting details.

INFO
2
(9) Editing Printing Settings Files
Printing settings selected in the Program, Register, Definition, and Motion tab pages can be saved as files. Such
files are called printing settings files. This section explains how to read, delete, and save printing settings files.
(a) Reading Printing Settings Files
Select File − Read from the Print Manager menu. In the Read Print Information File window, select the print-
ing settings file to be read and click the OK button.

(b) Deleting Printing Settings Files

Select File − Delete from the Print Manager menu. In the Delete Print Information File window, select the
printing settings file to be deleted and click the OK button.

(c) Saving Printing Settings Files

Select File − Save from the Print Manager menu. In the Save Print Information File window, enter the file
name and title and click the OK button.

Enter a file name of up to 8 characters and a title of up to 48 characters.

INFO

2-77
 2 Manager Functions
2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons

2.5 User Menu Manager

The User Menu Manager is a function for registering shortcut icons to be used to call up the various function
windows on the desktop. After registration, you can call up a function window simply by clicking its icon, and
you can then execute that function (logon is necessary). This means that you go straight to processing that you
want to execute without having to go through the normal startup sequence.

2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons

To register a user menu, select the menu incorporated in the file menu for each function menu as shown below.
The shortcut icon for the currently active window will be registered.

Click Register User menu to display the dialog box shown below, then make the necessary entries in this dialog
box. Currently, you can register a shortcut icon by entering just a title.

This is the information

of the system
concerned and it will
be registered as well.

This dialog box is displayed when the Motion Editor window is active, and you can register a shortcut for this
window on the desktop by entering MotionEditor for the title and then pressing the OK button.

2-78
 2.5 User Menu Manager

2.5.2 Starting Up from a Shortcut Icon

Double-click a registered shortcut icon. The Log on to the controller window shown below will be displayed.
Enter your User Name and Password on this window.

When you have successfully logged on the function window registered for the icon is displayed, so you can start
using the function immediately. This example assumes that you are starting up the Motion Editor.

Manager Functions
As shown above, this function allows you to proceed right to startup of the Motion Editor by following the steps
of clicking the shortcut icon and logging on rather than following the conventional startup sequence. You can
greatly improve operating convenience by using this function for the function windows of the system that you
often use.

2-79
 3
System Configuration Definitions

This section describes the system configuration definitions that set the system operating envi-
ronment for the hardware settings made with the module configuration definitions in Chapter 8
Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions.

3.1 Outline of System Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2

System Configuration Definitions

3.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4

3-1
 3 System Configuration Definitions

3.1 Outline of System Configuration Definitions

The Definition Folder is registered under the PLC folder in the File Manager window. It is used to access the def-
initions folder containing the Machine Controller's system environment and operating environment settings.
(1) Types of System Configuration Definitions
The following table lists the System Configuration Definition Files that can be accessed by opening the Defini-
tions Folder in the PLC Folder. The files listed as Yes in the required column must be set. The other files are set as
required by the system configuration.
System Configuration
Function Required Reference
Definition File
Application Information Edits the system information history. − Chapter 4
System Configuration Checks and modifies the Machine Controller status. − Chapter 5
Sets the high-speed, low-speed, and system scan
Scan Time Yes Chapter 6
times.
Data Trace Defines the data to be traced. − Chapter 7
Module Configuration Defines the Module configuration. Yes Chapter 8

3-2
 3.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows

3.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Windows

The methods used to open the following System Configuration Definitions windows will be described.
• System definitions
• Scan time definitions
• Application information definitions
• Data trace definitions
• Module configuration definitions
The System Configuration Definitions windows can be opened from the File Manager or the Engineering Man-
ager.
(1) Opening from the File Manager
Open the relevant PLC folder from the Directory Tree of the File Manager.
Select the Definition Folder from the PLC Folder, and then double-click the folder. The files contained in the
selected Definition Folder will also be displayed in the List of the File Manager, so double-clicking the file here
will have the same effect.

(2) Opening from the Engineering Manager

The definition menu can be displayed by selecting File − Open − Definition from the Engineering Manager
Menu. Select the desired item from the menus.

(3) New Definition Files

System Configuration Definitions

When a system information definition file is opened for the first time, a dialog box will be displayed to confirm
that a new file is to be created because the setting data for each of the definition files has not been defined. Click
the OK button to continue with the definition operations.

3-3
 3 System Configuration Definitions

3.3 Updating Files in Online Mode and Offline Mode

When the data or files are created or modified, the location where they are stored depends on whether the
Machine Controller has been logged onto in online mode or offline mode.
(1) Logging On in Online
When in online mode, the data stored at the Machine Controller is accessed. When data is newly created or
updated, it is saved to both the Machine Controller and the Programming Device hard disk.

(2) Logging On in Offline

When in offline mode, the Machine Controller is not connected, and the data stored on the Programming Device
hard disk is accessed. When data is newly created or updated, it is saved only to the Programming Device hard
disk. When data is created in offline mode, the data must later be transferred to the Machine Controller in online
mode to enable using it in the Machine Controller. If the data is not transferred, the data in the Machine Control-
ler will not be updated.

Data and file

designation

NO
Online
YES
Only Machine
Controller data read Only HDD data read

Data or file
created or updated

NO
Online
YES
Machine Controller
data updated

HDD data updated

The creation and modification of all data and files is managed by the Programming Device.
IMPORTANT

3-4
 4
Definition Folder 1:
Application Information Definitions

Definition Folder 1: Application Information Definitions

This chapter explains how to set application information.
The procedure to set the current application information is given below such as the names of
equipment using the Machine Controller and revision history. Parts of the data set here are
reflected in the covers of document printouts, but it does not affect actual Machine Controller
operation.
Use the application information for system development-related history, memos, etc.

4.1 Opening the Application Information Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2

4.2 Application Information Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.3 Setting Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.4 Saving Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.5 Closing Application Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3

4-1
 4 Definition Folder 1: Application Information Definitions

4.1 Opening the Application Information Window

Open the Application Information window according to instructions in 3.2 Opening System Configuration Def-
initions Windows.

4.2 Application Information Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Application Information win-
dow.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the Application Information window.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Registers a shortcut for the application informa-
Register in User Menu
tion.
Save Saves application information data.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion
Motion Task Manager
program.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

4-2
 4.3 Setting Application Information

4.3 Setting Application Information

Setting Details
Order No. Input the system order number, up to eight characters.
Controller Name Input a name for the Machine Controller, up to eight characters.
Input the type of the Machine Controller that is to be used, up to 32
Controller Type
characters.
User Input the user, up to 32 characters.
Used Input the area of use, up to 32 characters.
Equip. Input the name of the equipment, up to 32 characters.
Usage Input the application, up to 32 characters.
Date Prepared Input the date prepared, up to 48 characters.
Input the revision history, up to 48 characters.
Revision History
Up to 15 revision history records can be input.

4.4 Saving Application Information

Definition Folder 1: Application Information Definitions

Save application information using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the menus.
2. Click the Yes button in the Application Information message box.

4.5 Closing Application Information

Exit the application information settings by closing the Application Information window.
To close the window, select File − Close from the menus.

4-3
 5
Definition Folder 2:
System Configuration

This chapter explains how to perform operations in the System Configuration window.
The System Configuration window is used to check the operating mode and status of the
Machine Controller's CPU, and to make settings.

5.1 Opening the System Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2

Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

5.2 System Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
5.3 System Configuration Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
5.4 Changing Machine Controller Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.5 Saving System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
5.6 Closing System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7

5-1
 5 Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

5.1 Opening the System Configuration Window

Open the System Configuration window according to instructions in 3.2 Opening System Configuration Defini-
tions Windows.

(1) Login Information

Login information is displayed below the title bar in the System Configuration window. Hyphens will be dis-
played in offline mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port number.
UT# Displays the unit number of the Machine Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto.

(2) Tab Pages

The System Configuration Window has one tab page.
Tab Page Details
System Configuration Sets the Machine Controller status and calendar values.

5-2
 5.2 System Configuration Menus

5.2 System Configuration Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the System Configuration window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the System Configuration Window.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Registers a shortcut for the application
Register in User Menu
information.
Save Saves system definition data.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Delete Assignment Clears the shared memory allocation data.
Control
CALENDAR Changes the calendar values.
CPU RUN Sets online operating mode.
CPU STOP Sets offline stop mode.
Error Reset Resets the display of detected errors.
Memory Clear Clears the Machine Controller's memory.
Compresses the Machine Controller's user pro-

Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

MEM COMPACT
gram memory.
CPU RESET Resets the CPU.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion
Motion Task Manager
program.
Next Page Displays the next tab page.
Back Page Displays the previous tab page.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons. 5
Help
About Application Displays version information.

5-3
 5 Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

5.3 System Configuration Tab Page

Status-related items can be accessed only in online mode.
Setting Details
Enter the power loss decision time. Enter a time from 0.0 to 9.9 s.
Momentary Power
If 0.0 is entered, all power losses will be judged as ordinary power
Loss Time Setting
losses, rather than as momentary power losses.
Start-up After Momen- Select the method with which the Machine Controller will be started
tary Power Loss following momentary power losses.
Start-up After Power Select the method with which the Machine Controller will be started
Down following power ON after power losses.
Enabled: Programs and definition data can be changed.
Write Protect Program Disabled: Programs and definition data can be displayed but they
cannot be changed. Register values, however, can still be changed.
Enter the number of times that the previous high-speed scan input
Retain H-Scan Input values are to be retained in the event of an I/O error. Enter a number
Values Setting (Reten- from 1 to 255.
tion of Previous High- If 3 is entered, for example, then high-speed scan inputs will be reset
scan Input Value) when an I/O error occurs for four consecutive times for high-speed
scan inputs.
Enter the number of times that the previous low-speed scan input
Retain L-Scan Input values are to be retained in the event of an I/O error. Enter a number
Values Setting (Reten- from 1 to 255.
tion of Previous Low- If 3 is entered, for example, then low-speed scan inputs will be reset
scan Input Value) when an I/O error occurs for four consecutive times for low-speed
scan inputs.
Controller Firmware
Displays the Machine Controller's system software number (in
Version (System Soft-
online mode only).
ware Number)
Displays the current operating status of the Machine Controller in
Running Status
online mode.
Start up Status Displays the Machine Controller's status at startup.
Power up Status Displays the Machine Controller's status when rebooted.
Start up Memory Sta-
Displays the memory status at startup.
tus
CPU Multiple System Makes the settings for the CPU multiple system.

(1) Running Status

Status Meaning
Lit: Normal Lit when Module is normal. Not lit when an error
Ready
Not lit: Self-diagnosis error has occurred.
Lit when scan is executed. Not lit if a fatal error
Lit: Running occurs or if an operation is executed in the System
Run
Not lit: Stopped Configuration Window that stops the Machine
Controller.
Lit: Alarm Lit when an alarm has occurred. Not lit when nor-
Alarm
Not lit: Normal mal.
Lit: Error Lit when an error has occurred. Not lit when nor-
Error
Not lit: Normal mal.
Lit: Battery voltage low
Lit when battery voltage is low. Not lit when bat-
BAT Alarm Not lit: Battery voltage nor-
tery voltage is normal.
mal
Lit: Bus being accessed
BUS Lit during CPU Module bus access. Not lit when
Not lit: Bus accessed
Access bus access is stopped.
stopped

5-4
 5.3 System Configuration Tab Page

(2) CPU Multiple System

(a) Run Mode
Set the CPU multiple system operational mode.
• Harmony Stop (coordinated stop): Linked operation, so the stopping of one CPU will also stop the other
CPU.
• Stand alone (independent run): The CPU operations have no effect on each other.

(b) Sync Scan (Synchronized Scan)

Set the synchronized scan for the CPU multiple system.
• H/L: Synchronize both high-speed scan and low-speed scan.
• H only: Synchronize only high-speed scan.
• L only: Synchronize only low-speed scan.
• No Synchronize: Both CPUs run without synchronization.
For the MP920, set this to H only.

Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

5

5-5
 5 Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

5.4 Changing Machine Controller Status

When the System Configuration Window is displayed and active, the status of the Machine Controller can be
changed using the Control (C) menu from the Engineering Manager menu. The changes made are immediately
reflected in the Machine Controller's operation.

Machine Controller status cannot be changed in offline mode.

IMPORTANT

(1) Starting Machine Controller Operation

1. Select Control − CPU RUN from the menus.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.

(2) Stopping Machine Controller Operation

1. Select Control − CPU STOP from the menus.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.
Execution of the user program will stop when the Machine Controller stops operation.

(3) Resetting the Machine Controller's Error Display

Reset the display of errors detected by the Machine Controller using the following procedure. Before resetting
the display, use the register list function to check the Error Description.
1. Select Control − Error Reset from the menus.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.

(4) Clearing Machine Controller Memory

When the Machine Controller's memory is cleared, the user programs and definition data will be deleted. The
contents of the flash memory, however, will not be cleared.
1. Select Control − Memory Clear from the menus.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.

The Machine Controller operation must be stopped when clearing Machine Controller memory is executed.
IMPORTANT
The basic control cycle will not return to its default value when Machine Controller memory is cleared. The
power supply must be turned OFF and then back ON to return the basic control cycle to the default value.

(5) Compressing Memory

If the user program becomes too large and the available user program memory is reduced, then the user program
memory will become fragmented when the program is repeatedly changed. If that occurs, it may become impos-
sible to make changes or additions to the program even if the required memory capacity is available. By execut-
ing the memory compression, the utilized area in the user program memory will be packed and the fragmented
area will be repaired.
1. Select Control − MEM COMPACT from the menus.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.

By using memory compression, programs can be created up to the limit of the user program memory. When the
IMPORTANT
user program memory is full, however, existing programs cannot be changed.

5-6
 5.5 Saving System Configuration

(6) Resetting the CPU

When the CPU is reset, the status will be the same as when the power is turned OFF and then ON.
Reset the CPU using the following procedure.
1. Select Control − CPU RESET from the System Configuration menu.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.

• The CPU reset function cannot be used with the MP930.

IMPORTANT
• The Machine Controller operation must be stopped before resetting the CPU. For the method to stop the
Machine Controller operation, refer to (2) in 5.4 Changing Machine Controller Status.

5.5 Saving System Configuration

Save the system definitions using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the System Configuration menu.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.
3. Click the OK button in the message box.

An Error Detection Message is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appendix A Error Messages,
INFO
eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.

Definition Folder 2: System Configuration

5.6 Closing System Configuration
Exit the system configuration definitions by closing the System Configuration window.
To close the window, select File − Close from the menus.

5-7
 6
Definition Folder 3:
Scan Time Definitions

This chapter explains how to set the scan times.

The scan times are the cycles repeated by Machine Controller to execute the user programs
(high-speed scan program, low-speed scan program) over and over. The MP940 also features a
system scan to enable high-precision servo control.
All three scan times must be set for the MP940: High-speed, low-speed, and system. The scan
time settings are important factors in Machine Controller operation. Refer to the relevant User's
Manual: Design and Maintenance and be sure that suitable times are set.

Definition Folder 3: Scan Time Definitions

6.1 Opening the Scan Time Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2 Scan Time Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.3 Setting the System Scan Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.6 Closing Scan Time Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5

6-1
 6 Definition Folder 3: Scan Time Definitions

6.1 Opening the Scan Time Window

Open the Scan Time Window according to instructions in 3.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Win-
dows.

(1) Login Information

Login information is displayed below the title bar in the System Configuration window. Hyphens will be dis-
played in offline mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port number.
UT# Displays the unit number of the Machine Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto.

(2) Network Information

Machine Controller network information is displayed.
Information Details
Network Number Displays the network number.
Station Number Displays the station number.
Controller Number Displays the CPU number.
Controller Type Displays the Machine Controller type.

6-2
 6.2 Scan Time Menus

6.2 Scan Time Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Scan Time window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the Scan Time Window.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Registers a shortcut for the application informa-
Register in User Menu
tion.
Save Saves scan time setting data.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion
Motion Task Manager
program.
Adds the Machine Controller displaying the scan
PC Add
time.
Deletes the Machine Controller displaying the
PC Delete
scan time.
Set

Definition Folder 3: Scan Time Definitions

Basic Control Cycle Sets the basic control cycle (MP940 only).
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

6-3
 6 Definition Folder 3: Scan Time Definitions

6.3 Setting the System Scan Time

The system scan time is set only for the MP940.
The scan times determine the flow of program execution. The MP940 provides three different scan times: sys-
tem, high-speed, and low-speed. The system scan time must be set first because it is used as a basis for setting the
high-speed and low-speed scan times.
The scan times must be set as shown in the following table. Refer to the Machine Controller MP940 User's Man-
ual: Design and Maintenance (SIEZ-C887-4.1) for details.
Scan Scan Time Setting
System scan Select one of 0.5, 1, 2, or 4 ms.
High-speed scan A multiple of the system scan time between 0.5 and 32 ms
Low-speed scan A multiple of the system scan time between 2.0 and 100 ms

(1) Opening the Basic Control Cycle Window

Select Set − Basic Control Cycle from the Scan Time menu. The following Basic Control Cycle window will be
displayed.

Setting Details
Set the system scan time. The current system scan time setting is
Set Time
shown underneath the setting.
Set the maximum value of the system scan time. The maximum
Maximum Time
value measured to present is shown underneath the setting.
Current Time Displays the current system scan time.
Steps Displays the number of steps for the system scan.
Displays the percentage of background processing in the overall sys-
Background Time
tem processing.
Set the watchdog time as a presumed maximum limit to the system
Watchdog Set
scan time.

• The power supply must be turned OFF and back ON after the basic control cycle is changed.
IMPORTANT
• The basic control cycle will not return to its default value when Machine Controller memory is cleared. The
power supply must be turned OFF and then back ON to return the basic control cycle to the default value.

6-4
 6.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions

6.4 Setting Scan Time Definitions

In online mode, the Machine Controller's high-speed scan time is displayed. In offline mode, the scan time data
saved on the Programming Device hard disk is displayed.
Setting Details
Setting: Input the set value for the scan time.
Maximum Run Time: Displays the maximum value for the high-
speed scan time. To clear the maximum value, input 0. In offline
High-speed Scan Set- Mode, 0 is always displayed.
ting Current Run Time: Displays the current high-speed scan time.
In offline mode, 0 is always displayed.
Number of steps: Displays the total number of steps in the high-
speed scan program.
Low-speed Scan Set- Sets the low-speed scan time. The meaning of each item is the same
ting as for the high-speed scan.
Start-up DWG Steps Displays the total number of steps in the startup drawing.
Interrupt DWG Steps Displays the total number of steps in the interrupt drawing.
User Function Steps Displays the total number of steps in user functions.
Total Steps Displays the total number of steps in all drawings.
Total: Displays the total capacity of the program memory (drawings,
functions, and motion programs). In offline mode, 0 is always dis-
Program Memory played.
Available: Displays the amount of program memory available.
In offline mode, 0 is always displayed.

Definition Folder 3: Scan Time Definitions

In online mode, the maximum value can be cleared by inputting 0 in the Maximum H-Scan Run Time or the Maximum L-
INFO
Scan Run Time and saving it. After the old maximum value has been cleared, a new one will be entered.

6.5 Saving Scan Time Definitions

Save the scan time definitions using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the Scan Time menu.
2. Click the Yes button in the Scan Time message box.

6.6 Closing Scan Time Definitions

Exit the scan time definitions by closing the Scan Time window. 6
To close the window, select File − Close from the menus.

6-5
 7
Definition Folder 4:
Data Trace Definitions

This chapter explains how to define data to be traced and how traced data is displayed.
Data being traced can be obtained using trigger conditions. The trace data can be displayed in
either a list or a graph, and it can be saved.

7.1 Data Trace - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2

7.1.1 Opening the Data Trace Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.2 Data Trace Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
7.1.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
7.1.4 Data Trace Setup Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.1.5 List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

7.1.6 Graph Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.1.7 Closing Data Trace Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19

7.2 Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20

7.2.1 Before Using the Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.2.2 Starting the Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.2.3 Trace Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
7.2.4 Graph - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
7.2.5 List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30
7.2.6 Other Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-47

7-1
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.1 Opening the Data Trace Window

7.1 Data Trace

7.1.1 Opening the Data Trace Window
Open the Data Trace Window according to instructions in 3.2 Opening System Configuration Definitions Win-
dows.

(1) Login Information

Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Data Trace Window. Hyphens will be displayed in
offline mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port number.
UT# Displays the unit number of the Machine Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto.

(2) Group and Status Information

Information Details
Group Number Displays the group number.
Displays the data trace status in the CPU of the currently displayed
group number.
Status
RUN: Data trace currently being executed.
STOP: Data trace not being executed.

(3) Tab Pages

The Data Trace Window has three tab pages.
Tab Page Details
Data Trace Setup Sets the data trace trigger.
List Displays the traced data in a list.
Graph Displays the traced data in a graph.

While the Data Trace Window is active, the tab pages can be accessed in the following order by selecting View − Next
INFO
Page from the menus.
• Data Trace Setup → List → Graph → Data Trace Setup
To access the tab pages in reverse order, select View − Back Page from the menus.

7-2
 7.1 Data Trace

7.1.2 Data Trace Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Data Trace window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the Data Trace window.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Register in User Menu Registers a shortcut for the trace definition.
Save Saves trace definition data.
Delete Deletes trace definition data.
Trace Data
Read Reads trace data from floppy disk.
Write Writes trace data to floppy disk.
Trace Data Write (CSV
Saves trace data in CSV format.
Type)
Page Setting Makes the page settings for printing.
Trace Data Print Prints trace data.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Trigger Initiate Condition
Delete Deletes the trigger condition.
Trace Setting
Delete Deletes rows of the specified trace data.
Add Adds rows of the specified trace data.
Default Setting Sets the default values.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion
Motion Task Manager
program.
Mode
RE-DSP Refreshes the display data.
AUTO Automatically refreshes the display data.
Sampling
Number of read data Changes the number of data to be read.
Trace Time Axis Changes the trace time axis.
Displays a row of trace data from any sample
Jump to Appoint Data
number.
Data 7
DEC Displays trace data in decimal.
HEX Displays trace data in hexadecimal.
m/s Switches the time axis unit.
Next Page Displays the next tab page.
Back Page Displays the previous tab page.
Control
Trace Start Starts the data trace.
Trace Stop Stops the data trace.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help

7-3
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations

Menu Command Function

About Application Displays version information.

7.1.3 Outline of Data Trace Operations

The three tab pages are switched between to set the trace trigger, check trace data, and perform other operations
for tracing.
A standard procedure for data tracing is given below.
1. Set the data trace trigger conditions on the Data Trace Setup tab page.
2. Start the trace.
3. Check the trace data list on the List tab page.
4. Set the graph scale and other parameters on the Graph tab page to display the trace data as a graph.
5. Repeat the above steps to produce various trace data. It is often convenient to switch between the list
display and the graph display.

Trace Definitions List Display

Graph Display

7-4
 7.1 Data Trace

7.1.4 Data Trace Setup Tab Page

This tab page is used to set the following items.
• Setting trace definitions
• Editing trace definitions
• Saving and deleting trace definitions
• Starting traces
• Saving and deleting trace data
• Reading trace data
(1) Setting Trace Definitions
Refer to the Data Trace Setup Tab Page in 7.1.1 Opening the Data Trace Window.
Setting Details
Input a name for the trace definition data, within 32 characters. The
Data Name
name entered here has no effect on data trace execution.
Select the timing for executing the data trace.
Program: Executes the data trace when a TRACE system function is
executed in a DWG or function program.
Trace Timing
H-SCAN: Executes the data trace each high-speed scan.
L-SCAN: Executes the data trace each low-speed scan.
S-SCAN: Executes the data trace each system scan. (MP940 only)
When H-SCAN/L-SCAN is selected for the Trace Timing, input the
trace scan cycle (0 to 32,767). Cannot be set when Program is
selected for the Trace Timing.
Trace Interval
If 3 is input, for example, the data trace will be executed at an inter-
val of once every four scans. If 0 is input, then the data trace will be
executed each scan.
Input the maximum number of times (0 to 999,999) that the data

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

trace is to be executed. Cannot be set when Program is selected for
the Trace Timing.
No. of Samples If 0 is input, a continuous trace (cyclic trace) will be executed until it
is stopped either manually or by the condition of Terminate 1 or Ter-
minate 2 for the Trigger Condition. If 1000 is input, the trace will be
executed for 1,000 data samples.
When H-SCAN/L-SCAN is selected for the Trace Timing, input the
Trigger Condition: Ini- condition for beginning the data trace. Cannot be set when Program
tiate (Initiate Trigger is selected for the Trace Timing.
Condition) If no condition is input here, then the trace operation must be started
manually.
When H-SCAN/L-SCAN is selected for the Trace Timing, input the
condition for stopping the data trace and the number of traces to be
executed from when the condition is met to when the data trace is
stopped. Up to two terminate trigger conditions can be set. Cannot
be set when Program is selected for the Trace Timing.
Trigger Condition: Ter- 7
If 0 is input for the Samples Collected after Termination, the trace
minate 1 or Terminate
will be stopped immediately when the trigger condition is met. If the
2 (Terminate Trigger
Terminate 1 or Terminate 2 in the Trigger Condition is not input, the
Condition)
data trace will be executed until it is stopped either manually or by
reaching the number of traces specified for the No. of Samples. If
there are two conditions set for Terminate 1 and Terminate 2 in the
Trigger Condition, then the data trace will be stopped when either of
those conditions is met.
Input the register numbers (Register), drawing numbers (Drawing),
Trace Data Definition scale conversion values (SCALE), or comments that are to be traced.
A maximum of 16 items can be specified.

7-5
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.4 Data Trace Setup Tab Page

(2) Details of Trace Data Definition

Setting Details
Input the numbers of the registers to be traced. The types of registers
Register that can be input are S, O, M, and D registers. Depending on the for-
(Register Number) mat of the register, the data to be traced can be integer data, double-
length integer data, or bit data.
If the register number to be traced is a D register (i.e., if a D register
is input for the Register), then input a D register drawing number.
For a motion program, input a motion program drawing number
Drawing (MP††††). If the register number is not a D register, there is no
(Drawing Number) need to input anything here. D registers in different scans cannot be
specified at the same time. Also, the data trace can be executed only
when the scan level of the D registers to be traced is the same as the
scan level specified for the Trace Timing.
SCALE (Scale Input the scale conversion value for the traced data. This value will
Conversion Value) be the amplitude when the trace data is displayed in a graph.
Comment Input a comment for the register to be traced, up to 32 characters.
If the trace data definition is saved with no data entered for the Trace Data Definition, the trace definition data for
the currently displayed group will be deleted. In effect, this is the same as deleting it by selecting File − Delete
from the Data Trace menu.

7-6
 7.1 Data Trace

„ Trigger Conditions
INFO
• There are three trigger conditions: Initiate trigger, terminate trigger 1, and terminate trigger 2.
• If a bit register number is input on the left side, only = can be selected as the operator. Input either ON or OFF on the
right side.
• If a non-bit register number is input on the left side, select the operator from among <, ≤, =, ≠, ≥, or >, and input a
number on the right side.
• Input the number of samples to be taken from when the trigger condition is met to when the data trace is stopped, in the
Samples Collected after Termination of Terminate 1 or Terminate 2 of the Trigger Condition. Input a number from 0 to
65,534.
• Input a comment up to 32 characters.
„ Setting Default Values
The default values can be set by selecting Edit − Default Setting from the Data Trace menu. The Trace Timing will
become Program, the No. of Samples will become 0, and all other data will be cleared.
„ Tracing D register
The trace timing and drawing settings are checked when the trace definitions data is saved. The following table shows the
possible combinations. Do not use any other combinations when tracing D registers.

Trace Timing Drawing

Program H††, H††.††, MP††††
H-SCAN H††, H††.††, MP††††
L-SCAN L††, L††.††

For example, an error will occur if an MP†††† drawing with the trace timing set to the L-SCAN (low-speed scan) is
detected when saving.

Data Trace Definition

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

The scan level of the designated
DWG does not match.

OK

An error will be detected at the Machine Controller when online if the motion program or drawing is not registered or if the
upper limit of D register numbers is exceeded.

Error Message

Error in processing request

from DPDH, CPU092 system.

OK

Error checks are not performed in offline mode. 7

7-7
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.4 Data Trace Setup Tab Page

(3) Editing Trace Definition Data

This section explains how to edit trace definition data.
(a) Deleting the Trigger Condition
Delete the trigger condition using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the trigger condition to be deleted.
2. Select Edit − Trigger Initiate Condition − Delete from the Data Trace menu.
3. The trigger condition specified in step 1. will be deleted.

When a trigger condition is deleted, all of the settings associated with that trigger condition will be deleted. For example, if
INFO
Terminate 1 of the Trigger Condition is deleted, the data for the condition type, comment, and delay will all be deleted.

(b) Deleting a Trace Data Definition Row

Delete a Trace Data Definition row using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the row of the trace data to be deleted.
2. Select Edit − Trace Setting − Delete from the Data Trace menu.
3. The trace definition selected in step 1. will be deleted.

(c) Inserting a Trace Data Definition Row

Insert a Trace Data Definition row using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the trace data definition is to be inserted.
2. Select Edit − Trace Setting − Add from the Data Trace menu.
3. A blank row will be inserted at the position specified in step 1.

(4) Saving and Deleting Trace Definition Data

(a) Saving
1. Select File − Save from the Data Trace menu.
2. Click the Yes button in the Data Trace message box.

Saving a trace definition with no data is the same as deleting it. If the save operation fails, an error message
IMPORTANT
will be displayed. Refer to Appendix A Error Messages, remove the cause of the error, and then save the data
again.

(b) Deleting
1. Select File − Delete from the Data Trace menu.
2. Click the Yes button in the Data Trace message box.

7-8
 7.1 Data Trace

(5) Starting the Data Trace

The Machine Controller starts the data trace operation immediately when trace definition data is saved to the
Machine Controller. If trace definitions are changed and saved again, the data traced up to that point will be lost
and the data trace operation will start again from the beginning.
The current trace execution status is displayed in the Status Box.

„ If the Machine Controller does not perform a data trace, it may be due to the following conditions:
INFO
• The currently used Machine Controller is in offline stop mode.
• The MPE720 is in offline mode.
• The TRACE system function in the main program is not being executed when Program is set for the Trace Timing
under the Data Trace Setup tab page.
• The RESET input for the TRACE system function in the main program is ON when Program is set for the Trace
Timing under the Data Trace Setup tab page.
• The actual number of traces has reached the value set for the No. of Samples on the Data Trace Setup tab page.
• The condition set for Terminate 1 or Terminate 2 of the Trigger Condition under the Data Trace Setup tab page has been
met.
• The data trace has been manually stopped.

(6) Saving and Deleting Trace Data

The data resulting from a data trace can be saved to a floppy disk. The data that is saved depends on the tab page
that is active.
If the Data Trace Setup Tab Page is active, only the trace definitions will be saved. If the List or Graph Tab Page
is active, the trace definitions and the trace results will both be saved.

(7) Writing the Trace Data

Select File − Trace Data − Write from the Data Trace menu. The Write File window will be displayed.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

7
Display Details
Input the file name and the drive letter of the floppy disk where the
trace data is to be saved. The default file name is $DTRACE.DAT.
File Name After inputting the file name, click the Update button. The trace data
saved to the file that was input will then be displayed under No.001
to 010.
No. Displays the trace data number.
Displays the name of the trace data. The trace data name is the same
Trace Data Name as the data saved in the Data Name on the Data Trace Setup tab
page.
Date Displays the date when the data last traced was saved.
Time Displays the time when the data last traced was saved.
Data Displays the type of data saved.

7-9
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.4 Data Trace Setup Tab Page

(a) Symbols
The following symbols have special meanings in the client area of the Write File window.
• A hyphen (-) indicates that the data saved there is trace definition data only.
• indicates the data saved there includes both trace definition data and traced results.
• ×× indicate that no data is saved there.

(b) Saving Trace Data

Save trace data using the following procedure.
1. Select File – Trace Data – Write from the Data Trace menu. The Write File window will be displayed.
2. Input the name of the file to be written for the File Name and click the Update button. A list of trace data
will be displayed.
3. Click on the No. column at which to write the trace data.
4. Click the Execute button
The trace data will be written successfully.

(c) Deleting Trace Data

Either a trace data file or individual trace data saved in a floppy disk can be deleted.
Delete trace data using the following procedure.
1. Deleting Trace Data Files
Delete the trace data file displayed for the File Name in the Write File window.
a) Select File – Trace Data – Write from the Data Trace menu. The Write File window will be displayed.
b) For the File Name, input the name of the file to be deleted, and then click the Update button.
c) Click the Delete File button.
d) Click the Yes button in the message box.
e) The trace data file specified in step 1 will be deleted.
f) Click the Cancel button to complete the deletion of the trace data file.
2. Deleting Individual Trace Data
Delete trace data for specific trace data numbers.
a) Select File – Trace Data – Write from the Data Trace menu. The Write File window will be displayed.
b) For the File Name, input the name of the file containing the data to be deleted. Then click the Update
button.
c) Select the number of the data that is to be deleted.
d) Click the Delete List button.
e) Click the Yes button in the message box.
f) The trace data item specified in step 2 will be deleted.
g) Click the Cancel button to complete the deletion of the trace data items.

7-10
 7.1 Data Trace

(8) Reading Trace Data from a Floppy Disk

This section explains how to read trace data that has been saved to a floppy disk.
(a) Reading the Trace Data
Select File − Trace Data − Read from the Data Trace menu. The Read File window will be displayed.

(b) Reading Trace Data

Read trace data from a floppy disk using the following procedure.
1. For the File Name, input the name of the file containing the data to be read. Then click the Update button.
A list of trace data will be displayed.
2. Select the number of the trace data that is to be read.
3. Click the Execute button.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

4. Click the Cancel button.
The trace data will be written successfully.

• A maximum of 10 trace data items can be written to a single file.

INFO
• Trace data is read by group.

7-11
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.5 List Tab Page

7.1.5 List Tab Page

This tab page is used to display the results of a data trace in numeric form. The following items can be set in the
List Tab Page.
• Setting the List tab page
• Updating displayed data
• Changing the base number of displayed data
• Starting and stopping manual traces
• Changing the trace time axis
• Changing the sample number from which to start the display
• Setting the number of data items to be read
(1) Setting the List Tab Page

(a) Group and Status Information

Group and status information are displayed above the tab.
Information Details
Group Number Selects the group number.
Displayed to the right of the Group Number. Displays the name input
Data Name
for the Data Name in the Data Trace Setup tab page.
Displayed to the left of the Status. Displays the time when data was
last traced and the execution status of that data trace.
Last Status
RUN: Data trace being executed.
STOP: Data trace stopped.
Displays the data trace execution status in the CPU of the currently
displayed group number.
Status
RUN: Data trace being executed.
STOP: Data trace stopped.

(b) Display Configuration

List

Trace time axis type Data name 1 Data name 2

Register number Register 1 Register 2
Sample number 1
Sample number 2

Trace data

• The trace time axis type is determined by the trace time axis setting.
• The register number is displayed first in the column under the trace time axis type, and then the sample
numbers are displayed.
• The registers set for the Trace Data Definition on the Data Trace Setup tab page are displayed in order in
the register number row.

7-12
 7.1 Data Trace

(c) Display Items

Display Details
Displays the axis type for trace data. Refer to Details of Trace Time
Trace time axis
Axis Setting provided after this table.
Displays the names automatically given to trace data: DATA-01,
Data names
DATA-02, DATA-03, etc.
Register numbers Displays the numbers of the registers that are traced.
Displays the sample numbers. The display format depends on the
Sample numbers
data displayed on the trace time axis.
Displays the traced data according to the register data types (integer,
Trace data
double-length integer, real, or bit).

„ Details of Trace Time Axis Setting

IMPORTANT
There are four types of trace time axes: TIMEA, TIMEB, SNOA, and SNOB. Each of these is explained
below.
• TIMEA
Trace data is displayed in time units*, with the time at which the trace was begun as 0. Accordingly, 0
represents the oldest trace data. The data is traced each scan as set in the Scan Time window.
The data can be displayed in units of either 1 or 0.01 second. To switch these two unit settings, select
View - Data - m/s from the Data Trace menu. For example, 01.000 will be 1 second in units of 1 second,
and 0.01 seconds in units of 0.01 seconds. The placement of the decimal point will vary depending on
the length of time for the trace, so 01.000 is the same as 1.0000.
• TIMEB
Trace data is displayed in time units*, with the time at which the trace was stopped as 0. Accordingly, 0
represents the newest trace data. The data is traced each scan as set in the Scan Time window.
• SNOA
Trace data is displayed in sample number units, with the time at which the trace was begun as 0. Data is

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

traced at the interval set for the Trace Timing in the Data Trace Setup tab page. Trace data numbers are
displayed in order, from smaller to larger (0 1, 2, 3...), with 0 being the oldest.
• SNOB
Trace data is displayed in sample number units, with the time at which the trace was stopped as 0. Data
is traced at the interval set for the Trace Timing in the Data Trace Setup tab page. Trace data numbers are
displayed in order, from larger to smaller (...−3, −2, −1, 0), with 0 being the newest.

(2) Updating Display Data

The most recent trace data can be displayed.
Update the trace data using the following procedure.
Select View − Mode − RE-DSP from the Data Trace menu.

„ Automatic Updating of Trace Data

IMPORTANT
When View − Mode − Auto is selected from the Data Trace menu, the trace data is automatically scrolled and 7
the most updated trace data is displayed. It is not possible to switch to another tab page while in the automatic
update mode.
Selecting View − Mode − Auto again cancels the automatic updating.

7-13
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.5 List Tab Page

(3) Changing the Base Number of Display Data

The data can be displayed in either decimal or hexadecimal format by changing the base number. The base num-
ber, however, cannot be changed, for bit data.
(a) Decimal Display
Display the data in decimal format using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the item to be displayed in decimal.
2. Select View − Data − DEC from the Data Trace menu. The data will be displayed in decimal.

(b) Hexadecimal Display

Display the data in hexadecimal format using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the item to be displayed in hexadecimal.
2. Select View − Data − HEX from the Data Trace menu. The data will be displayed in hexadecimal.

(4) Manually Starting and Stopping Data Traces

Traces can be started and stopped manually.
(a) Starting Manually
To manually start a data trace operation, select Control − Trace Start from the Data Trace menu.

(b) Stopping Manually

To manually stop a data trace operation, select Control − Trace Stop from the Data Trace menu.

(5) Changing the Trace Time Axis

Change the time axis for displaying the trace data using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Sampling − Trace Time Axis from the Data Trace menu.
2. In the Select Trace Time Axis Display window, select the time axis display and set the sampling interval
and then click the OK button.
The trace time axis display will be switched and the numeric data will be displayed.

If the Trace Timing on the Data Trace Setup tab page is set to Program and the time axis is changed to either Time Dis-
INFO
play A or Time Display B, the sampling interval must be input in the window in step 2 of the above procedure.

7-14
 7.1 Data Trace

(6) Changing the Beginning Sample Number for Display

Change and display trace data beginning with any desired sample number using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Sampling − Jump to Appoint Data from the Data Trace menu.
2. Input the beginning sampling number in the Designate 1 Row of Sample Data window, and then click
the OK button. The trace data will be displayed beginning with the number that was input.

(7) Setting the Amount of Data to Be Read

Set the number of trace data items to be read using the following procedure. When the RE-DSP function is subse-
quently executed, the number of data items set here will be read from the Machine Controller.
1. Select View − Sampling − Number of Read Data from the Data Trace menu.
2. Input the number of data items to be read in the Setting Number of Read Data window, and then click
the OK button.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Specify the number of data items to be read as the number of frames. A frame is the number of registers set on the Data
INFO
Trace Setup tab page.

7-15
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.6 Graph Tab Page

7.1.6 Graph Tab Page

This tab page is used to display the data resulting from a data trace in graphic form. The following operation can
be performed from the Graph tab page.
• Opening the Graph tab page
• Setting the Graph tab page
• Updating the displayed data
• Starting and stopping manual traces
• Changing the trace time axis
• Changing the sample number from which to start the display
• Changing the number of data items to be read
• Closing the data trace definitions
(1) Opening the Graph Tab Page
Click the Graph tab in the Data Trace window.

7-16
 7.1 Data Trace

(2) Setting the Graph Tab Page

(a) Group and Status Information
Refer to (1) Setting the List Tab Page in 7.1.5 List Tab Page.

(b) Display Configuration

Graph

A Register #
Scale conversion
S= value

U = Max. trace data value

L = Min. trace data value Display ON/OFF

B Register #
Scale conversion
S = value
Graph Display Area

U = Max. trace data value Displays integers, double-length

integers, and real data (4 max.)
L = Min. trace data value Display ON/OFF

C Register #
Scale conversion
S = value

U = Max. trace data value

L = Min. trace data value Display ON/OFF

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

D Register #
Scale conversion
S = value Sample number

U = Max. trace data value

L = Min. trace data value Display ON/OFF

Bit Data Display Area
(4 max.)
Relay number
Relay number
Relay number
Relay number
Thumb (Scroll mode switch)
Setting graph Scroll slider

7-17
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.1.6 Graph Tab Page

(c) Setting Items

Setting Details
Select the number of the integer, double-length integer, or real num-
ber register to be traced. Any register number set in the Trace Data
Register Number Definition under the Data Trace Setup Tab Page can be selected.
Register numbers cannot be selected, however, while in the auto-
matic update mode.
Input the scale conversion value for the trace data. Changing this
value adjusts the vertical amplitude of the graph. With automatic
Scale Conversion Val- updating, this value is continually displayed as the amplitude. The
ue default setting is the value set for SCALE in the Trace Data Defini-
tion under the Data Trace Setup Tab Page. If 0 is set, the amplitude
will be the same as if 32767 is set.
Max. Trace Data Value Displays the maximum value for the trace data.
Min. Trace Data Value Displays the minimum value for the trace data.
The trace data display can be switched ON and OFF by clicking
Display ON/OFF
here.
Relay Number Displays the number of the bit register to be traced.
Graph Display (Integer,
Displays integer, double-length integer, and real number data in
Double-length Integer,
graph form. A maximum of four data items can be displayed at one
Real number Data Dis-
time.
play)
Displays bit data in graph form. A maximum of four data items can
Bit Data Display
be displayed at one time.
Used to adjust the horizontal oscillation of the trace data by dragging
Scale Slider the slider, or by pressing the Right and Left cursor keys. With auto-
matic updating, this value is continually displayed as the oscillation.
Turn this switch ON (indicated by a check mark) to scroll the graph
according to the movement of the scroll box when the scroll box in
Thumb (Scroll Mode
the scroll bar in the data display area is dragged. When this is turned
Switch)
OFF, the graph is not scrolled while the box is being dragged, and
the graph display is then modified after the dragging has stopped.
Displays the sample number. The form of the display will vary
depending on the trace time axis. By clicking on a sample number
Sample Number
position, a vertical line can be displayed in the graph display area at
that position.
Used to change settings such as the scale graduation for the currently
Setting Graph Button displayed graph, the number of display points, etc. in the following
procedure.

(d) Setting Graph Button

1. Click the Setting Graph button. The following Setting Graph window will be displayed.
2. Input the graph settings in the Setting Graph window, and then click the OK button.
The graph display will be changed according to the new settings.

7-18
 7.1 Data Trace

(3) Updating Display Data

The most recent trace data can be displayed.
For details, refer to (2) Updating Display Data in 7.1.5 List Tab Page.

(4) Manually Starting and Stopping Data Traces

Traces can be started and stopped manually.
For details, refer to (4) Manually Starting and Stopping Data Traces in 7.1.5 List Tab Page.

(5) Changing the Trace Time Axis

The trace time axis can be changed.
For details, refer to (5) Changing the Trace Time Axis in 7.1.5 List Tab Page.

(6) Changing the Beginning Sample Number for Display

Trace data beginning with any desired sample number can be changed.
For details, refer to (6) Changing the Beginning Sample Number for Display in 7.1.5 List Tab Page.

(7) Setting the Amount of Data to Be Read

The number of data items to be read can be set.
For details, refer to (7) Setting the Amount of Data to Be Read in 7.1.5 List Tab Page.

7.1.7 Closing Data Trace Setup

Exit the data trace definitions by closing the Data Trace window.
To close the window, select File − Close from the menus.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

7-19
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.1 Before Using the Trace Manager

7.2 Trace Manager

7.2.1 Before Using the Trace Manager
Before using the Trace Manager, change the settings by following the procedure below.
1. Select View - Configuration from the pull-down menus on the File Manager window to open the
Configuration window.

2. Select the Data Trace tab in the Configuration window.

3. Select On for Use the trace manager, then click the OK button.

If you change the On or Off setting for Use the trace manager, it is necessary to restart MPE720. Note
that the On or Off setting is retained, so this operation is not required from the next start-up.

7-20
 7.2 Trace Manager

7.2.2 Starting the Trace Manager

The Trace Manager can be started by using any of the following five methods.
• In the tree on the File Manager window, double-click Data Trace under the Definition Folder.
• Select File - Open - Definition - Data trace definition from the pull-down menus in the Engineering
Manager window.

• Click the Data Trace Definition icon on the Engineering Manager window.
• Select Tool - Trace Manager from the pull-down menus in the New Ladder Editor.

• Click the Trace Manager icon on the New Ladder Editor.

(1) Layout of the Trace Manager Window

The Trace Manager window comprises three areas: the operation panel, graph and list.

Operation panel

Graph

List

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

• Operation Panel Area
This area is used for general data trace operations, such as starting and stopping a trace, trigger settings, etc.
It is always displayed, regardless of the graph or list display mode.
• Graph Area
This area displays trace data. Either a trend graph or an X-Y graph can be selected. The graph area is not dis-
played when the list area display is maximized.
• List Area
This area is used for operations such as assigning and deleting monitor variables. Monitor variables are dis- 7
played in list format. The list area is not displayed when the graph area display is maximized.

7-21
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.3 Trace Operations

7.2.3 Trace Operations

The main operations of the data trace functions are performed from the operation panel or the pull-down menus.
(1) Trace Execution
The functions relating to trace execution are trace initialization, trace termination, snapshot, and number of mon-
itor data setting.

Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Starts the data trace.
This function doesn't work
Initialize Trace If an initiate trigger has been set, the system
in offline mode.
waits for the trigger.
Stops the data trace. This icon can only be
Terminate Trace When a trace is stopped, all the trace buffer data clicked when a data trace is
is acquired. being executed.
Acquires the data in the trace buffer during exe-
Monitoring stops.
cution of a data trace.
Snapshot There is no effect on the
Clicking the icon again restores to the normal
trace execution status.
trace execution status.
When entering a number
Sets the maximum number of monitor data that
directly, the maximum value
Number of Monitor can be acquired on stopping or taking a snapshot.
that can be entered is 32158.
Data It is possible to select from All Data, 100 or
One bit of data is counted as
1000, or you can enter a number drectly.
one word.

(2) Trigger Setting

Set the initiate trigger and terminate trigger for a data trace as follows.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Trigger and
Displays the Trigger and configuration window. –
Configuration

When the Trigger and configuration window is first displayed, it appears as the simple setting screen.
Clicking the Extend set button changes its appearance to the detailed setting screen.

Simple setting screen Detailed setting screen

7-22
 7.2 Trace Manager

Each of the items in the Trigger and configuration window is explained in the following table.

Sim- De-
Item Setting Description
ple tail
Any character string comprising up to 32 sin-
Trace Name 9 9 Text String gle byte characters or 16 double byte charac-
ters can be specified.
High Scan, Low Scan, Specifies the data sampling condition.
Sampling 9 9 Super High Scan, Spec- The Super High Scan setting is only avail-
ified by Program able with MP940.
Specifies the data sampling interval.
Sampling Interval 9 9 0 to 32767 When 0 is set, traces are performed every
time.
Specifies the time in ms. The value set here is
used for the time axis.
Trace Interval of Program 9 9 0.1 to 999.9
This setting is valid only when the sampling
condition is for specification by program.
Auto Specifies the number of data traces.
Trace No. of Times Number of maximum When Auto is selected, data tracing continues
9 9
(Data Size) data, 100, 1000 until the terminate trigger condition is met or
1 to 999999 until the Stop button is clicked.
Specifies the trigger for initiating the trace
[Register number]
operation.
Initiate Trigger Condition 9 9 [ > / < / = / <> / >= / <= ]
If nothing is specified, tracing will start at the
[Number]
same time as sampling starts.
Specifies the trigger for terminating the trace
[Register number] operation. One or two terminate triggers can
Terminate Trigger
– 9 [ > / < / = / <> / >= / <= ] be set.
Conditions 1 and 2
[Number] If nothing is specified, tracing will be exe-
cuted until sampling stops.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Specifies how many times sampling is to be
Number of Terminate
– 9 0 to 65534 executed and tracing terminated after the ter-
Delays
mination condition is met.
9: Item available −: Item not available

(3) Graph Type Selection

Select the type of graph to be displayed in the graph display area (the display mode). You can select either of two
types of graph: the trend graph and the X-Y graph.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Trend Graphs Displays trend gaphs. –

X-Y Graphs Displays X-Y gaphs. –

7
(4) File Operations
Import/export files and print data.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Import Reads trace data and definitions from the selected file. –

Export Outputs the trace data and definitions to the selected file. –

Print Prints trace settings, graphs, lists, etc. –

7-23
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.4 Graph

7.2.4 Graph
You can select the type of graph to be displayed as either a trend graph or an X-Y graph.
(1) Trend Graphs
In the trend graph display mode, the set monitor variables are indicated on the graph in time series.

Monitor variable selection (vertical axis) Graph area operation buttons

Maximum value
selection

Maximize graph
display button

Scroll bar Unit selection (horizontal axis)

The horizontal axis of the graph represents the time at which trace data is sampled. The units can be selected
from ms, sec, min, and data. Scrolling on the horizontal axis can be done either by using the scroll bar or by
using the pointer scroll mode.

The vertical axis of the graph represents the value of the trace data, and you can make two settings, at the left and
right of the graph, for both the monitor variable name and maximum value. Monitor variables can only be set
during a trace termination or during a snapshot. In addition to during a trace termination and during a snapshot,
the maximum value for the graph can also be set during execution of a trace. When the maximum value is
changed, the display position of the variable set for the Y1 axis or the Y2 axis as the Y-axis scale in the list dis-
play changes.
Refer to • Monitor Page in 7.2.5 (1) Changing Pagesor Y-axis scale.

Operations such as pointer settings, cursor settings, scale adjustments, and graph copying can be performed in
this mode.
• Pointer Settings
By switching the pointer (mouse cursor) mode, you can perform operations such as scrolling the graph and
zooming in and out.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Graph data for which Auto is set as the Y-
Select Sets the pointer for adjusting the graph offset. axis scale in the list cannot be moved by
dragging.

Scroll Sets the cursor for scrolling the graph. –

Sets the cursor for zooming into the graph. The

Zoom In area that is selected by dragging is displayed –
enlarged.
Sets the cursor for zooming out of the graph. On
This icon functions when you have zoomed
Zoom Out clicking this icon, the graph is reduced to the
into the graph.
next smaller size.
This icon functions when you have zoomed
Reset Returns the graph to its original scale.
into the graph.

7-24
 7.2 Trace Manager

• Grid
You can set whether to display or hide the grid in the graph.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Grid Toggles between displaying and hiding the grid. –

• Cursor Operations
The sampling time and data at the point specified with the cursor are displayed. Two cursors, A and B, are
provided, and you can select whether to display or hide each of them. You can also use these operations to
change the display positions of the two cursors, either independently or in a linked manner, and to compare
data and ascertain wave forms.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Selects the display or hide state for cursor
Cursor A –
A.
Selects the display or hide state for cursor
Cursor B –
B.
Displays cursors A and B so that they are
Cursor A/B with This icon is active when both cursors A
moved in a linked manner, maintaining a
Fixed Interval and B are displayed.
fixed interval between them.
Selects whether the A/B Cursor window
Cursor Setting –
is displayed or not.

The A/B Cursor window is shown below.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

The following items can be set in the A/B Cursor window.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
The cross cursor is displayed when a
Selects either monitor variable is activated in the
Type the Vertical ( | ) or Cross (+) cur- select field of the list display. The
sor shape. center of the cross cursor will move
over the selected monitor variable.
When the icon is clicked, the Color
Color Selects the cursor color.
Setting window will be displayed. 7
Selects whether to display or hide The cursors are displayed by select-
Show
the cursors. ing their respective checkboxes.
Adjusts the display positions of
the cursors. When a value is entered directly, it is
Position
You can either enter a value adjusted to the grid position.
directly or use the spin buttons.

On left-clicking within the graph area, the cursors move in accordance with the conditions, as follows.
• When only Cursor A (or only Cursor B) is Displayed
Cursor A (or B) moves to the clicked location.
• When Cursors A and B are Both Displayed and Linked
Cursor A will move to the location that was clicked and cursor B will move with it at a fixed interval.

7-25
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.4 Graph

• When Cursors A and B are Both Displayed but Not Linked

If the cursor mode in the list area is either Normal or Cursor as A, cursor A moves to the point that is
clicked while cursor B doesn't move. If the cursor mode in the list area is Cursor as B, cursor B moves to
the point that is clicked while cursor A doesn't move.
Note: When Cursor A/B with same interval is not selected, Cursor A/B cannot be selected as the cursor
mode in the list area. Conversely, when Cursor A/B with same interval is selected, neither Cursor
as A nor Cursor as B can be selected as the cursor mode in the list area.

• Scale Offset Adjust

The Scale offset adjust window allows you to adjust the scale and offset of each axis in the graph.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Selects whether to display or hide the
Scale Offset Adjust –
Scale offset adjust window.

The Scale offset adjust window is shown below.

Scale adjustment doesn't require the selection of an object. Offset adjustment is effective when the object of off-
set adjustment has been selected in the Select field of the list area. It cannot be used without selecting the object
of offset adjustment. Note that it cannot be used if the selection is cancelled after displaying the window either.
In such cases you can use the function by selecting offset adjustment in the list area to activate it.
Note: Use the Select field in the list to select the offset adjustment object. On the Monitor Page and File Pages, the
selected object will be a monitor variable. The offset adjustment horizontal axis will be the sampling time,
and the vertical axis will be the data value of the selected monitor variable. On an the XY graph Page, the
monitor variables set for the vertical and horizontal axes become the objects. The offset adjustment horizontal
and vertical axes will be the data values for the variables that are set. For details on pages, refer to (1) Chang-
ing Pages.
The icons in the Scale offset adjust window are explained in the table below.

7-26
 7.2 Trace Manager

Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Sets the vertical scale. Enter
Vertical Scale The setting range is
a value directly or use the
Set Value 100 to 1000.
spin buttons.

Adjusts the vertical scale.

Vertical Scale
Drag up and down using the –
Adjustment Bar
mouse.

Sets the horizontal scale.

Horizontal The setting range is
Enter a value directly or use
Scale Set Value 10 to 1000.
the spin buttons.
Adjusts the horizontal scale.
Horizontal
Drag up and down using the –
Scale Adjustment Bar
mouse.
Displays the variable name
Offset Adjustment
for the offset adjustment –
Variable
object.
Sets the vertical offset posi-
Vertical Offset The setting range is
tion. Enter a value directly or
Position Set Value −100.00 to 100.00.
use the spin buttons.
Adjusts the vertical offset
Vertical Offset
position. Drag up and down –
Adjustment Bar
using the mouse.
If an object (sam-
pling time) has been
selected at the
Monitor page or
File pages, the set-
Sets the vertical offset posi-
Horizontal Offset ting range is −99 to

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

tion. Enter a value directly or
Position Set Value 99, and if an object
use the spin buttons.
(variable value) has
been selected at the
XY graph page, the
setting range is
−100.00 to 100.00.
Adjusts the horizontal offset
Horizontal Offset
position. Drag up and down –
Adjustment Bar
using the mouse.
Returns the scale or offset to The default value
their default values. for the horizontal
Vertical scale: 100 offset is 0.00 when
Default
Horizontal scale: 100 an object is selected
Vertical offset: 0.00 at the XY graph
Horizontal offset: 0 page.

Close
Closes the Scale offset
– 7
adjust window.
• Copy Graph
This is a function for copying a graph to a clipboard. This makes it possible to paste the graph as a graph
image into other Windows applications (e.g. Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint).
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Copy Graph Copies the graph to the clipboard. –

7-27
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.4 Graph

• Maximum Graph Display

Usually, the Trace Manager window shows the operation panel, the graph area and the list area, but on
clicking the maximum graph display icon, the list area disappears and the graph area is maximized.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Maximum Graph Hides the list and maximizes the graph This icon is effective only during nor-
Display (Set) display. mal graph display.
Maximum Graph Displays the list and returns the graph This icon is effective only during maxi-
Display (Cancel) to its normal display. mum graph display.

The Trace Manager window with maximum graph display set is shown in the figure below.

(2) X-Y Graphs

This is a graph that, by plotting two specified monitor variables (variable X and variable Y) on the horizontal axis
and vertical axis, shows the relationship between these variables over a certain time.
Monitor variable selection (vertical axis) Buttons for X-Y graph display setting operations

Maximum value
selection

Maximum value selection

Buttons for playback-related operations Monitor variable selection (horizontal axis)

In the same way as for the vertical axis of a trend graph, a variable name and maximum value can be set for the
horizontal and vertical axes of the X-Y graph. While an X-Y graph is being displayed, display settings and play-
back operations are possible in addition to all of the operations available during trend graph display.

7-28
 7.2 Trace Manager

• Display Settings
The display settings for an X-Y graph can be changed.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Point
Displays coordinates as points. –
Display
Line
Displays coordinates connected by lines. –
Display
Model Displays coordinates connected by lines according For details on connected points, refer to
Display to connected point data. 7.2.5 (1) • XY Graph Page.
This icon is effective only during point
Tracks Selects whether to leave tracks or not.
display.

• Playback
The playback function reproduces displays of data captured before tracing is stopped, or data captured for
snapshots. Operations such as playback, stop, fast forward, fast return, slow-motion forward, and slow-
motion return can be performed.
Playback can be executed when an X-Y graph is displayed. There is no time information included in an X-Y
graph, so this function is provided to display changes in data with the elapsed time.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Replays an X-Y graph from
Playback the beginning of the traced –
data.
Stops the replaying of an
Stop X-Y graph at the point –
where this button is clicked.
Executes fast forward/fast
Fast Forward return at the specified rate. Can be used only during

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Fast Return On cancellation, replay is playback.
automatically resumed.
Slow-motion
Forward Executes slow-motion for-
–
Slow-motion ward or return.
Return
XY graph - Return to
Return to Returns you to the begin-
– Beginning, from the pull-
Beginning ning of the traced data.
down menus
XY graph - Forward to
Forward to Takes you forward to the
– End, from the pull-down
End end of the traced data.
menus
Sets the fast forward and
Rate Setting –
fast return rate.
Execution Displays the execution time The unit can be set to ms,
Time for the playback display. sec, min, or data. 7

7-29
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

(3) Pop-up Menu

Right-clicking within the graph area displays the pop-up menu shown in the figure below.
The operations that you can perform from this menu are the same as those covered by the icon buttons, so refer to
the icon operations already described for details.

Refer to • Pointer Settings in 7.2.4 (1) Trend Graphs.

Refer to • Cursor Operations in 7.2.4 (1) Trend Graphs.

Refer to • Scale Offset Adjust in 7.2.4 (1) Trend Graphs.

Refer to • Cursor Operations in 7.2.4 (1) Trend Graphs.
Refer to 7.2.3 (2) Trigger Setting.

7.2.5 List
In the list area you can perform management operations such as assigning and deleting monitor variables for data
traces and displaying trace data in list form.
Changing pages List operation buttons

(1) Changing Pages

Three types of page are displayed in the list area: Monitor page, XY graph page and File pages. Switch among
these pages by selecting the respective tabs.
• Monitor Page
You can display, assign, delete and edit monitor variables on this page. An example of the Monitor page dis-
play is shown below.

7-30
 7.2 Trace Manager

Item Editing
Meaning Remarks
(Field) (Setting)
You can change the data view, find, calculate,
adjust the offset and display the cross-shaped
cursor. The following rules apply to displayed
items.
Select the monitor variable to be activated
Select Possible M:y : No.y for monitoring
here.
Fx:y : No.y for file x
SUB : Difference between two variables
ADD : Sum of two variables
REF : Reference variable
Select whether to display or hide the graph
: displaying a graph
Show here. Possible
: hiding a graph
Color Select the color of the graph. Possible –
The variable name of the trace object is
Variable Possible –
indicated here.
For a D register, enter the name of the pro-
Program Possible –
gram in which the D register is used.
Comment Set and display comments here. Possible You can display or hide comments.
When Auto is set, the scale is automatically
adjusted and displayed for each monitor vari-
able.
When Y1 axis is selected, the data is displayed
Set the scale for the Y-axis, selecting from according to the scale at the left side of the
Y axis scale Possible
Auto, Y1 axis and Y2 axis. graph; and when Y2 axis is selected, the data is
displayed according to the scale at the right
side of the graph.
You can select whether the scale data is dis-

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

played or hidden.
The maximum value for trace data is dis- Not
Maximum value You can display or hide the value.
played here. possible
The minimum value for trace data is dis- Not
Minimum value You can display or hide the value.
played here. possible
Not
Cursor A Values for cursor A are displayed. You can display or hide the value.
possible
Not
Cursor B Values for cursor B are displayed. You can display or hide the value.
possible
The difference between the values for cur- Not
Difference (A - B) You can display or hide the value.
sors A and B is displayed. possible
The value for unit conversion is displayed
as a magnification. Data is displayed in the
Convert unit (xN) form "conversion value × magnification." Possible You can display or hide the value.
This item is used, for example, when con-
verting to the machine coordinate system. 7
Not
Data The trace data values are displayed here. –
possible
Note: For details on how to select the display or hide status, refer to 7.2.4 (3) Pop-up Menu.

7-31
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

• XY Graph Page
On the XY graph page, you can assign, delete, edit and display the monitor variables for displaying an X-Y
graph as the graph. The appearance of the list area when the XY graph page is displayed is shown below.

The items indicated in the table below are displayed on the XY graph page.
Item Editing
Meaning Remarks
(Field) (Setting)
Once the object is activated, offset adjustment
Select Select the object to be activated here. Possible
and displaying the cross cursor is enabled.
Hide: Data is not displayed on a graph.
Select the display method for the graph
Fixed display: Data is displayed on a graph
here.
Show Possible when tracing is executed.
Hide, Fixed display, or Playback can be
Playback: data is displayed on a graph when
selected.
playback is executed.
The color selection window is displayed,
Color Possible –
allowing you to select a color.
The variable name of the trace object on the
X axis (horizontal axis) is indicated here.
Variable (X axis) You can set these variables by selecting Possible –
from the variables that have been set on the
Monitor Page.
The variable name of the trace object on the
Y axis (vertical axis) is indicated here.
Variable (Y axis) You can set these variables by selecting Possible –
from the variables that have been set on the
monitor page.
Set the connection target number in the
model display.
Connection Point Possible –
Either Nothing or the Select number set for
the XY graph Page can be selected.
When cursor A is displayed, the cursor A Not
Cursor A You can display or hide the value.
data value is indicated here. possible
When cursor B is displayed, the cursor B Not
Cursor B You can display or hide the value.
data value is indicated here. possible
When cursor A and B are displayed, the dif-
Not
Difference (A - B) ference between the values for cursors A You can display or hide the value.
possible
and B is displayed.
Note: For details on how to select the display or hide status, refer to 7.2.4 (3) Pop-up Menu.

• File Pages
File pages display monitor variable data that has been imported from a file. On displaying the File page by
selecting the respective tab and importing a file, the information in that file is displayed.
The items displayed on File pages are the same as those displayed on the Monitor page. However, since the
Variable, Program and Comment items display the information imported from a file, their information cannot
be edited.
The default setting for the number of File pages displayed is two, but the number can be set to a maximum of
eight.
Note: For details on setting the number of File pages displayed, refer to 7.2.6 (2) Option Functions.

7-32
 7.2 Trace Manager

(2) Assigning Monitor Variables

In order to use the data trace function, monitor variables have to be assigned. Up to 16 monitor variables can be
assigned.
Note: When using monitor setting selection, a maximum of 64 variables can be assigned. However, the maximum
number that can be displayed at one time is 16. Refer to • Monitor Setting in 7.2.5 (3) List Operations.

• Procedure for Assigning Monitor Variables

Assign monitor variables from the Trace Manager window by following the procedure below.
1. Directly enter a variable (register) name in the Variable field on the Monitor page in the list area of the
Trace Manager window to assign the variable with that name as a monitor variable.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

7-33
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

2. Click the select variable icon in the Trace Manager window to display the Select variable
window. Make entries for the necessary items and the variable will be assigned with the entered
information.

3. Click View - Select variable from the pull-down menus in the Trace Manager window to display the
Select variable window. Make entries for the necessary items and the variable will be assigned with the
entered information.

7-34
 7.2 Trace Manager

Performing the operations in steps 2 and 3 displays the Select variable window. For details on how to set
monitor variables in the Select variable window, refer to in • Variable Selection in 7.2.5 (3) List Operations.
Monitor variables can also be assigned by using the following methods.
• Right-click the variable name of the motion program to display its pop-up menu and then click Assign to
trace to assign the selected variable to the Trace Manager as a monitor object.
• Right-click the variable name of the motion parameters to display its pop-up menu and then click Assign
to trace to assign the selected variable to the Trace Manager as a monitor object.
• Right-click the variable name of the New Ladder Editor to display its pop-up menu and then click Assign
to trace to assign the selected variable to the Trace Manager as a monitor object.
• Right-click the variable name of the Former Ladder Editor to display its pop-up menu and then click
Assign to trace to assign the selected variable to the Trace Manager as a monitor object.
When a variable is assigned by a method other than direct entry, the variable is assigned to the line in which the
selected cell on the Monitor page lies. If a variable has already been assigned to the line in question, it is over-
written.

(3) List Operations

The operations that are possible in the list area are monitor setting, variable selection, reference variable selec-
tion, data display setting, cursor mode selection, list display direction selection, find, calculation and list maximi-
zation. These operations can be performed in any list display mode (page).
• Monitor Setting
This is a function for selecting the monitor settings for trace display. Since the maximum number of trace
items that can be monitored at the same time is 16, it is easy to change the trace object by making multiple
settings.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Monitor Displays the Select the monitor configura-
–
Setting tion window.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Clicking the monitor setting icon displays the window shown below. You can select the monitor setting from
among Monitor1, Monitor2, Monitor3 and Monitor4.

• Variable Selection
Variable selection is a function for selecting and assigning monitor variables on the Monitor page.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks 7
Variable
Displays the Select variable window. –
Selection

Clicking the variable selection icon displays the Select variable window. By selecting different tabs in the
Select variable window you can assign axes, I/Os, variables or system variables as monitor variables.
In order to assign monitor variables from the Select variable window, it is a prerequisite that a parameter
name (variable comment, register comment) has been set for the register. Only registers for which a com-
ment has been set in the area allocated to a module are displayed in the Select variable window, and can be
assigned as monitor variables.
Note: When a register comment is set, this comment is automatically set even when a monitor variable has
been set by directly entering a register number in the list area.

7-35
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

Comments are registered as the default only for system variables. When the System Variable tab has been
selected, the Select variable window is displayed as shown below.

To assign a system variable as a monitor variable, select the system variable in question from the list and
click the Set button.
Since comments are not set by default for the registers of axes, I/Os or variables, other than system variables,
they cannot be displayed in the Select variable window and for this reason it is not possible to set them as
monitor variables from the Select variable window without making a change. In order to set them as moni-
tor variables from the Select variable window you must set comments for the registers in a separate opera-
tion.
Comments are set by manually entering a comment for the register number of each register using the Engi-
neering Manager window (comment list, quick reference, etc.). Note that automatic setting with the Import
Axis Comments function is only possible for axis registers.
Note: For details on how to enter comments manually, refer to the separate documentation on the
Engineering Manager. For details on the Import Axis Comments function, refer to 7.2.6 (3) Import
Axis Comments.

7-36
 7.2 Trace Manager

The following figure shows the Select variable window with the I/O tab selected, and with comments
entered for some of the I/O registers of the local I/O module. In the following figure, the IW0500, OW0500
and OW0501 registers, for which comments have been set, are displayed, while the IW0501 register, for
which no comment has been set, is not displayed.

The following operations are common to all variable setting.

Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Updates the display with the latest
Refresh –
information.
This button becomes effective after the
Variable Sets the selected variable as a mon- variable to be set and the location where it
Setting itor variable. is to be set (displayed) have been selected.
It is only effective on the Monitor page.

Close Closes the Select variable window. –

7-37
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

• Reference Variable Selection

Reference variable selection is a function used to refer to the variables on the File n page from the Monitor
page.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Reference
Displays the Select reference variable
Variable –
window.
Selection

Clicking the reference variable selection icon displays the Select reference variable window shown below.

Use the following procedure to set a reference variable.

1. Select the variable that you want to refer to in the list and click the (1)Reference variable button.
The selected variable name will be displayed at Setup value.
2. Select, from the list, the Variable field on the Monitor page that you want to set, and click the Set button
in the Select reference variable window.
3. The operation above adds the selected reference variable to the selected Variable field.

7-38
 7.2 Trace Manager

Besides file variable, you can also select the difference with respect to the reference variable or the sum with
respect to the reference variable as the reference variable type. When The result of the subtraction of the
reference variable has been selected, the appearance of the Select reference variable window is as shown
below. In this case, in step of the operation described above, the operation assigned to the (2)Reference
variable button must be executed in addition to the (1)Reference variable button.

The operations in the Select reference variable window are summarized in the following table.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Sets the type of reference variable.
The reference of the file variable,

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Reference The result of the subtraction of
–
Variable Type the reference variable or The
result of the addition of the refer-
ence variable can be selected.
The selected reference vari-
Reference
Selects the variable selected in the able remains effective even
Variable
list as the reference variable. after the window has been
Selection
closed.
This button becomes effective
Reference when the necessary number of
Sets the selected reference variable
Variable reference variables and the
in the list.
Setting variable field where they are
to be set have been selected.
Closes the Select reference vari-
Close –
able window.

• Data Display Setting 7

This is a function for changing the data display type for the variables selected from the list
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Changes the data display type for the

variables selected from the list. Deci- If no variable has been selected this
Data Display
mal, Unsigned Decimal, Hexadeci- function is disabled.
mal, or Binary can be selected.

7-39
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

• Cursor Mode Selection

This is a function for scrolling the position of the list data display in a linkage with the positions of cursors A
and B on the graph.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
If cursor A (or cursor B) is not dis-
Sets the cursor to which the data dis-
played, you cannot select Cursor as A
play position is to be linked.
or Cursor as B.
Cursor as A/B, Cursor as A, Cursor
When Cursor as A/B with same
as B, or Normal can be selected.
Cursor Mode interval is not set in the graph area,
When Cursor as A has been selected, Cursor as A/B cannot be selected.
the data display position in the list is
If an option that cannot be imple-
scrolled in a linkage with cursor A on
mented is selected, the status doesn't
the graph.
change.

If a cursor linkage mode (Cursor as A, Cursor as B, or Cursor as A/B) is set, the display on the Monitor
page and File pages in the list area automatically shifts to the data corresponding to the cursor position (if
Cursor as A/B has been set, the cursor A position) to which it is linked in the settings linked to the motion of
the cursor(s) on the graph. Conversely, if data is selected on the Monitor page or a File page (by clicking in
a data field), the cursor that is linked in the settings moves to the position of the selected data in the graph
area.
• List Display Direction Selection
This is a function for selecting the vertical or horizontal display direction for the list
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
When this function is OFF, the data of
each variable is displayed in the hori-
List Display Switches the list display direction
zontal direction. When it is ON, the
Direction between vertical and horizontal.
data of each variable is displayed in
the vertical direction.

When vertical display has been selected for the list, the Trace Manager window is displayed as shown
below.

7-40
 7.2 Trace Manager

• Find
This is a function for searching for and jumping to the selected (active) variable.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Find Displays the Find window. –

On selecting and activating a monitor variable in the list and then clicking the find icon, the Find window
shown below is displayed.

If the Find icon is clicked without having selected a monitor variable, or if the monitor variable selection is
cancelled after the Find window has been displayed, the displayed Find window will change its appearance
as shown below and it is not possible to use the find function. If this happens, select a monitor variable in the
list to activate it and you will be able to use the find function.

If Time axis is selected as the Find target, the Find window will change its appearance as shown below. Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

7-41
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

You can perform the operations listed in the table below in the Find window.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Displays the vari-
Target
able name selected –
Variable
as the find target.
Sets the target to be
found. Maximum
value, Minimum
value, Maximum
Find Target value in an area, –
Minimum value
in an area, or
Time axis can be
selected.

Between A and
Selects either All
B cannot be
Search trace data or
selected when
Range Between A and B
cursors A and B
as the find area.
are hidden.

Searches from the

Find from top –
top of the find area.
Searches back-
Find to
ward from the –
backward
present position.
Searches forward
Find to
from the present –
forward
position.
Closes the Find
Close –
window.
Displayed only
Sets the jump
when Time axis
Time Setting (find) time in units
is set as the find
of ms.
target.
Displayed only
Jumps to the data
when Time axis
Jump for the set time
is set as the find
(proximity).
target.

7-42
 7.2 Trace Manager

• Calculate
This is a function for performing calculations to determine the area, average value, or other value for the
selected (active) variable.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks

Calculate Displays the Calculate window. –

Selecting a monitor variable in the list and clicking the calculate icon displays the Calculate window shown
below.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

If the calculate icon is clicked without having selected a monitor variable, or if the monitor variable selection
is cancelled after displaying the Calculate window, the displayed Calculate window will change its appear-
ance as shown below and it is not possible to use the calculate function. If this happens, select a monitor
variable in the list to activate it and you will be able to use the calculate function

7-43
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

You can perform the operations listed in the table below in the Calculate Window.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Displays the vari-
able name for
Target Vari-
which a calcula- –
able
tion is to be per-
formed.
Sets the type of
calculation.
Calculation Area, Average,
–
Type or Absolute
average can be
selected.

Between A and
Selects either All
B cannot be
trace data or
Find Area selected when
Between A and
cursors A and B
B as the find area.
are hidden.

The result is dis-

Executes the cal-
Calculate played in the
culation.
Result area.
Closes the Calcu-
Close –
late window.

• Maximum List Display

This is a function for hiding the graph area and maximizing the list display.
Symbol Name Meaning Remarks
Maximum List Display Hides the graph and maximizes the list This icon is effective only during nor-
(Set) display. mal list display.
Maximum List Display Displays the graph and returns the list This icon is effective only during maxi-
(Cancel) to its normal display. mum list display.

The appearance of the Trace Manager window when the list has been maximized is shown below.
The list is displayed in the normal format (horizontal).

7-44
 7.2 Trace Manager

• Pop-up Menu
The following pop-up menu is displayed by right-clicking in the list area.

The list area's pop-up menu includes functions that cannot be executed by operating the icons.
Outline explanations of the functions other than those that can be executed by operating the icons are given in
the following table.
Symbol Item Meaning Remarks
This function is effective when the
Variable field has been selected on
the Monitor page or the XY graph
Deletes the selected variable from
Delete page. When a deletion is executed
the monitor.
on the Monitor page, the same
deletion is reflected on the XY
graph page.
Toggles between displaying and

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Maximum/Minimum
hiding the maximum and minimum –
Value
values in the list area.
Toggles between displaying and
Variable Comment hiding variable comments in the –
list area.
Toggles between displaying and
Cursor Position hiding Cursor A, Cursor B, and –
Difference A-B in the list area.
Toggles between displaying and
– Convert Unit hiding Convert Unit in the list –
area.
Adjusts the cell width in the trace
– Adjust Cell Width –
data display.

7-45
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.5 List

• Record Operation
This is a function for inserting and deleting* records. It is only effective on the Menu page and cannot be
executed on the XY graph page or a File page. It can be executed from the Edit pull-down menu.
* The difference between the Delete and Delete the record functions is that Delete just deletes the selected
variable, whereas with Delete the record the monitor variables move upward to fill in the gap after dele-
tion.

Item Operations Meaning Remarks

Insert Record Edit - Insert the record Inserts a blank record at the selected location. –
Delete Record Edit - Delete the record Deletes the selected record. –

7-46
 7.2 Trace Manager

7.2.6 Other Functions

The other functions described here are those that can only be executed from the pull-down menus.
(1) Trace Definition
These functions are used to save, delete, etc. trace definitions. They can be executed from the File menu.

Item Operations Meaning Remarks

File - Reset as de- Returns the trace definitions to the All monitor variables that have
Default Setting
fault default status. been assigned will be deleted.
File -

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

Save Configura-
Save the configura- Saves the trace definitions. –
tion
tion
File -
Delete Configura-
Delete the configu- Deletes the trace definitions. –
tion
ration

(2) Option Functions

The option functions can be executed from the View menu.

7-47
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.6 Other Functions

Item Operations Meaning Remarks

Option View - Option Displays the Option window. –
By selecting different tabs in the Option window, you can make settings relating to settings, graphs, X-Y graphs,
lists and printing.

On a screen with the Set tab selected, you can set the default directory for CSV files to be imported/exported.

With the Graph tab selected you can make settings relating to graph display as listed in the following table.
Item Settings
Background Background color
Default unit, graduation width, scale value display interval, line type, thickness, color, font
X axis
(type, size, style)
Y axis,
Y1 axis, Scale value display interval, line type, thickness, color, font (type, size, style)
Y2 axis
File variable Line type, thickness, color
Points Thickness, color
A and B cursors Line type, thickness, color
Grid Line type, thickness, color
Reference variables Line type, thickness, color
Monitor variables Note: Separate settings can be made for monitor variables from 1 through 16.

With the XY graph tab selected, you can make settings relating to the display of X-Y graphs. The settings that
you can make are playback speed (standard, minimum, maximum), fast forward rate, and default unit.

With the List tab selected, you can make settings relating to the display of the list. The items that can be set
include Number of file pages. The default value for this item is 2, but values up to 8 can be set. You can also
make settings relating to data display such as font (type, size, style), the colors used for the background, editing
in progress, errors, and link break variables, and the number of monitor data.

With the Print tab selected you can select whether or not each of the trace settings, graph and list are to be
printed as the information when the data trace print function is used.

7-48
 7.2 Trace Manager

(3) Import Axis Comments

The import axis comments function is a function for automatically assigning servo system (axis)-related informa-
tion and monitor parameter comment information as register comments.
The import axis comments function is executed by following the procedure below.
1. Select Tool - Import Axis Comments from the pull-down menus in the File Manager window.

2. Select a PLC folder* or folder under a PLC folder in the tree display area or list area in the File Manager
window, then right-click in the tree display area or list area and select Import Axis Comments from the

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

pop-up menu that appears.
Note: With MP920, this is a CPU folder or folder under a CPU folder. This is because it is possible to
specify multiple CPU modules with MP920, which means that you have to specify the CPU where
register comments are to be automatically assigned. If you select a PLC folder and right-click, the
Import Axis Comments pop-up menu option is disabled.

3. Select File - Open - Tool - Import Axis Comments from the pull-down menus in the Engineering
Manager window.

7-49
 7 Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions
7.2.6 Other Functions

The import axis comments function is only effective when using the Trace Manager. On executing the
import axis comments function, the following window is displayed.

By making a selection using radio buttons, you can also use the import axis comments function to assign
register comments for a specified axis (target axis) only.

Note also that clicking the Details button displays the window with more detail and enables you to set
comment formats.

7-50
 7.2 Trace Manager

On clicking the Set button in the Import register comments window, the servo settings/monitor
parameters of all axes or the target axis are assigned as register comments.
When the Axis tab is selected in the Select variable window, the appearance of the tab page changes in
the way shown below before and after the execution of the import axis comments function. And after the
function has been executed, it becomes possible to assign axis registers as monitor variables in the Select
variable window.

Definition Folder 4: Data Trace Definitions

7-51
 8
Definition Folder 5:
Module Configuration Definitions

This chapter explains how to set the module configuration definitions for each Machine Con-
troller. For details, refer to the user’s manual for each Machine Controller.

8.1 Machine Controller Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2

8.1.1 Machine Controller MP Series Module Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2

8.2 Basic Operation of Module Configuration Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4

8.2.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.2.2 Basic Flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5

Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions

8.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6
8.2.4 Module Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7
8.2.5 Setting Items for Module Configuration Definition Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-8

8.3 Basic Operation of Individual Module Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9

8.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9

8-1
 8 Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions
8.1.1 Machine Controller MP Series Module Configurations

8.1 Machine Controller Module Configurations

8.1.1 Machine Controller MP Series Module Configurations
The system configurations of Machine Controllers shown below are available to meet specific applications.
Machine Controller Module Configuration
MP910 Interface board (ISA bus, C-PCI bus supported)
Building block type for mounting the necessary Modules onto mounting
MP920
bases.*
MP930 All-in-one type with all functions in a single case.
MP940 Integrated with SERVOPACK, for use by bus connection.
MP2100 Interface board (PCI bus supported)
CPU-01
MP2200 Block type for freely selecting optional modules.
CPU-02
MP2300 Block type for freely selecting optional modules.
Compact, all-in-one type that has a base module equipped with MECHA-
MP2300S TROLINK and Ethernet (100 Base-TX) ports as standard and one option
slot.
MP2310 MP2300S with two option slots.

* For Building-block Machine Controllers, Expansion Interface Modules of system bus can be used to connect up to
4 Mounting Bases (Racks). When multiple building blocks are connected in a single system, the racks are identi-
fied by their rack numbers, rack 1 to rack n (n ≤ 4) in the Module configuration definitions.

8-2
 8.1 Machine Controller Module Configurations

The following illustrations show the external appearances of the MP-series Machine Controllers.

MP910 MP920

MP930 MP940

MP2100 MP2300

Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions

MP2300
YASKAWA RDY RUN
S2

S1

ALM ERR
TX BAT
BAT

TX

STOP
SUP
INT
CNFG
MP2100

MON
BAT

SW1
TEST

OFF ON

M-4/10
1

Option

Option
Option

BATTERY
2

ON

CPU I/O

DC24V

DC 0V
I/O
M-I/II
YASKAWA

MP2200 MP2300S

MP2200 MBU-01 CPU-01 218F-01 SVB-01 LIO-01

POWER
LIO-01 LIO-02 260F-01 217F-01 EXIOIF

MP2300S LIO 01
4&; 470
;#5-#9# .& .&
#./ '44
.& .&
/6: $#6
.& .&
64: +2
.& .&
5612
572
+06 /1&'
59
%0() 
/10 I/O
6'56 01
10

YASKAWA
$#66'4;

M-I/II
'+06
'6'56
01
59

10 8
4.;
176
'VJGTPGV
.+0-

MP2310
&%
8

&%
0V

/

MP2310
RDY RUN

YASKAWA ALM ERR

MTX BAT

TRX IP

STOP
SUP
INIT
CNFG SW1
MON
TEST
ON
Option

Option

Option

E-INIT SW2
E-TEST
ON

BATTERY

/'%*#641.+0-

M-I/II
DC24
Ethernet
LINK
DC 0

POWER

100M

8-3
 8 Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions
8.2.1 Outline

8.2 Basic Operation of Module Configuration Definitions

8.2.1 Outline
(1) MP900 Series
The Module Configuration Definitions of the MP900-series Machine Controller consist of Individual Module
Definitions windows, which define individual Modules, and the Module Configuration window, which shows the
overall configuration, regardless of the type of Machine Controller. Select the Module to be defined in the Mod-
ule Configuration window to open the Individual Module Definitions windows.

SVA-02 definition

DI-01 definition

...Definition

Module Configuration Window Individual Module Definitions Windows

(2) MP2000 Series

The Module Configuration Definitions of the MP2000-series Machine Controller consist of Individual Module
Definitions windows, which define individual Modules, and the Module Configuration window, which shows
the overall configuration, regardless of the type of Machine Controller. The Module Configuration window also
consists of two levels. When a Module to be defined is selected in the upper Controller section, the configuration
of that Module is shown in the Module Details section below. Select the Module to be defined in the Controller
section to open the Individual Module Definitions windows displayed in the Module Details section.

Local I/O definition

Controller
section

SVB definition

Module
Details
section ...Definition

Module Configuration Window Individual Module Definitions Windows

8-4
 8.2 Basic Operation of Module Configuration Definitions

8.2.2 Basic Flowchart

(1) MP900 Series

Open Module Configuration Window.

Set and save Module configuration definition

data.

Open Individual Module Definitions

Window.

Set and save individual Module definition data.

NO
All Modules defined?

YES

Close Module Configuration Window.

(2) MP2000 Series

Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions

Open Module Configuration Window.

Allocate the module definition data in the

Controller section.

Set and save the module definition data for the

allocated Module in the Module Details section.

Open Individual Module Definitions

Window.

Set and save individual Module definition data.

8
NO
All Modules defined?

YES

Close Module Configuration Window.

8-5
 8 Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions
8.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Window

8.2.3 Opening the Module Configuration Window

The Module Configuration window can be opened from the File Manager or Engineering Manager.
(1) Opening from the File Manager
Open the Definition Folder on the Directory Tree and double-click Module Configuration.

(2) Opening from the Engineering Manager

Select File − Open − Definition − Module Configuration.

Configuration
racks information

Slot
information

Module combinations depend on the Machine Controller.

8-6
 8.2 Basic Operation of Module Configuration Definitions

8.2.4 Module Configuration Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Module Configuration window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Selects or executes another function.
Close Closes the Module Configuration window.
Save & Save to Flash
Saves to flash memory.
Memory
Registers a shortcut for the Module configura-
Register in User Menu
tion definition window.
Save Saves definition data.
Delete Deletes definition data.
Delete Slot Deletes definition data for one slot.
Displays the Module Configuration window for
Open Slot
a slot.
Print Prints definition data.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion pro-
Motion Task Manager
gram.
Next Page Displays the next tab page.

Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions

Back Page Displays the previous tab page.
Order
Reset Module Resets a Module.
All Module Self
Executes self-configuration of all Modules.
Configuration
Module Self Executes self-configuration of the selected Mod-
Configuration ule.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

8-7
 8 Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions
8.2.5 Setting Items for Module Configuration Definition Data

8.2.5 Setting Items for Module Configuration Definition Data

The following table shows the setting items for module configuration definition data.
Setting Details
Select Rack and
Sets the configuration rack information.
Rack Type
Slot Number Displays the slot numbers on the rack.
Module Type Sets the name of the Module installed in the slots.
CPU Number Sets the CPU number to control the Modules.
Sets the circuit number in order from 01 for each Communication
Circuit Number
and Motion Module.
Dual Module Sets Dual Modules.
Dual Circuit Sets Dual Transmission Paths.
I/O Start Register Sets the I/O register start (leading) address.
I/O End Register Sets the I/O register ending address.
Sets to enable/disable the input registers.
Disable Input
Blank: Setting not allowed, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Sets to enable/disable the output registers.
Disable Output
Blank: Setting not allowed, D: Disabled, E: Enabled
Motion Start Sets the start address for the motion parameters register. This address
(Motion Start Register) is set automatically.
Motion End Sets the end address for the motion parameters register. This address
(Motion End Register) is set automatically.
Performs MECHATROLINK communication definitions when the
Details
SVB-01 is set in the Module Type.
Status Displays each Module's status when online.

(1) Saving Module Configuration Definitions

Nothing has been set immediately after installation, so be sure to save the data at least one time.
1. Select File − Save from the menus.
2. Verify the displayed message and click the Yes button to save the definition data.

(2) Deleting Module Configuration Definitions

When deleting the module configuration definitions file, the definition files for all the individual Modules are
also deleted.
1. Select File − Delete from the menus.
2. Verify the displayed message and click the Yes button to delete the definition data.

(3) Ending the Module Configuration Definitions

Select File − Close from the menus to return to the Engineering Manager window.

8-8
 8.3 Basic Operation of Individual Module Definitions

8.3 Basic Operation of Individual Module Definitions

8.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows
(1) Opening from the File Menu
1. Click the name of the desired Module in the Module Configuration window.
2. Select File − Open Slot. The Individual Module Definitions window will be displayed.

Rack 1
No. 00 01 02
Module MP920 RESERVED 217IF

For example, click 217IF, and then select

File - Open Slot.

(2) Opening from the Slot Number Row

To open a window directly from its slot number, double-click the slot number of the slot in which the desired
Module is mounted in the Module Configuration window. The individual Module Definitions window will be
displayed.
For example, double-click 02.

Rack 1
No. 00 01 02
Module MP920 RESERVED 217IF

Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions

„ New File Confirmation Window
INFO
Attempting to open an Individual Module Definitions window for the first time will display a confirmation message that
this is a new file. Click the OK button to proceed.

(3) Configurations of Individual Module Definitions Window

The basic configuration of Individual Module Definitions windows is shown below.
Module name
PT#... UT# ... CPU# ... Rack # Slot # Cir. # I/O address

8-9
 8 Definition Folder 5: Module Configuration Definitions
8.3.1 Opening Individual Module Definitions Windows

The title of the Individual Module Definitions window will be displayed in the title bar, and the login information
bar, including the following information, will be displayed below the title bar. Hyphens will be displayed in
offline mode. Login information items can vary depending on the Module model.
Login Information Details
PT # Displays the logical port number used when online.
CPU # Displays the logged on CPU number when online.
RACK # Displays the rack number to which the Module is mounted.
Displays the slot number to which the Module is mounted on the
SLOT #
rack.
Displays the circuit number allocated using Module configuration
CIR# (Circuit #)
definitions for Communication Modules.
Displayed to the right of CIR#. Displays the I/O address area allo-
I/O Address
cated to the Module using Module configuration definitions.

(4) Saving Individual Module Definitions

Nothing has been set immediately after installation, so be sure to save the data at least one time.
1. Select File − Save from the menus.
2. Verify the displayed message and click the Yes Button to save the definition data.

(5) Deleting Individual Module Definitions

1. Select File − Delete from the menus.
2. Verify the displayed message and click the Yes Button to delete the definition data.

(6) Closing Individual Module Definitions

Select File − Close from the menus to return to the Module Configuration window.

8-10
 9
Program Folder 1:
Ladder Programming

9.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3

9.1.1 Ladder Programming System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3

9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5

9.2.1 Outline of Properties Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5
9.2.2 Opening Drawing Properties Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5
9.2.3 Drawing Properties Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-6
9.2.4 Drawing Properties Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7
9.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-8
9.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
9.2.7 # Register List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12
9.2.8 Update History Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13
9.2.9 Saving Property Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

9.3 Creating Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15
9.3.1 Outline of Creating Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15
9.3.2 LADDER Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15
9.3.3 LADDER Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18
9.3.4 LADDER Window Display Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.3.5 Inputting Ladder Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21
9.3.6 Editing Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-27
9.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-32
9.3.8 Disabling Coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-38
9.3.9 Displaying Current Values - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-39
9.3.10 Creating Comments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-40
9.3.11 Saving Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-41
9.3.12 Printing Ladder Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42
9.3.13 Closing Ladder Program Editing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42
9
9.4 Creating Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
9.4.1 Outline of Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
9.4.2 Table Program Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
9.4.3 Table Program Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-44
9.4.4 Switching Input Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45
9.4.5 Entering # Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45
9.4.6 Entering M Register Constant Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-46
9.4.7 Entering I/O Conversion Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47
9.4.8 Entering Interlock Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47

9-1
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

9.4.9 Entering Part Composition Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-49

9.4.10 Entering Data in C Constant Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-51
9.4.11 Editing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-57
9.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-60
9.4.13 Printing Table Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -9-60

9-2
 9.1 Ladder Programming System

9.1 Ladder Programming System

This section provides a figure showing the relationships between the various tools provided to create ladder pro-
grams for Machine Controllers, including supplemental commands, program editing tools, and other tools.
Refer to the Machine Controller MP900 Series User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIEZ-C887-1.2) for
details on specific ladder program instructions and instruction specifications.

9.1.1 Ladder Programming System

The following figure shows the relationships between the supplemental commands, program editing tools, and
other tools available for ladder programming.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

9-3
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.1.1 Ladder Programming System

Symbol/register
input mode New
Drawings/Functions diagram
Automatically registered Open Main
Configuration program
definitions
Table data
Symbol instructions Shared
Table data
definitions TBL††† definitions
QTBL††

Comment
list
Properties

Table program
# register execution
list instructions
MCTBL Constant tables
XCALL †††† (M resister)

Revision
history
I/O conversion
IOTBL
tables
I/O
definitions
(Functions only) Ladder diagrams Interlock
ILKTBL
tables

Table programs
Part composition
ASMTBL tables

SFC action box

SFC time chart
Not
shared Constant tables
SFC flowchart # constant
tables (# resister)

Refer to ladder
programming
manual. Shared C constant C constant
tables tables

Disable coil lists

Register lists Registers
Tuning Comment lists
I, O, M, D panels
Cross-references
Register number
conversion

Tools

Based on the figure above, the following items are described in this chapter.
• Setting properties
• Creating new and main programs
• Creating table programs
• Creating tuning panels
• Creating C registers
• Creating table data
• Tools

9-4
 9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window

9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window

This section describes the Drawing properties window used to manage the configuration information for indi-
vidual ladder programs.

9.2.1 Outline of Properties Window

Properties are attributes set for each ladder program or function program. The following information can be set.
• Configuration definitions
• I/O definitions (functions only)
• Symbol definitions
• # register lists
• Revision histories
There are default settings for properties. Settings are required, however, for ladder programs that use many regis-
ters.

9.2.2 Opening Drawing Properties Windows

(1) Opening Procedures
Use one of the following two procedures to open a Drawing properties window.
(a) Opening from the Engineering Manager
Select File − Open − Program − Properties from the LADDER menu.
If the program is not open, an Open DWG setting window will be displayed. Select DWG for a ladder pro-
gram or FUNC for a function program, enter the drawing name for the Name, and click the OK button. The
Open DWG setting window will not be displayed if the program is open.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

The Drawing properties window for the program will be opened.

9-5
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.2.3 Drawing Properties Menus

If the properties are for a function program, the following tabs will be displayed instead of the tabs above for a
ladder program.

(b) Opening from the File Manager

Select the ladder or function program for which the Drawing properties window is to be opened from the
Directory Tree, and then select File − Open − DWG Properties.
You can also right-click the ladder or function program for which the Drawing properties window is to be
opened in the Directory Tree, and then select the command from the pop-up menu.

(2) Tab Pages

There are different tab pages for ladder program and function program Drawing properties window. Refer to the
following tables for details.
(a) Tab Pages for Ladder Program Drawing Properties Windows
Tab Page Details
Drawing Properties Defines configuration information for ladder programs.
Symbol Definition Defines ladder program symbols.
# Register List Sets # registers for ladder programs.
Update History Displays Update History for ladder programs.

(b) Tab Pages for Function Program Drawing Properties Windows

Tab Page Details
Function Configuration Defines configuration information for function programs.
I/O Definition Defines function program I/O.
Symbol Definition Defines function program symbols.
# Register List Sets # registers for function programs.
Update History Displays Update History for function programs.

• Select View − Next Page from the LADDER menu to move through the tab pages in order, starting with the Drawing
INFO
properties or Function Configuration tab page on the left.
• Select View − Back Page to move through the tab pages in reverse order.

9.2.3 Drawing Properties Menus

The menus displayed in Drawing properties window are the same as those displayed in the LADDER window.
Refer to 9.3.4 LADDER Window Display Mode.

9-6
 9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window

9.2.4 Drawing Properties Tab Page

The following table shows the configuration definition.
Setting Details
Enter one character for the rank of the program. The rank is deter-
Drawing Rank
mined by the user.
Enter the reading and writing privileges for the program. None of the
Read/Write Privilege privilege data can be set to a higher value than the current user's
privileges.
When D registers are to be used by the programs, enter the number
Number of D Registers of words for the D registers. D registers cannot be used by the pro-
grams if this number is set to 0.
When # registers are to be used by the programs, enter the number of
Number of # Registers words for the # registers. # registers cannot be used by the programs
if this number is set to 0.
When using SFC within the program, enter the number of output bits
Number of SFC* for each SFC step in 16-bit units (maximum 128 bits.) If 0 is entered,
Output Bits the SFC output bit time chart cannot be displayed, but there is no
effect on the operation of the SFC.
DWG Title Enter a program title of up to 48 characters.

* SFC: SFC is the abbreviation for Sequential Function Chart, which is a programming language.
• The number of D and # registers will differ depending on the type of Machine Controller.
• There are some Machine Controller types that will not support the use of SFC programs. Refer to the
relevant User’s Manual for the Machine Controller for details.
• The D register numbers that can be used in the program when 10 is entered as the Number of D Registers
are shown in the following table.
Type Register Number Range
Integers DW00000 to DW00009
Double-length
DL00000 to DL00008
integers
Real numbers DF00000 to DF00008
Bits DB000000 to DB000009F

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

The number of words allocated to D and # registers is used for reserving memory. Therefore, when subscripted
IMPORTANT
registers are used during programming, the programs must be created such that they do not exceed the memory
area set within the program. An operating error will occur when data is read from or written to a D or # register
beyond the set memory area.

9-7
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page

9.2.5 I/O Definition Tab Page

This tab page is used only for function programs. The I/O definition details are described below.

Setting Details
Enter a number between 1 and 16 for the number of function input
Number of Inputs
data items.
Number of Address In-
Enter 1 for address input and 0 for no address input.
puts
Enter a number between 1 and 16 for the number of function output
Number of Outputs
data items.
Select the type of function input data. Refer to the Data Types* table
Input Type
after this table.
Input (Input Comment) Enter a function input data comment of up to 8 characters.
Select the function output data type. Refer to the Data Types* table
Output Type
after this table.
Output (Output Com-
Enter a function output data comment of up to 8 characters.
ment)

* Data Types

Selected Item Meaning

B-VAL Bits
I-VAL
Integers
I-REG
L-VAL
Double-length integers
L-REG
F-VAL
Real numbers
F-REG

9-8
 9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window

9.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page

Symbol names can be used in programs instead of register numbers, for easy understanding.
This section describes the allocations of symbols.
(1) Setting the Symbol Definition Data
Click the Symbol Definition tab in the Properties window.

Setting Details
Symbol Name Enter a symbol name of up to 8 characters.
Register Number Enter the number of the register to which the symbol is allocated.
Size Enter the number of data items to be allocated to the symbol.
Range Enter the symbol class.
Initial This data is not effective in the current version.

1. Symbol Name
Numbers, dashes, and underscores cannot be used as the first character of symbol names. Symbols
beginning with $ have been defined in or automatically allocated by the MPE720. Such symbols are
called automatic symbols and are displayed as follows:
• $AUTO††† (††† is any number starting with 001.)
Drawing and function programs cannot be saved if they contain automatic symbols. Change automatic
symbols to another symbol name.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

2. Register Number
By defining a symbol for a register number, that number does not have to be entered when entering
operands in the program. Enter the symbol only, and the corresponding register number will be displayed
automatically.
3. Size
The default setting is 1. Enter the data in hexadecimal, with an H preceding the hexadecimal value.
This data is used when symbols are automatically allocated for register numbers. For example, if symbols
are automatically allocated to registers starting from MW00001 and the data size is 1, the register number
for the second symbol will be MW00002. The symbols will be allocated in order from MW00001 with a
size of 1 word. If symbols are automatically allocated with size of 2, the symbols will be allocated from
MW00001 and each will have be two words in size. The register number for the second symbol will be
MW00003.
Refer to (3) Automatically Allocating AUTO Symbols later in this section.
4. Range 9
• AUTO: Shows that the register number has an automatically allocated symbol. This symbol range will
be displayed when the symbol has been allocated by the MPE720.
• MTBL: Shows that the symbol is for the host link. Depending on the host link functions, the host link
can be executed and the same symbol definition data can be set for each scan type.
• USER: Shows that the symbol has been defined by the user. This symbol range will appear when the
register number has been allocated by the user.

INFO The maximum number of symbols that can be defined differs depending on the type of Machine Controller.

9-9
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.2.6 Symbol Definition Tab Page

(2) Editing Symbols

Symbols can be edited in rows units.
(a) Deleting Symbols
When a symbol name has been altered in the LADDER Window, the original symbol name is not automati-
cally deleted. These superseded symbol names should be deleted by the user, but they cannot be deleted from
the LADDER Window.
Delete symbol names using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the symbol name to be deleted.
2. Select Edit − DEL from the LADDER Menu.
The row selected in step 1 will be deleted.

(b) Alphabetizing Symbols

Display symbols in alphabetical order using the following procedure.
Select View − Sort from the LADDER Menu.
The symbol names will be displayed in alphabetical order.

(3) Automatically Allocating AUTO Symbols

All symbols in the AUTO range will be automatically allocated to register numbers starting with any number.
If a symbol name is entered that has not been allocated to a register number in the LADDER Window, meaning
the symbol has not been defined, open the Symbol Definition Tab Page to display the symbols in a table like the
one shown below.
No. Symbol Name Register Number Size Range Initial ▲
01 DATA1 H0001 AUTO ▼ *
02 DATA2 H0001 AUTO ▼ *
03 DATA3 H0001 AUTO ▼ *
04 ▼

Normally, symbols would be automatically allocated when AUTO is set for the Range. If, however, a register
number has already been set for the Register Number, either by previous automatic allocation or manual input of
register numbers, symbols will not be allocated automatically for those register numbers even if the Range col-
umn shows AUTO.
(a) Automatic D and M Register Number Allocation
Symbols can be automatically allocated to D and M registers starting with any number. Allocate D and M
registers automatically using the following procedure.
1. Enter the symbol definition data to allocate in the Symbol Name, Register Number (register type only),
and Size. Select AUTO as the Range.
2. Select Data − Auto Number − AUTO from the LADDER Menu.
3. The Automatic symbol allocation (D, M) Window will be displayed. Enter the leading register numbers
from which to allocate local registers (D) and global registers (M), and then click the Set Button.
The register numbers will be automatically allocated and displayed.
In this example, DATA1 is set to integer D register data with a data size of 1, DATA2 is set to real number
M register data with a data size of 1, and DATA3 is set to integer M register data with a data size of 1.
Therefore, the register numbers will be DW00000, MF00002, and MW00001 respectively, if the register
numbers are automatically allocated by setting the leading D register number to 0 and the leading M
register number to 1.

No. Symbol Name Register Number Size Range

01 DATA1 DW00000 H0001 AUTO ▼
02 DATA2 MF00002 H0001 AUTO ▼
03 DATA3 MW00001 H0001 AUTO ▼
04 ▼

9-10
 9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window

• In step 1, enter the register type (DW, MW, etc.) for the Register Number. Nothing needs to be entered for the Register
INFO
Number if operands have been specified in symbol input mode in the DWG window. For the Size, enter a decimal value
corresponding to the register type (in word units for word type, and bit units for bit type). For the Range, enter AUTO.
• If no data is entered for the Register Number, and automatic register number allocation is executed, the result will be the
same as if DW was entered. Automatic register number allocation is executed in the order of bit, integer, double-length
integer, and real number data.

(b) Automatic Number Allocation to All Registers

Allocate symbols to S, I, O, M, D, C, and # register numbers starting from any number using the following
procedure.
1. Enter the symbol definition data to allocate in the Symbol Name, Register Number (register type only),
and Size. Select AUTO as the Range.
2. Select Data − Auto Number − AUTO from the LADDER Menu.
3. The Automatic symbol assignment (AUTO) Window will be displayed. Enter the leading register number,
and click the Set Button.
The register numbers will be automatically allocated and displayed.
For example, if the data size settings are two words for DATA1, one word for DATA3, and one word for
DATA4, DATA1 will take two words and the register numbers will be MW00010, MW00012, and
MW00013 respectively.
No. Symbol Name Register Number Size Range
01 DATA1 MF00010 H0002 AUTO ▼
02 DATA2 MF H0001 AUTO ▼
03 DATA3 MW00012 H0001 AUTO ▼
04 DATA4 MW00013 H0001 AUTO ▼
05 ▼

In step 1, enter the register type for the Register Number. Nothing needs to be entered for the Register Number if operands
INFO
have been specified in symbol input mode in the DWG Window. For the Size, enter a decimal value corresponding to the

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

register type (in word units for word type, and bit units for bit type). For the Range, enter AUTO.

(4) Upward Linking of Symbols

Symbols are valid only within the DWG or function program in which they are defined. The same symbol can
thus be defined in another DWG or function program to refer to a different register number.
Symbols can be defined so that symbol names defined in drawings with different hierarchies can be used to refer-
ence the same register number in all DWG and function programs processed in the same scan. This is called sym-
bol linking. If the DWG program executing the upward link is a child drawing, it can search for symbol
definitions in the parent drawing to determine the register number. The symbol to which the upward link is being
created must be defined in the parent drawing in advance.
Parent Child Grandchild
H H01 H01.01

For example, if an upward symbol link is used in H01.02.01, links can be used for symbols defined in H01 and 9
H01.02.
Perform upward linking of symbols using the following procedure.
1. Enter the symbol definition data to be linked for the Symbol Name. Select MTBL as the Range.
2. Select Data − Symbol Link from the LADDER menu.
Definition data in the same scan as the upward drawing is searched according to the symbol, and the data
is displayed.

9-11
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.2.7 # Register List Tab Page

Do not enter any data in the Register Number and Size. For the Range, enter MTBL.
INFO

9.2.7 # Register List Tab Page

This section explains how to make and alter # register settings.
(1) Setting the # Register Values
Click the # Register List tab in the Properties window to display the following tab page. Set the details of the
# Register in this window.
This tab page cannot be used if the Number of # Registers is set to 0 on the Function Configuration tab page.

Setting Details
Displays the # register numbers for the number of registers entered on the
Register Number
Number of # Registers on the Function Configuration Tab Page.
Value Enter the # register values.

(2) Changing the Base Number of # Register Values

The display mode base number of the # register values can be changed. Depending on the display mode, # regis-
ters can be changed to #W, #L, #F, etc.
(a) Decimal Integer Display
Select Data − Cardinal − DEC from the LADDER menu to display the register values in decimal.

(b) Hexadecimal Integer Display

Select Data − Cardinal − HEX from the LADDER menu to display the register values in hexadecimal.

(c) Real Number Display

Select Data − Cardinal − FLOAT from the LADDER menu to display the register values as real numbers.

(d) Decimal Double-length Integer Display

Select Data − Cardinal − LONG from the LADDER menu to display the register numbers as double-length
integers.

(e) Binary Integer Display

Select Data − Cardinal − BIN from the LADDER menu to display the register values in binary.

(f) ASCII Display

Select Data − Cardinal − ASCII from the LADDER menu to change the register numbers to ASCII charac-
ters.

Undefined data will be displayed if register values that cannot be displayed as ASCII characters are set to ASCII display
INFO
mode.

9-12
 9.2 Setting Drawing Properties Window

(3) Changing # Register Values

Change # register values using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the register value to be changed.
2. Enter the new value.

(4) Clearing # Register Values

Clear consecutive registers to a user-defined value using the following procedure
1. Select Data − Set from the LADDER menu.
2. The Register Data Clear window will be displayed. Enter the leading register number, number of
registers to be cleared, and the replacement data, and click the Set button. The data will be cleared to a
user-defined value.

9.2.8 Update History Tab Page

This section explains how to display and delete Update History data.
(1) Displaying Update History
Up to 10 Update History records can be created for each drawing in the DWG or function programs. The Update
History is displayed in chronological order.

Display Details
Date Displays the date the DWG or function program was saved.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Time Displays the time the DWG or function program was saved.
Displays the name of the user that saved the DWG or function pro-
User Name
gram.

(2) Deleting Update History

There are two methods for deleting the Update History: All data for a particular DWG or function program can
be deleted or individual records in the Update History can be deleted.
(a) Deleting All Update History Records
Delete all of the Update History records currently displayed using the following procedure.
1. Select Edit − ALLDEL from the LADDER menu to delete all Update History data currently being
displayed.
2. All Update History data will be deleted.

(b) Deleting Individual Update History Records 9

Delete one Update History record using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the Update History record to be deleted.
2. Select Edit − DEL from the LADDER menu.
3. The Update History record selected in step 1 will be deleted.

9-13
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.2.9 Saving Property Information

9.2.9 Saving Property Information

Property information must be saved at the same time as the DWG or function program is saved. Execute the Save
command from the DWG window for the DWG number or function symbol for which the property settings were
made.
Save property information using the following procedure.
1. Select Window from the LADDER menu to display the list of active LADDER windows, and select the
LADDER window from which the property information is to be saved.
2. Select File − Save from the LADDER menu.
3. Click the Yes button in the message box.
4. Click the OK button in the message box.

The Error Detection message box is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appendix A Error Messages,
INFO
eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.

9-14
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

This section explains how to create ladder programs (main programs) called drawings (DWGs).
• Outline of creating ladder programs
• Opening the LADDER window
• Ladder menus
• LADDER window display mode
• Inputting ladder instructions
• Editing programs
• Creating branch circuits
• Disabling coils
• Jump
• Displaying current values
• Creating comments
• Saving ladder programs
• Printing ladder programs
• Closing ladder program editing

9.3.1 Outline of Creating Ladder Programs

The MPE720 includes a Ladder Editor for inputting ladder programs. The Ladder Editor is automatically opened
when a new or existing program is opened, enabling ladder programs to be edited immediately.

9.3.2 LADDER Window

(1) Opening the LADDER Window
The LADDER window can be opened from the File Manager or Engineering Manager.
(a) Opening New Drawings from the File Manager
1. Select File − New Drawing from the File Manager menu.
2. The Input DWG Name will be opened. Enter the name and type of drawing in the dialog box and click the
OK button.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

An empty LADDER window will be displayed.

(b) Opening Existing Drawings from the File Manager

1. Click the desired drawing number in the Directory Tree.
2. Select File − Open − Main Program from the LADDER menu. 9
The existing program will be displayed and editing will be enabled.

9-15
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.2 LADDER Window

(c) Opening New/Existing Drawings from the Engineering Manager

1. Select File − Open − Program − New Drawing from the LADDER menu.
2. Enter the name and type of drawing in the dialog box, and click the OK button.
3. The Input DWG Name will be displayed. Enter the name and type of drawing in the dialog box and click
the OK button.

• In the dialog box, set DWG as the Type to open the main drawing program, and set FUNC to open the main function
INFO
program.
• Up to the number of drawings set in the File Manager configuration can be open at the same time in the LADDER
window.

9-16
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(2) LADDER Window Configuration

Monitor switching buttons Online monitor display

Level Comments
Ladder program
Step No.

D registers Total No. of steps

# registers Operand input mode

Display Details
These buttons are used to select whether or not to obtain the current
Monitor Switching
value while online. This function is stopped with the button and
Buttons
started with the button.
Online monitor display Operates when monitoring the current value online.
Level Displays the nesting level of each program.
Step No. Displays the step number of the instruction.
For ladder programs, the program executed is displayed. For user
Ladder Program functions, the function's internal program is displayed.
The current value of each operand is also obtained while online.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Comments for the program being executed will be displayed. Refer
Comments to 9.3.10 Creating Comments for information on how to create
comments.
Displays the value set in the Number of D Registers on the Drawing
D registers
Properties tab page in the Drawing Properties window.
Displays the value set in the Number of # Registers on the Drawing
# registers
Properties tab page in the Drawing Properties window.
Total No. of Steps Displays the total number of steps for the program.
Displays the operand input mode.
ADR: Register Number Input Mode
Operand Input Mode
SYM: Symbol Input Mode
S-A: Register Number + Symbol Input Mode

9-17
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.3 LADDER Menus

9.3.3 LADDER Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the LADDER window.

Menu Command Function

File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the LADDER Window.
Remake Comment Updates comments.
Remake Cross Info. Updates cross-reference information.
Save Saves programs.
Save & Save into flash
Saves to flash memory.
memory
Page Setting Sets the printer paper margins.
Print Program Prints the main program.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manger.
Edit
Cuts an instruction and places it on the clip-
Cut
board.
Copy Copies an instruction to the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard.
INS Inserts an instruction.
DEL Deletes an instruction.
UNDELETE Restores deleted data.
FIND Searches registers.
COPYA Copies the ladder program file.
View
Input Mode
Address Sets to Register Number Input Mode.
Symbol Sets to Symbol Input Mode.
Address + Symbol Sets to Register Number + Symbol Input Mode.
Normal Switches to normal display mode.
Large Switches to large display mode.
Symbol
Program Symbol Switches to program symbol display mode.
Comment Switches to comment symbol display mode.
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the Status Bar.
Comment Bar Displays the Comment Bar.
Function Bar Displays the Function Bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Command
RELAY
MATH
LOGIC
CONTROL Selects instructions.
FUNCTION Refer to Machine Controller MP900 Series
MOVE User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIEZ-
DDC C887-1.2) for details on instructions.
TABLE
MOTION
SFC

9-18
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(Cont’d)

Menu Command Function

Debug
SYNC Synchronously updates current values.
HOLD Pauses updating current values.
DIS-ON Disables the COIL instruction and turns it ON.
DIS-OFF Disables the COIL instruction and turns it OFF.
Releases the COIL instruction from disable sta-
ENABLE
tus.
REFER Opens the LADDER Window being called.
Displays the program opened using the REFER
BACK
command.
Cursor
Jump to Line Moves the cursor to the desired step number.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

9-19
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.4 LADDER Window Display Mode

9.3.4 LADDER Window Display Mode

This section describes the display modes that are available for the Ladder Editor in the LADDER window. The
display can be changed as required during programming.
LADDER
Program
Symbol
Normal/Large symbols/
display
Comment
mode
Display symbols
mode

Ladder program Comments

Display/
don’t display Function
display mode

(1) Switching Program Display Modes

There are two program display modes: Normal, for displaying characters at normal size and Large, for displaying
characters at a larger size.
Program Display Mode Switching Procedure
Normal (default) Select View − Normal.
Large Select View− Large.

(2) Switching Symbol Display Modes

There are two symbol display modes in the LADDER Window: Comment Symbol Display Mode, which displays
symbols created using the Create Comment operation and Program Symbol Display Mode, which displays sym-
bols created by symbol definitions. When the LADDER Window is first opened, the display mode is Comment
Symbol.
Program Display Mode Switching Procedure
Program Symbol Select View − Symbol − Program Symbol.
Comment Symbol Select View − Symbol − Comment.

(3) Switching Function Bar Display Modes

Pressing function keys when the function bar is displayed will execute the same functions as selecting instruc-
tions from LADDER Menu.
Select View − Function Bar from the LADDER Menu to switch ON and OFF the function bar display. Function
keys will not operate if the function bar is not displayed.

9-20
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

9.3.5 Inputting Ladder Instructions

This section explains how to input and edit ladder instructions and operands.
• Structure of ladder instructions
• Ladder instruction input methods
• Operand input methods
• Inputting instructions
(1) Structure of Ladder Instructions
Basically, ladder instructions consist of three elements: A symbol, a numeric processing instruction or register
number, and a bit processing instruction or current value.
Basic Structure of Ladder Instruction

Symbol Input/Not displayed

Register number or
numeric processing Input/Not displayed
instruction
Current value or bit
processing Input/Not displayed
instruction

For current values expressed as bit processing instructions, the text will be displayed in bold if the condition of
the bit processing instruction is met and will be displayed in normal text if the condition is not met.
The register value is displayed for numeric processing instructions. The current value is displayed only in Online
Mode.
Bit processing instruction Numeric processing instruction

LIMIT-SW Symbol Symbol IN-DATA

MB00101 Register No. Register No. MW00100
Bit instruction Current value 01000

Displayed in bold text if condition

is met in Online Mode.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

(2) Input Methods of Ladder Instructions
There are three methods that can be used to input ladder instructions. Use the methods as required to facilitate
inputting.
Refer to Machine Controller MP900 Series User's Manual: Ladder Programming (SIEZ-C887-1.2) for details on
instructions. Refer to Appendix C Drawing and Function Instructions for a list of instructions that can be input
for the MPE720.
(a) Using Mnemonics
Instructions can be selected easily from the keyboard by entering mnemonics and pressing the Enter key.
These mnemonics eliminate the need to search for the instruction on pull-down menus or the function bar.
Refer to Appendix C Drawing and Function Instructions for lists of mnemonics.
As an example, the procedure to select the N.O. CONTACT instruction (-| |-) is described below.
1. Enter the mnemonic for N.O. CONTACT (][).
9
2. Press the Enter key. The N.O. CONTACT instruction will be input.

(b) Selecting Instructions from the LADDER Menu

Display the Command Pull-down Menu, and select the instruction.
As an example, the procedure to select the N.O. CONTACT instruction (-| |-) is described below.
• Select Command − RELAY − N.O. Contact from the LADDER Menu. The N.O. CONTACT instruction
will be input.

9-21
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.5 Inputting Ladder Instructions

(c) Selecting Instructions from the Function Bar

Instructions displayed on the function bar can be selected using function keys. The function bar display must
be activated first. Refer to Appendix C Drawing and Function Instructions for lists of function bar com-
mands.
As an example, the procedure to select the N.O. CONTACT instruction (-| |-) is described below.
1. Press the F11 key (F-SEL) on the function bar until the N.O. CONTACT instruction
(-| |-) is displayed.
2. Press the F1 key to select (-| |-) on the function bar. The N.O. CONTACT instruction will be displayed.

(3) Operand Input Methods

There are four methods for inputting operands:
• Using register numbers
• Using symbols
• Using symbols and register numbers
• Using constants
(a) Changing Input Modes
The input mode can be changed using one of the procedures outlined on the table below.
Input Mode Procedure Status
Register Number Select View − Input Mode − Address. ADR
Symbol Select View − Input Mode − Symbol. SYM
Register Number
Select View − Input Mode − Address + Symbol. S-A
+ Symbol

Register Input Mode is the default when the LADDER Window is first displayed.

(b) Register Number Input Mode

Only register numbers can be entered in Register Number Input Mode. The cursor will not move to the input
position for symbols.
1. Change to the Register Number Input Mode (ADR) and enter the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for register numbers. Enter the register number.

If the register number entered in step 2 has a symbol defined for it in the comment bar or comment list, that symbol will
INFO
also be displayed, assuming Comment Symbol Display Mode has been set.

(c) Symbol Input Mode

Only symbols can be entered in Symbol Input Mode. The cursor will not move to the input position for regis-
ter numbers.
1. Change to the Symbol Input Mode (SYM) and enter the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for symbols. Enter the symbol.

• If the symbol entered at step 2 is defined on the Symbol Definition Tab Page in the Drawing Properties Window, the
INFO
register number corresponding to that symbol will also be displayed.
• Symbols must be defined before they can be entered.

TERMS Operand
An operand is information required by the instruction, such as symbols, register numbers, and constants.

9-22
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(d) Register Number + Symbol Input Mode

Both a symbol and register number can be entered in Register Number + Symbol Input Mode using the fol-
lowing procedure. By entering an undefined symbol, symbols will be defined automatically and do not need
to be defined on the Symbol Definition Tab Page in the Drawing Properties Window.
1. Change to the Register Number + Symbol Input Mode (S-A) and enter the instruction.
2. The cursor will then appear at the input position for register numbers. Enter the register number.
3. The cursor will appear at the input position for symbols. Enter the symbol.

(e) Using Constants

Input operands with constants using the following procedure.
1. Change to the Register Number Input Mode (ADR) and enter the instruction.
2. The cursor will appear at the input position for constants. Enter the constant. Constants can be decimal
(integer, double-length integer, or real number) or hexadecimal (integer or double-length integer).

„ Input Format for Constants

INFO
The following table shows the input format for constants.
Window Input
Input Value Details
Display String
Use numerals 0 to 9. Place a minus sign (-) in front
Integer 00100 100
of negative values.
Use numerals 0 to 9 and enter L at the end of the
value. Place a minus sign (-) in front of negative
Double- values.
length 0000010000 10000L If the input value is greater than 32,767 or less than
Integer -32,768, the value will become a double-length
Decimal integer automatically, even without an L at the end
of the value.
Use numerals 0 to 9 and enter E at the end of the
value. Place a minus sign (-) in front of negative
Real values.
100.1E 100.1E
Number If the input value includes a dot (.), the value will

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

become a real number automatically, even without
an E at the end of the value.
Enter H at the beginning of the value, and use
Integer H32FF H32FF
numerals 0 to 9, and A to F.
Enter H at the beginning of the value, and use
numerals 0 to 9, and A to F. Enter L at the end of
Hexadecimal Double-
the value.
length H000032FF H32FFL
If the input value is longer than 4 digits, the value
Integer
will become a double-length integer automatically,
even without L at the end of the value.

(4) Inputting Instructions

Inputting instructions can be divided into several patterns. This section describes the following basic instructions.
9
• Math, logic, and comparison instructions
• Conditional instructions
• Functions
• MOVW, XCHG, etc.
• SEE
• END
• Inline comments

9-23
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.5 Inputting Ladder Instructions

(a) Inputting Math, Logic, and Comparison Instructions

The cursor normally moves to the right when the Enter key is pressed after inputting the math, logic, or com-
parison operation. The cursor will move to the beginning of the next line when window size restrictions do
not allow further instruction input to the right or after the STORE instruction appears.

EXAMPLE As an example, the procedure to input the following instructions is shown below.

1 0000 |- MW01000 ⇒ MW02000

1. Select the INTEGER ENTRY (|-) instruction.
2. Enter the register number, MW01000.
3. Select the STORE ( ⇒ ) instruction.
4. Enter the register number, MW02000.

(b) Inputting Conditional Instructions

There are no special instructions provided for conditional instructions. Select the [] instruction to show that
an instruction is conditional. The instruction inside the square brackets [] in the following program will be
executed if the condition, bit register IB00010, is met. The bit status is checked only to determine whether the
condition is met.

EXAMPLE As an example, the procedure to input the following program is shown below.

IB00010
1 0000

1 0001 [ MW00010 ] [ MW02000 ]

1. Enter the N.O. CONTACT instruction and the register number, IB00010. This instruction will form the
condition.
2. Select the INTEGER ENTRY (|-) instruction.
3. Select the CONDITION ([ ])instruction and enter the register number, MW00010.
4. Enter the STORE instruction in the same way as in steps 2 and 3.

(c) Inputting Functions

There are two types of functions: System functions (functions created by the system) and user functions
(functions created by the user). The input method is the same for both types of functions. User functions need
to be defined before they can be entered.

EXAMPLE As an example, the procedure to input the following instructions is shown below.
1 0000 FUNC-01

MB000001 IN-1 OUT-1 MB000002

1 0001
FIN FOUT

IN-2 OUT-2
1 0003 MW00010 FIN FOUT MW00011

1 0005 MW00020 IN-3 OUT-3 MW00021

FIN FOUT
ADDRESS
1 0006
MA01000

Create the function box, and input the function input section, the address input section, and then the output
section to input functions.

9-24
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

1. Creating the Function Box

• Select the FSTART instruction and enter the function name, FUNC-01.
The function box will be displayed.
Function Box

Function name

Inputs Outputs

Addresses

Next, input the function input section, address input section, and output section as described below.
2. Entering the Inputs
• Input the input section for bit data (defined using B-VAL) as follows:
i) Enter the N.O. CONTACT instruction and the bit register number MB000001.
ii) Input the FIN instruction. The function input parameters and the N.O. CONTACT instruction will
be connected.

1 0000 FUNC-01

MB000001 IN-1 OUT-1

1 0001 FIN

IN-2 OUT-2

• Input the input section for integer data (defined using I-VAL), double-length integer data (defined using
L-VAL), or real number data (defined using F-VAL) as follows:
The following example is for integer data.
i) Enter the INTEGER ENTRY instruction and the register number MW00010.
ii) Input the FIN instruction. The function input parameters and the INTEGER ENTRY instruction
will be connected.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

IN-2 OUT-2
1 0003 MW00010 FIN
F

• Input the input section for integer data (defined using I-REG), double-length integer data (defined
using L-REG), or real number data (defined using F-REG) as follows:
The following example is for integer data.
i) Select the FIN instruction. The function input parameters and the register number (or constant) will
be connected.

1 0005 IN-3 OUT-3

FIN

ii) Enter the register number or constant.

1 0005 MW00020 IN-3 OUT-3

FIN
9
3. Inputting the Addresses
Input addresses as follows:
i) Select the FIN instruction.
ii) Enter the register number, MA01000.
ADDRESS
1 0006
MA01000

9-25
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.5 Inputting Ladder Instructions

4. Inputting the Outputs

• Input the output section for bit data (defined using B-VAL) as follows:
i) Select the FOUT instruction.
ii) Enter the COIL instruction and the register number MB000002. The function output parameters
and the COIL instruction will be connected.

MB000001 IN-1 OUT-1 MB000002

1 0001
FIN FOUT

• Input the output section for integer data (defined using I-VAL), double-length integer data (defined
using L-VAL), or real number data (defined using F-VAL) as follows:
The following example is for integer data.
i) Select the FOUT instruction.
ii) Enter the STORE instruction and the register number MW00011. The function output parameters
and the STORE instruction will be connected.
IN-2 OUT-2
1 0003 MW00010 FIN FOUT MW00011

• Input the output section for integer data (defined using I-REG), double-length integer data (defined
using L-REG), or real number data (defined using F-REG) as follows:
The following example is for integer data.
i) Select the FOUT instruction.
ii) Enter the register number, MW00021.

1 0005 MW00020 IN-3 OUT-3 MW00021

FIN FOUT

(d) Inputting MOVW, XCHG and Other Instructions

MOVW, XCHG and similar instructions require two or more operands. When the instruction is entered, the
cursor moves to the input position for the first operand. Enter the required operands to complete the instruc-
tions.

EXAMPLE As an example, the procedure to input the following instructions is shown below.
1 0002 MOVW MW00020 ÆMW00120 W=00010
1.Select the MOVW instruction. The cursor will move to the input position for the first operand. The
MOVW instruction will be moved to the next line and displayed at the beginning of the next line.
2.Enter the first operand, MW00020 and press the Enter key.
3.Enter the second operand, MW00120 and press the Enter key.
4.Enter the third operand, 00010 and press the Enter key.

(e) Inputting SEE Instructions

Input the SEE instruction as shown below.

EXAMPLE As an example, the procedure to input the following instructions is shown below.
1 0002 SEE H01.01
1.Select the SEE instruction. The cursor will move to the input position for the DWG number.
2.Enter the drawing number, H01.01.

9-26
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(f) Inputting the END Instruction

The END instruction is placed at the end of the IF, WHILE, and FOR statements, and at the end of DWG and
function programs. The END instruction will be changed to IEND, WEND, or FEND depending on the state-
ment when it is entered. For DWG and function programs, the END instruction will be changed to DEND
when entered.

EXAMPLE As an example, the procedure to input the following instructions is shown below.
1 0000 |- 00000 J
1 0002 MW02000
1 0003 WHILE
2 0004 |- J <00100
2 0006 ON
2 0007 |- MW00200 +MW00100j MW02000
2 0010 |- J +00001 J
1 0013 WEND
1. Enter the counter (J), the INTEGER ENTRY instruction to clear the work register (MW02000) to zero,
and the STORE instruction.
2. Select the WHILE instruction.
3. Enter the WHILE statement (steps 4 to 10 in the figure above.)
4. Enter the END instruction. The type of END instruction will be determined automatically and the
appropriate END instruction will be displayed. In this case, WEND will be displayed.

(g) Inputting Inline Comments

Comments can be input at any position in main programs and user function programs. Inline comments do
not affect the program execution at all.
Input inline comments using the following procedure.
1. Select the COMMENT instruction.
2. Enter the comment, MW01000 is motor rotation speed.
3. Enter double quotation marks (") at the end of the comment.
1 0000 "MW01000 is motor rotation speed"

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Up to 70 characters per line can be entered for the inline comment, with a maximum of 180 characters in total
IMPORTANT
if carriage returns are used. Depending on the number of carriage returns, however, the maximum number of
characters possible in the character string may be reduced.

9.3.6 Editing Programs

Instructions can be edited. If the user starts to edit programs while online, the current value will not be updated
until the edited program is saved normally.
• Insert
• Delete
• Undelete
• Cut
9
• Copy
• Paste
• Change operand
• Jump to step number
• Opening LADDER Window for SEE and FSTART instructions
• Returning to previous windows

9-27
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.6 Editing Programs

Programs cannot be edited under the following circumstances:

INFO
• When the cursor is in a blank position other than at an instruction or operand.
• During the execution of other edit operations.

(1) Inserting
Insert instructions into a string of instructions using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is to be inserted.
2. Select Edit − INS from the LADDER menu. INS will appear at the bottom of the window to indicate that
the insert operation is in progress, space to insert instructions will be provided, and the rest of the program
below the insertion area will temporarily not be displayed.
SGL01
MB000202 MB000020
1 0000

Insertion area

3. Enter the instruction. Further instructions can be entered until step 4 is performed.
4. Select Edit − INS from the LADDER menu.
The instruction entered in step 3 will be inserted and the portion of the program below the insertion area
will be displayed correctly again.

(2) Deleting
Delete a block of instructions using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to beginning of the block of instructions to be deleted.
2. Select Edit − DEL from the LADDER menu. DEL will appear at the bottom of the window to indicate
that the delete operation is in progress.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the block of instructions to be deleted. The section to be deleted will be
displayed in reversed color.

1 0002 IB00000 OB00000

SGL02
1 0004 MB004900 MB006801

4. Select Edit − DEL from the LADDER menu.

The block of instructions specified in steps 1 and 3 will be deleted.

9-28
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

„ Cancelling Delete Operation

INFO
Press the ESC key to cancel the delete operation without deleting any instructions.
„ Deleting One Instruction in a Relay Circuit
• The power line may be corrected as shown in the following figure if one instruction in a relay circuit is deleted,
depending on the connection status of the circuit where the instruction was deleted.

0000 MB001000 MB001001 1 0000 MB1000

0002 MB001002 1 0001 MB1002

• Circuits will be connected after an instruction is deleted if they are connected directly to the deleted element.

1 0000 MB001000 MB001001 1 0000 MB001000 MB001001

1 0002 MB001002

Circuits will be open after an instruction is deleted if they are connected parallel to the deleted element.
„ Deleting Multiple Instructions Including Relay Circuits
When multiple instructions including relay circuits are to be deleted, select a power connection instruction as the start of
the block to be deleted, and select a COIL instruction as the end of the block.

(3) UNDELETE
The UNDELETE can be used to undo one delete, cut, or paste operation.
The following example shows executing UNDELETE after DELETE.

DB001020 IB00100 OBC0010

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

DB001020 IB00110 OBC0410

Delete

DB001020 IB00110 OBC0410

Perform UNDELETE
by selecting Edit -
UNDELETE from the
LADDER Menu.
DB001020 IB00100 OBC0010

9
DB001020 IB00110 OBC0410

9-29
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.6 Editing Programs

(4) Cutting
Instructions can be cut. Cut data is copied to the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can be reproduced mul-
tiple times using the paste operation.
Cut instructions using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the start of the section to be cut.
2. Select Edit − Cut from the LADDER menu. CUT will appear at the bottom of the window to indicate the
cut operation is in progress.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the section to be cut. The section to be cut will be displayed in reversed
color.
4. Select Edit − Cut from the LADDER menu.
The section specified in steps 1 and 3 will be cut.

• Press the ESC key to cancel the cut operation without cutting any instructions.
INFO
• Unlike the delete operation, power lines will not be corrected when instructions are cut using the cut operation.

(5) Copying
Instructions can be copied to the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can be reproduced multiple times using
the paste operation.
Copy instructions to the clipboard using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the beginning of the section to be copied.
2. Select Edit − Copy from the LADDER menu. Copy will appear at the bottom of the window to indicate
that the copy operation is in progress.
3. Move the cursor to the end of the section to be copied. The section to be copied will be displayed in
reversed color.
4. Select Edit − Copy from the LADDER menu.
The section specified in steps 1 and 3 will be copied.

(6) Pasting
The contents of the clipboard can be reproduced. The instructions copied to the clipboard using the cut or copy
operations will be reproduced. The data on the clipboard is saved and can be reproduced multiple times.
When the cut or copy operations are executed again, the instructions on the clipboard will be cleared and
replaced with the new cut or copied instructions.
Reproduce instructions on the clipboard using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the instruction is to be pasted.
2. Select Edit − Paste from the LADDER menu.
3. The data on the clipboard will be inserted into the position specified in step 1.

(7) Changing Instructions and Operands

Change previously entered instructions or operands using the following procedure.
(a) Changing Relay Numbers
1. Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to the relay number to be changed.
2. Enter the new relay number.

(b) Changing Contacts

1. Press the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the contact instruction to be changed.
2. Enter the new contact instruction.

9-30
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(c) Changing Relay Numbers and Contacts

1. Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to the operand to be changed.
2. Enter the new operand.
3. Enter the new relay number.

(d) Changing Operands

1. Press the Cursor Keys to move the cursor to the operand to be changed.
2. Enter the new operand.
The following operands exist and can be changed. You cannot, however, change to an operands that is not
supported by the instruction.
• Decimal and hexadecimal integer constants, decimal and hexadecimal double-length integer constants,
and decimal real number constants.
• S, I, O, M and D registers, and subscripted S, I, O, M and D registers.
• C and # registers, and subscripted C and # registers.
• Registers for X, Y, Z and A functions, and subscripted registers for X, Y, Z and A functions.
• Subscript registers (I and J).

(e) Changing Comments

1. Press the cursor keys to move the cursor to the comment to be changed.
2. Select the comment instruction.
3. Enter the new comment.
4. Enter double quotation marks (") at the end of the comment.

(8) Jumping to a Particular Step Number

Move the cursor to a particular step number in the program using the following procedure.
1. Select Cursor − Jump to Line from the LADDER menu.
2. Enter the step number in the Display Position dialog box and click the Set button.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

3. The cursor will move to the step number designated in step 2.

(9) Opening DWG Windows Used by SEE and FSTART Instructions

When SEE or FSTART instructions are used in the DWG or function program that is currently displayed, the
LADDER Window for the DWG or function program that is called by these instructions can be opened.
Open the DWG Window used by SEE and FSTART instructions using the following procedure. 9
1. Move the cursor to the DWG number or function symbol that the SEE or FSTART instruction is calling.
1 0000 SEE H
H01.01

2. Select Debug − REFER from the LADDER menu.

3. The DWG window called in step 1 will be opened.

• In Online Mode, the current values when the relevant SEE or FSTART instruction was executed will be displayed in
INFO
any DWG or function program opened with the refer operation.

9-31
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits

(10) Returning to Previous Windows

The window from which the refer operation was used can be returned to in the reverse order.
Select Debug − BACK from the LADDER menu to return to the previous windows in reverse order.
Up to 4 windows that have been previously opened can be returned to in the reverse order.

9.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits

When branches and parallel circuits are used in relay circuits, the cursor moves according to branches, connec-
tion points, and parallel connections. The cursor position for the next instruction switches for branches, connec-
tion points, and parallel connections. The cursor position can be reserved or released by alternately designating
branches, connection points and parallel connections. Those designation are found on the Command Menu from
the LADDER Menu. Mnemonics can also be used to designate them.
(1) Setting Branch Points
As shown in the following figure, branch points are display to the left of a COIL instruction, and input positions
for parallel circuits are reserved starting from the branch point. The branch point will be automatically displayed
without setting it if a contact is to be connected to the power line.
Branch point
EXAMPLE
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000

1 0002 IB00002 OB00001

Set the branch point shown in the above figure using the following procedure.
1. Select the N.O. CONTACT instruction.

1 0000 IB00000

2. Select Command − RELAY − Branch from the LADDER Menu.

3. A branch point will appear.
Branch point

1 0000 IB00000

4. Enter the relay number.

Branch point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001

• The mnemonic for a branch point, a comma (,), can be used at step 2 to display a branch point.
INFO
• Insert a COIL instruction after completing step 4 to display the cursor at the branch point designated in step 3, rather
than at the power line. This enables the next instruction to be entered from this point.
Branch point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000

• The cursor will move to the last branch point if several branch points have been designated.

9-32
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(2) Setting Connection Points

As shown in the following figure, connection points are shown to the right of the contact instruction and the input
positions for parallel circuits will be reserved between a branch point and connection point if there is a branch
point, and between the power line and the connection point if there is no branch point.
Connection point
EXAMPLE
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000

1 0002 IB00002

Set the connection point shown in the above figure using the following procedure.
1. Select the N.O. CONTACT instruction.

1 0000 IB00000

2. Select Command − RELAY − Join from the LADDER Menu.

3. A connection point will appear.
Connection point

1 0000 IB00000

4. Enter the relay number.

Connection point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

• The mnemonic for a connection point, a period (.), can be used at step 2 to display a connection point.
INFO
• Once step 4 has been completed, the input position for the next instruction will be on the new line after the connection
point. If a branch point has been designated previously, the next instruction will be entered from the branch point, and if
not, the next instruction will be entered from the power line.

(3) Setting Parallel Connections

As shown in the following figure, the connection point specified above is connected to the right side of the cur-
rent instruction input position. A connection point must be specified first to enable connection.

EXAMPLE
1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 OB00000

1 0002 IB00002
Connection point 9

Set the parallel connection shown in the above figure using the following procedure.
1. Designate the connection point as shown below.
Connection point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001

9-33
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits

2. Select the N.O. CONTACT instruction.

Connection point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001

1 0002

3. Select Command − Relay − Connect from the LADDER Menu.

Connection point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001

1 0002

4. Enter the relay number.

Connection point

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001

1 0002 IB00002

• The mnemonic for a parallel connection, a comma and a period (, .), can be used at step 3 to display a parallel
INFO
connection.
• Once step 4 has been completed, the input position for the next instruction will be to the right of the parallel connection.

(4) Creating a Pulse Generation Circuit

Pulse Generation Circuits are programmed the same way as the branching method explained in (1) Setting
Branch Points, (2) Setting Connection Points, and (3) Setting Parallel Connections.

EXAMPLE 1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000

1 0003 MB009971 OB00001

ON PULSE instruction

OFF PULSE instruction

Create the pulse generation circuit shown in the above figure using the following procedure.
1. Enter the N.C. CONTACT instruction.
2. Select the ON PULSE instruction and then enter the branch point.

1 0000 IB00000

3. Enter the register number which is the operand for the ON PULSE instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 MB009970

9-34
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

4. Enter the COIL instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000

5. Select the OFF PULSE instruction.

6. Enter the register number which is the operand for the OFF PULSE instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000

1 0003 MB009971

7. Enter the COIL instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 MB009970 OB00000

1 0003 MB009971 OB00001

(5) Creating Timer Circuits

Timer circuits are created by setting the following three points:
• Branches, connection points, and parallel connections.
• Time limit setting constants or register numbers for time limit settings.
• Register numbers for counting.
Timer circuit
EXAMPLE
1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000
[T ]

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

1 0003 IB00001

1 0005 IB00002 OB00001

Create the timer circuit shown in the above figure using the following procedure.
1. Enter the N.C. CONTACT instruction.
2. Select the ON-DELAY instruction and then enter the branch points and connection points.

1 0000 IB00000
[T ]

3. Enter the time limit settings (constants or register numbers) which are the operands for the ON-DELAY
instruction.
9
1 0000 IB00000 005.00
[T ]

4. Enter the register number for counting as an operand of the ON-DELAY instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010

[T ]

9-35
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.7 Creating Branch Circuits

5. Select the N.O. CONTACT instruction and then set the branch points and the parallel connections.

1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]

1 0003

6. Enter a register number as the operand of the N.O. CONTACT instruction.

7. Enter the COIL instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]

1 0003 IB00001

1 0005

8. Enter the N.O. CONTACT instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]

1 0003 IB00001

1 0005 IB00002

9. Enter the COIL instruction.

1 0000 IB00000 005.00 MW00010 OB00000

[T ]

1 0003 IB00001

1 0005 IB00002 OB00001

Branch point, connection point, and parallel connection settings can be made when the cursor is on the time limit setting or
INFO
the register for counting.

(6) Setting Series Connections

When connection points or parallel connections have not been designated, the next contact will be connected in
series and the cursor will move to the right from the current instruction position. Contacts will be connected in
series whether or not there is branching. There is no limit to the number of contacts.
When the series connection extends across one line, as shown in the following figure, the input position for the
next instruction will automatically appear at the start of the next line.
End of the line

1 0000 IB00000 IB00001 IB00002 IB00003 IB00004

1 0005 IB00004 OB00000

Continuation

9-36
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(7) Creating Complicated Circuits

Complicated sequence circuits, such as the one shown in the following figure, can be created by setting branch
points, connection points, and parallel connections.

1 0000 MB000000 IB00000 OB00000

DATA1
1 0001 MB000001 IB00001 MB00000A MB00000B OB00001

DATA1
1 0004 MB000010 MB000011 MB000002 MB000003 OB00002

1 0013 IB00100 DB000000 MB000300

1 0016 DB000001 MB000301

1 0018 IB00101 005.00 MW00102 OB00100

[T ]

1 0021 IB00102

1 0023 IB00103 OB00101

Create the sequence circuit shown in the above figure using the procedure (steps 1 to 24) in the following table.
Step Instruction Branch or Connection Selection Operand Input
1 N.O. CONTACT Connection point MB000000
2 N.O. CONTACT Parallel connection MB000001
3 N.C. CONTACT Branch point, connection point IB00000
Connection point, parallel connec-
4 N.C. CONTACT IB00001
tion
5 N.O. CONTACT − MB000010
6 N.C. CONTACT Parallel connection MB000011

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

7 COIL Branch point OB00000
8 N.O. CONTACT Branch point MB00000A
9 N.O. CONTACT − MB00000B
10 COIL − OB00001
11 N.O. CONTACT − MB000002
12 N.C. CONTACT − MB000003
13 COIL − OB00002
14 N.O. CONTACT − IB00100
15 ON PULSE Branch point DB000000
16 COIL − MB000300
17 OFF PULSE − DB000001
18 COIL − MB000301
19 N.C. CONTACT − IB00101 9
20 ON-DELAY Branch point, connection point 5 MW00102
21 N.O. CONTACT Branch point, parallel connection IB00102
22 COIL − OB00100
23 N.O. CONTACT − IB00103
24 COIL − OB00101

9-37
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.8 Disabling Coils

The procedure for step 3 in the table, for example, is outlined below.
1. Select the N.C. CONTACT instruction.
2. Select the BRANCH instruction.
3. Select the connection point.
4. Enter IB0000 and press the Enter key.

• In step 4, the operand code will determine what type of register is required for the operand. Enter only the
IMPORTANT
register type and number, and IB00000 will be entered automatically.
• When multiple operands are used, press the Enter key after inputting each operand to ensure that each
operand is entered correctly.

9.3.8 Disabling Coils

COIL instructions can be forcibly fixed to the energized state (Disabled ON) or to the de-energized state (Dis-
abled OFF), and disable settings for COIL instructions can be cleared.
Coil status will be displayed as shown below depending on the disable ON/OFF status.
• COIL Instruction Notation

: Disable cleared (normal state).

: Disabled ON.

: Disabled OFF.

• SET COIL Instruction Notation

S : Disable cleared (normal state).

S : Disabled ON.

S : Disabled OFF.

• RESET COIL Instruction Notation

R : Disable cleared (normal).

R : Disabled ON.

R : Disabled OFF.

• Devices may malfunction if the above operations are executed during equipment operation. Execute these
IMPORTANT
operations only after checking that equipment is not being operated.
• In Online Mode, disabled coil settings will be written to the Machine Controller at the same time as the
settings are made or cleared.
• When coils are set to Disabled ON or OFF, only the specified coil will be set to ON or OFF. Other coils will
not be affected by the disable settings, even if they are the same type of coil. Other instructions using the
same relay number, however, such as the N.O. CONTACT instruction, will be affected.

9-38
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

(1) Setting Disabled ON

Force-set and fix a COIL instruction to Disabled ON during program execution using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the COIL instruction to be set to Disabled ON.
2. Select Debug − DIS-ON from the LADDER Menu. The COIL instruction notation will change to
Disabled ON.

(2) Setting Disabled OFF

Force-set and fix a COIL instruction to Disabled OFF during program execution using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the COIL instruction to be set to Disabled OFF.
2. Select Debug − DIS-OFF from the LADDER Menu. The COIL instruction notation will change to
Disabled OFF.

(3) Clearing Disable Settings

Clear Disable Settings for COIL instructions using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the COIL instruction for which the disable setting is to be cleared.
2. Select Debug − ENABLE from the LADDER Menu. The COIL instruction notation will return to normal.

9.3.9 Displaying Current Values

In Online Mode, current values can be displayed at the same time as the program.
The current values for instructions are displayed as follows:
Instruction Current Value Display
Contacts will be shown as open or closed on the circuit diagram.
Contacts
Closed contacts appear bolder than open contacts.
Coils will be shown as ON or OFF on the circuit diagram. ON coils
Coils
will appear bolder than OFF coils.
Operand values used for processing are displayed below the expres-
Operands
sions.

Current values are updated frequently and the latest data is displayed.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Current values cannot be displayed in Offline Mode.
INFO

(1) Synchronously Updating Current Values

The values of designated S, I, O, M, D, C, and # registers, the values of subscript registers I and J, and current
program values when ON/OFF condition has been met for a designated relay number will be displayed. The data
display will be updated when the condition is met. If the condition is not met, the display will remain at the pre-
vious values. Up to two registers can be set at the same time. If two registers are set, an AND of the individual
conditions will be used.
Synchronously update current values using the following procedure.
1. Select Debug − SYNC from the LADDER Menu.
2. Enter the register numbers and values in the Set Current Value Collection Condition window and click
the Set Button.
9

9-39
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.10 Creating Comments

The current values will be updated when the set condition is met.

Click the Clear button in step 2 to clear all the set updating conditions for current values.
INFO

(2) Displaying Current Values Using the REFER Command

If the cursor is on the SEE instruction or a user function symbol, the SEE instruction or user function symbol will
be expanded into the DWG program or user function program using the REFER command. Accordingly, the cur-
rent values when the SEE instruction or the FUNCTION CALL instruction (FSTART) is executed can be dis-
played.
Move the cursor to position (A) in DWG.L in the following figure, and execute the refer operation to open the
DWG.L01 Program Window. The current value displayed for DWG.L01 will be the value displayed when the
SEE instruction is executed at position (A) in DWG.L. The value when the SEE instruction is executed at posi-
tion (B) will not be displayed.

DWG.L Cursor position

DWG.L01

(A) SEE L01

(B) SEE L01

DEND DEND

Display current values with the REFER command using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the DWG number or function symbol position for the SEE or FSTART instruction.
2. Select Debug − REFER from the LADDER Menu.
The LADDER Window being called will be displayed.

(3) Pausing Updating of Current Values

Select Debug − HOLD from the LADDER Menu to pause updating of current values.
Execute the HOLD command again when the updating of current values is paused to restart the updating of cur-
rent values.

9.3.10 Creating Comments

Create register comments using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Comment Bar from the LADDER Menu to open the Comment Window.

2. Enter a register number.

3. Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters.
4. Enter a comment of up to 48 characters.
5. Press the Enter key. The comment will be written simultaneously to a comment file.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to enter the next comment. Select View − Comment Bar again to close the Comment
Window.

9-40
 9.3 Creating Ladder Programs

• If the cursor is moved to a register number before performing step 1, that register number will be displayed as the
INFO
default in step 2.
• The symbol entered in step 3 is different from the symbol defined on the Symbol Definition Tab Page in the Drawing
Properties Window.

9.3.11 Saving Ladder Programs

This section explains how to save ladder programs and the configuration of the Save Error window.
(1) How to Save Ladder Programs
Ladder programs are saved to the Machine Controller and the Programming Device hard disk in Online Mode,
and to the Programming Device hard disk in Offline Mode.
If a LADDER Window for a DWG or function program is open, all related programs such as SFC and table pro-
grams will be saved at the same time.
Save ladder programs using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the LADDER Menu.
2. Click the Yes button in the message box.
3. Click the OK button in the message box.

An insufficient memory error may occur when saving. Refer to 10.4.1 Compile Execution for details.
IMPORTANT

(2) Save Error Window Configuration

The ladder program will be compiled when it is saved. If a compile error is detected, the Save Error window will
be displayed.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

9-41
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.3.12 Printing Ladder Programs

Display Details
Type Displays the type of program for which an error was detected.
Code Displays the code number for the error.
Message Displays the error message.
The step number for which an error was detected will be displayed
for main programs and SFC programs. The line number for which an
(1)
error was detected will be displayed for table programs and tuning
panels.
This data is disabled for main programs and SFC programs. The row
(2) number for which an error was detected is displayed for table pro-
grams and tuning panels.
This data is disabled for main programs, SFC programs, table pro-
grams other than interlock tables, and tuning panels. For Create
(3)
Interlock Table Windows, the subtable number for which the error
was detected will be displayed.
(4) This data is not available in the current version.

Move the cursor to any error in the Save Error window to highlight it and then click the OK button to move the
cursor to the position where the error was detected.
Click the Cancel button to close the Save Error window.

9.3.12 Printing Ladder Programs

Ladder programs can be printed from the LADDER Window without starting up the Print Manager. Only the lad-
der program that is currently open, however, will be printed.
(1) Page Settings
Set the print page margins using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Page Setting from the LADDER menu.
2. Set each margin in the Ladder Program Page Set window, and click the OK button.

(2) Printing
Print the ladder program currently displayed using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Print Program from the LADDER menu.
2. The Print Setup Window will be displayed. Set the printer name and click the OK button.

Refer to the relevant printer manual for the print settings in step 2.
INFO

9.3.13 Closing Ladder Program Editing

The edit process for ladder programs is exited by closing the LADDER window.
Select File − Close from the LADDER menu to close the LADDER window.

9-42
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

9.4 Creating Table Programs

This section explains how to create table programs.

9.4.1 Outline of Table Programs

Tables can be used to easily create constant tables or ladder programs by entering register numbers, contact types,
interlock information, and other data.
There are six types of tables:
Table Program Details
Constant TBL (# REG)
Creates tension control parameters, position control parameters, and
[Constant tables
other constants specific to a DWG or function program.
(# register)]
Constant TBL (M REG)
Creates mechanical and electrical equipment specifications and
[Constant tables
other constants used by all DWG and function programs.
(M register)]
I/O Conversion TBL Creates scale conversions for numeric data and signal conversions
[I/O conversion tables] for bit signals.
Interlock TBL
Creates device startup and operating conditions and other interlocks.
(Interlock tables)
Part Composition TBL
Simultaneously creates multiple solenoid valve circuits, auxiliary
[Part composition
sequence circuits, and other standard circuits.
tables]
Constant Table
Creates constant tables used in all DWG and function programs, e.g.,
(C Register)
items for facilities or products.
(C constant tables)

9.4.2 Table Program Windows

(1) Opening Table Program Windows
Except for the Constant Table (C Register) Map Window, the Table Program windows can be opened from the
File Manager and the Engineering Manager.
(a) Opening from the File Manager

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

1. Click the drawing number in the Directory Tree.
2. Select File − Open from the File Manager Menu.
3. Select the type of table from the submenu.

(b) Opening from the Engineering Manager

1. Select File − Open − Program from the File Manager Menu.
2. The submenu will be displayed. Select the type of table from the five types described in 9.4.1 Outline of
Table Programs.
Refer to the following sections to input table program data after opening the Table Program Window.
• 9.4.5 Entering # Register Constant Table Data
• 9.4.6 Entering M Register Constant Table Data
• 9.4.7 Entering I/O Conversion Table Data
• 9.4.8 Entering Interlock Table Data 9
• 9.4.9 Entering Part Composition Table Data

• C constant tables cannot be opened from the File Manager. Select File − Open − C Register from the Engineering
INFO
Manager Menu.
• The Open DWG Setting window will be opened if a Table Program window is opened when no DWG or function
program is open. Enter the DWG name and type, and click the OK button.
• The table program is set for the DWG or function ladder program from which it was opened. Therefore, if different
DWG number or function symbol table programs are to be set, the ladder program for that DWG number or function
symbol must be opened.

9-43
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.3 Table Program Menus

9.4.3 Table Program Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Table Program windows.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the Table Program Windows.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Registers a shortcut for the Table Program win-
Register in User Menu
dows.
Save Saves table programs.
The delete function cannot be used with Table
Delete
Program Windows.
Page Setting Sets print paper margins.
Print Table Prints table programs.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Cut Cuts table data.
Copy Copies table data to the clipboard.
Paste Copies the contents of the clipboard.
Delete Row Deletes multiple consecutive rows.
Insert Row Inserts a row.
Input
Input Setting Data Switches to settings input mode.
Input Table Definition Switches to table definition input mode.
Input Register Switches to register input mode.
Direction of Cursor
Sets the direction for cursor movement.
Movement
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion pro-
Motion Task Manager
gram.
Display Head Row Moves the cursor to the first row in the table.
Display Designated
Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Row
Display Last Row Moves the cursor to the last row in the table.
Next Page * Moves the cursor to the next page of the table.
Moves the cursor to the previous page of the
Previous Page *
table.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

* The Next Page (N) and Back Page (B) operations are displayed for # register constant tables.

9-44
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

9.4.4 Switching Input Modes

The input modes for input table data can be switched to select the most efficient mode. The direction the cursor
will move after cell data input can also be specified.
(1) Table Data Input Modes
Input Mode Details
Only setting cells can be entered in Settings Input Mode. No inputs
Settings Input Mode can be made to other cells.
Select Input − Input Setting Data from the Table Program Menu.
Data can be entered into any cell in the table.
Table Definition Input
Select Input − Input Table Definition from the Table Program
Mode
Menu.
Only register numbers can be entered in Register Input Mode. No
Register Input Mode inputs can be made to other cells.
Select Input − Input Register from the Table Program Menu.

(2) Switching Cursor Movement Direction

Switch the cursor movement direction after table data has been entered and the Enter Key pressed using the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Select Input − Direction of Cursor Movement from the Table Program Menu.
2. The Designate Direction of Cursor Movement Window will be displayed. Specify the direction of
movement from Horizontal Direction (Right), Vertical Direction (Down), or No movement and click the
OK Button.

9.4.5 Entering # Register Constant Table Data

# register constant tables are created by entering constants (integer, double-length integer, and real number), sym-
bols, and # register numbers.
When a # register constant table is saved, the constants are automatically converted and the results placed in the
# registers after the upper and lower limits of each constant have been checked.
Table data can be created for as many # registers as are set on the Drawing Properties Tab Page in the Drawing
Properties Window.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Setting Details
Data Name Enter constant names of up to 48 characters.
Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the destination #
Symbol
register.
Save Point Enter the # register number to which the constant will be saved. 9
Enter the constant to be saved to the # register. When entering values
in hexadecimal, add an H to the beginning of the value, such as
H00FF.
Set Value
When entering settings, enter values within the range in the Lower
Limit and Upper Limit columns. The settings will be checked against
these limits.
Unit Enter a unit for the constant of up to 8 characters.
Lower Limit Enter the lower limit of the constant.
Enter the upper limit of the constant. The lower limit must be equal
Upper Limit
to or less than the upper limit.

9-45
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.6 Entering M Register Constant Table Data

• Save Point, Set Value, Lower Limit, and Upper Limit must be set. An error will occur when the table is
IMPORTANT
saved if these are not set.
• # register constant tables cannot be created if the number of # registers is set to 0 on the Drawing Properties
Tab Page in the Drawing Properties Window.

9.4.6 Entering M Register Constant Table Data

M register constant tables are created by entering constants (integer, double-length integer, real number, and
hexadecimal constants), symbols, and M register numbers. When an M register constant table is saved, it is auto-
matically converted to a subroutine that saves the constants to M registers after the upper and lower limits of each
constant have been checked. The subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the main program.
Up to 200 rows of table data can be entered.

Setting Details
Data Name Enter constant names of up to 48 characters.
Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the destination M
Symbol
register.
Save Point Enter the M register number to which the constant will be saved.
Enter the constant to be saved in the M register. When entering in
hexadecimal, add an H to the beginning of the value, such as H00FF.
Set Value When entering settings, enter values within the range in the Lower
Limit and Upper Limit columns. The settings will be checked against
these limits.
Unit Enter a unit for the constant of up to 8 characters.
Lower Limit Enter the lower limit of the constant.
Enter the upper limit of the constant. The lower limit must be equal
Upper Limit
to or less than the upper limit.

The Save Point, Set Value, Lower Limit, and Upper Limit must be set. An error will occur when the table is saved if these
INFO
are not set.

9-46
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

9.4.7 Entering I/O Conversion Table Data

Input registers and conversion equations are designated in I/O conversion tables, and the output register to which
the result of the conversion will be saved is defined. When a I/O conversion table is saved, it is automatically
converted to a subroutine that converts the values in the input registers according to the conversion equation and
saves the results in the output registers. An additional equation that checks the upper and lower limits can be
added for the results of the scale conversion. Subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the
main program.
Up to 200 rows of table data can be entered.

Setting Details
Data Name Enter a name of up to 36 characters.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the input register.
Enter the input register number. The current value will be displayed in
Input Register
Online Mode.
Unit Enter a unit of up to 8 characters for the input register value.
Setting Lower Limit Enter the lower limit for the check after scale conversion.
Range Upper Limit Enter the upper limit for the check after scale conversion.
Enter the equation for converting the input register values. Leave a
Scale Change/Bit space between the input equation values and the operands. Refer to the
Signal Conversion Set Machine Controller MP900 Series User's Manual: Ladder Program-
ming (SIEZ-C887-1.2) for information on conversion equations.
Symbol Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the output register.
Enter the number of the output register to which the scale-converted
Output Register
value from the input register is to be saved.
Unit Enter a unit of up to 8 characters for the output register value.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

• The Register in Input and Register in Output must be set. An error will occur when the table is saved if they
IMPORTANT
are not set.
• I/O conversion tables cannot be created for user functions.

9.4.8 Entering Interlock Table Data

Interlock tables define the device startup and operation and other interlock conditions. Interlock conditions are
defined by entering symbols, bit register numbers, and signal type (N.O. CONTACT, N.C. CONTACT, or COIL).
When an interlock table is saved, it is automatically converted to a subroutine made up of N.O. CONTACTs,
N.C. CONTACTs, and COILs. Subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the main program.
Refer to the following sections.
• Entering table data 9
• Switching between subtables and main tables
• Splitting and joining blocks
• Registering comments

TERMS Interlock tables

Interlock tables are a type of table program that show device startup and operating conditions.

9-47
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.8 Entering Interlock Table Data

(1) Entering Table Data

Up to 500 rows and 25 columns of table data can be entered.

Setting Details
The row number for each block is displayed. The blocks are num-
No.
bered alphabetically, and are followed by a numeric row number.
Enter the input mode for interlock conditions as I, S, O, or X. Refer
M (Mode)
to Table 9.1 Interlock I/O Modes given after this table.
Data Name Enter a name of up to 48 characters.
Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the register num-
Symbol
ber to be interlocked.
Register Enter the bit register number that controls the interlock.
Enter the interlock condition. Enter A for N.O. CONTACT, B for
Signal (1 to 17) N.C CONTACT, and C for COIL. ( ) will be displayed for N.O.
CONTACT, ( ) for N.C. CONTACT, and ( ) for COIL.

Table 9.1 Interlock I/O Modes

M (Mode) Details
Used when defining input signals. N.O. CONTACT ( ) and N.C.
I CONTACT ( ) can be input in columns 1 to †† in rows defined
in this mode.
Used when entering table data in subtables. This mode is effective
S only for main tables. The subtable output and the main table input
symbols (or registers) must be the same.
Used when defining output signals. COIL ( ) can be input in col-
O
umns 1 to †† in rows defined in this mode.
Used when defining output signals as input signals. Nothing has to
be set for the Register when this mode has been input. Define the
X
same symbol output within the main table if working with the main
table, and within subtable 1 if working within subtable 1.

„ Deleting Condition Signals

INFO
Select the signal to be deleted and press the Space Bar. The column for the deleted signal will be cleared.

• The M (Mode), Register, and Signal must be set. An error will occur when the table is saved if these are not
IMPORTANT
set.
• Interlock tables cannot be created for user functions.

9-48
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

(2) Switching Between Subtables and Main Tables

Interlock tables are made up of one main interlock table and interlock subtables which correspond to rows in the
main interlock table.
Subtables are created when interlock conditions are divided into different levels. The subtable numbers are deter-
mined by the row number in the main table, with the subtable for row A01 being called subtable A01, and the
subtable for row B02 being called subtable B02.
Select View − Sub Table/Main Table from the Table Program Menu to switch between main tables and subtables.

When switching from main tables to subtables, the cursor must already be in the row in the main table.
INFO
No subtable can be displayed for a row where data other than S is set in the M (Mode).

(3) Splitting and Joining Blocks

Interlocks can be split into a maximum of 26 blocks, to treat each block as an independent interlock.
Split and join blocks using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the block to be split or joined.

M1 POWER ON
M2 POWER ON
M3 POWER ON

2. Select View − Block Division from the Table Program Menu.

The block will be split or joined.

M1 POWER ON
M2 POWER ON
M3 POWER ON

• Each time the split/join operation is executed, splitting and joining blocks will be performed alternately.
INFO
• Blocks in subtables cannot be split, and one interlock cannot be extended across multiple blocks. Each interlock must
consist of one block only.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

(4) Registering Comments
Select whether or not to register the data in the Data Name column as the register comment for the same row
using the following procedure.
1. Select Edit − Entry Comment from the Table Program Menu.
2. Select either Register name as comment or Do not register name as comment in the Comment Registration
Selection Window.
3. Click the OK Button.

9.4.9 Entering Part Composition Table Data

Part composition tables are created by entering I/O register numbers for user functions and work register num-
bers. When a part composition table is saved, each row of the part composition table is treated as one function
program, the register numbers in the user function programs are re-allocated, and a subroutine is created contain- 9
ing the same functions. Subroutines can be called by using the XCALL instruction in the main program.
Refer to the following sections.
• Entering table data
• Switching part units
• Switching table formats

9-49
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.9 Entering Part Composition Table Data

(1) Entering Table Data

Up to 100 rows of table data can be entered. Only 32 columns in total of input and output data, however, can be
entered.

Setting Details
Data Name Enter a name of up to 36 characters.
Enter an existing user function signal. After the signal is input, the I/
Part Name
O signals for user functions will be displayed automatically.
Enter the input register numbers or direct values to be allocated to
Input each user function input. Add an H to the beginning of the values
when entering in hexadecimal.
Enter the output register numbers for allocating each user function
Output
output.
Head Work, REG No.
(DW, #W) Enter the D register number or # register number for allocating the
(D or # Register No. for work registers used within the user function.
Work Register)

• Part composition tables cannot be created for user functions.

• The default number of columns for Input and Output in the part composition table will contain three columns each by
default. The number of columns must be increased beforehand when inputting functions with four or more I/Os for the
Part Name.

(2) Switching Part Units

Switch between single part or multiple part composition tables using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Designate Part Unit from the Table Program Menu. The Designate Part Unit Window will
be displayed.
2. Designate the part unit, Single Selection or Multiple Designation, in the window and click the OK Button.
The table unit will be switched and the part composition table will be displayed.

(3) Switching Table Formats

There are two formats for part composition tables: Normal display, which displays register numbers only, and
Symbol + Settings display which displays register numbers and user function symbols.
To switch between Normal display and Symbol + Settings display, select View − Disp Selection from the Table
Program Menu.
The table format will be switched and the part composition table displayed.

The table format cannot be switched if Single Selection is selected in the Designate Part Unit Window.
INFO
\

9-50
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

9.4.10 Entering Data in C Constant Tables

C registers are registered on C constant tables and can be only accessed from DWG and function programs.
Up to 200 C registers can be registered and are managed as a unit using the C Register Constant Table List.
Opened from menus

C
C Register Open C
C
Constant Table C constant tables
List

(Accessed only)

C
C
C
Drawings

(1) Outline of Creation Procedure

1. Open the C register constant table list. (Refer to 9.4.2 Table Program Windows.)
2. Select a C constant table or create a new one.
3. Open the C constant table.
4. Edit the C constant table.
5. Save the C constant table.

(2) Configuration of Constant Table (C Register) Map Window

(C Register Constant Table List Window)
The C Register Constant Table List Window displays a list of the registered C constant tables in ascending order.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

The C Constant Table Window can be opened and C register data defined from the C Register Constant Table
List Window.

Display Details
No. Number within table.
Tbl Name
Displays the C constant table names. 9
(Table Name)
Register Displays the number of the leading C register.
Displays the number of C registers starting from the leading C regis-
Size
ter number in words.
Comment Displays the C constant table comments.

9-51
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.10 Entering Data in C Constant Tables

(3) C Register Constant Table List Menu

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the C Register Constant Table List
Window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Closes the C Register Constant Table List Win-
Close
dow.
Registers a shortcut for the C Register Constant
Register in User Menu
Table List window.
Constant Table Opens C constant tables.
New Open Creates a new C constant table.
Delete Deletes C constant tables.
Update Modifies C constant tables.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Window
Displays the operating status of the motion pro-
Motion Task Manager
gram.
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

(4) Operation in the C Register Constant Table List Window

The following operations are possible in the C Register Constant Table List Window.
• Opening C constant tables
• Creating new C constant tables
• Deleting C constant tables
• Modifying C constant table information
(a) Opening C Constant Tables
1. Click the C constant table number in the No. column on the C constant table.
Product Info.
Line Constant
Procon

2. Select File − Constant Table (C) from the C Register Constant Table List Menu. The C constant table
selected in step 1 will be opened.
The C Constant Table Window can also be opened by double-clicking the table number in step 1.

9-52
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

(b) Creating New C Constant Tables

Create new C constant tables using the following procedure. When a new table is created, the C constant
table for that table will be opened.
1. Select File − New Open from the C Register Constant Table List Menu. The New Window will be
displayed.

2. Enter the table name for Name, leading register number for Register Number, size for Size C Register, and
comment for Comment in the New Window and click the OK Button.
3. The C Constant Table Window will be displayed.

• Enter a table name of up to 8 characters. Enter a leading register number between CW0 and CW4095. The sum of the
INFO
leading register number and number entered for the Size must be 4096 or less.
• Leading register numbers and register sizes that overlap with other C register ranges cannot be input.

(5) Deleting C Constant Tables

Delete C constant tables using the following procedure.
1. Click the No. of the C constant table to be deleted.
Product Info.
Line Constant
Procon

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

2. Select File − Delete from the C Register Constant Table List Menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the message box.
The C constant table selected in step 1 will be deleted.
Product Info.
Procon

(6) Modifying C Constant Table Information

Modify the register range and other C constant table information using the following procedure. The C Constant
Table Window for that C constant table will be displayed after the modifications have been made.
1. Click the No. of the C constant table to be modified.
Product Info. 9
Procon

2. Select File − Update from the C Register Constant Table List Menu. The Update Window will be
displayed.
3. Select the items to be modified in the Update Window and click the OK Button. The C Constant Table
Window will be displayed.

9-53
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.10 Entering Data in C Constant Tables

The name of the register table cannot be modified. Enter a leading register number between CW0 and CW4095. The sum
INFO
of the leading register number and the number entered for Size must be 4096 or less. Leading register numbers and register
sizes that overlap with other C register ranges cannot be input.

(7) Opening C Constant Table Windows

C constant tables are opened by selecting the corresponding C constant table number in the C Register Constant
Table List Window and then selecting File − Constant Table (C). They can also be opened by double-clicking the
corresponding C constant table number.

9-54
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

(8) C Constant Table Menu

The following table shows the functions of menu commands in the C Constant Table Window.

Menu Command Function

File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the C Constant Table Window.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Save Saves C constant tables.
Delete Not used with this window.
Page Setting Sets print paper margins.
Print Table Prints C constant tables.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Cut Cuts table data.
Copy Copies table data to the clipboard.
Paste Reproduces data on the clipboard.
Delete Row Deletes multiple consecutive rows.
Insert Row Inserts a blank row.
Input
Input Setting Data Switches to Settings input mode.
Input Table Definition Switches to Table Definition input mode.
Input Register Switches to Register input mode.
Direction of Cursor
Changes the direction of cursor movement.
Movement
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Displays the operating status of the motion pro-
Motion Task Manager
gram.
Display Head Row Moves the cursor to the first row of the table.
Display Designated
Moves the cursor to a specific row in the table.
Row
Display Last Row Moves the cursor to the last row of the table.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

9-55
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.10 Entering Data in C Constant Tables

(9) Setting C Constant Tables

C registers are created by entering constants (integer, double-length integer, real number, and hexadecimal con-
stants), symbols, and C register numbers. When a C register table is saved, the constants are automatically con-
verted to C registers after the upper and lower limits of each constant are checked.
Table data can be created for as many C registers as are currently open.
No. Data Name Symbol Save Point Set Value Unit Lower Upper
Limit Limit

1
2

C register definition area

Table name Leading Register No. Input Mode

Setting Details
Data Name Enter a name for each constant of up to 48 characters.
Enter a symbol of up to 8 characters to be used for the destination C
Symbol
register.
Save Point Enter the C register number to which the constants will be saved.
Enter the constant to be saved to the C register. When entering in
hexadecimal, add an H to the beginning of the value, such as H00FF.
Set Value When entering settings, enter values within the range in the Lower
Limit and Upper Limit columns. The settings will be checked against
these limits.
Unit Enter a unit for the constant of up to 8 characters.
Lower Limit Enter the lower limit of the constant.
Enter the upper limit of the constant. The lower limit must be less
Upper Limit
than or equal to the upper limit.
Table Name Displays the name of the currently displayed C constant table.
Displays the leading C register number in the currently displayed C
Leading Register No.
constant table.
Input Mode Displays the current input mode.

The Set Value, Lower Limit, Upper Limit, and Save Point must be set. An error will occur when the table is
IMPORTANT
saved if these are not set.

9-56
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

9.4.11 Editing Table Programs

This section describes the editing functions used for all table programs. Table programs can be edited by row,
column, or block.
• Moving the cursor
• Selecting table cells to edit
• Cutting and pasting table data
• Inserting and deleting rows
• Inserting and deleting columns
(1) Moving the Cursor
The cursor is normally moved by pressing the Cursor Keys or clicking a cell in the table. The cursor can also be
moved to the first or last row and the previous or next page as required.
(a) To First Row
Select View − Display Head Row from the Table Program Menu. The cursor will move to the first row in the
table.

(b) To Last Row

Select View − Display Last Row from the Table Program Menu. The cursor will move to the last row in the
table.

(c) To Specific Row

1. Select View − Display Designated Row from the Table Program Menu. The Setting display row Window
will be displayed.
2. In the Setting display row Window, enter the row number to which the cursor is to be moved and click the
OK Button. The cursor will move to the specified row.

(d) To Next Page (Valid only for # Register Constant Tables)

Select View − Next Page from the Table Program Menu. The cursor will move to the first row of the next
page.

(e) To Previous Page (Valid only for # Register Constant Tables)

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

Select View − Back Page from the Table Program Menu. The cursor will move to the first row of the previ-
ous page.

(2) Selecting Table Cells to Edit

1. Click the top-left cell of the section to be edited.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime ATime
DecelerateTime DTime
ShortStopTime STime

2. Drag the cursor to the bottom-right cell of the section.

LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime
DecelerateTime
ATime
DTime 9
ShortStopTime STime

9-57
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.11 Editing Table Programs

(3) Cutting and Pasting Table Data

Table cells can be cut, copied, and pasted. The table data editing functions can be used only in Table Definition
Input Mode. Select Input − Input Table Definition from the C Constant Table Menu to enter the Table Definition
Input Mode.
(a) Cutting Table Data
Cut table data within a specified section using the following procedure. Cut data is copied to the clipboard,
and this data can be reproduced multiple times by using the paste operation.
1. Select the section to be cut.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime ATime

2. Select Edit − Cut from the Table Program Menu.

The data specified in step 1 will be cut.
LineMaxSpeed

AccelerateTime ATime

(b) Copying Table Data

Copy table data within a specified section to the clipboard using the following procedure. This data can be
reproduced multiple times by using the paste operation.
1. Select the section to be copied.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime ATime

2. Select Edit − Copy from the Table Program Menu.

The section specified in step 1 will be copied to the clipboard.

(c) Pasting Table Data

Paste the contents of the clipboard into a table using the following procedure. The table data that has been
previously cut or copied to the clipboard can be pasted. The data on the clipboard can be pasted multiple
times, and is cleared and replaced with new data each time the cut or copy operations are used.
1. Move the cursor to the section where the contents of the clipboard is to be pasted.
LineMaxSpeed

AccelerateTime ATime

2. Select Edit − Paste from the Table Program Menu.

The data will be reproduced at the position specified in step 1.

(4) Inserting and Deleting Rows

(a) Inserting Rows
Insert one or more blank rows at any point in the table using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the position where a row is to be inserted.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime ATime

2. Select Edit − Insert Row from the Table Program Menu. The Insert Row Window will be displayed.

9-58
 9.4 Creating Table Programs

3. Enter the number of rows to be inserted in the Insert Row Window and click the OK Button. The number
of specified rows will be inserted.
LineMaxSpeed

DecelerateTime

(b) Deleting Rows

Delete one or more consecutive rows using the following procedure.
1. Click the row to be deleted.
LineMaxSpeed
FullSpeed
AccelerateTime ATime
DecelerateTime DTime

2. Select Edit − Delete Row from the Table Program Menu.

The row specified in step 1 will be deleted.
LineMaxSpeed
DecelerateTime DTime
ShortStopTime STime

All of the rows currently displayed cannot be deleted.

INFO

(5) Inserting and Deleting Columns

Columns can be inserted or deleted in interlock or part composition tables.
(a) Inserting Columns
Insert one or more column at the cursor position using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the position where the column is to be inserted.
M2Roll
M4Roll

Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming

M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation

2. Select Edit − Insert Column from the Table Program Menu. The Column Insert Window will be
displayed.
3. Enter the number of columns to be inserted in the Column Insert Window and click the OK Button. The
number of specified columns will be inserted.
M2Roll
M4Roll

M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation

Columns can be inserted in the Signal columns (1 to 17) in interlock tables, and in the Input and Output columns in part
INFO
composition tables.
9

9-59
 9 Program Folder 1: Ladder Programming
9.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs

(b) Deleting Columns

Delete one or more consecutive columns using the following procedure.
1. Select part of the column to be deleted.
M2Roll
M4Roll

M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation

2. Select Edit − Delete Column from the Table Program Menu.

The column or columns specified in step 1 will be deleted.
M2Roll
M4Roll

M1RollPreparation
M2RollPreparation

Columns can be inserted in the Signal columns (1 to 17) in interlock tables, and in the Input and Output columns in part
INFO
composition tables.

9.4.12 Saving and Closing Table Programs

(1) Saving
If a LADDER Window for DWG or function program window is open, all programs, such as main programs, will
be saved at the same time.
1. Select File − Save from the Table Program Menu.
2. A window to confirm saving will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
3. Click the OK Button in the window to inform normal completion of saving.

• Interlock tables can be saved even if contact and COIL settings have not been made. This improves the
IMPORTANT
operability of the MPE720 by allowing the user to temporarily interrupt programming. The contact and
COIL settings must be made, however, before the program is executed.
• The table programs will be compiled when they are saved. The Save Error Window will be displayed if a
compile error is detected.
• Refer to Save Error Window Configuration in 9.3.11 Saving Ladder Programs for information on the Save
Error Window.

(2) Closing
The process of creating table programs can be exited by closing the Table Program Window.
Select File − Close from the Table Program Menu to close the Table Program Window.

9.4.13 Printing Table Programs

Table programs can be printed from the Table Program Window without starting the Print Manager. Only the
table program that is currently open, however, will be printed.
Refer to 9.3.12 Printing Ladder Programs for information on page settings and printing.

9-60
 10
Program Folder 2:
Motion Programming

This chapter describes the procedure to develop motion programs.

10.1 Developing Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2

10.1.1 Outline of Developing Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2

10.2 Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3

10.2.1 Outline of Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
10.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
10.2.3 Group Definition Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.2.4 Setting Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.2.5 Saving Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
10.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
10.2.7 Closing Group Definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10

10.3 Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11

10.3.1 Outline of Creating Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11
10.3.2 Setting the Number of Common Registers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

10.3.3 Setting Motion Properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-13
10.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-15
10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-17
10.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-20
10.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-24
10.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-25

10.4 Compiling Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26

10.4.1 Compile Execution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26
10.4.2 Compile Execution Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-26
10.4.3 Normal Completion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-27
10.4.4 Error Completion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-27

10.5 Debugging Motion Programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-28

10.5.1 Outline of Debug Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-28
10.5.2 Opening the Debug Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-28 10
10.5.3 Debug Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-31

10-1
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.1.1 Outline of Developing Motion Programs

10.1 Developing Motion Programs

10.1.1 Outline of Developing Motion Programs
The following figure outlines the procedure to develop motion programs. It is assumed that the module configu-
ration and system configuration have already been defined.
Define Module Configuration. Refer to Chapter 8 Definition
Change Folder 5: Module Configura-
motion tion Definitions.
parameters.

Define System Configuration. Refer to Chapter 3 System

Set the Configuration Definitions.
Feed- scans.
back
Sets the motion control envi-
Define Groups. ronment, e.g., control signals,
Set signals number of axes, etc.
and axes.

Develops program on the

Create the motion program. Motion Editor.

Check program with Monitor. Test with Debug Operation.

Refer to Chapter 12 Tools.

Start actual operation.

10-2
 10.2 Group Definitions

10.2 Group Definitions

This section explains how to set definitions for the groups, which are important settings for executing motion
programs.

Groups can be defined only in offline mode and logging on.

IMPORTANT
If you are in online mode, log off and then log in again in offline mode to enable defining the group. Group
Definitions can be referenced in either online or offline mode.

10.2.1 Outline of Group Definitions

(1) Groups
One group defines all of the axes for managing one set of control signals. The same axis cannot be defined in
more than one group.

(2) Group Registration

Several groups can be controlled by a Machine Controller. The group is registered mainly by defining the control
signals and axis information.
For Machine Controllers for which four groups can be registered, four independent motion programs are exe-
cuted in parallel by one Machine Controller. At least one group must be registered to execute the motion pro-
grams.

(3) Number of Groups and Tasks

With the MP900-series Machine Controllers, the number of groups and the number of tasks is set in the group
definitions. The number of motion programs executed in parallel will be the number of groups times the number
of tasks in each group.
For example, if there are three tasks in Group 1 and four tasks in Group 2, then seven motion programs will be
executed in parallel, as shown in the following figure.
Group 1 Task 1 MPM001 PFORK□，□，・・・□

Task 2 MPM002 ・・・

Task 3 MPM003 ・・・

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Group 2 Task 1 MPM009 ・・・

Task 2 MPM010 ・・・

Task 3 MPM011 ・・・

Task 4 MPM012 ・・・

DWG programs Motion programs

With the MP2000-series Machine Controllers, up to 16 motion programs can be executed in parallel, regardless
of the number of groups or the number of tasks.
The maximum number of programs that can be executed in parallel is as follows:
• MP940: 1 group × 4 tasks = 4 programs
10
• MP930: 4 groups × 4 tasks = 16 programs
• MP920: 8 groups × 8 tasks = 64 programs
• MP2100: 16 programs
• MP2300: 16 programs

10-3
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window

The PFORK command can also be used for executing small tasks, so the number of programs that can be exe-
cuted in parallel is actually greater than this. Hardware resources are shared, so be sure to consider the effects on
overall system performance.
With the MP2100/2300, the maximum number of programs that can be executed in parallel is fixed at 16.

10.2.2 Opening Group Definition Window

To open from the File Manager, double-click the Group Definition File Icon.
To open from the Engineering Manager Window, select File − Open − Definition − Group Definition.

(1) Login Information

Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Group Definition Window. Hyphens will be displayed in
offline mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port.
Displays the unit number of the MP900/MP2000-series Machine
UT#
Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto.

(2) Tab Pages

The Group Definition window is composed of several tab pages: the Group List and Group 01 Tab Pages.
Tab Page Details
Group List Registers the group names.
Group 01 Sets the detailed group information.

The tab pages can be scrolled in the following order by selecting View − Next Page from the menus.
INFO
• Group List → Group 01 → Group 02 → ...
To scroll pages in the opposite direction, select View − Back Page from the menus.

10-4
 10.2 Group Definitions

10.2.3 Group Definition Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Group Definition Window.

Menu Command Function

File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes the Group Definition Window.
Register in User Menu Registers a shortcut for the group definitions.
Save Saves group definitions.
Delete Deletes group definitions.
Print Prints group definition contents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Next Page Displays the next tab page.
Back Page Displays the previous tab page.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

10.2.4 Setting Group Definitions

Set the group name first, and then define the operation of each group.
(1) Group List Tab Page
This tab page is used to divide motion programs into multiple groups for processing. Each group has an individ-
ual group number, DWG number, and group name. The group number and DWG number are pre-defined, but the

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

user sets the group name on the Group List tab page.
Display/Setting Details
Displays the group number.
Group No. From four to eight groups can be created, depending on the Machine
Controller type.
Displays the DWG number that corresponds to the group number.
The DWG number cannot be changed.
This DWG number indicates the location where the motion program
DWG No. control ladder program is generated when Create Ladder Dwgs.
(automatic program generation) is specified in the detailed group
information. If Create Ladder Dwgs. is not specified, the DWG
number is not relevant. The contents cannot be changed.
Group Name Displays and sets the group name with up to 16 characters.
Save Button Clicking the Save button saves the group name to the Group List.
10
• Setting Group Names
Set group names using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the position in the Group Name column where the group name is to be input.
2. Input the group name and press the Enter key.
3. Click the Save button. A group number tab corresponding to the group name will be added to the window.

10-5
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.2.4 Setting Group Definitions

Added group setting tab

Group List Group 01

(2) Group 01 Tab Page

This tab page is used to define the detailed information for the group.
Detailed group information must be set separately for each group.

Details
Display/Setting
MP900 Series MP2000 Series
Group Name Displays the name of the group currently being defined.
Axis (Number of Con-
Input the number of axes to be controlled by the group.
trolled Axes)
Task (Number of Input the number of main motion programs to be This setting is not possible with the MP2000
Tasks) run simultaneously. Series. It is fixed at 16 max.
This setting is not possible with the MP2000
Allocate group input signals for Create Ladder
Series. Create Ladder Dwgs. (automatic pro-
Group Input Signal Dwgs. (automatic program generation) to I or M
gram generation) has been removed and so this
registers.
function has also been removed.
Define the registers for setting the override sig-
This setting is not possible with the MP2000
nals.
Override Signal Series. Set the interpolation override to the third
The default settings are recommended. If the sig-
word of the MSEE instruction’s work registers.
nals must be changed, use M registers.
Create Ladder Dwgs.
Specify whether a motion management ladder This setting is not possible with the MP2000
(Automatic Program
program is to be generated automatically. Series. This function has been removed.
Generation)
The MSEE instruction is used to start a motion
This setting is not possible with the MP2000
Program Status/Con- program from a ladder program for automati-
Series. Create Ladder Dwgs. (automatic pro-
trol (Motion Work Reg- cally generating motion programs. Define the
gram generation) has been removed and so this
isters) work registers to be used with the MSEE instruc-
function has also been removed.
tion.
Allocate a logical axis name, within eight characters, to the physical axis numbers for the number of
Axis Definition
controlled axes.
This setting is not possible with the MP2000
Allocate axis input signals for Create Ladder
Series. Create Ladder Dwgs. (automatic pro-
Axis Input Signal Dwgs. (automatic program generation) to I or M
gram generation) has been removed and so this
registers.
function has also been removed.

10-6
 10.2 Group Definitions

(Cont’d)
Details
Display/Setting
MP900 Series MP2000 Series
Set the leading register number for outputting
alarms. M, I, or O integer registers can be speci-
fied. The number of continuous alarm registers With the MP2000 Series, notification of motion
will be used for the number of parallel processes program alarms is made to S registers. If motion
used for the motion programs in that group. For programs are started individually and there are
example, if MW00010 is defined as the leading four parallel processes, notification of alarms
alarm output register and there are four parallel will be made to the following registers.
Alarm Out (Alarm Out- processes, then MW00010 to MW00013 will be Parallel process 1 alarm register
SW3268 並列処理1アラームレジスタ
put Register) used in order of parallel numbers. Parallel process 2 alarm register
SW3271 並列処理2アラームレジスタ
SW3274 Parallel process 3 alarm register
並列処理3アラームレジスタ
MW00010 Parallel process 1 alarm register
SW3277 Parallel process 4 alarm register
並列処理4アラームレジスタ
MW00011 Parallel process 2 alarm register
Refer to Motion Program Status on page 10-8 for
MW00012 Parallel process 3 alarm register
details on alarm output registers.
MW00013 Parallel process 4 alarm register

Define the leading register number for output-

ting the current position. M, I, or O double-
length integer registers can be specified. The
number of continuous current position output
With the MP2000 Series, notification of the cur-
register will be used for the number of controlled
rent position is made to S registers. If motion
axes. For example, if ML00020 is defined as the
programs are started individually and there are
leading current position register and there are
three controlled axes, notification of the current
three controlled axes, then registers ML00020 to
position will be made to the following registers.
Pos Output (Position ML00024 will be used in order from axis 01.
Output Register) SL3290 Logical axis 01 current position
論理軸01現在位置
SL3292 Logical axis 02 current position
論理軸02現在位置
ML00020 Logical axis 01 current position
SL3294 Logical axis 03 current position
論理軸03現在位置

Logical axis 02 current position

Refer to Motion Program Status on page 10-8 for
ML00022
details on position output registers.

ML00024 Logical axis 03 current position

Sets whether or not to restart from the ABORT

status. Consult with your Yaskawa representative This setting is not possible with the MP2000

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Restart
before using this feature, for which restrictions Series.
exist.

The same alarm output registers are used for all tasks. To manage alarms separately for each task when two or
IMPORTANT
more tasks are set, save the contents of the alarm output registers to other registers immediately following the
MSEE instruction in the ladder program.

„ Override Signal for MP2000-series Machine Controllers

INFO
The interpolation feed speed can be overridden in the range 0% to 327.67%. The override setting is set in the third word of
the MSEE instruction’s work registers. The interpolation override value depends upon the setting of bit 14 (Interpolation
override setting) in the second word of the MSEE instructions’s work registers.
Override Enable Bit OFF: Override fixed at 100%.
Override Enable Bit ON: Use preset override. 10
F command Interpolation speed over-
FMX × IFP commands
× ride (100% = 10,000) = Output speed

F command
Interpolation Output
speed override speed

FMX × IFP commands

10-7
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.2.4 Setting Group Definitions

The following move commands are related to the interpolation feed speed:
• F command: F designation in interpolation command
• IFP command: INTERPOLATION FEED SPEED RATIO SETTING
• FMX command: MAXIMUM INTERPOLATION FEED SPEED SETTING
• IAC command: INTERPOLATION ACCELERATION TIME CHANGE
• IDC command: INTERPOLATION DECELERATION TIME CHANGE
• SCC command: S-CURVE TIME CONSTANT CHANGE
„ Motion Program Status
In the MP2000-series Machine Controllers, the status of the motion program is reported in the S registers. The following
figure shows the S-registers used by the motion program as well as details on the work status.
Work Program Numbers
ワーク使用プログラム番号

S Registers
Sレジスタ Work 1 program number 1W
ワーク1使用プログラム番号
SW3200 Number of motion program in operation
動作中のモーションプログラムの番号
Execution
実行プログラム領域program Work 2 program number 1W
ワーク2使用プログラム番号
area The motion programs reported here use the
ここに報告されているモーションプログラムが
16W corresponding work status words.
各ワークステータスを使用します。
SW3216
予備 Work 16 program number 1W
ワーク16使用プログラム番号
Reserved

Work 1 program status

ワーク1プログラムステータス 1W Indicate the status flags and control signals
SW3264 ワーク1を使用しているモーションプログラム
Work 1 program control sig-
ワーク1プログラム制御信号
for the motion program that is using work 1.
のステータスと制御信号を表示します。
Work 1 status
ワーク1ステータス nals 1W

Parallel 1 program number

並列1プログラム番号 1W
58W
Parallel 1 program block
並列1プログラムブロック番号
SW3322 number 1W
Work 2 status
ワーク2ステータス
並列1プログラムエラーコード
Parallel 1 program error code 1W

58W Parallel 2 program number

並列2プログラム番号 1W
Parallel 2 program block
並列2プログラムブロック番号
Indicate the 8 parallel sets of data for the
ワーク1を使用しているモーションプログラム
number 1W
motion program that is using work 1. Indicate
の8並列分の表示。最終ネストプログラム番
Parallel 2 program error code 1W
並列2プログラムエラーコード the last nested program number, executed
号と実行ブロックおよびエラーコードを表示し
SW4134 ます。 and error code.
block,
Work 16 status
ワーク16ステータス
Parallel 8 program number
並列8プログラム番号 1W
58W Parallel 8 program block
SW4191 並列8プログラムブロック番号
number 1W

Parallel 8 program error code 1W

並列8プログラムエラーコード

Axis 01 current position 2W

軸01現在位置

Axis 02 current position 2W

軸02現在位置 Indicate the current positions of the logical
ワーク1を使用しているモーションプログラム
axes defined for the group which includes the
が属するグループに定義された論理軸の現
在位置 program that is using work 1.
motion
Axis 16 current position 2W
軸16現在位置

1. Work Status used by the Motion Program

The main motion program uses a single work status area during operation. The motion program alarms of the motion
program and the current positions of the logical axes are displayed in the work status area.
• Procedure when Specifying the Work Status Area
To specify the work status area used by the motion program, turn ON bit 13 (System work number setting) in the
second word of the MSEE instruction’s work registers. When the System work number setting is turned ON, the
motion program will used the work status area set in the fourth word (System work number) of the MSEE instruc-
tion’s work registers. If the specified system work number is out of range or already allocated, bit 14 (“No system
work” error) will be turned ON in the first word of the work registers.
• Procedure when Not Specifying the Work Status Area
The work status areas are used in the order that the motion programs are started, beginning from the work 1 status.
When two or more motion programs are started in the same scan, the work status areas are used in the order that the
MSEE instructions are called. Each work status area is released when the corresponding motion program ends.
Follow the steps outlined below to view the motion program alarms of the motion program and the current positions
of the logical axes.

10-8
 10.2 Group Definitions

Check the execution program area (SW3200 to SW3215) to

determine the work status area being used by the motion
programs currently being executed.

Check the desired data such as the motion program alarms

of the motion program.

2. Executing Multiple Motion Programs

EXAMPLE
In the following example, motion program MPM001 is started after motion program MPM003 is started.

Execution program 3 Work 1 program number

ワーク1使用プログラム番号
実行プログラム
Motion program (MPM003)
モーションプログラム（MPM003） 1 Work 2 program number
ワーク2使用プログラム番号
16W
MOV [A1] 1000
Ladder program
ラダープログラム 予備
Reserved
・・・・
MSEE MPM003 DA00000
・・・・ ワーク1ステータス
Work 1 status TheMPM003のワーク
work status of
MPM003 is displayed.
ステータスが表示されます
Motion program (MPM001)
モーションプログラム（MPM001）
58W

MOV [A1] 1000 ワーク2ステータス

Work 2 status
MSEE MPM003 DA00000
・・・・ TheMPM001のワーク
work status of
58W
・・・・ MPM001 is displayed.
ステータスが表示されます

When MPM003 has been started, the number 3 is reported to the work 1 program number (SW3200) in the
execution program area and MPM003 uses the work 1 status area. The motion program alarms and current
positions of the logical axes can be checked by reading the work 1 status information.
When MPM001 is started after MPM003 has started, the number 1 is reported to the work 2 program number
(SW3201) in the execution program area and MPM001 uses the work 2 status area. The motion program
alarms and current positions of the logical axes can be checked by reading the work 2 status information.

10.2.5 Saving Group Definitions

Save the group definitions using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the Group Definition Menu.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

2. Click the Yes Button in the Group Definition Message Box.
3. The AUTO EDIT Window will be displayed. Specify the motion program call method, and click the OK
Button.

4. Click the OK Button in the message box.

• The AUTO EDIT Window is displayed only when the group is defined with automatic program generation enabled
INFO
when Create Ladder Dwgs. is set to ON in the Group Definition Window. 10
• Group definition data can be saved only in offline mode. This data is thus not written to the Machine Controller when it
is saved. It is necessary to connect online to the Machine Controller and then transfer the group definition data.

10-9
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions

10.2.6 Deleting Group Definitions

Delete group definitions data using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Delete from the Group Definition Menu.
2. Click the Yes Button in the message box.

When a group is deleted, all of the group definition data will be deleted.
INFO

10.2.7 Closing Group Definitions

Defining a group is completed by closing the Group Definition Window.
To exit group definitions, close the Group Definition Window by selecting File − Close.

10-10
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

10.3 Creating Motion Programs

This section explains the basics of motion programming, from editing to compiling and saving files.

10.3.1 Outline of Creating Motion Programs

The following flowchart shows the standard steps in developing a motion program. The operations from starting
the File Manager on up to the definitions must be performed before beginning the motion programming.

ファイルマネージャ
File Manager startup
始動

Setting定義設定
definitions Module,
モジュール構成定義 System, and Group defi-
nitions
システム構成定義(setting the number of
common registers)
グループ定義
（グローバルレジスタ数の設定）
モーションエディタ
Motion Editor startup
起動 General-
汎用エディタ
purpose editor

Online
オンライン Import
インポート
Motion program
モーションプログラム
editing MPM†††.TXT
MPMxxx.TXT
MP940 編集 Export
BAT
TX
R
エクスポート
X
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
M
PRT2
E
RUN
C
Compiling
コンパイル
1 2 3 4 5 6

H
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
2
PP O
COPY L
→ NO I
N
PORT1 K

I/O

MPM†††
MPMxxx YES
Error?
エラー?
PORT2

NO
POWER

+24V LED
ファイル保存
GND
FG File saving and
＆
transferring
転送
Online
オンライン

Debugging
デバッグ

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

End
終了

Fig 10.1 Motion Program Development Flow

10

10-11
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.2 Setting the Number of Common Registers

10.3.2 Setting the Number of Common Registers

Defining common registers can be omitted, but it enables managing the common registers used in ladder pro-
grams and motion programs. Make the settings in the Setup of Register Writing Permission Window.
There are limits on the common registers (M and O registers) that can be used in motion programs. Motion pro-
grams that use registers that are out of the specified ranges will cause compiler errors to prevent mistakes in pro-
gramming.
The following figure shows an example of an M register map for the MP900-series Machine Controller. O regis-
ters depend on the I/O registers allocated in the Module Configuration Definitions.

MW00000 Reserved by the system

MW00001 Interpolation overrides

MW00002 Motion control work registers

Alarm output registers

Allocated in the Group Definition.
O and I registers can also be allo-
cated instead of M registers.

Current position output

registers

Not used The range of registers that

can be used is defined.
MW65535
MW32767

Fig 10.2 M Register Map

(1) Opening the Setup of Register Writing Permission Window

Open the Setup of Register Writing Permission Window using the following procedure.
1. Click the Motion Programs Folder in the Programs Folder in the File Manager window.

Programs

High Scan
Programs

Motion Pro-
Programs

2. Right-click the Motion Programs Folder, and select Open − Resister Writing Permission from the pop-
up menu.
The Setup of Register Writing Permission window will be displayed.

10-12
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

The Setup of Register Writing Permission Window can also be opened by selecting File − Open − Register Writing Per-
INFO
mission from the File Manager Menu.

(2) Setting the Register Writing Permission Properties

(a) M Register and O Register
Input the range of register numbers that can be used in the motion programs. Input M register number in dec-
imal and O register number in hexadecimal. The default range will be from 0 to the maximum register num-
ber. The maximum register number depends on the type of Machine Controller.

(b) User Privilege

Set the user privileges required to set the enabled ranges. Any user with privileges lower than the value set
here will not be able to set values.

(c) Set Button

Click the Set Button to enable the set values.

• When the Engineering Manager is opened, all values are for display only, i.e., they cannot be changed.
INFO
• One register write enable setting parameter file is created in the PLC Folder on the hard disk. The settings in this file are
effective for all of the motion programs within the same PLC folder.
• Register write enable ranges are checked only the M and O registers appear on the left side of substitution statements.
They are not check elsewhere.
• O registers OWC000 to OWCFFF are reserved by the system and are not checked for write enable ranges.

10.3.3 Setting Motion Properties

Motion properties consist of the attribute information for a motion program. Although the properties are set to
defaults by the system, they must be set according to the program structure, specifications, etc.
Motion properties can be updated at any time. These values are referenced during compiling, and a work area is
allocated.
Be sure to check the motion properties before beginning programming, and make settings as required.
(1) Opening the Motion Program Configuration Definition Window

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

(Motion Properties Window)
With the Motion Editor open, select File − Motion Properties from the Engineering Manager Menu.

10

Fig 10.3 Motion Properties Window

10-13
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.3 Setting Motion Properties

(2) Tab Pages

The Motion Program Configuration Definition Window is composed of two tab pages: the Configuration Defini-
tion and Update History Tab Pages.
Tab Page Details
Sets the program attributes. Normally, the default values should be
Configuration Definition
used.
Update History Displays the motion program update history.

(3) Configuration Definition Tab Page

Setting Details
This is not supported by the current version. There is no need to
Standardization Level
input anything here.
Input the read/write privileges for the motion program. For any
given data item, it is not possible to set a value higher than the cur-
File Privileges
rent user privilege. For details on file privileges, refer to 2.2.5 User
Management.
When using D registers in the motion program, enter the number of
words in the D registers. If 0 is input here, D register cannot be
accessed from the program.
If 10 is input, for example, the D register numbers that can be used in
D Register the program are as follows:
• Integer registers: DW00000 to DW00009
• Double-length integer registers: DL00000 to DL00008
• Real number registers: DF00000 to DF00008
• Bit registers: DB000000 to DB00009F
Set the maximum number of parallel processes to be specified by the
PFORK command.
• MP910: 8 (maximum number of parallel processes)
• MP920: 8 (maximum number of parallel processes)
Parallel Processing
• MP930: 4 (maximum number of parallel processes)
• MP940: 8 (maximum number of parallel processes)
• MP2100: 4 (maximum number of parallel processes)
• MP2300: 4 (maximum number of parallel processes)
Displays information related to the motion program. It is for refer-
Group No. to MBOX
ence only and cannot be changed.
This title will be output as a comment in the Print Confirmation Dia-
Title
log Box when the motion program list is printed.

(4) Update History Tab Page

The time and date at which the motion program was revised are registered automatically, along with the user
name that was logged on.

10-14
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

10.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor Window

The Motion Editor is a programming tool required in inputting and editing motion programs. It provides func-
tions such as text editing, compiling, debugging, and monitoring.
(a) Opening from the File Manager
There are three ways to open the Motion Editor.
• Method 1: Double-click the Motion Programs Folder in the File Manager.
• Method 2: Click the Motion Programs Folder in the File Manager and select File − Open − Motion
Editor from the File Manager Menu.
• Method 3: Right-click with the cursor on the Motion program file folder to display the pop-up menu.
Then select Open.

A new motion program can be created by selecting either of the following menu items while a motion-related
file or folder is selected.
• Select File − Create New Program.
• Select File − Open − Motion Editor.

(b) Opening from the Engineering Manager

From the Engineering Manager window, select File − Open − Motion Program − Motion Editor.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

10

10-15
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.4 Opening the Motion Editor Window

(1) Motion Editor Window Configuration

The Motion Editor is displayed as a single child window within its parent window, the Engineering Manager
window. Function windows other than the Motion Editor are also displayed in the Engineering Manager
window. When the Motion Editor is active, the Engineering Manager's menu bar will show the Motion Editor's
menu.

Engineering Manager
Menu bar (function menu)
Tool bar (Tool icons)
Motion Editor
PT# : CPU#:
CPU#
Group name Tool icons Debug tool icons

Row numbers Program edit area

Function bar (Debug function keys)

Status bar

Fig 10.4 Motion Editor Window Configuration

Configuration Details
Menu Bar The menu bar which is enabled by the Motion Editor.
Displays the name of the group in which the motion program is
Group Name
located.
Tool Icons Often used commands are available through these icons.
Row Numbers Row numbers are allocated automatically when the program is input.
Program Edit Area This is the area where the program is actually input.
Debug Tool Icons These are icons and function keys to which debugging functions are
Debug Function Keys allocated. For details, refer to 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs.

10-16
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions when the Motion Editor Window is active.

Menu Command Function

File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open
Definition
Module Configuration Display the various definition windows.
System Configuration
Scan Time Setting
Application Info.
Data Trace
Fault Monitor
Group Definition
Program
New Drawing
Properties
Main Program
SFC Flow Chart
SFC Time Chart
SFC Action Box
Constant Table (# Reg) Ladder programming tools
Constant Table (M
Reg)
I/O Conversion Table
Interlock Table
Part Composition
Table
Tuning Panel
Tool
Register List

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Cross Reference
Disable Coil List Displays Machine Controller registers.
Comment List
Register Replace
C Register
C Register Map
Table Data Definition
Table Data Map
Motion Program
Open New File Opens a new program.
Open Opens an existing program.

10

10-17
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus

(Cont’d)
Menu Command Function
Close Closes the Motion Editor.
Motion Properties Defines the motion properties.
Save & Save into flash
Saves to flash memory.
memory
Register in User Menu Registers a shortcut icon for the motion editor.
Save Saves the program.
Save New File Saves the program with a new name.
Delete Deletes a program.
Import Converts a text file to a motion program file.
Export Converts a motion program file to a text file.
Print Prints data.
Print Program Prints the active program.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Undo Cancels the last operation.
Cut
Copy Standard text editing commands
Paste
Find Finds a text string.
Replace Replaces one text string with another.
Jump Jumps to a specified row number.
Head Jumps to first row.
Last Jumps to last row.
Adds a semicolon at the last column of a pro-
Semicolon
gram row.
Takes the current position as a command oper-
Position Teaching
and.
View
Font Changes the font.
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Function Bar Displays the Function Bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Displays the operating status of the motion pro-
Motion task manager
gram.
Debug Operation Function
Allocates function keys for debug operation.
Bar
Position Teaching Function
Allocates function keys for teaching positions.
Bar
Error List Redisplays the error list display.
Monitor Parallel No.
Refer to 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs.
Monitor Regeneration
Automatically scrolls so that the operation cur-
Auto scrolling
sor is always in view.

10-18
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

(Cont’d)
Menu Command Function
Debug
Debug ON
Hold
Abort
Multi Step Run
Start Point
Break Point Refer to 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs.
Step Run
Step In
Code Generation
Current Value Update
Debug OFF
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

10

10-19
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions

10.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions

This section explains the commands that are commonly used from the menu bar and tool icons.
(1) Searching for a Character String
Search for a specified character string in a program that is being edited using the following procedure.
1. Select Edit − Find to display the Find Window.
2. Enter the character string to be searched for and specify the search direction, and then click the Find Next
Button.
a) When a matching character string is found, it will be displayed in reversed color and the search will
stop. Either click the Find Next Button again to resume the search for the next matching character
string or click the Cancel Button to stop the search.
b) If no matching character string is found, a sound will be made. Either enter a different character string
to be searched for and execute the search again, or click the Cancel Button to close the Find Window.

(2) Replacing a Character String

Replace one specified character string with another in a program that is being edited using the following proce-
dure.
1. Select Edit − Replace to display the Replace Window.
2. Enter the character string that is to be replaced and the character string that it is to be replaced with, and
click the Find Next Button.
a) When a matching character string is found, it will be displayed in reversed color and the search will
stop. Then execute one of the follow operations:
• Either click the Replace Button to replace only that character string and search for the next
instance, or click the Replace All Button to replace all instances of that character string.
• Click the Find Next Button to leave that character string unchanged and search for the next
instance.
• Click the Cancel Button to close the Replace Window.
b) If no matching character string is found, a sound will be made. Either enter a different character string
to be searched for and execute the search again, or click the Cancel Button to close the Replace
Window.

(3) Jumping to a Specified Row

Move the cursor to a specified row number in the program using the following procedure.
1. Select Edit − Jump. A window will be displayed for the jump destination.
2. Input the row number and then click the Execution Button.
To cancel the jump operation, click the Cancel Button to close the window.

(4) Jumping to the First Row of the Program

Select Edit − Head to move the cursor to the first row of the program.

(5) Jumping to the End Row of the Program

Select Edit − Last to move the cursor to the last row of the program.

10-20
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

(6) Adding a Semicolon

The motion language specifications require a semicolon in the last column of every program row. With this func-
tion enabled, a semicolon is added in the last column of a program row when the Enter Key is pressed. The pur-
pose of this function is to lighten the program input load.
The semicolon function can be enabled or disabled by selecting Edit − Semicolon from the Motion Editor Menu.
A checkmark will appear in the menu before the Semicolon Command when it is enabled. The Semicolon Button
in the tool icon in the Motion Editor Window will also stay in pressed state.
To disable the semicolon function, remove the check mark by again selecting Edit − Semicolon or click the
Semicolon Tool Icon.

(7) Teaching Positions

Take the current coordinate values for the axes controlled by the MP900/MP2000-series Machine Controllers as
the coordinate value operand for a move command using the following procedure.
(a) Opening the Position Monitor Window
Open the Position Monitor Window to display the current coordinate values using the following procedure.
Select File − Open − Motion Program − Position Monitor from the Engineering Manager Menu in online
mode. The Position Monitor Window will open.

(b) Setting the Teaching Axes

There are two procedures that can be used to set the teaching axis:
• From the Position Teaching Window
• Using the teaching function keys.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

• Setting from the Position Teaching Window
1. Select Edit − Position Teaching. The Position Teaching Window will be displayed.
Alternatively, click the Teaching Button in the Motion Editor Window.

Position Teaching Button

The logical axis names and check boxes defined in the Group Definitions are displayed as shown below.

10

10-21
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.6 Motion Editor Editing Functions

Position Teaching (MPM†††) ×

Teaching Axis Teaching Axis

Logical axis name 1 ・・・

Logical axis name 2

・・・

Logical axis name 3

・・・

Teaching Close Next

Fig 10.5 Position Teaching Window

2. Set the axes to be taught.

There are two ways to set the axes to be taught. Use these as required.
• Using the Position Teaching Button
The current position will be taught for the logical axis whose check boxes have been checked.
• Using the Logical Axis Name Buttons
The current position will be taught for only the logical axis whose button has been pressed.
• Setting with Teaching Function Keys
Axis value can be taught directly from the function keys without opening the Position Teaching Window.
Select View − Position Teaching Function Bar from the Engineering Manager Menu.
The function keys will be displayed along with the logical axis names.

Engineering Manager ×
File (F) Edit (E) View (V)
Font

Switch between
these two menus by Debug operation toolbar
pressing the ALT +
F10 Keys. Position Teaching Function Bar

Click here.

Motion Editor

1 Logical Axis Name 1 2 Logical Axis Name 2 3 Logical Axis Name 3 12 MENU

10-22
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

„ Function Keys
INFO
• Eight logical axis names defined in the Group Definitions are allocated to the function keys from the left (F1 to F8).
Press the F12 (MENU) Key to switch to the next eight axes (i.e., eight axes starting from the 9th). There can be a
maximum of 48 axes per group.
The MENU Key is F10 on non-DOS computers.
• The following shortcut keys can be used when the Motion Editor Window is active.

Switches between Debug Operation and Position

Alt + F10
Teaching Function Keys.
Alt + V, D Switches to Debug Operation Function Keys.
Alt + V, P Switches to Position Teaching Function Keys.

• When switching between more than one Motion Editor Window, the function keys will be reset to axes 1 to 8.

(c) Obtaining Coordinate Values

The following example shows how to obtain the coordinate values. Assume that the cursor is just after the
mov command in the Motion Editor Window.
abs;
mov
If the Teaching Button in the Position Teaching Window is clicked this point, the coordinate values displayed
in the Position Monitor Window will be moved into the mov command operand as the A1 and B1 coordinate
values.
abs;
mov [A1]0.000[B1]0.000
The mov command is used in this example, but coordinate values can be obtained in the same way for other
commands that have axis information operands.

(8) Specifying Fonts

The font used in the Motion Editor Window can be set.
Select View − Font from the Motion Editor Menu. The Font Window will be displayed. Specify the font to be
used, the font style, and the size, and then click the OK Button.

(9) Error List

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

The compiling error list can be redisplayed when required.
Select View − Error List to display the Error List Window displayed when compiling.

Alternatively, click the List tool icon.

Click the Close button to close the window.

10

10-23
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands

10.3.7 Motion Editor Expansion Commands

This section explains the import and export commands which are associated with external program text files.
The program source files saved by the Motion Editor consist of not only text files but also various types of data,
including the operating environment. Accordingly, there is no problem with the operating environment for the
Motion Editor, but source files cannot be directly opened by general-purpose editors. For that reason, the Motion
Editor is provided with import and export commands to allow general-purpose text editors to be used.

General-
Motion
purpose
Editor
editor

Motion Program
program source file
source file

Import

Export

Fig 10.6 Import and Export Commands

(1) Importing
The import function is used for bringing text files created by a general-purpose editor into the Motion Editor.
This function converts a text file into a motion program file.
Import a file using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Import from the Motion Editor Menu.
The window for opening the text file to be converted will be displayed.

2. Search for the file by using Look in or other method.

3. Select the file by clicking it.
4. Click the Open Button.
The selected text file will be read and a new Motion Editor Window will be displayed. After editing the
program, save the file.

10-24
 10.3 Creating Motion Programs

(2) Exporting
The export function is used in the following cases:
• To temporarily save a file that is being edited by the Motion Editor.
• To edit an existing program with a standard text editor.

If an error, such as a syntax error, will occur in the Motion Editor when programming has not yet been com-
IMPORTANT
pleted, the program cannot be saved in that condition. When there is an error, use the following export proce-
dure to save programs that are in the process of being edited.

The export procedure is as follows:

1. With the edited program open, select File − Export from the Motion Editor Menu. A window will be
displayed to specify where the text file is to be saved.

2. Select or input the name of the file and the destination folder, and click the Save Button. If a file by that
name already exists, it will be overwritten when the new file is saved.
3. After the file has been saved, close the Motion Editor Window.

10.3.8 Closing the Motion Editor

To close the Motion Editor and return to the Engineering Manager, select File − Close from the Motion Editor
Menu.

• Motion parameter can be changed or saved while the Motion Editor Window is open. If the number of
IMPORTANT
decimal digits in the fixed parameters is changed and saved, however, a warning message will be displayed.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Confirm the safety of the system before proceeding.

Engineering Bulider

The number of the decimal point

beams was changed.
It has the possibility that the
amount of movement changes.
Be careful. Save file: OK?

Yes (Y) No (N)

Fig 10.7 Warning Message for Save

• Fixed parameters can be saved only when the servo is OFF. A Controller error message will be displayed if
an attempt is made to change or save fixed parameters when the servo is ON.
10

10-25
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.4.1 Compile Execution

10.4 Compiling Motion Programs

This section explains the process involved in compiling a motion program.

10.4.1 Compile Execution

The program is compiled automatically when the file is saved.
Execute the compile operation by saving the file using the following procedure.
1. With the motion program open, the program will be compiled when any of the following operations are
performed.
• Select File − Save.
• Select File − Save New File.
• Click the Save Icon.
While the program is being compiled, the progress of the operation will be displayed by a bar in the
Motion Editor Window, as shown in Compile Execution Steps.
2. If a file where an object is saved during the compile operation already exists, the Overwrite Confirmation
Window will be displayed. To overwrite the existing object, click the Yes Button. To save the new object
without overwriting the existing one, select File − Save As and input a different name.

„ Insufficient Memory Errors when Saving Files

IMPORTANT
The following error messages will be displayed if the object or source areas are insufficient when saving files
online.

Error Message Meaning

CPDH_CPU_0B2 object memory area exceeded. Saving
may be possible by using MEM COMPACT to compress
Object area overflow
the memory area. Memory compression is executed from
within the System Configuration Definition Window.
Insufficient memory in the CPDH_CPU_0B3 program
memory area. Saving may be possible by using MEM
Source storage area
COMPACT to compress the memory area. Memory
overflow
compression is executed from within the System Config-
uration Definition Window.

„ Remedy
• From the Motion Editor Window, open the System Configuration Definition Window by selecting File −
Open − System configuration from the Motion Editor Menu.
• Set the CPU to STOP by selecting Control − CPU STOP from the System Configuration Menu.
• Compress memory by selecting Control − MEM COMPACT from the System Configuration Menu.
• Set the CPU to RUN by selecting Control − CPU RUN from the System Configuration Menu.
If the insufficient memory error occurs again for saving, then the physical memory is insufficient. Delete
unneeded programs or other files. The error message will appear more frequently as the amount of memory
available decreases. Compressing memory each time will help.

10.4.2 Compile Execution Steps

When the compile operation is started, the status of the compile operation is displayed in the a progress bar.

When the compile operation is completed, the progress bar above will be closed.

10-26
 10.4 Compiling Motion Programs

10.4.3 Normal Completion

If the compile operation is completed normally, the file will be saved to the Programming Device hard disk.
Then, in Online Mode, the compiled file will be transferred to the Machine Controller.
The window will then be returned to the Motion Editor Window. If there is no need for editing, close the Motion
Editor.

10.4.4 Error Completion

If an error occurs during the compile operation, the Error List Window will be displayed. Check the Error
Description, correct the program, and execute the compile operation again. Even after this window has been
closed, it can be displayed again by selecting View − Error List from the Motion Editor Menu.

The cursor can be moved to the relevant place in the Motion Editor by
double-clicking the row number displayed in the Error Row column.

The motion program file cannot be saved as long as there are any compile errors. To save it temporarily, it is
IMPORTANT
necessary to use the export command.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

10

10-27
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.1 Outline of Debug Operations

10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

This section describes the Debug Operation used to debug motion programs.
This section describes the details of debug operations for MP900-series Machine Controllers. For debug opera-
tions for MP2000-series Machine Controllers, refer to Machine Controller MP2000 Series User’s Manual for
Motion Programming (manual No.: SIEP C880700 38).

10.5.1 Outline of Debug Operations

Debug operations are used to debug motion programs. Open the Motion Editor in Online Mode to turn ON and
OFF the debug operations.
Debug commands include standard start points and breakpoints, and single-step execution.

The Engineering Builder Window will be displayed if the user tries to enter debug operations in Offline Mode,
IMPORTANT
and the operation will be cancelled.

10.5.2 Opening the Debug Window

The Debug Operation is provided as one of the functions of the Motion Editor. The Motion Editor Window and
the Debug Window are the same window. Logging in online, however, is required to use the Debug Operation. It
is not possible in Offline Mode.
The portions of the Motion Editor Window that are used for Debug Operation are shown below.
Debug Menu

Engineering Manager
Debug T

Motion Editor
PT# : CPU#
DM Off

Debug Tool Icons

Line numbers Motion program source data

Debug Function Keys

Status Bar

The following table shows the configuration of the Debug Window.

Configuration Details
The commands used in debug operations are displayed under this
Debug Menu
menu.
Debug Tool Icons Icons have been created for frequently used debug commands.
Debug Function Keys Function Keys have been allocated for debug commands.
Status Bar Displays information on debug operations.

10-28
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

(1) Debug Menu

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Debug Window.
Menu Command Function
File
Refer to 10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus.
Edit
View
Font
Tool Bar Refer to 10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus.
Status Bar
Function Bar Displays the Function Bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Debug Operation
Allocates function keys for a debug operation.
Function Bar
Position Teaching
Allocates function keys for teaching positions.
Function Bar
Error List Refer to 10.3.5 Motion Editor Menus.
Monitor Parallel No.
Refer to 12.10 Position Monitor for details.
Monitor Regeneration
Automatically scrolls so that the operation cur-
Auto scrolling
sor is always in view.
Debug
Debug ON Enables the debug operations.
Temporarily stops the move command that is
Hold
currently being executed.
Abort Cancels the debug operations.
Multi Step Run Executes rows 1 to n.
Start Point Specifies the first row for debugging.
Break Point Specifies the last row for debugging.
Step Run Executes debugging one step at a time.
Step In Hands control to a subroutine.
Code Generator Compiles and updates the object.
Current Value Update Updates current coordinate value.
Debug OFF Disables debug operations.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

10

10-29
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.2 Opening the Debug Window

(2) Debug Icons

Icons have been created for frequently used debug commands, and these commands can be executed by clicking
each of them once.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

The commands indicated by the above icons are as follows:

1. Debug ON
2. Debug OFF
3. Current Value Update
4. Step In
5. Step Run (Step Over)
6. Start Point Set
7. Break Point Set
8. Multi Step Run.
9. Hold ON/OFF.
10.Abort

(3) Debug Function Keys

Debug commands are also supported by Function Keys.

1. 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

(4) Debug Status Bar

The debug status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Motion Editor Window and shows the following debug sta-
tus. More than one status may be displayed.
Status Meaning
Debug Mode Debug operations enabled.
Running Operating normally.
Holding Move commands remain in hold.
Abort Resetting debug operations.
Alarm An operation error has occurred.
Break Held at the breakpoint.

10-30
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

10.5.3 Debug Operations

This section explains the actual debug operations.
Debug operations are possible only when there are no compile errors in the program opened in the Motion Editor,
which is the program to be debugged.
(1) Starting and Stopping Debug Operations
The first command that must be set when starting debug operations is the Debug ON command. All commands
used in debug operations are enabled when the Debug ON command is given and Debug Mode will be displayed
on the status bar.
1. Click the DM button so that the Debug ON command will enable the tool icons related to debug
operations.

Debug Mode will be displayed on the status bar.

2. Click the off button so that the Debug OFF command will disable debug operations, and the display will
return to the previous screen.

• Use the Debug ON command when program operation has been stopped.
INFO
• The Debug ON command is valid for one main program only. It cannot be set for multiple main programs
simultaneously.
• If the MPE720 is exited without using the Debug OFF command to close the debug operations, an error will occur
when the user next tries to start debug operations after restart. Execute the Debug OFF command and then the Debug
ON command.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

(2) Debug Window Configuration during Debug Operations
The following window will be displayed during debug operations. Start points and breakpoints will appear after
the row numbers in the row number display section. The entire row that is currently being debugged will be dis-
played in reversed color as an operation cursor.
The user can confirm which row is being executed by following the operation cursor.
Start point Operation cursor

00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

00006 msee mps100;
00007 fmx t30000;

10
Break point

(a) Setting Start Points

The start point symbol (⇒) is displayed from when it is set and during debugging. The symbol disappears
when debugging is stopped.
Select the first row for debugging and click the SP Button. The start point symbol will appear at the end of
the row number. To release the start point (⇒), repeat the step to set the start point in the same row.

10-31
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

The following example shows the editing cursor at row 00005.

EXAMPLE
00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

Start point

During step execution, the (⇒) symbol may not appear for commands with short execution times,
because the start point is set and the command executed at the same time.

(b) Setting Break Points

A breakpoint ( ) will remain at the same position once it is set until it is cleared. Select the row where the
debugging is to be stopped, and click the BP Button. The breakpoint symbol ( ) will appear at the end of the
designated row number.
Break points can be cleared by the following four methods:
• Set a different breakpoint.
• Click the BP Button again in the row where a breakpoint is currently set.
• Abort the debug operations.
• Disable the debug operations.

(c) Operation Cursor

The operation cursor displayed in reversed color by row shows the command that is currently being executed.
The operation cursor will automatically scroll through the program and indicate the command currently being
executed if the cursor moves from the row currently being displayed in the Motion Editor Window.
The operation cursor will turn back into the editing cursor when the operation is stopped. The operation cur-
sor will be displayed during normal operation if a program opened using the Motion Editor is being executed.

(3) Step Run

Step Run can be used to debug the program one row at a time. Depending on how the subroutine written using
the MSEE command is executed, the Step Run command is divided into Step Over and Step In commands.
Debugging of the main program, including subroutines, is executed using a combination of these commands.
Normally, the Step Run command means Step Over.
(a) Step Over
Debugging is executed one row at a time using the Step Run command. The subroutine written using the
MSEE command is processed as one execution unit, and stops at the next command after the MSEE com-
mand.
EXAMPLE An example of execution of the Step Over command is shown below.
1.Set the cursor in the row for which the Step Run command is to be executed.
Editing cursor

00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

00006 fmx t20000;
00007 mov [a1]o;

10-32
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

2.The execution of a command can be confirmed by the operation cursor during execution. The
operation cursor may not be visible, however, for command executions that are completed
quickly.
Operation cursor

00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

00006 fmx t20000;
00007 mov [a1]o;

3.A breakpoint and the cursor are automatically set when one row has been debugged.
Breakpoint

00005 mvs [a1]100 [b1]100;

00006 fmx t20000;
00007 mov [a1]o;

Editing cursor

(b) Step In
The Step In command is used to debug subroutines written using the MSEE command. It is valid for MSEE
commands. If it is used for other commands, the function will be the same as if the Step Over command was
executed.
When the Step In command is executed, the Motion Editor Window for the subroutine opened using the
MSEE command will be displayed and control transferred. Other debug commands can be used in the sub-
routine, just as for main programs.
If the RET command is executed during the subroutine, the Motion Editor Window for that subroutine will be
closed, and the program will return to the next command after the MSEE command. Up to 8 levels of subrou-
tines can be nested within a subroutine.
EXAMPLE An example of execution of the Step In command is shown below.
1.The first row has been set in the MSEE command. The mps101 subroutine is about to be executed.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Editing cursor

00010 msee mps101;

00011 fmx t30000;

2.When the Step In command is executed, the subroutine is displayed, the debug environment is
prepared, and progress is shown in a progress bar.
100%

10

10-33
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

3.The Motion Editor Window for the subroutine is displayed, and the cursor is set to the first row.
Both Step In and Step Over commands can be used.
Editing cursor

00001 MPS101 "GROUP01"

00002 dw14=1;
00003 fmx t10000;
00004 mvs

ret

4.When the subroutine RET command is executed, the subroutine window is closed and the display
returns to the main program.
Editing cursor

00010 msee mps101;

00011 fmx t30000;

(4) Multi Step Run

One or more rows of commands will be executed for which the start point and breakpoint have been set. Either
the start point or breakpoint can be set first. The start point is automatically cleared when execution is stopped,
however, breakpoints remain until a new breakpoint is set.
(a) When a Breakpoint is Passed
EXAMPLE In the following example, the start point has been set in row 2 and the breakpoint in row 7.
Start point

MPS101 "GROUP01"
00001 abs;
00002 mov [a1]100;
00003

00007 fmx t20000;

Break point

When the Multi Step Run command has been executed, debugging is executed for rows 2 through 6, and
stops at the breakpoint in row 7.
Editing cursor

MPS101 "GROUP01"
00001 abs;
00002 mov [a1]100;
00003

00007 fmx t20000;

Break point

The operation cursor may not be visible for some commands. Refer to 12.9 Motion Program Monitoring for
information on commands for which the operation cursor is displayed.

10-34
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

(b) When the Breakpoint Is Not Passed

If the set breakpoint is not passed and the logic is normal, the following processing will be executed.
• Main Programs
Debugging will be executed until the END command, where it will stop.
• Subroutines
The RET command will be executed, the program will return to the MSEE command, and stop at the next
command.
EXAMPLE In the following example, the breakpoint is set at an earlier row. As a result, the RET command will
be executed, the program will return to the MSEE command, and stop at the next command.
The execution process is shown below.
1.Open mps102 using the Step In command.
Break point

00004 mov [a1]100 ;

00005 msee mps102;
00006 msee mps103;

Editing cursor
Start point

2.The debug operations enter the subroutine. If the Multi Step Run command is executed with the
settings shown on the right of the following figure, the RET command will be executed, and
control will return to the main program.

00001 MPS102
00002 mov [b1]200;
00003 fim t100;

ret;
Editing cursor

3.Once back at the main program, the process will stop at the next command.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

Editing cursor

00004 mov [a1]100 ;

00005 msee mps102;
00006 msee mps103;

10

10-35
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

(5) Hold ON/OFF

The Hold command holds the command currently being executed. When the Hold command is executed again,
the hold is cleared, and execution of the command is continued.
The Hold command is enabled only for the move commands, however, and is ignored when executed for other
commands.
The timing charts for the following commands is outlined below.
0010 mov [a1] 100; Hold enabled.
0011 ob1010=1; Hold disabled.
0012 tim t 500; Hold disabled.
0013 mvs [b1] 100. [c1] 200; Hold enabled.
0014 mov [c1] 0; Hold enabled.

On Off On
Hold

1. mov
Hold enabled.

2. ob101
Hold disabled.

t500
3. tim

4. mvs
Hold enabled.

(6) Abort
The Abort command aborts the execution of the debug operations. Debugging cannot be resumed once this com-
mand has been executed.
(a) Monitor Display after Abort
The monitor display after the Abort command has been executed is outlined below.
1. Start points and breakpoints are cleared, and the corresponding symbols disappear.
2. Debug control returns to the main program, even if a subroutine is currently being debugged. The main
program window will be the active window, and the editing cursor will point to the first row. As a result,
resumption of the debug operations will always be from the main program.
3. If the Motion Editor Window for subroutines is open, it will not automatically close. This allows the user
not to only check the debug operations, but to also save any subroutines that have been edited during the
debug operations to the Machine Controller.
Refer to (8) Editing during Debug Operations later in this chapter.

10-36
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

(b) Abort Example

EXAMPLE An example of the execution of the Abort command is shown below.
1.Place the cursor on the MSEE command and execute the mps101 subroutine using the Step In
command.
Cursor

00001 MPM001 "GROUP01"

00010 msee mps101;

2.Once the subroutine is executed, set the start point and breakpoint as shown below.
Start point

00001 MPS101 "GROUP01"

00002 fmx t10000;

00019 mvs [d1]200 f1000 pfn;

00020 ret;

Break point

3.Then, execute the Abort command instead of the Step Run command. The start point and
breakpoint will be cleared, the debug command turned OFF, and the debug operations reset. The
window will remain open.

00001 MPS101 "GROUP01"

00002 fmx t10000;

00019 mvs [d1]200 f1000 pfn;

00020 ret;

4.As the debug operations were reset, the main program only can be debugged, and the start point is

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

set at the beginning.
Editing cursor

00001 MPM001 "GROUP01"

00010 msee mps101;

(7) Current Value Update

The Current Value Update command is used to correct deviations in current values from axis movement by the
motion program when axes are jogged or otherwise moved by the ladder program during the debug operations.
10
Be sure to execute this command when axes have been moved through manual intervention during the debug
IMPORTANT
operations.

10-37
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

(8) Editing during Debug Operations

If the program is to be improved or faults in the program is discovered during debug operations, the program can
be corrected and re-executed when the operation cursor is not displayed (no commands are being executed).
(a) Editable Programs
The following limits apply to editing programs:
• Only programs that are displayed in the active window during the debug operations can be displayed.
• Subroutine windows opened during the debug operations cannot be edited. Windows can, however, be
switched and scrolled.
• Programs not related to the debug operations can be edited but cannot be saved.

• Programs cannot be edited when the operation cursor is displayed, indicating that the debug operations are being
INFO
executed.
Operation cursor

00012 fmx t30000 ;

00013 mvs [a1]100;

00020 pfork

• The following program can be edited. The debug operations are stopped, and the editing cursor is at the front of the
PFORK command.
Editing cursor

00012 fmx t30000 ;

00013 mvs [a1]100;

00020 pfork

• In the following program, the MPS101 subroutine, which has been called from the MPM001 main program using the
Step In command, is active. In addition, the MPM002 program, which is unrelated to the debug operations, is open.
Main program

Subroutine opened
Motion Editor
from the main
00005 MPM001 program
Motion Editor
00005 MPS101

Motion Editor
00005 MPM002
Program unrelated to
the debug operations

In this example, MPM002 can be edited because it is unrelated to the debug operation, but MPM001 cannot be edited
because it is still in the debug operation. MPM002 cannot be saved.

10-38
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

(9) Editing
(a) Editing and Temporary Registration
The edit operation is based on the Motion Editor edit functions. Press the SHIFT + Enter Keys or select
Debug − Code Generator from the Motion Editor Menu to temporarily register changed data on the Machine
Controller. To register the data permanently, select File − Save from the Motion Editor Menu. Refer to (c)
Updating Files for details.
Temporary registration on the Machine Controller is designed to perform a test run for debug operations.
Update the file only when there are no problems with the test run.
If the temporary registration step is omitted and editing executed, the steps for temporarily registering the
data will be executed automatically. The program will be compiled first and, if no errors occur, the temporary
registration step will be executed. The execution is disabled if an error occurs while compiling.
EXAMPLE An example of the editing operation is shown below.
1.Set the editing cursor at row 6 to insert an allocation statement.
Editing cursor

00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;

2.Input the substitute text dw14=14.

Editing cursor

00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 dw14=14;
00007 ;

3.Press the Shift + Enter Keys or select Debug − Code Generator from the Motion Editor Menu to
compile the changed text. The execution can be performed if no errors occur.

30%

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

10

10-39
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

(b) Handling Breakpoints

Breakpoints are set for row numbers. Breakpoints are not set for the command allocated to that row number.
As a result, breakpoints will be set for different commands when the program has been edited and row num-
bers have changed.
Take note of the current breakpoint settings during editing.
EXAMPLE An example of editing breakpoints is shown below.
1.Set the breakpoint at row 9.
Break point

00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 mvs [c1]o;
00010 ;

Editing cursor

2.Edit the mvs command in row 9. The breakpoint will remain with the same command in this
example because the text is being overwritten.
Break point

00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 mvs [c1]200 ;
00010 ;

Editing cursor

3.Two rows of commands have been added in row 9. The row numbers will move and, as a result,
the breakpoint will be located at the tim command.
Break point

00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 tim t100;
00010 mw100 = 100;
00011 mvs [c1]200 ;
00012 ;

Editing cursor

4.The tim command has been deleted. The row numbers will move up one, and the breakpoint will
be located with the substituted text.
Break point

00007 fmx t20000;

00008 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;
00009 mw100 = 100;
00010 mvs [c1]200 ;
00011 ;

Editing cursor

10-40
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

(c) Updating Files

The file update process during the debug operations involves temporary registration and permanent registra-
tion. The temporary registration command is designed for test runs, and only allows operation results of pro-
gram changes to be confirmed. If the results of the test run are good, the adjustments can be saved properly to
the file. This is called permanent registration.

(d) Temporary Registration

Changed programs can be temporarily registered on the Machine Controller by pressing the Shift + Enter
Keys, or by selecting Debug − Code Generator from the Motion Editor Menu. The original program on the
Machine Controller will be overwritten only when the permanent registration command is executed.

(e) Permanent Registration

Files registered on the Programming Device hard disk and Machine Controller are updated with changed pro-
grams. The Motion Editor cannot be closed if permanent registration is not executed. Select File − Save
before closing the Motion Editor.
• Execute permanent registration in the active Motion Editor Window.
• A message saying that the program [MPM†††] is Editing will be displayed if the debug operations are
turned OFF without executing permanent registration. Click the OK Button to save the update. This
method can be used to execute permanent registration.

If the RET command is executed in the subroutine after temporary registration but without permanent registration, perma-
INFO
nent registration will be automatically executed. If original program that has not been debugged is to be kept, create a PLC
folder in the File Manager for copying and saving that program, or use the Export command to save the required program.

(10) Restrictions during Debug Operations

The restrictions that apply to the debug operations are outlined below.
(a) Effective Commands during Debug Operations
As shown on the following table, some commands are enabled when the program is stopped, and some are
enabled during the debug operations.
When During
No. Command
Stopped Operation
1 Debug Mode ON (DM) Enabled Disabled

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

2 Debug Mode OFF (Off) Enabled Disabled
3 Current Value Update (POS) Enabled Disabled
4 Step Run (Step over) Enabled Disabled
5 Step In Enabled Disabled
6 Start Point (SP) Enabled Disabled
7 Break Point (BP) Enabled Disabled
8 Multi Step Run (GO) Enabled Disabled
9 Hold ON/OFF (HOLD) Disabled Enabled
10 Abort (X) Disabled Enabled

10

10-41
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

(b) Editing Cursors and Breakpoints after Step Run

The editing cursor and breakpoint move to the next row after the Step Run command is executed. If there is a
nonexecutable command for comments or labels in the next row, however, the cursor and breakpoint will
stop at the next executable command that appears.
EXAMPLE An example of editing cursor and breakpoint movement is shown below.
1.Set the cursor in row 5.
Break point

00001 MPS001 "GROUP"

00002 dw10=10;
00003 dw11=11;
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;

Editing cursor

2.Execute Step Over.

Break point

00001 MPS001 "GROUP"

00002 dw10=10;
00003 dw11=11;
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;

Operation cursor

3.The comment and label rows are passed, and the breakpoint and cursor are set to row 9, which has
the fmx command.
Break point

00001 MPS001 "GROUP"

00002 dw10=10;
00003 dw11=11;
00004 dw12=12;
00005 dw13=13;
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;

Editing cursor

10-42
 10.5 Debugging Motion Programs

(c) Commands that Cannot be Executed with Step Run

The Step Run command cannot be executed for some commands. An error message will be displayed for
these commands shown on the following table. Set the start point to the next command that can be executed
with the Step Run command.
Command Code Example Remarks
IF if ib01==1;
ELSE else; Start points cannot be set.
IEND iend;
WHILE while ib01==1;
WEND wend;
PFORK pfork L1 L2;
JOINTO jointo L3;
PJOINT L3: pjoint L1 L2;
SFORK sfork ib01==1?L1 ib01==0?L2;
SJOINT L3: sjoint;
END end; Start points cannot be set.

(d) Commands for which Start Points and Breakpoints Cannot be Set
Start points and breakpoints cannot be set for the nonexecutable commands shown in the following table.
Error messages will be displayed if start points or breakpoints are set for these commands. Set the start points
and breakpoints to commands that can be set.
Start Break
Command Coding Example Remarks
Point point
ELSE else; No Yes Step Run is not possible.
END end; No Yes Step Run is not possible.
;row ; No No
"Comment"; row "Interpolation speed"; No No
Label row Label; No No

(e) Executing from Command and Label Rows

Step Run can be executed from rows with semi-colons (;) only and comment rows that start with semi-colons
(;). In such cases, the next subsequent executable command is executed.

Program Folder 2: Motion Programming

EXAMPLE An example of Step Run execution from command and label rows is shown below.
1.Set the cursor in a comment row.

Editing cursor

00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
00010 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;

2.When Step Run is executed, the executable commands after row 6 are executed. In this example,
the fmx command is executed.
Break point 10
00006 ;
00007 ; Comments
00008 LB0;
00009 fmx t20000;
00010 mvs [a1]0 [b1]0;

Operation cursor

10-43
 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Programming
10.5.3 Debug Operations

(f) SNG Operation

The SNG command does not function in debug operations.
The sng commands are specified in rows 30 and 31, however these rows will be executed with Step Run.
Break point

00028 mov [a1]0.;

00029 ob101 = 0
00030 sng mov [a1]100. ;
00031 sng mov [b1]100. ;
00032 ob101 = 1
00033 mov [a1]100.;

Editing cursor

10-44
 11
Creating Table Data

This chapter explains how to create data used in table format (arrays) in the main program.

11.1 Creating Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2

11.1.1 Outline of Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
11.1.2 Table Data Definition List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-3
11.1.3 Table Data Definition List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4
11.1.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data Definition List Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
11.1.5 Opening Column Attribute Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-6
11.1.6 Data Table Column Attribute Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-7
11.1.7 Setting Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-8
11.1.8 Editing Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-9
11.1.9 Saving Column Attributes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-10
11.1.10 Opening Table Data Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-10
11.1.11 Table Data Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -11-11
11.1.12 Setting Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
11.1.13 Editing Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
11.1.14 Saving and Closing Table Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12

Creating Table Data

11

11-1
 11 Creating Table Data
11.1.1 Outline of Table Data

11.1 Creating Table Data

This section describes how to create the array data used in the main program.

11.1.1 Outline of Table Data

Table data can be accessed by using the table data manipulation instructions in the ladder program.
The procedure to create table data can be divided into the following 3 procedures. Follow the steps to create table
data.

Table Data Creation

Procedure

1. Set table definition

information.

2. Set column
attributes.
Table Ladder

TBL†††
table
3. Set table data. TBL†††
table

End.

1. Setting Table Definition Information

Open the Table Data Definition List Window and select creating a new table. The Table Definition Dialog
Box will be displayed. Set the table name, table type, number of columns and rows, and table comment.
Setting Details
Table Name Sets the table name.
Table Type Sets either array or record.
Column Sets the number of columns in the table.
Lines Sets the number of rows in the table.
Table Comment Sets the table comment.
Selects either Normal or Battery back-up.
Table data store target (Available only for the CPU-02 Module in the MP2200 Machine
Controller.)

2. Setting Column Attributes

Open the Data table column attribute Window and set the column attribute. The attributes to be set include
column names, data types, sizes, and display types.
Setting Details
Column Name Sets the name of the column.
Sets either of integer, double-length integer, real number, or
Data
character string.
Size Sets the length of the data.
Display Type Sets the display format for the table data.
Column Comment Sets the column comment.

11-2
 11.1 Creating Table Data

3. Setting Table Data

Open the Table data Window and set column data for the number of rows.
Table name

Column 1 Column 2 Column n Column name

Number of rows

Number of columns

If the table is an array table, there will be only one column name because all of the element data types
(integer, real number, etc.) are the same.
If the table is a record table, the column name, data type, and other settings must be made for each
column.

11.1.2 Table Data Definition List Window

This section describes how to open the list window, and the configurations of windows and menus.
(1) Opening Table Data Definition List Windows
(a) Opening from the File Manager
1. Open the PLC folder in the Directory Tree.
2. Double-click a Table Data List file in the Table Data Folder. The Table Data Definition List Window will
be displayed.
The following window will be displayed when creating a new data table.

Creating Table Data

(b) Opening from the Engineering Manager

Select File − Open − Data Table Definition − Data Table Map from the Engineering Manager Menu.

11

11-3
 11 Creating Table Data
11.1.3 Table Data Definition List Menus

(2) Configuration of Table Data Definition List Window

A list of registered data tables can be displayed. The data tables in the list are displayed in alphabetic order. The
column attributes and table data settings windows are opened from this window to define data tables.
Refer to the window shown in 11.1.2 Table Data Definition List Window.
Display Details
Table Name Displays table names.
Table Type Displays table types.
Lines Displays the number of rows of table data.
Column Displays the number of columns of table data.
Table data store target Displays the storage destination for the table data.
Comment Displays the data table comments.
Column Attribute
Opens the Column Attribute window.
Button
Table Data Button Opens the Table Data window.

11.1.3 Table Data Definition List Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Table Data Definition List Win-
dow.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
New Open Creates new data tables.
Delete Deletes data tables.
Registers a shortcut for the Table Data Defini-
Register in User Menu
tion window.
Close Closes the Table Data Definition List window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Copy Table Data
Copies table data.
Definition
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Column Definition Opens the Data table column attribute Window.
Table Data Opens the Table data Window.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

11-4
 11.1 Creating Table Data

11.1.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data Definition List Windows

The following operations are provided in the Table Data Definition List Window to manipulate the tables.
• Opening Data table column attribute Windows
• Opening Table data Windows
• Creating new data tables
• Deleting data tables
(1) Opening Data Table Column Attribute Windows
Data table column attribute Windows can be opened from the Table Data Definition List Window and Table data
Window as follows: Data type and other attributes can be changed for each column name given in the table.
(a) Opening from the Table Data Definition List Window
1. Click the desired number in the No. column of the table.
2. Select View − Column Definition from the Table Data Definition List Menu, or click the Column
Attribute Button.
Data table column attribute Windows can be opened by double-clicking the desired number in the No. col-
umn of the table.

(b) Opening from the Table Data Window

Data table column attribute Windows can also be opened by selecting File − Column Attribute from the
Table Data Menu.

(2) Opening Table Data Windows

Table data Windows can be opened from the Table Data Definition List Window or the Data table column
attribute Window.
(a) Opening from the Table Data Definition List Window
1. Click the No. column in the table.
2. Select View − Table Data from the Table Data Definition List Menu, or click the Table Data Button.

(b) Opening from the Data Table Column Attribute Window

Table data Windows can also be opened by selecting File − Table Data from the Data Table Column
Attribute Menu.

(3) Creating Data Tables

Create a data table using the following procedure. Once the data table is created, a Data table column attribute
Window for that data table will be displayed.
1. Select File − New Open from the Table Data Definition List menu.
Creating Table Data

11

2. Enter the table definition information in the Table Definition window, and click the OK button. The Data
table column attribute Window for the data table will be displayed.

11-5
 11 Creating Table Data
11.1.5 Opening Column Attribute Windows

(a) Setting a Table Definition

Setting Details
Enter a table name of up to 8 characters. Commas (,), question marks
Table Name (?), asterisks (*), quotation marks (“), and apostrophes (') cannot be
used.
Select the table type.
Table Type Array Type: All columns have the same attributes.
Record Type: Each column has different attributes.
Enter the number of columns and rows in the table, between 1 and
10,000.
The size of the table data is calculated by multiplying the number of
columns by the numbers of rows. Use a table data size of 1 MB or
Column,
less as a guide. Table data of more than 5 MB cannot be created.
Lines
An error message box will be displayed if the size exceeds 5 MB.
Reduce the number of columns and rows if this error occurs. A mes-
sage box giving a warning will be displayed when the table data size
exceeds 1 MB.
Table Comment Enter a table comment of up to 32 characters.

(4) Deleting Data Tables

Delete data tables using the following procedure.
1. Click the No. column of the data table to be deleted in the Table Data Definition List Window.
2. Select File − Delete from the Table Data Definition List Menu.
Click the Yes Button in the message box. The selected data table will be deleted.

11.1.5 Opening Column Attribute Windows

For details, refer to (1) Opening Data Table Column Attribute Windows in 11.1.4 Manipulating Tables in Table
Data Definition List Windows.

11-6
 11.1 Creating Table Data

11.1.6 Data Table Column Attribute Menu

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in Data table column attribute Windows.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes Data table column attribute Windows.
Save & Save to Flash Saves to flash memory.
Save Saves column attribute data.
Table Data Opens Table data Windows.
Change Changes table definitions.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Copy Copies row data to the clipboard.
Cut Cuts row data.
Paste Reproduces data on the clipboard.
Insert Inserts a blank row.
Delete Deletes data.
Insert column Inserts a column.
Delete column Deletes a column.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Go To Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

Creating Table Data

11

11-7
 11 Creating Table Data
11.1.7 Setting Column Attributes

11.1.7 Setting Column Attributes

Column attributes can be set. All columns have the same attributes for array tables, so settings are made for one
column only. For record tables, each column has different attributes, and settings are made therefore for each col-
umn.

Setting Details
Table Definition Infor- Displays the table name, table type, number of columns, number of
mation rows, and table comments.
Displays column numbers. Only one column will be displayed for array
No. tables. For record tables, columns up to the number of columns in the
table will be displayed.
Column Name Enter a column name of up to 8 characters.
Select the column data type.
Data
Select Integer, 32 Bit integer, Real, or Character.
Enter the table data size as a number of bytes between 1 and 80. This
entry, however, can only be made for Character data. The data size will
Size
be 2 bytes for Integer data, 4 bytes for 32 Bit integer data, and 4 bytes
for Real data, and these values cannot be changed.
Set the data display type. The display type cannot be changed, however,
Display Type if the Data is set to Character or Real.
Select BIN, DEC, HEX, Real, or Character.
Column Comment Enter a column comment of up to 32 characters.

11-8
 11.1 Creating Table Data

11.1.8 Editing Column Attributes

The following operations can be used to edit column attributes by row.
• Inserting column attributes data rows
• Deleting column attributes data rows
• Cutting column attributes data rows
• Copying column attributes data rows
• Pasting column attributes data rows
• Jumping to column attributes data rows
• Changing table definitions
• Saving column attributes data
(1) Inserting Column Attribute Data Rows
Insert one or more consecutive column attribute data rows using the following procedure.
1. Click the column number where the row is to be inserted.
2. Select Edit − Insert from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu.
3. The Setting Number of Insert Data Window will be displayed. Input the number of rows to be inserted and
click the OK Button. The specified number of blank row will be inserted.

• This operation does not increase the actual number of rows, but moves the data down by the number of rows inserted. A
INFO
message box will be displayed if rows will be deleted as a result of the insertion. Click the OK or Cancel Button to
confirm or cancel the insertion.
• The actual number of rows can be increased by changing the number of columns in the table definitions. Refer to (7)
Changing Table Definitions later in this section.

(2) Deleting Column Attribute Data Rows

Delete one or more consecutive column attribute data rows using the following procedure.
1. Click the column number of the row to be deleted.
To delete more than one row, drag the cursor on the column number to select the range to delete.
2. Select Edit − Delete from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu.
3. Click the Yes Button in the message box. The specified rows will be deleted.

This operation does not reduce the actual number of rows, but moves the data up by the number of rows deleted. The actual
INFO
number of rows can be reduced by changing the number of columns in the table definitions. Refer to (7) Changing Table
Definitions later in this section.

(3) Cutting Column Attribute Data

Cut specified ranges of data using the following procedure. The data cut using the cut operation is copied to the
Creating Table Data

clipboard. The data on the clipboard can be reproduced multiple times by using the paste operation.
1. Drag across the column numbers of the rows to be cut.
2. Select Edit − Cut from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu. The specified range of data will be cut.

(4) Copying Column Attribute Data

Copy a specified range of data to the clipboard using the following procedure. The data on the clipboard can be
reproduced multiple times by using the paste operation.
1. Select the range of data to be copied to the clipboard.
11
2. Select Edit − Copy from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu. The specified range of data in will be
copied to the clipboard.

11-9
 11 Creating Table Data
11.1.9 Saving Column Attributes

(5) Pasting Column Attribute Data

Paste column attribute data using the following procedure.
1. Click the column number where the data is to be pasted.
2. Select Edit − Paste from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu. The data on the clipboard will be pasted
at the specified position.

(6) Jumping to Column Attribute Rows

Move the cursor to a specific row using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Go To from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu.
2. The Setting Display Data No. Window will be displayed. Enter the row number to which the cursor is to
be moved and click the OK Button. The cursor will be moved to the specified row.

(7) Changing Table Definitions

Change table data type and other table definitions using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Change from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu.
2. The Table Definition Window will be displayed. Enter the changes and click the OK Button.

11.1.9 Saving Column Attributes

Save column attributes using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the Data Table Column Attribute Menu.
2. A window will be displayed to confirm the save. Click the Yes Button.
3. A window will be displayed showing that the save has been completed normally. Click the OK Button.

The Error Detection Message Box is displayed if the data was not saved successfully. Refer to Appendix A Error Mes-
INFO
sages, eliminate the cause of the error, and save the data again.

11.1.10 Opening Table Data Windows

For details, refer to (2) Opening Table Data Windows in 11.1.4 Manipulating Tables in Table Data Definition List
Windows.

11-10
 11.1 Creating Table Data

11.1.11 Table Data Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in Table data Window.

Menu Command Function

File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens windows for individual functions.
Close Closes Table data Windows.
Save Saves the table data.
Column Definition Opens the Data table column attribute Window.
Import Imports table data.
Export Exports table data.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Go To Moves the cursor to a specific column.
Edit
Insert
Not used with this window.
Delete
Line Insert Inserts a line.
Line Delete Deletes a line.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

Creating Table Data

11

11-11
 11 Creating Table Data
11.1.12 Setting Table Data

11.1.12 Setting Table Data

Table data can be set in the Table data Windows. The data set in the following table is used for the table data
manipulation instructions in the main program, such as TBLBR and TBLBW.

Setting Details
Table Name Displays the name of the table.
Columns Displays the number of column set in the table definitions.
Lines Displays the number of rows set in the table definitions.
Table data store
Displays the storage destination for the table data.
target
Column No. Displays the column numbers in order from the left.
Column Name Displays the column names in order from the left.
Line No. Displays the row numbers in order from the top.
Enter table data between 0 and 9 for decimal, between 0 and 9 and A and F for hexadecimal,
Table Data
and 1 and 0 for binary. Enter an H at the beginning of hexadecimal data numerals.

11.1.13 Editing Table Data

• Jumping the Cursor
Move the cursor to a specific row or column using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Go To from the Table Data Menu.
2. The Jump Line and Column Setting Window will be displayed. Enter the row number and column number
to which the cursor is to be moved and click the OK Button. The cursor will be moved to the specified
position.

11.1.14 Saving and Closing Table Data

(1) Saving
Data entered when making table data settings is saved as soon as the Enter key is pressed.

(2) Closing
Close the Table data window, the Data table column attribute window, and the Table Data Definition List win-
dow to exit the process for creating table data.
1. Active the Table data window and select File − Close from the menu.
2. Active the Data table column attribute window and select File − Close from the menu.
3. Active the Table Data Definition List window and select File − Close from the menu.

11-12
 12
Tools

This chapter explains the monitoring functions that check the Machine Controller's operating
conditions and tools that support program debugging.

12.1 Outline of the Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3

12.2 Tuning Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.2.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.2.2 Opening the Tuning Panel Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
12.2.3 Tuning Panel Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-5
12.2.4 Configuration and Operation of the Tuning Panel Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-6
12.2.5 Exiting Tuning Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-7

12.3 Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8

12.3.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
12.3.2 Opening the Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
12.3.3 Quick Reference Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-9
12.3.4 Quick Reference Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-11
12.3.5 Editing Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15
12.3.6 Closing the Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-20

12.4 Register Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21

12.4.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21
12.4.2 Opening a Register List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21
12.4.3 Register List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-22
12.4.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Data Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-23
12.4.5 Exiting the Register List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-25

12.5 Cross References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26

12.5.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26
12.5.2 Opening the Cross Reference Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26
12.5.3 Cross Reference Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-27
12.5.4 Configuration and Operation of the Cross Reference Condition Window - - - - - - - - 12-27
12.5.5 Closing Cross References - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-29

12.6 Disable Coil Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30

Tools

12.6.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30

12.6.2 Opening the Disable Coil List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
12.6.3 Disable Coil List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
12.6.4 Configuration and Operation of the Disable Coil List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-31 12
12.6.5 Exiting Disable Coil Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-31

12-1
 12 Tools

12.7 Comment Lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32

12.7.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
12.7.2 Opening Comment List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
12.7.3 Comment List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
12.7.4 Configuration and Operation of the Comment List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33
12.7.5 Exiting the Comment Creation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33

12.8 Replacing Register Numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34

12.8.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34
12.8.2 Opening the Register No. Replacement Cross Reference Window - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34
12.8.3 Register Number Replacement Cross Reference Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-35
12.8.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Number Replacement Cross
Reference Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-36
12.8.5 Closing Register Number Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-38

12.9 Motion Program Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39

12.9.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39
12.9.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39
12.9.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-41

12.10 Position Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42

12.10.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42
12.10.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42
12.10.3 Position Monitor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43
12.10.4 Configuration of the Position Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43
12.10.5 Closing Position Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-45

12.11 Task Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46

12.11.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46
12.11.2 Opening the Task Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46
12.11.3 Task Monitor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-47
12.11.4 Task Monitor Display Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-47
12.11.5 Task Monitor Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-48
12.11.6 Closing Task Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-49

12.12 Motion Alarm Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50

12.12.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50
12.12.2 Opening the Motion Alarm Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50
12.12.3 Motion Alarm Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-51
12.12.4 Motion Alarm Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-51
12.12.5 Closing Motion Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-54

12-2
 12.1 Outline of the Tools

12.1 Outline of the Tools

The tools support program debugging and confirmation of motion program execution conditions.
The tools display the contents of Machine Controller registers, data related to the servo being controlled, and
other data in real time. Logging in online is thus required to use these tools. The menu commands to start the
Monitoring Tools will not be displayed in Offline Mode, except for the Register List Tool.

CPU registers SERVOPACK Motor

Tuning panel Motion Program

MOV [A1]100
Displays values of PFORK
special registers.

Motion
Position
Register list program Task monitor Motion alarms
monitor
monitor
Program execution Displays axis Display task
Displays register Displays alarms.
is followed by current positions. execution status.
values.
cursor.

Move from menu commands (online)

Ladder program

Refer to the following for details.

• Ladder Programming Tool
• Motion Programming Monitor
• Position Monitor
• Task Monitor
• Motion Alarm
Tools

12

12-3
 12 Tools
12.2.1 Outline

12.2 Tuning Panel

This section describes the Tuning Panel for defining registers used in DWG and function programs.

12.2.1 Outline
The Tuning Panel is used to define names and units for registers used in DWG and function programs. In Online
Mode, the current values of defined registers are displayed and can be changed.
(1) Tuning Panel Window
All definition data for tuning panels can be entered. Up to 100 definition data items can be created.
No. Data Name S Format Current Value Unit Lower Limit Upper Limit REG-No. DWG

DWG No. Input mode

12.2.2 Opening the Tuning Panel Window

The Tuning Panel Window can be opened from the File Manager or the Engineering Manager.
(1) Opening from the File Manager
1. Click a DWG number on the Directory Tree.
2. Select File − Open − Tuning Panel from the File Manager Menu.
The Tuning Panel window will be displayed.

(2) Opening from the Engineering Manager

Select File − Open − Program − Tuning Panel from the Engineering Manager menu.

• The Open DWG Setting Window will be displayed if the Tuning Panel window is opened when no DWG or function
INFO
program is open. Enter the DWG name and DWG type, and click the OK button.
• The tuning panel settings are made for the main DWG or function program for which the Tuning Panel window was
opened. If tuning panel settings are to be made for other DWG numbers or function symbols, the main program for that
DWG number or function symbol must be opened.

12-4
 12.2 Tuning Panel

12.2.3 Tuning Panel Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Tuning Panel window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Tuning Panel Window.
Close Closes the Tuning Panel Window.
Registers a shortcut for the Tuning Panel win-
Register in User Menu
dow.
Save Saves the tuning panel.
Delete Not used with this window.
Page Setting Sets the print paper margins.
Print Table Prints tuning panel definition data.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Cut Cuts data.
Copy Copies data to the clipboard.
Paste Reproduces the data on the clipboard.
Delete Row Deletes multiple consecutive rows.
Insert Row Inserts a blank row.
Input
Input Settings Switches to Settings input mode.
Input Table Definition Switches to Table Definition input mode.
Input Register Switches to Register input mode.
Direction of Cursor
Sets the direction for cursor movement.
Movement
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Display Head Row Moves the cursor to the first row.
Display Designated
Moves the cursor to a specific row.
Row
Display Last Row Moves the cursor to the last row.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.
Tools

12

12-5
 12 Tools
12.2.4 Configuration and Operation of the Tuning Panel Window

12.2.4 Configuration and Operation of the Tuning Panel Window

(1) Switching Input Modes
There are two input modes for tuning panels: Table Definition Input Mode where entries are made for all cells in
the table; and Register Input Mode where only register numbers are input. The cursor position can be set to verti-
cal, horizontal, or no movement after the inputs have been made and the Enter key pressed.
The method for switching input modes is the same as for table programs. Refer to 9.4.4 Switching Input Modes.

(2) Setting Tuning Panels

All definition data for tuning panels can be entered. Up to 100 definition data items can be created.
No. Data Name S Format Current Value Unit Lower Limit Upper Limit REG-No. DWG

DWG No. Input mode

Setting Details
Data Name Enter a data name of up to 48 characters.
S Enter S to permit current values to be set. If this cell is left blank, the
(Setting Permission) current value cannot be changed.
Format Enter the display format for current values: X for numerals and
(Display Definition)* . (period) for decimal points.
Displays current values for the registers. Register data from the
Machine Controller is displayed in Online Mode, and data from the
Programming Device hard disk will be displayed in Offline Mode. If
Current Value x.xxx is input in the Format, the display will be 1.000 even if the
actual register value is 1000.
The current value can be changed if S is input in the S (Setting per-
missions). The input value is saved when the Enter Key is pressed.
Unit Enter the unit for the current value of up to 8 characters.
Enter the lower limit for the current value. Enter upper and lower
Lower Limit limits such that the lower limit is equal to or less than the upper
limit.
Enter the upper limit for the current value. Enter upper and lower
Upper Limit limits such that the lower limit is equal to or less than the upper
limit.
Enter the register number for displaying the current value. I, O, M,
REG-No.
and D registers can be entered.
If a D register number is input in the REG-No., input the D register
DWG
DWG number.
DWG No. Displays the number of the DWG that is currently open.
Input Mode Displays the current input mode.

12-6
 12.2 Tuning Panel

* Table Formats for Format (Display Definition) are as follows:

Current Value Display Format Register Type

Integer signed number Xx.xxx Integer, double-length integer
Integer unsigned number Uxx.xxx Integer, double-length integer*
Hexadecimal Hxxxx Integer, double-length integer*
Real number (with exponent) x.xxxxxE.xx Real number
Real number
x.xxxxx Real number
(without exponent)
Bit signal ON/OFF or 0/1 Bit*

* Negative values cannot be input when the current values are input.
Note: The decimal point will move depending on the current value. If current values have more digits than
can be displayed, these values will be converted to real numbers with exponents and displayed.

(3) Editing Tuning Panels

The editing methods for tuning panels are the same as for table programs. Refer to 9.4.11 Editing Table Pro-
grams.

(4) Saving Tuning Panels

If a program window with the same DWG number is opened, that program (main or other program) will be saved
also.
Save tuning panels using the following procedure.
1. Select File − Save from the Tuning Panel menu.
2. The DWG/FUNC Saving Window will be displayed. Click the Yes button.
3. The Save Normally Completed Window will be displayed. Click the OK button.

• When tuning panels are saved, a check of whether or not the definition data is correctly input is performed.
IMPORTANT
The Save Error Window is displayed if an error is detected during this check.
• Refer to Save Error Window Configuration under 9.3.11 Saving Ladder Programs for information on error
windows.

(5) Printing Tuning Panels

Tuning panels can be printed from the Tuning Panel window without starting the Print Manager. Only the tuning
panel that is currently open, however, will be printed.
Refer to 9.3.12 Printing Ladder Programs for information on page settings and printing.

12.2.5 Exiting Tuning Panels

The process of creating tuning panels can be exited by closing the Tuning Panel window.
Select File − Close from the Tuning Panel menu to close the Tuning Panel window.
Tools

12

12-7
 12 Tools
12.3.1 Outline

12.3 Quick Reference

This section explains the configuration and operation of the Quick Reference.

12.3.1 Outline
The Quick Reference is composed of the following three kinds of pages.
• List Page: Display/set the specified registers.
• Watch Page: Display/add/edit the specified registers.
• Time Chart: Graphically display the specified register data (bit units).
It is possible to add or delete pages for any function. A name up to 32 characters long can be attached as the title
of the page.

12.3.2 Opening the Quick Reference

Open the Quick Reference from the Engineering Manager.
• Opening from the Engineering Manager
Select View − Quick Reference from the Engineering Manager Menu.

Page (tab)
Boundary line

Quick Reference

The Quick Reference Window is a docking window, so the window can be resized by dragging the boundary lines and the
INFO
window itself can be repositioned by dragging it to the left or right.

12-8
 12.3 Quick Reference

12.3.3 Quick Reference Menu

The popup menu can be displayed by right-clicking in the Quick Reference.
(1) Watch Page

Menu Command Function

View
Quick reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Selects the page to be displayed in the Quick
Select View page
Reference.
Add Sets a register to be registered in the watch page.
Deletes the selected register from the watch
Delete
page.
Deletes all of added registers from the watch
All Delete
page.
Add page
Add List Page Adds a new register list page.
Add Watch Page Adds a new watch page.
Add Graph Page Adds a new time chart.
Deletes the watch page from the Quick Refer-
Delete page
ence.
Edit page
Cut Cuts the watch page.
Copy Copies the watch page.
Pastes a cut or copied watch page into the Quick
Paste
Reference.
Returns the Quick Reference to its default status.
Reset all
(All registered pages and data are deleted.)
Property Changes the title of the watch page.

View Quick reference

Add Select View page
Delete
All Delete
Add page Add List Page
Delete page Add Watch Page
Edit page Add Graph Page
Reset all
Property Cut
Copy
Paste
Tools

12

12-9
 12 Tools
12.3.3 Quick Reference Menu

(2) List and Graph Pages

Menu Command Function
View
Quick reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Selects the page to be displayed in the Quick
Select View page
Reference.
Add page
Add List Page Adds a new register list page.
Add Watch Page Adds a new watch page.
Add Graph Page Adds a new time chart page.
Deletes the watch page from the Quick Refer-
Delete page
ence.
Returns the Quick Reference to its default status.
All Reset
(All registered pages and data are deleted.)
Property Changes the title of the watch page.

View Quick reference

Add page Select View page
Delete page
All Reset Add List Page
Add Watch Page
Property Add Graph Page

12-10
 12.3 Quick Reference

12.3.4 Quick Reference Operations

This section explains the operations of the Quick Reference function.
(1) Page Operations
(a) Selecting Pages to Display
Customize the pages that will be displayed in the Quick Reference.
1. Select View − Select View Page from the popup menu. The Select Show Page window will be displayed.

Fig 12.1 Select Show Page Window

2. Specify which pages will be displayed and which will be hidden.

• Displaying a Page:
Select the option next to the page(s) that you want to display.
• Hiding a Page:
Clear the option next to the page(s) that you do not want to display.

It is not possible to hide all of the pages. At least one option must be selected.
INFO

3. Click the OK button.

Only the selected pages will be displayed as pages.
When the display option is selected for all three pages (as in the example Select Show Page window of
step 1 above), there will be three page tabs displayed. Tools

12

12-11
 12 Tools
12.3.4 Quick Reference Operations

(b) Moving through Pages

Quick Reference pages can move to the left and right.
If the tabs of the Quick Reference pages cannot be displayed within the window, a scroll button will be dis-
played as shown below (The scroll button is circled).

The scroll button will not be displayed if the entire tab can be displayed within the window.
INFO

Click the right scroll button or left scroll button to scroll through the data.
Tabs can be moved in order to the right and left.

(c) Adding a Page

Pages can be added.
The following three kinds of pages can be added.
• Register List Page

• Watch Page

• Time Chart Page

1. Select Add Page from the popup menu and select Add List Page, Add Watch Page, or Add Graph Page
from the submenu.
The Property window will be displayed.

2. Input the title for the page being added and click the OK button.
The selected kind of page will be inserted into the Quick Reference.
The title set in the Property window will be displayed in the tab of the inserted page.

12-12
 12.3 Quick Reference

(d) Deleting a Page

Pages can be deleted from the Quick Reference.
1. Select the page to be deleted so that it is active.
2. Select Delete Page from the popup menu.
The selected page will be deleted from the Quick Reference.

When an added page is deleted, there is no way to undo that deletion. Make sure that you want to delete the
IMPORTANT
selected page.

(e) Changing the Title

The titles of pages can be changed.
1. Select the desired page so that it is active.
2. Select Property from the popup menu.
The Property window will be displayed.

Note: The Property Window shown above is displayed when the title of a Register List page is being
changed.

3. Input the title and click the OK button.

The title displayed in the tab of the selected page will be changed to the name that was input in the
Property Window.

(f) Cutting a Page

Watch pages can be cut.
The Cut operation is possible only for a Watch Page.
1. Select the Watch page to be deleted so that it is active.
2. Select Edit Page − Cut from the popup menu.
The selected Watch page will be cut.

• A page deleted by cutting can be pasted.

INFO
• When pasting, only the last page that was cut will be pasted.

(g) Copying a Page

The Copy operation is possible only for a Watch Page.
1. Select the Watch page to be copied so that it is active.
2. Select Edit Page − Copy from the popup menu.
The selected Watch page will be copied.
Tools

• A copied page can be pasted.

INFO
• When pasting, only the last page that was copied will be pasted. 12

12-13
 12 Tools
12.3.4 Quick Reference Operations

(h) Pasting a Page

The Paste operation is possible only for a Watch Page.
1. Select the Watch page in the location where the page will be pasted so that it is active.
2. Select Edit Page − Paste from the popup menu.
The last page that was cut or copied will be pasted just in front of the active page.

(2) Setting a Register

(a) Adding a Register
The registration of registers is possible only for a Watch Page.
1. Select the Watch page in which the register will be added so that the page is active.
2. Select Add from the popup menu.
The Set Number of Register window will be displayed.

3. Input the register number and DWG name of the register being added to the page and click the OK button.
The register data for the register number specified in the Set Number of Register Window will be
displayed in the last line of the list. When a D register has been set as the register number, the DWG name
specified in the Set Number of Register window will also be displayed in the list.

If the input data is invalid, the data will not be accepted.

IMPORTANT

Refer to 12.3.5 Editing Data for details on data editing such as the set values for the data.
INFO

(b) Deleting a Register

The deletion of registers is possible only for a Watch Page.
1. Select the row containing the data to be deleted so that the row is active.
2. Select Delete from the popup menu.
The selected row will be deleted from the list.

(3) Deleting and Resetting All Data

(a) Deleting All Data
The deletion of all data is possible only for a Watch Page.
1. Select the Watch page in which data is to be deleted so that the page is active.
2. Select All Delete from the pop-up menu.
All of the data will be deleted from the list in the selected Watch page.

12-14
 12.3 Quick Reference

(b) Resetting All Data

The Quick Reference display and data contents can be reset to their default settings.
1. Select All Reset from the popup menu.
A confirmation message will be displayed.

2. Click the Yes button.

The Quick Reference display and all of the data contents will be reset to their initial settings.

12.3.5 Editing Data

Various operations (such as changing data, changing the page display, and setting data in registers) can be per-
formed by editing data in the Quick Reference.
These functions are detailed below.
(1) Editing a Page
A page displayed in the Quick Reference can be edited.
The following table lists the items that can be edited.
Edit Item Details
Adding a Page Adds a new page to the Quick Reference.
Deleting a Page Deletes a page from the Quick Reference.
Changing the Displayed Page Specifies the page to display.
Changing the Page Title Changes the title of the page.
Copying a Page Copies a page (Watch pages only).
Cutting a Page Cuts a page (Watch pages only).
Pasting a Page Pastes a page that was cut or copied (Watch pages only).

Refer to 12.3.4 Quick Reference Operations for details on editing pages.

(2) Registers That Can Be Input

The following table shows the registers that can be input in the Quick Reference.
Register Vari- Maximum Number
Read/Write
able MP910 MP920 MP930 MP940
S Register 1024 1024 1024 1024 R/W
I Register 5120 5120 2048 2048 R/W
O Register 5120 5120 2048 2048 R/W
M Register 32768 32768 32768 32768 R/W
D Register 16384 16384 16384 16384 R/W
C Register 16384 16384 16384 16384 Read only

D registers are unique to each drawing, so a DWG name must be set when a D register is specified. The maxi-
mum number of D registers that can be used is set with the Number of D Registers setting in the DWG Properties
Tools

Window. For all other registers, the maximum number is the maximum shown in the table.

12

12-15
 12 Tools
12.3.5 Editing Data

(3) Editing with the DWG

Registers that are being used in a drawing can be registered from the DWG to the Quick Reference. Furthermore,
any symbols or comments that are input for a register number in the Quick Reference will be reflected in the
DWG.
(a) Registering a Register Number (DWG → Quick Reference)
1. Open the DWG file in the Engineering Manager.
2. Move the cursor over that register number in the DWG that you want to register in the Quick Reference to
select it so that it is active, and right-click to display the popup menu.
3. Select Register Add from the popup menu.
In the following example, register DB00100A has been selected in the DWG.

The above-mentioned operation will register the selected register number (DB00100A in this example) in
the active Watch page within the Quick Reference.
The selected register number and corresponding data will be added to the bottom of the list.

12-16
 12.3 Quick Reference

(b) Adding Symbols/Comments (Quick Reference → DWG)

Symbols and comments (circled in the following figure) can be set in a Quick Reference Watch page.
The following symbol and comment are used in this example.
• Symbol: testtest (up to 8 characters)
• Comment: Register For Test (up to 48 characters)

After the symbol or comment is set, the setting will be reflected in the DWG when the DWG is active.
The symbol will be displayed above the register number and the comment will be displayed at the end of the
row for last output registers only (circled in the following figure).
The symbol is displayed above the comment (circled in the following figure).

Tools

12

12-17
 12 Tools
12.3.5 Editing Data

(c) Editing Register List Page

The various data and settings of the Register List page are shown below.
The following figure shows the Register List Page Window.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

1. Register Number
• Description: Specifies the leading register number of the registers containing the data to display/set.
• Set value: Input the register number.
2. DWG (DWG Name)
• Description: DWG name for register numbers that have DWG names.
• Set value: Input the DWG name.
When a D register is specified in the Register No., a DWG name must be set because the D registers are
unique to the drawing. The DWG setting is ignored for all other registers.
3. D (Number of Registers)
• Description: Specifies the number of the registers containing the data to display/set.
• Set value: Input the number of registers to display. Input a multiple of 4. If the set value is not a
multiple of 4, the input value will automatically be increased to the nearest multiple of 4.
4. TYPE (Display Format)
• Description: Specifies the register data display format.
• Set value: Select the desired data display format from the pull-down menu. The following table shows
the data formats that can be selected from the list.
Register Number Setting Display Formats
Binary Value set in
Displays ON or OFF.
Register Number
DEC Decimal display
HEX Hexadecimal display
Word, Long Value, or BIN Binary display
Floating Value set in
Register Number FLOAT Floating-point display
LONG Long (4 byte) display
ASCII ASCII display

The register number will be set to the following format automatically based on the selected value.
• Floating-point value when FLOAT is selected (for example, MF††††)
• Long value when LONG is selected (for example, ML††††)
• Word value when any other value is selected (for example, MW††††)
5. Controller (Type of Machine Controller)
• Description: Indicates the type of the Machine Controller.
• Set value: Display only (The data cannot be set.)
6. Register Data
• Description: Indicates the current register data.
• Set value: Input a value in the data format set with TYPE. Data set in this field will be reflected as the
data of the register.

12-18
 12.3 Quick Reference

(4) Editing Watch Page

The various data and settings of the Watch page are shown below.
The following figure shows the Watch Page Window.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1. Register (Register Number)

• Description: Specifies the register number of the register containing the data to display/set.
• Set value: Input the register number.
2. DWG Name
• Description: DWG name for register number that has DWG name.
• Set value: Input the DWG name.
When a D register is specified in the Register, a DWG name must be set because the D registers are
unique to the drawing. The DWG Name setting cannot be input for any other registers.
3. DSP Type (Display Format)
• Description: Specifies the data display format.
• Set value: Select the desired data display format from the pull-down menu. The following table shows
the data formats that can be selected from the list.
Register Number Setting Display Formats
Binary BIN Displays ON or OFF.
DEC Decimal display
Word HEX Hexadecimal display
BIN Binary display
LONG Long (4 byte) display
Long
HEX Hexadecimal display
Floating-point FLOAT Floating-point display

4. Data (Register Data)

• Description: Indicates the current register data set in the register number.
• Set value: Input a value in the data format set with DSP Type. Data set in this field will be reflected as
the data of the register.
5. Symbol
• Description: Indicates the name (symbol) corresponding to the register number.
• Set value: Input the name (symbol) that you want to correspond to the register data. The name set in
this field will be displayed above the register number in the drawing specified by the DWG name.
6. Comment
• Description: Indicates the data comment.
• Set value: Input the comment corresponding to the register data. A comment up to 48 characters long
can be input.
Tools

12

12-19
 12 Tools
12.3.6 Closing the Quick Reference

(5) Editing Time Chart Page

The various data and settings of the Time Chart Page are shown below.
The following figure shows the Time Chart Page Window.
1. 2. 3. 4.

1. Register Number
• Description: Specifies the register number of the register containing the data to chart.
• Set value: Input the register number. Only bit data can be input.
2. DWG (DWG Name)
• Description: DWG name for register number that has DWG name.
• Set value: Input the DWG name.
When a D register is specified in the Register No., a DWG name must be set because the D registers are
unique to the drawing. The DWG setting cannot be input for any other registers.
3. Initial Button
Click this button to clear (erase) the chart that is being displayed.
This operation does not clear the register number or DWG name.
4. Chart Display
A chart is displayed based on the data of the register specified by the Register No. and DWG.

12.3.6 Closing the Quick Reference

To close the Quick Reference, select View − Quick Reference from the Quick Reference Menu and clear the
Quick Reference Option.

12-20
 12.4 Register Lists

12.4 Register Lists

This section describes the register list structure and operations.

12.4.1 Outline
The current values of the Machine Controller's internal registers, the S, I, O, M, D, and C registers, can be dis-
played or changed on a Register List Window.
A separate Register List Window is opened for each register display parameters that is set. More than one Regis-
ter List Window can be open at the same time. Select File − Open Register List from the Register List Menu, a
child window is opened to show the contents of the registers.
Parent window

Register List
Menu Bar

Register Data
PT#: CPU#
Child windows
Select

Register Data
PT#: CPU#

Select

12.4.2 Opening a Register List Window

A Register List Window can be opened as a separate window such as a File Manager or an Engineering Manager
Window.
(1) Register List Window
The Register List Window can be opened from either the File Manager or the Engineering Manager. Both of
these procedures are explained below.
1. Opening From the File Manager
Select Tool − Register List from the File Manager Menu. Tools

12

2. Opening From the Engineering Manager

Select File − Open − Tool − Register List from the Engineering Manager Menu.

12-21
 12 Tools
12.4.3 Register List Menus

(2) Two or More Register Data Windows

One Register Data window is opened automatically when the Register List window is opened. Open another
Register Data window when necessary using the following procedure.
Register contents can be displayed as integer, double-length integer, real number, or bit data. The displayed data
is from the Machine Controller in Online Mode and from the Programming Device hard disk in Offline Mode.
To create a new Register Data Window, select File − Open Register List from the Register List Menu. A new
Register Data window will be displayed in the Register List window.

Register list

12.4.3 Register List Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Register List window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Displays the File Manager.
Open Register List Displays the Register Data Window.
Close* Closes the Register Data Window.
Exit Exits the Register List Window.
View Mode
DEC* Displays register list in decimal.
HEX* Displays register list in hexadecimal.
* Displays register list in real numbers.
FLOAT
* Displays register list in binary.
BIN
* Displays register list in double-length integers.
LONG
* Displays register list in ASCII.
ASCII
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Function Bar Displays the Function Bar.
Window
Cascade* Stacks windows in the display.
* Lines up windows in the display.
Tile
Next Window Displays the next window.
Delete Window Deletes the window.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

* Displayed only in the Register List window.

12-22
 12.4 Register Lists

• Tool Icons in Register List Window

Among the various menu items, most commonly used items are available through tool icons as shown in the
following illustration.

Version information
ASCII display
Floating-point decimal display
Long integer display
Binary display
Hexadecimal display
Decimal display

Delete window
Next window
Open New Register Data Window
Call File Manager

12.4.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Data Window

(1) Window Configuration
When the (parent) Register List Window is opened, one child window, the Register Data window is also opened.
Child Window Details
Register Data
Displays the register contents.
Window

(2) Displaying Registers

Set the following parameters in the Register Data window and then click anywhere in the display area.
The contents of the registers will be displayed.
Setting Details
Register Number Sets the register number to start the display.
DWG Sets the DWG or function name for local registers.
D Sets the number of registers to display.
TYPE Sets the display type: Binary, decimal, hexadecimal, or ASCII.
Controller
Displays the type of the Machine Controller. (Setting is not possi-
(Type of Machine
ble.)
Controller)

(a) Select Controller Button

The Select Controller button is used to check registers from another Machine Controller. When the button is
clicked, a list of the PLC Folders registered in the File Manager will be displayed. Select the desired PLC
(Machine Controller).
The default will normally be the PLC Folder that was the source of starting the register list. If the register list
is started from the Engineering Manager, for example, the default will be the Machine Controller from which
the Engineering Manager was started.
Normally, only register data from the PLC Folder that is currently logged on to is displayed, and there is no
need to click the Select Controller button.
Tools

12

12-23
 12 Tools
12.4.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Data Window

Click the Select Controller Button to display the Select window.

Select

Controller N...CPU Name Order Name Group Name Server

• If a register number other than for a D register is input for the Register Number setting, there is no need to input a DWG
INFO
number.
• For a Register Number setting, the motion program number can be input for the DWG = Box.
• A register list cannot be displayed for X, Y, A, or # registers.
• In Offline Mode, a register list can be displayed for only the M register, and not for other registers.
However, if the register data is saved on the Programming Device hard disk or a floppy disk using the Transfer
function, the register list can be displayed.

(3) Changing the Display Format

The numeric display mode and register type can be changed for the displayed register list.
(a) Changing the Numeric Display Format
The display format for the register's numeric values can be changed to decimal, hexadecimal, binary, or
ASCII.
• Decimal Display
Register values can be displayed in decimal by selecting View Mode − DEC from the Register List Menu.
• Hexadecimal Display
Register values can be displayed in hexadecimal by selecting View Mode − HEX from the Register List
Menu
• Binary Display
Register values can be displayed in binary by selecting View Mode − BIN from the Register List Menu.
• ASCII Display
Register values can be displayed in ASCII by selecting View Mode − ASCII from the Register List Menu.

If register values that cannot be displayed as ASCII characters are set for ASCII display, undefined data will be displayed.
INFO

(b) Changing the Register Type

The register type can be changed to integer, double-length integer, or real number.
• Integers
The register number and register values can be displayed as integers by selecting either View Mode −
DEC or View Mode − HEX from the Register List Menu.

If DEC is selected, the integer register will be displayed in decimal. If HEX is selected, the integer register will be dis-
INFO
played in hexadecimal.

• Double-length Integers
The register number and register values can be displayed as double-length integers by selecting View
Mode − LONG from the Register List Menu.

12-24
 12.4 Register Lists

• Real Numbers
The register number and register values can be displayed as real numbers by selecting View Mode −
FLOAT from the Register List Menu.

(4) Changing Register Values

Change register values using the following procedure.
1. Move the cursor to the register value to be changed.
2. Input the value and then press the Enter key.

• For integer, double-length integer, or real number register lists, input values from 0 to 9 in decimal, 0 to 9 or A to F in
INFO
hexadecimal, or either 1 or 0 in binary. A negative value can be input if the register values are displayed in decimal.
• The values that are input will be immediately saved to the Machine Controller when the Enter key is pressed.

12.4.5 Exiting the Register List

Exit the register list by closing the Register List Window and the Register Data window using the following pro-
cedure.
• To close the Register Data Window, select File − Close from the Register List Menu.
• To close the Register List Window, select File − Exit from the Register List Menu.

Tools

12

12-25
 12 Tools
12.5.1 Outline

12.5 Cross References

This section describes the cross reference function for registers used in programs.

12.5.1 Outline
The cross reference function will search programs to find out which registers are used in which programs and
how the registers are used.

12.5.2 Opening the Cross Reference Window

The Cross Reference window is opened from the Engineering Manager.
• Opening from the Engineering Manager
1. Select File − Open − Tool − Cross References from the Engineering Manager Menu. The Cross
Reference Condition window will be displayed.

2. Set the conditions in the Cross Reference Condition window and then click the OK button. The Cross
Reference window will be opened.

If step 1. is executed when a DWG or function program is open, the Cross Reference window will open directly based on
INFO
the leading register used in the program. This will apply to all the programs that are open.

12-26
 12.5 Cross References

12.5.3 Cross Reference Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Cross Reference window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Cross Reference Window.
Close Closes the Cross Reference Window.
Register Set Sets the cross reference conditions.
Remake Cross Info. Updates the cross reference information.
Save Not used with this window.
Delete Not used with this window.
Print Prints the cross reference data.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the Status Bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Option
Normal Displays the Normal Mode.
High-speed Displays the High-speed Mode.
Option Displays the Expanded Mode.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

12.5.4 Configuration and Operation of the Cross Reference Condition Window

(1) Executing Cross References
The cross reference conditions can be reset while the Cross Reference window is open.
Select File − Open − Tools − Cross Reference from the Engineering Manager Menu. The Cross Reference Con-
dition window will be displayed.
(a) Specifying Cross Reference Conditions
Input the Cross Reference setting conditions in the Cross Reference Specifying window.
Setting Details
Register
Input the register number to search for.
(Register Number)
Input the DWG number of function symbol to search for. Wildcards can be
used as shown below.
* Searches all drawings.
L Searches the parent low-speed drawing.
L* Searches all low-speed drawings.
Drawing Number
L10* Searches drawing L10 and all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.* Searches all grandchild drawings of L10.
Tools

L10.01 Searches the specified drawing.

F* Searches all user functions.
FUNC001 Searches the specified function. 12
Select the search mode from Normal, High Speed, or Option. Refer to (b)
Search Mode
Details of Search Mode.

12-27
 12 Tools
12.5.4 Configuration and Operation of the Cross Reference Condition Window

(b) Details of Search Mode

1. Normal Search Mode
Select Option − Normal from the Cross Reference Menu.
In Online Mode, the Machine Controller will be searched; in Offline Mode, the Programming Device hard
disk will be searched. Table programs and tuning panels will not be searched in Offline Mode.
2. High-speed Search Mode
Select Option − High-speed from the Cross Reference Menu.
The cross reference information created by the cross reference information update function will be
searched. High-speed searching is possible because the cross reference information is searched instead of
the programs. Always update the cross reference information before performing the search using the
following procedure.
The cross reference information must be updated before executing a high-speed search.
a) Select File − Remake Cross Info. from the Cross Reference Menu.
b) The Remake Cross Information Window will be displayed. Click the OK button. The most recent cross
reference information will be saved on the Programming Device hard disk.
3. Option (Expanded) Search Mode
Select Option − Option from the Cross Reference Menu.
In Online Mode, the Machine Controller will be searched; in Offline Mode, the Programming Device hard
disk will be searched. In both cases, the table programs and tuning panels on the Programming Device
hard disk will be searched.

(2) Search Results

The Cross Reference Window is displayed as follows:
Cross Reference
Login information

Register Drawing
Search Mode
number number

A B C
1 Result Result A
2

Setting Details
Displays the port number and other information when logged in
Login Information
online.
Register Number Displays the register number that was searched for.
Drawing Number Displays the DWG number or function symbol that was searched.
Displays the search mode that was used (normal, high-speed, or
Search Mode
expanded).
Results Refer to Display of Search Results following this table.

12-28
 12.5 Cross References

• Display of Search Results

Search results are displayed in the following form.
H01 : 010 i ILKTB P002

6.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.

1. DWG Number or Function Symbol

The DWG number or function symbol using the search register.
2. Program Type
The type of program using the search register.
• /: Main program
• |: SFC flowchart
• -: SFC action box
• =: Symbol definition
• :: Table program
• !: Tuning panel
• %: FBD
3. Position
The position of the search register. The step number is given for DWG or function programs, SFC
flowcharts, and SFC action boxes. The row number is given for table programs.
4. Index Type
The type of index is given if the register is used as an indexed register.
• i: i register
• j: j register
5. Instruction Type
The type of instruction or program is displayed.
• #CTBL: # register constant table
• MCTBL: M register constant table
• OTBL: Interlock table
• ASMTBL: Part composition table
• TUNPNL: Tuning panel
• SYMBOL: Symbol definition
6. Table Number
The table number is displayed for interlock tables.
• P000: Tuning panel
• From P001: Symbol definition

12.5.5 Closing Cross References

Close the Cross Reference Window to exit cross references.
Select File − Close from the Cross Reference Menu to close the window.
Tools

12

12-29
 12 Tools
12.6.1 Outline

12.6 Disable Coil Lists

This section explains the function for searching for disabled coils.

12.6.1 Outline
Disable Coils Lists searches for disabled coils in the program and display information on them.

12.6.2 Opening the Disable Coil List Window

The Disable Coil List window is opened from the Engineering Manager.
• Opening from the Engineering Manager
Select File − Open − Tool − Disable Coil List from the Engineering Manager menu. The Disable Coil List
window will be displayed.

12.6.3 Disable Coil List Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Disable Coil List window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Disable Coil List Window.
Close Closes the Disable Coil List Window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

12-30
 12.6 Disable Coil Lists

12.6.4 Configuration and Operation of the Disable Coil List Window

(1) Setting Disable Coil Lists

Setting/Display Details
Ref. DWG Specify the range of programs to search for.
Search Button Executes the search.
No. Displays the row number.
Displays the DWG number or function symbol using the disabled
Drawing/Function
coil.
STEP Displays the step number with the disabled coil.
RELAY Displays the relay number of the disabled coil.
Displays the status of the disabled coil.
DIS ON: Disabled coil is ON
OFF: Disabled coil is OFF
Comment Displays the relay number comment.

(a) Specifying Search Program Ranges

DWG and function main programs, as well as SFC action boxes (offline only) can be searched.
Search Range Details
* Searches all drawings.
L Searches the parent low-speed drawing.
L* Searches all low-speed drawings.
L10* Searches drawing L10 and all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.* Searches all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.01 Searches the specified drawing.
F* Searches all user functions.
FUNC001 Searches the specified function.

(b) Display of Step Numbers

Step numbers and program types are displayed as follows:
/ 010

The step number in the program

The program type
/: Main program
−: SFC program

12.6.5 Exiting Disable Coil Lists

Close the Disable Coil List window to exit disabled coil lists.
Select File − Close from the Disable Coil List menu to close the window.
Tools

12

12-31
 12 Tools
12.7.1 Outline

12.7 Comment Lists

This section describes the creation of comments for registers in programs.

12.7.1 Outline
DWG and function program titles and comments for registers in currently displayed programs can be created at
the same time.

12.7.2 Opening Comment List Window

• Opening from the Engineering Manager
Select File − Open − Tool − Comment List from the Engineering Manager menu.

12.7.3 Comment List Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Comment List window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Comment List Window.
Close Closes the Comment List Window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
Edit
Cut Cuts symbols and comments for registers.
Copy Copies symbols and comments for registers.
Pastes symbols and comments that have been cut
Paste
or copied.
Del (Delete) Deletes symbols and comments for registers.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

12-32
 12.7 Comment Lists

12.7.4 Configuration and Operation of the Comment List Window

(1) Display Items
The symbols and comments defined for register numbers are displayed in the Comment List window.
Display Details
Enter the DWG number or function symbol for which comments are
DWG/FUNC
to be created.
Select the type of comment display.
Main Program: DWG, function, or table programs
Type SFC Flow Chart: SFC flowcharts
SFC Time Chart: SFC timecharts
SFC ABOX: SFC action boxes
Click the Refresh button to display the register numbers, symbols,
Refresh Button and comments used in the program set in the DWG/FUNC and Type
input fields.
Title Enter a DWG or function program title of up to 48 characters.
Displays the register numbers used in the program set in the DWG/
Register Number
FUNC and Type input fields.
Enter a symbol of up to 16 characters to be used for the register num-
Symbol
ber.
Comment Enter a comment of up to 48 characters for the register number.

(2) Creating Comments

Create register comments using the following procedure.
1. Set the DWG number or function symbol and the display type.
2. Click the Refresh button to display the register numbers used within the specified program.
3. Enter the title, symbols, and comments corresponding to the displayed register numbers.

Comments are saved when the Enter key is pressed after the comment has been entered in step 3.
INFO

(3) Editing Comments

Comment rows can be edited by selecting cut, copy, paste, and delete from the Edit menu.
Both the symbol and the comment in the selected row will be edited together.
To edit only the symbol or comment, double-click the cell, select the data with the cursor, and then edit it.

12.7.5 Exiting the Comment Creation

Close the Comment List window to exit comment lists.
Click the button in upper right corner to close the window.
Tools

12

12-33
 12 Tools
12.8.1 Outline

12.8 Replacing Register Numbers

This section describes the function for replacing a register number with another number.

12.8.1 Outline
The register number replacement function can be used to search for and replace any register number used in a
program.

• Searching and replacing are not possible in Online Mode.

IMPORTANT
• When register numbers are replaced, cross reference information is automatically updated. To reflect the
results of register number replacement in the Machine Controller, transfer the DWG or function program
that was changed to the Machine Controller using the Transfer function.

12.8.2 Opening the Register No. Replacement Cross Reference Window

The Register No. Replacement Corss Reference window is opened from the Engineering Manager.
• Opening from the Engineering Manager
Select File − Open − Tool − Register Replace from the Engineering Manager Menu. The Register No.
Replacement Cross Reference window will be displayed.

Search/replacement results display area

12-34
 12.8 Replacing Register Numbers

12.8.3 Register Number Replacement Cross Reference Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Register No. Replacement Cross
Reference window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Opens the Register Number Replacement Cross
Open
Reference Window.
Closes the Register Number Replacement Cross
Close
Reference Window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

Tools

12

12-35
 12 Tools
12.8.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Number Replacement Cross Reference Window

12.8.4 Configuration and Operation of the Register Number Replacement Cross

Reference Window
(1) Executing Register Number Replacement
The register numbers that can be used depend on the type of Machine Controller. Refer to the relevant Machine
Controller User's Manual: Design and Maintenance for details.
Searches and replacements can be executed for DWG and function programs, SFC program, # register constant
tables, M register constant tables, I/O conversion tables, interlock tables, and part composition tables.
Input the following items and click the OK button to search and replace the register numbers.
Setting Details
Input the register number to search for.
Register type: S, I, O, M, D, C, #, X, Y, Z
Target Register
Data type of register: Integer, Double-length integer, Real number,
Bit
To replace the register, input the register number to use after replace-
ment.
Replacement S, M, D, C, #, X, Y, and Z registers cannot be replaced with I or O
(Replacement registers or visa versa.
Register) Input the register data type of the leading register. If no replacement
register is specified, the target register will be search for but not
replaced.
Input the number of registers to search for or replace. Specify the
Replacement/Search
number of words for integer registers and the number of bits for bit
(Number of Registers
registers.
to be Replaced or
With bit registers, bits between 1 and 30,000 can be searched for or
Searched)
replaced in one operation.
Replacement/Search Input the leading and ending drawing numbers to search or replace.
(Replacement/Search To search or replace only one drawing, specify just the leading draw-
Range) ing number.
Replacement/Search Specify the order of displaying the search/replacement results as in
Condition order of DWG numbers or in order of register numbers.
OK Button Starts the search/replacement operation.
Cancel Button Closes the Register No. Replacement Cross Reference window.
New Condition Button Clears the search/replacement data to the default.
Search/replacement Display the results of the search/replacement operation. Refer to
results display area Search/Replacement Results Display Format following this table.

(a) Search/Replacement Results Display Format

1. Search Results Display window
DWG No. Register 1 2 3
1 Result Result
2 Result Result

Display Details
DWG No. Displays search drawing number.
Register Displays target register.
Refer to (c) Executing Register Number Replacement in 12.8.3 Reg-
1, 2, 3, etc.
ister Number Replacement Cross Reference Menus.

12-36
 12.8 Replacing Register Numbers

2. Search/Replacement Results Display window

DWG No. Previous After 1 2
1 Results Results
2

Display Details
DWG No. Displays searched or replaced DWG number or function symbol.
Previous Displays register number before replacement.
After Displays register number after replacement.
Refer to (c) Executing Register Number Replacement in 12.8.3 Reg-
1, 2, 3, etc.
ister Number Replacement Cross Reference Menus.

(b) Specifying Search/Replacement Ranges

The following type of wildcards can be used to specify search/replacement ranges. Wildcards cannot be used
in both the start and end specifications.
Search/Replacement
Details
Range
Searches/replaces all drawings.
* Search/replacement is executed in the following order: drawings A,
I, H, and L, and then user functions.
L Searches/replaces the parent low-speed drawing.
L* Searches/replaces all low-speed drawings.
L10* Searches/replaces drawing L10 and all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.* Searches/replaces all grandchild drawings of L10.
L10.01 Searches/replaces the specified drawing.
F* Searches/replaces all user functions beginning with F.
FUNC001 Searches/replaces the specified user function.

Tools

12

12-37
 12 Tools
12.8.5 Closing Register Number Replacement

(c) Display of Search/Replacement Results

Search and replacement results are displayed in the following form when a search/replacement operation is
executed.
* L01. 03 / 001 $ i

6.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.

1. Replacement Result
An asterisk (*) is displayed when the replacement is successful. Nothing is displayed if only a search was
performed.
2. DWG Number or Function Symbol
The DWG number or function symbol is displayed. The page number is displayed for table programs and
other programs with multiple pages. For example, L01.02P01 indicates page 01 in L01.02.
3. Program Type
The type of program using the search register.
• /: Main program
• |: SFC flowchart
• -: SFC action box
• =: Symbol definition
• :: Table program
• !: Tuning panel
• %: FBD
4. Position
The position of the search/replace register. The step number is given for DWG or function programs, SFC
flowcharts, and SFC action boxes. The row number is given for table programs.
5. Application
The application of the search/replace register.
• Blank: Read
• $: Storage or coil
• &: Transfer (bit or word)
• @: Other (e.g., timer)
6. Index Type
The type of index is given if the register is used as an indexed register.
• i: i register
• j: j register

12.8.5 Closing Register Number Replacement

Close the Register No. Replacement Cross Reference window to exit register number replacement.
Select File − Close from the Register Number Replacement Cross Reference Menu to close the window.

12-38
 12.9 Motion Program Monitoring

12.9 Motion Program Monitoring

This section describes how to follow motion program execution conditions one step at a time with an operation
cursor.

12.9.1 Outline
The motion program monitor function is built into the Motion Editor to follow program execution. It works
together with the Motion Editor.
Motion program monitoring is performed automatically when the Motion Editor is opened with the MPE720
connected to the Machine Controller in Online Mode. If an open motion program is running, the currently exe-
cuted program statement row will be displayed in reversed color with an operation cursor.
For details on opening the window and menu configuration, refer to Chapter 10 Program Folder 2: Motion Pro-
gramming.
MPE720 Motion Editor Window

00005 VEL [A1] 6000;

00006 ACC [A1] 1000;
00007 MOV [A1] 1000; The operation cursor shows the
00008 ACC [A1] 500; row in the motion program that
is currently being executed.
The cursor will move to the
next row when execution of the
current row has been
completed.

MP940
TX
BAT R
X
RDY
RUN
ALM
1
BAT
PRT1
M
PRT2
E
C
RUN
1 2 3 4 5 6

H
INIT A
TEST T
FLASH R
2
PP O
COPY L
N
I
O
N
PORT1 K

I/O

PORT2

POWER

+24V LED
GND
FG

12.9.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor

When a motion program that is being executed is opened from the Motion Editor, it is displayed in the program
monitor mode.
In the program monitor mode, the move command currently being executed is displayed in reversed color as
shown in the following illustration. The area moves according to the program execution.
Tools

12

12-39
 12 Tools
12.9.2 Opening the Motion Program Monitor

(1) Monitor Display for PFORK Command

The PFORK command is used to execute up to four processes in parallel based on the operands of the command.
The process number to be monitored must be specified.
When monitoring is performed, the move command in process 1 specified by label 1 is monitored by default.

PFORK Label 1, Label 2, Label 3, Label 4;

Label 1: Process 1
JOINTO Label 9
Block
Label 2: Process 2 The motion
JOINTO Label end command from
process 1 is
Label 3: Process 3 displayed in reversed
JOINTO Label 9 color as the default.

Label 4: Process 4
JOINTO Label 9

Label 9: PJOINT;

Change the block that is to be displayed for monitoring using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Monitor Parallel No. from the Motion Editor Menu.
2. Input the parallel number (block number) in the Monitor Parallel Specification dialog box, and then
click the Execution button. For the parallel number, input a number from 1 to 4.

(2) Commands Displayed for Monitoring

The following table shows the commands that are displayed in reversed color in the monitor mode.
Command Details Command Details
MOV Positioning MVS Linear interpolation
MCW Circular interpolation SPH Spherical interpolation
MCC Helical interpolation ZRN Zero point return
SKP Skip MVT Set time positioning
SPL Spline path compensation EXM External positioning
PFN In-position check UFC User function call
ACC Acceleration time change DCC Deceleration time change
SCC S-curve time constant change TIM Dwell time
IOW I/O variable wait MSEE Subroutine call

12-40
 12.9 Motion Program Monitoring

12.9.3 Stopping and Restarting the Monitoring Display

This section explains how to stop and restart the monitoring display.
(1) Stopping the Monitoring Display
To stop the monitoring display, press the Space key while the Motion Editor window is active. The cursor will
be changed from the operation cursor (in reversed color) to the editing cursor. The program can be edited while
the monitoring display is stopped.

00003 VEL [A1] 3000;

00004 ACC [A1] 2000;
00005 MOV [A1] 1000;

00003 VEL [A1] 3000;

00004 ACC [A1] 2000;
00005 MOV [A1] 1000;

Editing cursor

If an attempt is made to edit and save a program that is being executed while the monitoring display is stopped,
IMPORTANT
the program may not run normally.

(2) Restarting the Monitoring Display

Restart a monitoring display that has been stopped using the following procedure.
Select View − Monitor Regeneration from the Motion Editor Menu while the Motion Editor window is active.

If a motion program is saved while the monitoring display is stopped, the monitoring display will be restarted.
INFO

Tools

12

12-41
 12 Tools
12.10.1 Outline

12.10 Position Monitor

This section explains how to use position monitoring to display the current positions of the axes.

12.10.1 Outline
The Position Monitor window displays and periodically updates the current positions of the axes controlled by
the Machine Controller.
The current positions are displayed for both the work coordinate system and the machine coordinate system.
axis 2
axis 2
(axis 1)
Current position

(axis 2)

(0, 0) Workpiece axis 1

coordinates
axis 1
(0, 0) Machine coordinates

Fig 12.2 Coordinate System Example

12.10.2 Opening the Position Monitor Window

The Position Monitor window can be opened from the Engineering Manager. Select File − Open − Motion Pro-
gram − Position Monitor from the Engineering Manager menu.
The Position Monitor window will be displayed.

12-42
 12.10 Position Monitor

12.10.3 Position Monitor Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Position Monitor window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Position Monitor Window.
Close Closes the Position Monitor Window.
Registers a shortcut for the Position Monitor
Register in User Menu
window.
Save Not used with this window.
Delete Not used with this window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Quick Reference Displays the Quick Reference.
Display Item Selects a display item.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

12.10.4 Configuration of the Position Monitor Window

The items displayed in the Position Monitor window include the work coordinates for axes defined by groups,
machine coordinates, and work coordinate system feedback positions.
(1) Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Position Monitor window. Hyphens will be displayed in
Offline Mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port.
UT# Displays the unit number of the Machine Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto. Tools

12

12-43
 12 Tools
12.10.4 Configuration of the Position Monitor Window

(2) Position Information

Display Details
Select a group name defined in the group definitions from the list in
the box below the login information.
Group Name The current positions will be shown for the axes defined for the
selected group. If All Group is selected, the current positions will be
shown for the axes for all groups.
Displays the physical axis numbers for axes defined by the selected
Physical Axis
group.
Displays the logical axis names for the physical axes in the group
Logical Axis
definitions.
Displays the work coordinates for each axis. The work coordinates
Work Coordinate
are shown with the work coordinates offset added to the target posi-
System
tion monitor.
Displays the machine coordinates for each axis. The machine coordi-
Machine Coordinate
nates use the target position monitor values.
Displays the work coordinate system feedback positions for each
Work Coordinate axis. These positions are shown with the work coordinate offset
added to the position monitor.
This is the unit for the coordinates. It is defined by a Servo Module
Unit
Function Selection Flag.

• The Servo Module Function Selection Flags are in a fixed parameter.

INFO
• The work coordinate offset is a setting parameter.
• The target position monitor and position monitor are monitoring parameter.

(3) Selecting Display Items

The work coordinates, machine coordinates, and the work coordinate system feedback positions are all displayed
when the Position Monitor window is displayed. Any of these items can also be selected for display. Select one
of them using the following procedure.
1. Select View − Display Item from the Position Monitor Menu.
2. The Current Value Monitor Display Items dialog box will be displayed. Select the item to be displayed,
and then click the Set button.

12-44
 12.10 Position Monitor

The item selected in step 2 will be displayed.

Physical Axis 01.01
Logical Axis A1 Unit
Work coordinate system 480 mm

Position deviations cannot be displayed with MP-series Machine Controllers. It can only be selected as a display item.
INFO

12.10.5 Closing Position Monitoring

Exit position monitoring by closing the Position Monitor window.
To close the Position Monitor Window, select File − Close from the Position Monitor menu.

Tools

12

12-45
 12 Tools
12.11.1 Outline

12.11 Task Monitor

This section explains how to display motion program execution conditions in the Task Monitor.

The Task Monitor will work properly only when PGM automatic generation is enabled in the Group Defini-
IMPORTANT
tions. Do not use the Task Monitor otherwise.

12.11.1 Outline
With task monitoring, the Machine Controller displays the name of program currently being executed for each
task, and shows their execution status.
The following figure shows four groups with four tasks under the first group, and four processes under the first
task. The execution status for all tasks and processes under any one group can be monitored in the Task Monitor
at the same time. Machine Controllers, however, support only one group.
Group name Tasks Processes

Task Monitor Group 01 MPM001 PFORK: Process 1

PFORK: Process 2

PFORK: Process 3

PFORK: Process 4

MPM002 PFORK: Process 2

MPM003 PFORK: Process 3

MPM004 PFORK: Process 4

Group 02

Group 03

Group 04

12.11.2 Opening the Task Monitor Window

Open the Task Monitor window from the Engineering Manager. Select File − Open − Motion Program − Task
Monitor from the Engineering Manager Menu.
The Task Monitor window will be displayed.

• Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Task Monitor window. Hyphens will be displayed
in Offline Mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port.
UT# Displays the unit number of the Machine Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto.

12-46
 12.11 Task Monitor

12.11.3 Task Monitor Menus

The following table shows menu commands and functions displayed in the Task Monitor window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Task Monitor Window.
Close Closes the Task Monitor Window.
Registers a shortcut for the Task Monitor win-
Register in User Menu
dow.
Save Not used with this window.
Delete Not used with this window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Detail Mode Displays monitoring in detail.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

12.11.4 Task Monitor Display Modes

Task monitoring can be displayed in either of the following two modes.
Display Mode Details
Displays the motion program's groups and the execution conditions
Standard of the tasks (motion programs) executed in parallel within those
groups. This is the default mode.
Displays the PFORK command operating conditions and the pro-
Detailed gram's execution step numbers in addition to the information dis-
played in the Standard Display Mode.

(1) Standard Display Mode

When the Task Monitor Window is opened, it appears in the Standard Display Mode as shown in the following
illustration.

Task Monitor
PT#
Task 1 Task 2
Group Task 3
Group Mode Main Program Program Status Main Program Program Status
MPM†††
Tools

12

12-47
 12 Tools
12.11.5 Task Monitor Configuration

(2) Detailed Display Mode

To switch from the Standard Display Mode to the Detailed Display Mode, select View − Detailed Mode from the
Task Manager Menu. To return to the Standard Display Mode, select View − Detailed Mode again.

Task Monitor
PT#
Task 1 Task 2
Group
Group Mode Main Program Program Status Step# Main Program Program Status Step#
MPM†††
Process 1
Process 2
Process 3
Process 4

12.11.5 Task Monitor Configuration

The items displayed by the Task Monitor in both Standard and Detailed Display Mode are listed in the fol-
lowing table.
Display Details
Group Name Displays the group name set in the group definitions.
Group Mode*1 Displays the group execution status.
Displays the number of the motion program running for Task n.
Task n Main Program In Detailed Display Mode, the process number is displayed below
the motion program number.
Displays the execution status of the motion program running for
Task n Program Task n.
Status*2 In Detailed Display Mode, the process status*3 for each process exe-
cuted in parallel for PFORK is displayed.
Displays the step number being executed in the program (Detailed
Step #
Display Mode only).

* 1. The following group mode messages are displayed in the Group Mode.

Group Mode Messages

Group running
Group paused
Group stopped for debugging
Group alarm
Auto mode
Manual mode

* 2. The following program status messages are displayed in the Program Status.

Program Status Messages

Program running
Program paused
Program aborted
Program stopped for debugging
Program alarm
Program break
Program debug mode
Main program duplication error
Main program number overflow

12-48
 12.11 Task Monitor

* 3. In the Detailed Display Mode, the following process status messages are displayed in the Program Status.

Process Status Messages

Motion function running
Holding
Aborted
Stopped for debugging
Alarm
Break
Returning
Debug mode
Skip signal latch

12.11.6 Closing Task Monitoring

Close this program by closing the Task Monitor window.
To close the Task Monitor window, select File − Close from the Task Monitor menu.

Tools

12

12-49
 12 Tools
12.12.1 Outline

12.12 Motion Alarm Monitor

This section describes the Motion Alarm Monitor, which displays detailed information when alarms occur in the
motion system.

The Motion Alarm Monitor will work properly only when PGM automatic generation is enabled in the group
IMPORTANT
definitions. Do not use the Motion Alarm Monitor otherwise.

12.12.1 Outline
This function can be used to check whether or not a motion alarm has occurred at the Machine Controller using
the Motion Alarm Monitor.

Motion Alarm Monitor

Motion program

Error?

12.12.2 Opening the Motion Alarm Window

Open the Motion Alarm window from the Engineering Manager. Select File − Open − Motion Program −
Motion Alarm from the Engineering Manager menu.

• Login Information
Login information is displayed below the title bar in the Motion Alarm window. Hyphens will be displayed
in Offline Mode.
Login Information Details
PT# Displays the communication logical port.
UT# Displays the unit number of the Machine Controller.
CPU# Displays the number of the CPU which was logged onto.

12-50
 12.12 Motion Alarm Monitor

12.12.3 Motion Alarm Menus

The following table shows the menu commands and functions displayed in the Motion Alarm window.
Menu Command Function
File
File Manager Opens the File Manager.
Open Opens the Motion Alarm Window.
Close Closes the Motion Alarm Window.
Registers a shortcut for the Motion Alarm win-
Register in User Menu
dow.
Save Not used with this window.
Delete Not used with this window.
Print Prints documents.
Exit Exits the Engineering Manager.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Window
Cascade Stacks windows in the display.
Tile Lines up windows in the display.
Arrange Icons Lines up icons.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

12.12.4 Motion Alarm Display

When an alarm occurs, this function displays the name of the group and the program where the error occurred, a
program error message, the physical axis number, and the servo error code.
Display Details
Group (Group Name) Displays the name of the group where the alarm occurred.
Main Program Displays the name of the program where the alarm occurred.
If an alarm occurs in the program, a message will be displayed to
Program Error
indicate that an alarm has occurred.
Physical
Displays the number of the physical axis where the error occurred.
(Physical Axis)
Displays the servo error code.
Servo
Refer to the relevant Machine Controller User’s Manual: Design and
(Servo Error Code)
Maintenance for information on error codes.
When this button is clicked, an Motion Alarm Error Code Detail
Dialog Box is displayed for the error in the row where the cursor is
Error Code Detail
placed. The Motion Alarm Error Code Detail Dialog Box can also be
Button
displayed by double-clicking a cell displaying an error code in the
Servo. No details will be displayed, however, for program errors.
Tools

12

12-51
 12 Tools
12.12.4 Motion Alarm Display

(1) Motion Alarm Example

(a) Motion Alarm Error Code Detail Dialog Box

Motion Alarm
PT# ࡮࡮࡮࡮

Group Main Program Program Error Physical Servo

Group 01 Group mode 01.01 02
01.02 05
Group mode MPM001
MPM002

Error Code Detail

Servo error codes in the Motion Alarm window are displayed in hexadecimal. Errors are allocated to each
bit in hexadecimal. The Motion Alarm Error Code Detail dialog box shows the ON/OFF status and the
meaning of each bit.
The current status is indicated by the filled circles (z).

EXAMPLE Motion Alarm Error Code Detail

Servo Error Bit Details

0 Servo amp abnormal ON OFF

1 Positive direct overtravel ON OFF
2 Negative direct overtravel ON OFF
3 Positive direct soft limit ON OFF
4 Negative direct soft limit ON OFF
5 Servo power supply hasn’t been completed ON OFF
6 Locating time over ON OFF
7 Excessive locate movement quantity ON OFF
8 Filter type change error ON OFF
9 Filter fixed number change error ON OFF
10 Control mode error ON OFF
11 Origin non-establishment ON OFF
12 Origin establish movement ON OFF
13 User fixed number establishment error ON OFF
14 MECHATROLINK Servo same period ON OFF
15 MECHATROLINK Servo communicate error ON OFF
16 MECHATROLINK Servo command timeout ON OFF
17 ABS ENC revolution quantity over ON OFF

MECHATROLINK Servo Alarm HHHH

OK

Fig 12.3 Example of Motion Alarm Error Code Detail Dialog Box for MP930 MECHATROLINK Servo Module

12-52
 12.12 Motion Alarm Monitor

Motion Alarm Error Code Detail

Servo Error Bit Details

1 Positive direct overtravel ON OFF

2 Negative direct overtravel ON OFF
3 Positive direct soft limit ON OFF
4 Negative direct soft limit ON OFF
6 Locating timeover ON OFF
10 Control mode error ON OFF
11 Origin unestablishment ON OFF
17 ABS ENC revolution quantity over ON OFF
18 PG disconnect error ON OFF

OK

Fig 12.4 Example of Motion Alarm Error Code Detail Dialog Box for MP920 SVA Module

• Servo alarm error codes show the motion monitoring parameter alarms.
IMPORTANT
• MECHATROLINK servo alarm codes are displayed only for the MECHATROLINK Interface Servo
Module.
• Servo driver alarm codes for motion monitoring parameter are shown.
• The Motion Alarm Error Code Detail dialog box is not updated.
• The Motion Alarm window is updated every 0.5 second.

Tools

12

12-53
 12 Tools
12.12.5 Closing Motion Alarms

(b) Effective Module Error Bits

Displays in the Motion Alarm Error Code Detail dialog box are displayed as shown in the following table.
Yes indicates the Modules for which the status is displayed.
MP920 MP920 MP920
Bit Name MP910 MP930 MP940 MP2100 MP2300
SVA SVB PO-01
0 Servo Error Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 Positive Overtravel Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Negative Overtravel Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 Positive Software Limit Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Negative Software Limit Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Servo Off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
Excitation OFF Yes
6 Positioning time exceeded Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Excessive Locate
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7 Movement Quantity
Excessive speed Yes Yes Yes
8 Filter type change error Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Filter fixed number change
9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
error
10 Control mode error Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
11 Origin non-establishment Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
12 Origin establish movement Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
User fixed number
13 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
establishment error
MECHATROLINK Servo
14 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
same period
MECHATROLINK Servo
15 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
communicate error
MECHATROLINK Servo
16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
command timeout
ABS ENC revolution
17 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
quantity error
18 PG disconnect error Yes Yes Yes Yes
MECHATROLINK Servo
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Alarm Code Displays

12.12.5 Closing Motion Alarms

Close this program by closing the Motion Alarm window.
To close the Motion Alarm window, select File − Close from the Motion Alarm menu.

12-54
 Appendices

A Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2

A.1 System Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-2
A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-8

B File Manager Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-10

B.1 Common Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-10
B.2 Individual Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-11

C Drawing and Function Instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-21

D MECHATROLINK Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-26
E Remote Operation Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-27
E.1 Outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27
E.2 Modem Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27
E.3 Communication Process Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-27
E.4 Remote Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-34

F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-40

F.1 Error List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-40
F.2 Error Detail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-41
F.3 Warning List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-68
F.4 Details of Warnings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-69

G Operations Possible with the Application Converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -A-78

G.1 Cancelling Display in Red of Conversion Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-78
G.2 Rules for Module Conversion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-78
Appendices

App

A-1
 Appendices
A.1 System Error Messages

A Error Messages
A.1 System Error Messages
The following tables show the messages with error codes of the form CPDH_†††_ΔΔΔ.

CPDH__ΔΔΔ

Error number

Classification code

CT: Thread or other internal error

CMP: DWG or other compiling error
CPU: Errors from Machine Controller
DRV: Device driver-level errors
COM: Communication-related errors

(1) CPDH_CT_ΔΔΔ
Error Message Cause Correction
Reception buffer release error An error has occurred in the Win- Shutdown and restart Windows. Contact your
(CPDH_CT_010) dows memory area. Yaskawa representative if the error persists.
Queuing failure An error has occurred in shared Shutdown and restart Windows. Contact your
(CPDH_CT_011) Windows resources. Yaskawa representative if the error persists.
Source file write error An error has occurred in shared Shutdown and restart Windows. Contact your
(CPDH_CT_013) Windows resources. Yaskawa representative if the error persists.
Reception buffer obtainment error An error has occurred in the Win- Shutdown and restart Windows. Contact your
(CPDH_CT_00F) dows memory area. Yaskawa representative if the error persists.
Required port not initialized Inconsistency between system and Make 215IF I/F card and System Configuration
(CPDH_CT_02B) 215IF I/F card definitions. Window data consistent.
Designated port error Change the 215IF settings in the System Con-
The selected port cannot be used.
(CPDH_CT_02F) figuration Window.

A-2
 A Error Messages

(2) CPDH_CMP_ΔΔΔ
Error Message Cause Correction
Undefined instruction code detected An undefined instruction code has Execute the instruction again. Contact your
(CPDH_CMP_001) been detected. Yaskawa representative if the error persists.
IF instruction structure incorrect The IF instruction structure is Match the number of IF and IEND instructions.
(CPDH_CMP_002) incorrect. Reduce the number of nesting levels.
Match the number of WHILE and WEND
WHILE instruction structure incorrect The WHILE instruction structure is
instructions.
(CPDH_CMP_003) incorrect.
Reduce the number of nesting levels.
Match the number of FOR and FEND instruc-
FOR instruction structure incorrect The FOR instruction structure is
tions.
(CPDH_CMP_004) incorrect.
Reduce the number of nesting levels.
No END instruction
There is no END instruction. Add an END instruction.
(CPDH_CMP_005)
Too many registered drawings The maximum number of regis-
Reduce the number of drawings.
(CPDH_CMP_006) tered drawings has been exceeded.
Match the number of ABOX or SBOX instruc-
AEND instruction structure incorrect The AEND instruction structure is
tions and AEND instructions in the SFC Action
(CPDH_CMP_007) incorrect.
Box Window.
The maximum number of steps in
Too many SFC flowchart steps
the SFC flowchart has been Reduce the number of SFC flowchart steps.
(CPDH_CMP_008)
exceeded.
Too many SFC output bits The maximum number of SFC out- Reduce the number of SFC output bits to within
(CPDH_CMP_009) put bits has been exceeded. the allowable range.
ABOX instruction structure incorrect The ABOX instruction structure is Correct the ABOX instruction and the relation-
(CPDH_CMP_010) incorrect. ship between ABOX and SBOX instructions.
SFC flowchart branches exceeded The number of SFC flowchart
Reduce the number of SFC flowchart branches.
(CPDH_CMP_012) branches has been exceeded.
SFC flowchart structure incorrect The SFC flowchart structure is Check the SFC flowchart for incorrect start,
(CPDH_CMP_013) incorrect. end, or branch settings.
Too many SFC flowchart step boxes The number of SFC flowchart step Reduce the number of SFC flowchart step
(CPDH_CMP_014) boxes has been exceeded. boxes.
Check the expansion program for incorrect
Expansion program (table or other pro-
The table or other type expansion expansion program conversions in the
gram) structure incorrect
program structure is incorrect. MPE720. Contact your Yaskawa representative
(CPDH_CMP_015)
if the error persists.

Appendices

App

A-3
 Appendices
A.1 System Error Messages

(3) CPDH_CPU_ΔΔΔ

Error Message Cause Correction

1 DWG/FN object too large The size of one DWG or function Reduce the size of the DWG or function
(CPDH_CPU_021) object is too large. objects.
Source memory control error A source memory control error has
Execute loading again.
(CPDH_CPU_040) occurred.
Reduce the size of the DWG or function
1 DWG/FN object too large The size of one DWG or function objects.
(CPDH_CPU_0B1) object file is too large. Reduce the number of steps.
Reduce the number of # registers.
Machine Controller cannot run due to pro- The Machine Controller cannot run
gram memory error or watchdog time out due to a program memory error or a Execute loading.
(CPDH_CPU_041) watchdog time out.
Transfer To Controller operation
Cannot use this function because Machine
cannot be performed because the Stop CPU operation in the System Configura-
Controller is online
Machine Controllers CPU in run tion Window.
(CPDH_CPU_04D)
state.
• Repeat the operation.
Transmission error
A transmission error has occurred. • Check if the connectors are set properly.
(CPDH_CPU_090)
• Check that there is no noise interference.
Repeat the operation.
Incorrect processing request from MPE720 There is an error in the processing
Replace the Machine Controller or MPE720 if
(CPDH_CPU_091) request from the MPE720.
the error persists.
Repeat the operation.
Incorrect processing request from MPE720 There is an error in the processing
Replace the Machine Controller or MPE720 if
(CPDH_CPU_092) request from the MPE720.
the error persists.
• The file name is inappropriate.
• The DWG number is incorrect.
• A system function symbol has
Inappropriate file name been used for the user function
symbol. Enter an appropriate file name.
(CPDH_CPU_093)
• The DWG number or function
symbol called using the SEE and
FSTART instructions is incor-
rect.
• The file does not exist.
• A new DWG or function pro-
File does not exist gram has been created. Check the registration status of the program
(CPDH_CPU_094) • An illegal program number was file.
used by an indirect specification
for MSEE.
Register number exceeds range The register number exceeds the
Enter an appropriate register number.
(CPDH_CPU_096) range for register numbers.
Relay instruction executed when it is dis- • Check the 215IF settings.
The relay instruction was executed
abled. • Check the specifications at the communica-
when it is disabled.
(CPDH_CPU_099) tion destination.
The Machine Controller is execut-
Machine Controller busy
ing processing and cannot, there- Repeat the operation.
(CPDH_CPU_09A)
fore, receive messages.
Long Machine Controller processing time Processing at the Machine Control- This is not an error. Wait until the processing is
(CPDH_CPU_09B) ler will take some time. finished.
File altered by different device The file has been altered by a dif-
Read the file again.
(CPDH_CPU_09C) ferent device.
Module not operating normally The module is not operating nor-
−
(CPDH_CPU_09E) mally.

A-4
 A Error Messages

(Cont’d)
Error Message Cause Correction
• The MPE720 response wait time
• Check that the connector is connected prop-
has been exceeded.
erly.
• The transmission cable is not
MPE720 response wait time exceeded • Check that the Unit number is set properly.
connected.
(CPDH_CPU_09F) • Check that there is no noise interference.
• The Machine Controller does not
• Make the Machine Controller into stop mode
have enough processing time for
and set a longer scan time.
MPE720 message services.
Object memory area exceeded The object memory area has been Reduce the size of all DWG and function
(CPDH_CPU_0B2) exceeded. objects.
• Compress memory in the System Definition
Window.
• Reduce the size of all DWG and program
memory areas.
• Delete unused DWGs or functions.
• Reduce the number of steps in each DWG
No free program memory space There is no free program memory
and function.
(CPDH_CPU_0B3) space.
• Reduce the number of # registers in each
DWG and function.
• Reduce the number of symbols in each DWG
and function.
• Reduce the number of comments in each
DWG and function.
Another drawing or function calling the
Another DWG or function calls the Delete the instruction that is calling the func-
function to be deleted
function that is being deleted. tion to be deleted, and then delete the function.
(CPDH_CPU_0C0)
Data trace cannot be executed because Data trace cannot be executed
trace definition data number set to 0 because the trace definition data Reset the trace definitions.
(CPDH_CPU_0C1) number is set to 0.
Disable coil number exceeded maximum
The maximum number of disabled
(100) Reduce the number of disabled coils.
coils (100) has been exceeded.
(CPDH_CPU_0C2)
Repeat the operation.
Flash memory write failure The write to flash memory process-
Replace the Machine Controller if the error per-
(CPDH_CPU_0C3) ing failed.
sists.
Program write-protected The program is currently write-pro- Set the program to write-enabled mode in the
(CPDH_CPU_0F0) tected. System Definition Window.
Program memory not initialized The program memory has not been Clear the memory or perform batch Transfer To
(CPDH_CPU_0F1) initialized. Controller operation.
The program is currently write-pro- Set the program to write-enabled mode in the
Program write-protected
tected by the system definition and System Definition Window and try the opera-
(CPDH_CPU_0F0)
the program cannot be written. tion again.

(4) CPHD_DRV_ΔΔΔ
Error Message Cause Correction
The designated interrupt level
Interrupt level exceeds 0x0f.
range of 0 to 16 in the systems def- Set the interrupt level to between 0 and 16.
(CPDH_DRV_002)
inition file has been exceeded.
215IF I/F DIP switch 2 error
Appendices

There is an shared memory address

Set a correct shared memory address.
(CPDH_DRV_003) error in the system definitions file.
Designated port number exceeds 1 to 6
The designated port number is
range Designate a correct port number.
greater than the range of 1 to 6.
(CPDH_DRV_005)
215IF I/F DIP switch 3 error There is an shared memory address
Set a correct shared memory address.
App
(CPDH_DRV_007) error in the system definitions file.

A-5
 Appendices
A.1 System Error Messages

(5) CPDH_COM_ΔΔΔ

Error Message Cause Correction

• Start the communication process.
• Correct the communication setting to match
the current communication device.
Transfer handle could not be obtained. Start
Communication has not been • Correct the settings in the personal computer
the communication process.
enabled. for the current communication device.
(CPDH_COM_012)
• Check the cable connection between the
communication device and the Machine Con-
troller.
CP-213 transmission error. An error related to the CP-213 con- • Check the CP-213 transmission settings.
(CPDH_COM_043) nection has occurred. • Check the devices connected to the CP-213.
Inverter is busy. The Inverter is busy and cannot
Retry sending.
(CPDH_COM_044) receive messages.
Error in lower or upper limit of parameter
One or more of the set values is
range. Reset the fixed parameter.
outside the allowable setting range.
(CPDH_COM_048)
• Repeat the operation.
Transmission error
A transmission error has occurred. • Check if the connectors are set properly.
(CPDH_COM_0A0)
• Check that there is no noise interference.
PLC is not running. An attempt was made to enter
Start the CPU and then enter debug mode.
(CPDH_COM_0D0) debug mode with the CPU stopped.
• An attempt was made to enter • To debug a different program, turn OFF
debug mode when the debug debug mode for the main motion programs
Currently in debug mode. mode was already entered. currently in debug mode.
(CPDH_COM_0D1) • A normal mode source write • Repeat the operation.
(save) was attempted in debug If the error persists, replace the MPE720 or
mode. Machine Controller.
The following operations were
attempted when not in debug mode. Repeat the operation.
Not in debug mode.
• Execution of a source open com- If the error persists, replace the MPE720 or
(CPDH_COM_0D2)
mand. Step or GO was executed. Machine Controller.
• A diff transfer.
• An attempt was made to enter
debug mode for a motion pro- • Enable the motion program before entering
The motion program is disabled. gram that has been disabled. debug mode.
(CPDH_COM_0D3) • A step-in was attempted to a • Enable the motion subroutine before stepping
motion subroutine that has been in.
disabled.
An attempt was made to enter
Motion program is running. Enter debug mode after stopping the motion
debug mode for a motion program
(CPDH_COM_0D4) program.
that is being executed.
An attempt was made to open the
Repeat the operation.
No main motion program. source for a motion subroutine
If the error persists, replace the MPE720 or
(CPDH_COM_0D5) when the main motion program
Machine Controller.
does not exist during debugging.
Repeat the operation.
No such file. A diff transfer was attempted with
If the error persists, replace the MPE720 or
(CPDH_COM_0D6) illegal data.
Machine Controller.
• A step was executed for a row
with no command. Repeat the operation.
Error in SB/BP signal.
• A GO command was executed If the error persists, replace the MPE720 or
(CPDH_COM_0D7)
with SP or PB set for an illegal Machine Controller.
row.

A-6
 A Error Messages

(Cont’d)
Error Message Cause Correction
A compiling error occurred in the
Machine Controller.
The following may cause the com-
piling error.
• Debug mode was entered for an
Clear CPU memory, Transfer the motion pro-
illegal main motion program.
Execution not possible. gram, and repeat the operation.
• Step or GO command was exe-
(CPDH_COM_0D8) If the error persists, replace the MPE720 or
cuted when there was a save
Machine Controller.
error.
• An attempt was made to send
illegal data in a diff transfer.
• Program in CPU memory is cor-
rupted.
The number of D registers in the
D register size change. motion properties for debug mode Change the number of D registers in the motion
(CPDH_COM_0D9) changed and execution or diff properties back to its original value.
transfer was attempted.
Instructions were added that caused Delete the added instructions before saving or
Debug buffer area exceeded. the debug buffer to be exceeded diff transfer. (Turn OFF the debug mode once
(CPDH_COM_0DA) and saving or diff transfer were and allocate some of the program to subrou-
attempted. tines.)

(6) Other Error Messages

Error Message Cause Correction
215IF set value error in system definition A 215IF settings error has occurred Change the 215IF settings in the system defini-
file. in the system definitions. tions.
Master server power supply inter-
Error in network access Start the master server.
rupted or LAN cable disconnected
(1425) Connect the LAN cable correctly.
when master was shared.
Transfer not possible. A required file is being used by
another application (e.g., Engineer- Stop the other application and repeat the opera-
Use a file.
ing Manager), preventing execu- tion.
(FMR001) tion.
Memory could not be acquired. A required memory cannot be Stop all applications not required for the current
(FMR007) acquired. operation and repeat the operation.
Check the read permissions from the program
No read permission. The file could not be read with the
map in the File Manager and log on as a user
PKT007 current user permissions.
with the required permissions.
Check the read permissions from the program
No write permission. The file could not be written with
map in the File Manager and log on as a user
PKT008 the current user permissions.
with the required permissions.
Selected environment does not match PLC. An attempt was made to log onto a
Select the correct Machine Controller and PLC
Check the connected PLC. Machine Controller that is not the
folder.
PKT026 connected Machine Controller.
An attempt was made to open a
This message is just a warning, but to be safe,
Monitoring/debug information file/error- file motion program online when the
transfer the motion program to the Program-
not saved or does not match. Resave. motion program does not exist on
ming Device.
the Programming Device hard disk.
Appendices

App

A-7
 Appendices
A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages

A.2 Motion Compile Error Messages

Table A.1 shows a list of compile error messages in motion programs. All error messages and their causes are
outlined in the table. If an error occurs, refer to Table A.1 and correct the motion program.
Table A.1 Compile Error Messages

Error Message Cause

• Illegal command or no command.
• Illegal = (substitution operator).
• Inappropriate operator designation.
• Illegal comparison operator or inappropriate position.
• An odd number of parentheses.
Syntax error
• Undefined characters used.
• Excessive number of items in an equation.
• WHILE and WEND commands do not match.
• IF and IEND commands do not match.
• Other syntax error
Incorrect address designation • Illegal address designation for command or no address.
Variable range exceeded • The register (variable) range has been exceeded.
Arithmetic expression contains unusable variable • Illegal data type of register.
type • Illegal register type.
When an arithmetic expression is loaded, a maximum of 10 words of local
variables (D variables) are used as the work area during one parallel execution.
This error will occur if this maximum is exceeded. Local variables as work
areas are used in the manner outlined below, and are released and can be reused
when one block of processing has been completed.
Local Variables Used as Work Areas
1. When arithmetic expressions are loaded in order of priority, work areas are
used to temporarily store the results of operations that are calculated first.
Cannot load arithmetic expression
Multiple words are used depending on the complexity of the expression.
2. Work areas are used to temporarily store function results when functions
have been used in arithmetic expressions. Two words are used for each
function.
3. Work areas are used to temporarily store operation results when arithmetic
expressions have been used for coordinate designation in move commands.
Two words are used for each coordinate command in which arithmetic
expressions are specified.
• The decimal point position is incorrect. (The limit for the number of digits
designated to a value following decimal point has been exceeded.)
Too many decimal places
• The limit for the number of digits designated to a value has been exceeded.
• The range designated to a value has been exceeded.
• The limit for the number of digits designated to a value has been exceeded.
Integer size exceeded
• The range designated to a value has been exceeded.
• The physical or logical axis name has not been registered in the group defini-
tions.
Axis name error
• The same axis name has been used multiple times in one move command
statement.
Maximum number of axes exceeded The maximum number of axes to be simultaneously used has been exceeded.
Division by zero error Division by zero has been included in the arithmetic expression.
Maximum characters per block exceeded The number of characters set for one block has exceeded the maximum.
Command duplication error A command that cannot be duplicated has been duplicated in the expression.
• The END command has been used in a subroutine.
• The RET command has been used in the main program.
• The RET command position is incorrect.
Unusable instruction
• The GOTO command position is incorrect.
• The position of a command that uses an axis as an argument is incorrect in a
subroutine.

A-8
 A Error Messages

Table A.1 Compile Error Messages (Cont’d)

Error Message Cause

No END command There is no END or RET command.
• Nesting in IF statements is too deep.
Maximum nesting level exceeded • Nesting in WHILE statements is too deep.
• Nesting in SFORK statements is too deep.
• The number of labels designated in PFORK statements exceeds the range.
Number of branches exceeds range
• The number of labels designated in SFORK statements exceeds the range.
• Labels designated in PFORK duplicate SJOINT labels.
Duplicate labels used
• Labels designated in SFORK duplicate PJOINT labels.
• Label designated in PFORK does not exist.
• JOINTO label for PFORK does not exist.
No label • Label designated in SFORK does not exist.
• JOINTO label for SFORK does not exist.
• Label designated in GOTO does not exist.
Max. number of parallel executions exceeded The maximum number of parallel executions has been exceeded.
• The label order in PFORK statements is incorrect.
Label order incorrect
• The label order in SFORK statements is incorrect.
Program name incorrect The program name does not match MPM††† or MPS††† formats.
Duplicate label definitions Label definitions are duplicated at another position.
The destination for the GOTO command is inside a parallel execution or at
Jump destination incorrect
another incorrect position.
• Characters other than alphanumerics are included in a label.
Illegal character string defined
• There are too many characters in a label.

Appendices

App

A-9
 Appendices
B.1 Common Menus

B File Manager Menus

B.1 Common Menus
This section explains the common items on the pull-down menus under the menu bar in the File Manager Win-
dow. These common items do not change regardless of where the cursor is in the Directory Tree.
Unless otherwise specified, the following submenu will be displayed under File − Transfer, View, Tool, and
Help.
Menu Command Function
File − Transfer
All Files Transfers all files together.
Selected Files Transfers files separately.
Continuous File
Transfer files to several Machine Controllers.
Transfer
Other Saves data to and then compares with flash memory.
View
Tool Bar Displays the Tool Bar.
Status Bar Displays the status bar.
Detail Window Displays the Detail Display Section.
Large Icons Displays large icons in the List Display Section.
Small Icons Displays small icons in the List Display Section.
List Displays a list of small icons in the List Display Section.
Detail Displays a list of detailed data in the List Display Section.
Refresh Displays the latest information.
Configuration Displays system environment information for the MPE720.
Execution Mode
Selects standard or simple operation.
Change
Tool
User Menu Manager Displays the User Menu Manager.
Register Lists Displays the register list.
Cam tool Displays the Cam tool.
PLC Import Tool Displays the PLC Import Tool.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Help
About Application Displays version information.

A-10
 B File Manager Menus

B.2 Individual Menus

(1) Root Folder and Group Folder Menus
This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when the root folder or a group folder is
selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
New
Group Folder Creates a new group folder.
Order Folder Creates a new order folder.
Delete Deletes the group folder and its subdirectories.
Rename Changes the name of the group folder.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
New
Group Folder Creates a new group folder.
Order Folder Creates a new order folder.
Rename Changes the name of the group folder.
Delete Deletes the group folder and its subdirectories.

(2) Order Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when an order folder is selected.

(a) Pull-down Menus

Menu Command Function
File
New
Controller Folder Creates a new PLC folder.
Delete Deletes the order folder and its subdirectories.
Rename Changes the name of the order folder.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Appendices

Menu Command Function

New
Controller Folder Creates a new PLC folder.
Rename Changes the name of the order folder.
Delete Deletes the order folder and its subdirectories.
App

A-11
 Appendices
B.2 Individual Menus

(3) PLC Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a PLC folder is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
Log On Logs on to the Machine Controller.
Delete Deletes the PLC folder and its subdirectories.
Properties Changes Machine Controller information.
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Save All Motion
Saves all the motion programs.
Programs (HD)
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
Online Switches between online and offline modes.
Log On Logs on to the Machine Controller.
Properties Changes the Machine Controller information.
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
File Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Application Converter
Convert Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Delete Deletes the PLC folder and its subdirectories.
CPU Control Changes the CPU status.
Ladder Converter Tool Converts ladder programs to ladder programs by Ladder Works.

A-12
 B File Manager Menus

(4) C Register, Program, Definition, and Table Data Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a C register, program, definition,
or table data folder is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menu
Menu Command Function
File
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Register in User Menu Creates a shortcut icon.
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
* Valid only in online mode.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Register in User Menu Creates a shortcut icon.
Application Converter
Conversion Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
* Valid only in online mode.

Appendices

App

A-13
 Appendices
B.2 Individual Menus

(5) Program Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a function program, interrupt pro-
gram, high-speed scan program, initialization program, or low-speed scan program folder is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
New Drawing Opens a new drawing.
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
View
List Display
Display All Drawings
SFC Flow Chart
Constant Table (# Reg)
Constant Table
(M Reg)
Sets the data files to be displayed in the List Display Section.
I/O Conversion Table
Interlock Table
Part Composition
Table
Tuning Panel
Tool Bar Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
... Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.

(b) Pop-up Menu

Menu Command Function
New Drawing Opens a new drawing.
List Display
Display All Drawings Selects the data file type to be displayed in the List Display Sec-
... tion.
Application Converter
Conversion Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
* Valid only in online mode.

A-14
 B File Manager Menus

(6) Program File Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a program file is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menu
Menu Command Function
File
New Drawing Opens a new program.
Open
DWG Properties Opens the DWG Properties Window.
Main Program Opens the Main Program Window.
SFC Flow Chart Opens the SFC Flowchart Window.
Constant Table (# Reg) Opens the # Constant Table Window.
Constant Table
Opens the M Constant Table Window.
(M Reg)
I/O Conversion Table Opens the I/O Conversion Table Window.
Interlock Table Opens the Interlock Table Window.
Part Composition
Opens the Part Composition Table Window.
Table
Tuning Panel Opens the Tuning Panel Window.
Delete Deletes the program file.
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Register in User Menu Registers a shortcut icon on the desktop.*
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
Enable/Disable Enables or disables the program.
View
List Display
Display All Drawings
SFC Flow Chart
Constant Table (# Reg)
Constant Table
(M Reg)
Sets the data files to be displayed in the List Display Section.
I/O Conversion Table
Interlock Table
Part Composition
Table
Tuning Panel
Tool Bar Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
... Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
* Valid only in online mode.
Appendices

App

A-15
 Appendices
B.2 Individual Menus

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
New Drawing Opens a new program.
Open
DWG Properties Opens the DWG Properties Window.
Main Program Opens the Main Program Window.
SFC Flow Chart Opens the SFC Flowchart Window.
Constant Table (# Reg) Opens the # Constant Table Window.
Constant Table (M Reg) Opens the M Constant Table Window.
I/O Conversion Table Opens the I/O Conversion Table Window.
Interlock Table Opens the Interlock Table Window.
Part Composition Table Opens the Part Composition Table Window.
Tuning Panel Opens the Tuning Panel Window.
List Display
Display All Drawings
SFC Flow Chart
Constant Table (# Reg)
Constant Table (M Reg)
Sets the data files to be displayed in the List Display Section.
I/O Conversion Table
Interlock Table
Part Composition Table
Tuning Panel
Register in User Menu Creates a shortcut icon.
Delete DWG Deletes the program file.
Enable/Disable Enables and disables programs.
Copy DWG Copies the program.
Application Converter
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
* Valid only in online mode.

A-16
 B File Manager Menus

(7) Motion Program Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a motion program folder is
selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
New Drawing Opens a new program.
Open
Group Definition Defines group information.
Motion Parameter Defines and displays the motion parameters.*
Motion Editor Edits the motion program.
Register Writing
Sets the number of M and O registers.
Permission
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
* Valid only in online mode.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
New Drawing Opens a new program.
Open
Group Definition Defines group information.
Motion Parameter Defines and displays the motion parameters.*1
Motion Editor Edits the motion program.
Register Writing
Sets the number of M an O registers.
Permission
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Application Converter
Conversion Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*2
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Appendices

* 1. Displayed only with the MP930.

* 2. Valid only in online mode.

App

A-17
 Appendices
B.2 Individual Menus

(8) Motion Group Folder Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a motion group folder is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
Open New Program Opens a new motion program.
Open
Motion Editor Edits motion programs.
Position Monitor Displays the current position.*
Motion Alarm Displays alarm information.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
* Valid only in online mode.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
Open New Program Opens a new motion program.
Open
Motion Editor Edits motion programs.
Position Monitor Displays the current position.*
Motion Alarm Displays alarm information.*
Application Converter
Conversion Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
* Valid only in online mode.

A-18
 B File Manager Menus

(9) Motion Program File Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a motion program file is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
Open New Program Opens a new motion program.
Open
Motion Editor Edits the motion program.
Position Monitor Displays the current position.*1
Motion Alarm Displays alarm information.*1
Delete Deletes motion program files.
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Register in User Menu Creates a shortcut icon.*2
Copy to Copies a motion program file.
Print Opens the Print Manager.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
* 1. Valid only in online mode.
* 2. Refer to 2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons for details.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
Open New Program Opens a new motion program.
Open
Motion Editor Edits the motion program.
Position Monitor Displays the current position.*
Motion Alarm Displays alarm information.*
Register in User Menu Creates a shortcut icon.
Delete Deletes the motion program file.
Copy to Copies the motion program file.
Application Converter
Conversion Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
* Valid only in online mode.
Appendices

App

A-19
 Appendices
B.2 Individual Menus

(10) Group Definition File Menus

This section explains the pull-down and pop-up menus that are displayed when a group definition file is selected.
(a) Pull-down Menus
Menu Command Function
File
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
Register in User Menu Registers a shortcut icon on the desktop.*1
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Print Prints the contents of the selected file.
Exit Exits the File Manager.
Edit
Set Default User Sets the default user.
User Manager Used to manage users.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*2
View Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Tool Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Help Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
* 1. Refer to 2.5.1 Registering Shortcut Icons for details.
* 2. Valid only in online mode.

(b) Pop-up Menus

Menu Command Function
Transfer Refer to B.1 Common Menus.
Register in User Menu Creates a shortcut icon.
Application Converter
Conversion Wizard Starts the Application Converter.
Automatic Conversion
Starts the Automatic Application Converter.
Wizard
Manual Conversion
Starts the Manual Application Converter.
Wizard
Multi-register Replace Performs register replacement.
Controller Operation Changes the CPU status.*
Log Off Logs off from the Machine Controller.
* Valid only in online mode.

A-20
 C Drawing and Function Instructions

C Drawing and Function Instructions

The following tables list the instructions used when creating drawings and functions. The instructions are
grouped by function. Each of these commands has an auxiliary input key allocated to it.
Programs can be input more effectively by using the shortcut command keys allocated to the following sequence
control instructions.
• Program control instructions • Numeric comparison instructions
• Direct input instructions • Data manipulation instructions
• Sequence circuit instructions • Basic function instructions
• Logic operation instructions • DDC instructions
• Numeric math instructions • Table data manipulation instructions
• Numeric conversions instructions • Program control instructions

(1) Program Control Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
SEE SEE SEE [CONTROL(C)]-[SEE] 1[SEE]
FOR FOR FOR [CONTROL(C)]-[FOR] 4[FOR]
WHILE WHILE WHILE [CONTROL(C)]-[WHILE] 1[WHILE]
ON ON ON [CONTROL(C)]-[ON] 2[ON]
OFF OFF OFF [CONTROL(C)]-[OFF] 3[OFF]
IFON IFON IFON [CONTROL(C)]-[IFON] 5[IFON]
IFOFF IFOFF IFOFF [CONTROL(C)]-[IFOFF] 6[IFOFF]
ELSE ELSE ELSE [CONTROL(C)]-[ELSE] 7[ELSE]
DEND
FEND
END END [CONTROL(C)]-[END] 8[END]
WEND
IEND
CONDITION [] [] [FUNCTION(F)]-[[]] 9[[]]
FUNCTION CALL (FSTART) FSTART [CONTROL(C)]-[FSTART] 4[FSTART]
FUNCTION INPUT (FIN) FIN [CONTROL(C)]-[FIN] 5[FIN]
FUNCTION OUTPUT (FOUT) FOUT [CONTROL(C)]-[FOUT] 6[FOUT]
INLINE COMMENT "“ "“ [CONTROL(C)]-[COMMENT] 10[CMT]
EXTENSION PROGRAM CALL XCALL XCALL [CONTROL(C)]-[XCALL] 2[XCALL]
SFC PROGRAM EXECUTION SFC SFC [SFC(S)]-[SFC] 8[SFC]
SFC STEP NUMBER SFCSTEP SFCSTEP [SFC(S)]-[SFCSTEP] 8[SFCSTEP]
ACTION BOX ABOX ABOX [SFC(S)]-[ABOX] 9[ABOX]
ACTION BOX SBOX SBOX [SFC(S)]-[SBOX] 10[SBOX]

(2) Direct I/O Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
DIRECT INPUT IN IN [CONTROL(C)]-[IN] 1[IN]
DIRECT OUTPUT OUT OUT [CONTROL(C)]-[OUT] 2[OUT]
DIRECT INPUT R INR INR [CONTROL(C)]-[INR] 3[INR]
DIRECT OUTPUT R OUTR OUTR [CONTROL(C)]-[OUTR] 4[OUTR]
INPUT STRAIGHT INS INS [CONTROL(C)]-[INS] 7[INS]
Appendices

OUTPUT STRAIGHT OUTS OUTS [CONTROL(C)]-[OUTS] 8[OUTS]

App

A-21
Appendices

(3) Sequence Program Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
NO CONTACT ][ [RELAY(R)]-[NO CONTACT(A)] 1[ ]

NC CONTACT ]/ [RELAY(R)]-[NC CONTACT(B)] 2[ ]

COIL @ [RELAY(R)]-[COIL(O) . COIL(C)] 10[ ]

SET COIL @s [RELAY(R)]-[COIL(O) . SET COIL(S)] 9[ ]

[RELAY(R)]-[COIL(O) . RESET
RESET COIL @R 10[ ]
COIL(R)]

ON PULSE ]P [RELAY(R)]-[ONPULSE(P)] 8[ ]

OFF PULSE ]N [RELAY(R)]-[OFFPULSE(Q)] 9[ ]

10-MS ON-DELAY [ON [RELAY(R)]-[ONDELAY[10MS](N)] 6[ONDLY]

10-MS OFF-DELAY [OFF [RELAY(R)]-[OFFDELAY[10MS](F)] 7[OFFDLY]

1-S ON-DELAY s
[SON [RELAY(R)]-[ONDELAY[1S](S)] 6[ONSDL]

1-S OFF-DELAY s [SOFF [RELAY(R)]-[OFFDELAY[1S](R)] 7[OFFSDL]

BRANCH , (comma) [RELAY(R)]-[BRANCH(T)] 3[ ]

JOIN . (period) [RELAY(R)]-[JOIN(J)] 4[ ]

,.(comma and
CONNECT [RELAY(R)]-[CONNECT(C)] 5[ ]
period)

(4) Logic Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
AND ^ & [LOGIC(L)]-[AND] 2[^]
OR v | [LOGIC(L)]-[OR] 3[v]

XOR ^ [LOGIC(L)]-[XOR] 4[ ]

A-22
 C Drawing and Function Instructions

(5) Numeric Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
INTEGER ENTRY ; [ART(A)]-[ENTRY (I) . INTEGER (I)] 1[ ]
[ART(A)]-[ENTRY (I) . REAL NUM-
REAL NUMBER ENTRY ;; 1[ ]
BER (F)]
STORE : [ART(A)]-[STORE(S)] 10[ ]
ADDITION + + [ART(A)]-[+] 2[+]
SUBTRACTION - - [ART(A)]-[-] 3[-]
EXTENDED ADDITION ++ ++ [ART(A)]-[++] 2[++]
EXTENDED SUBTRACTION -- -- [ART(A)]-[- -] 3[--]
MULTIPLICATION × * [ART(A)]-[×] 4[×]
DIVISION ÷ / [ART(A)]-[÷] 5[÷]
MOD MOD MOD [ART(A)]-[MOD] 6[MOD]
REM REM REM [ART(A)]-[REM] 6[REM]
INCREMENT INC INC [ART(A)]-[INC] 4[INC]
DECREMENT DEC DEC [ART(A)]-[DEC] 5[DEC]
ADD TIME TMADD TMADD [ART(A)]-[TMADD] 6[TMADD]
SUBTRACT TIME TMSUB TMSUB [ART(A)]-[TMSUB] 7[TMSUB]
SPEND TIME SPEND SPEND [ART(A)]-[SPEND] 8[SPEND]

(6) Numeric Conversion Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
SIGN INVERSION INV INV [ART(A)]-[INV] 7[INV]
1'S COMPLEMENT COM COM [ART(A)]-[COM] 8[COM]
ABSOLUTE VALUE
ABS ABS [ART(A)]-[ABS] 1[ABS]
CONVERSION
BINARY CONVERSION
BIN BIN [ART(A)]-[BIN] 8[BIN]
(BCD→BIN)
BCD CONVERSION (BIN→BCD) BCD BCD [ART(A)]-[BCD] 9[BCD]
PARITY CONVERSION PARITY PARITY [ART(A)]-[PARITY] 7[PARITY]
ASCII CONVERSION 1 ASCII ASCII [ART(A)]-[ASCII] 1[ASCII]
ASCII CONVERSION 2 BINASC BINASC [ART(A)]-[BINASC] 2[BINASC]
ASCII CONVERSION 3 ASCBIN ASCBIN [ART(A)]-[ASCBIN] 3[ASCBIN]
Appendices

App

A-23
Appendices

(7) Numeric Comparison Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
COMPARE (<) < < [LOGIC(L)]-[<] 5[<]
COMPARE (≤) ≤ <= [LOGIC(L)]-[<=] 6[≤]
COMPARE (=) = = [LOGIC(L)]-[=] 7[=]
COMPARE (≠) ≠ <> [LOGIC(L)]-[!=] 8[≠]
COMPARE (≥) ≥ >= [LOGIC(L)]-[>=] 9[≥]
COMPARE (>) > > [LOGIC(L)]-[>] 10[>]
RANGE CHECK RCHK RCHK [LOGIC(L)]-[RCHK] 5[RCHK]

(8) Data Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
BIT ROTATION LEFT ROTL ROTL [MOVE(M)]-[ROTL] 6[ROTL]
BIT ROTATION RIGHT ROTR ROTR [MOVE(M)]-[ROTR] 7[ROTR]
MOVE BITS MOVB MOVB [MOVE(M)]-[MOVB] 2[MOVB]
MOVE WORD MOVW MOVW [MOVE(M)]-[MOVW] 1[MOVW]
EXCHANGE XCHG XCHG [MOVE(M)]-[XCHG] 3[XCHG]
SET WORDS SETW SETW [MOVE(M)]-[SETW] 4[SETW]
BYTE-TO-WORD EXPANSION BEXTD BEXTD [MOVE(M)]-[BEXTD] 5[BEXTD]
WORD-TO-BYTE
BPRESS BPRESS [MOVE(M)]-[BPRESS] 6[BPRESS]
COMPRESSION
BINARY SEARCH BSRCH BSRCH [MOVE(M)]-[BSRCH] 7[BSRCH]
SORT SORT SORT [MOVE(M)]-[SORT] 8[SORT]
BIT SHIFT LEFT SHFTL SHFTL [MOVE(M)]-[SHFTL] 8[SHFTL]
BIT SHIFT RIGHT SHFTR SHFTR [MOVE(M)]-[SHFTR] 9[SHFTR]
COPY WORD COPYW COPYW [MOVE(M)]-[COPYW] 5[COPYW]
BYTE SWAP BSWAP BSWAP [MOVE(M)]-[BSWAP] 4[BSWAP]

(9) Basic Function Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
SQUARE ROOT SQRT SQRT [FUNCTION(F)]-[SQRT] 2[SQRT]
SINE SIN SIN [FUNCTION(F)]-[SIN] 3[SIN]
COSINE COS COS [FUNCTION(F)]-[COS] 4[COS]
TANGENT TAN TAN [FUNCTION(F)]-[TAN] 5[TAN]
ARC SINE ASIN ASIN [FUNCTION(F)]-[ASIN] 6[ASIN]
ARC COSINE ACOS ACOS [FUNCTION(F)]-[ACOS] 7[ACOS]
ARC TANGENT ATAN ATAN [FUNCTION(F)]-[ATAN] 8[ATAN]
EXPONENT EXP EXP [FUNCTION(F)]-[EXP] 4[EXP]
NATURAL LOGARITHM LN LN [FUNCTION(F)]-[LN] 2[LN]
COMMON LOGARITHM LOG LOG [FUNCTION(F)]-[LOG] 3[LOG]

A-24
 C Drawing and Function Instructions

(10) DDC Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
DEAD ZONE A DZ_A DZA [DDC(D)]-[DZA] 2[DZA]
DEAD ZONE B DZ_B DZB [DDC(D)]-[DZB] 3[DZB]
UPPER/LOWER LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT [DDC(D)]-[LIMIT] 4[LIM]
PI CONTROL PI PI [DDC(D)]-[PI] 2[PI]
PD CONTROL PD PD [DDC(D)]-[PD] 3[PD]
PID CONTROL PID PID [DDC(D)]-[PID] 4[PID]
FIRST-ORDER LAG LAG LAG [DDC(D)]-[LAG] 5[LAG]
PHASE LEAD/LAG LLAG LLAG [DDC(D)]-[LLAG] 6[LLAG]
FUNCTION GENERATOR FGN FGN [DDC(D)]-[FGN] 6[FGN]
INVERSE FUNCTION
IFGN IFGN [DDC(D)]-[IFGN] 7[IFGN]
GENERATOR
LINEAR ACCELERATOR/
LAU LAU [DDC(D)]-[LAU] 7[LAU]
DECELERATOR 1
LINEAR ACCELERATOR/
SLAU SLAU [DDC(D)]-[SLAU] 8[SLAU]
DECELERATOR 2
PULSE WIDTH MODULATION PWM PWM [DDC(D)]-[PWM] 9[PWM]

(11) Table Data Operation Instructions

Function Bar
Instruction Display
Mnemonics Pull-down Menu Selection Key
TABLE READ TBLBR TBLBR [TABLE(T)]-[TBLBR] 1[TBLBR]
TABLE WRITE TBLBW TBLBW [TABLE(T)]-[TBLBW] 2[TBLBW]
ROW SEARCH TBLSRL TBLSRL [TABLE(T)]-[TBLSRL] 3[TBLSRL]
COLUMN SEARCH TBLSRC TBLSRC [TABLE(T)]-[TBLSRC] 4[TBLSRC]
TABLE CLEAR TBLCL TBLCL [TABLE(T)]-[TBLCL] 5[TBLCL]
TABLE BLOCK MOVE TBLMV TBLMV [TABLE(T)]-[TBLMV] 6[TBLMV]
QUEUE TABLE READ QTBLR QTBLR [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLR] 1[QTBLR]
QUEUE TABLE READ AND
QTBLRI QTBLRI [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLRI] 2[QTBLRI]
INCREMENT
QUEUE TABLE WRITE QTBLW QTBLW [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLW] 3[QTBLW]
QUEUE TABLE WRITE AND
QTBLWI QTBLWI [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLWI] 4[QTBLWI]
INCREMENT
QUEUE TABLE WRITE
QTBLCL QTBLCL [TABLE(T)]-[QTBLCL] 5[QTBLCL]
POINTER CLEAR
Appendices

App

A-25
Appendices

D MECHATROLINK Devices
MP2000
Classification Model Description MP910 MP920 MP930 MP940
M-I M-II
SGD-†††N, AC SERVOPACK for
Y Y Y N Y N
SGDB-††AN MECHATROLINK
SGDH SERVOPACK,
SGDH-†††E,
NS100 MECHATROLINK Y Y Y N Y N
JUSP-NS100
Interface Module
SERVOPACKs
SGDH SERVOPACK,
SGDH-†††E,
NS115 MECHATROLINK-II N N N N Y Y
JUSP-NS115
Interface Module
SGDS-
SGDS SERVOPACK N N N N Y Y
†††1††
Relay Module
JAMSC-
Wide voltage range relay Y Y Y Y Y N
120DRA83030
contacts, 8 contact outputs
JAMSC- AC Input Module
Y Y Y Y Y N
120DAI53330 100 VAC, 8 inputs
JAMSC- AC Input Module
Y Y Y Y Y N
120DAI73330 200 VAC, 8 inputs
JAMSC- AC Output Module
Y Y Y Y Y N
120DAO83330 100/200 VAC, 8 outputs
Distributed
I/O Modules JAMSC- DC Input Module
Y Y Y Y Y N
120DDI34330 12/24 VDC, 16 inputs
JAMSC- DC Output Module
Y Y Y Y Y N
120DDO34330 12/24 VDC, 16 outputs
A/D Module
JAMSC-
Analog input, −10 to 10 V, Y Y Y Y Y N
120AVI02030
4 channels
D/A Module
JAMSC-
Analog output, −10 to 10 V, Y Y Y Y Y N
120AVO01030
2 channels
64-point I/O Module
JEPMC-IO350 Y Y Y Y Y N
24 VDC, 64 inputs, 64 outputs
64-point I/O Module
I/O Modules JEPMC-IO2310 N N N N Y Y
24 VDC, 64 inputs, 64 outputs
16-point I/O Module
87816-11000 Y Y Y Y Y N
RIO-01
JAMSC- Counter Module
Y Y Y N Y N
Counter 120EHC21140 Reversible counter, 2 channels
Modules Counter Module
JEPMC-PL2900 N N N N Y Y
Reversible counter, 2 channels
JAMSC- Pulse Output Module
Y Y Y N Y N
Pulse Output 120MMB20230 Pulse output, 2 channels
Modules Pulse Output Module
JEPMC-PL2910 N N N N Y Y
Pulse output, 2 channels
PLC Module
PLC Module JEPMC-MC400 Y Y Y Y Y N
MP940
Note: Y = Connection possible, N = Connection not possible.

Refer to Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series User's Manual: MECHATROLINK System (SIEZ-
INFO
C887-5.1) for details.

A-26
 E Remote Operation Function

E Remote Operation Function

E.1 Outline
The Remote Operation function connects two MPE720s at a distance through modems and allows the receiving
MPE720 to be operated remotely from the transmitting MPE720.
The same operations can be performed from a transmitting MPE720 Setup in a remote location as the operations
in a receiving MPE720 connected to a Machine Controller.
The modem setting and the MPE720 communication process settings must be set properly to use the Remote
Operation function.

E.2 Modem Setup

Connect a modem to the Programming Device (personal computer in which the MPE720 is installed) and Setup
the modem. Refer to your modem's User's Guide for details on setting up the modem. Once the modem is Setup
when configuring the system, it will not be necessary to Setup the modem again.
If command echo is enabled in the modem settings, change the settings to disable the command echo. Refer to
your modem's User's Guide for details on disabling the command echo.

E.3 Communication Process Setup

Before performing remote operations, make the necessary communication process settings.
Once the communication process settings are made when configuring the system, it will not be necessary to make
the settings again.
(1) Settings in the Receiving MPE720
Make the Communication Process settings in the receiving MPE720.
(a) Opening the Communication Process Window
1. Double-click the Communication Manager icon.

2. The Communication Process window will be displayed.

Appendices

In this case, the CP-218 (218IF), CP-215 (215IF), and Serial (serial port) have already been set as devices App
connected to the Machine Controller. Refer to 2.1 Communication Manager for details on setting devices.

A-27
 Appendices
E.3 Communication Process Setup

(b) Communication Process Settings (Modem)

Make the following settings to enable modem communication in the communication process.
1. Click an unused logical port number (logical port 4 in this example).

2. Select File − Setting... from the menus.

3. In the Logical Port Setting window, set the Port Kind to Modem and then click the Detail button.

A-28
 E Remote Operation Function

4. Make the modem settings as shown below in the Modem Port Settings window and click the OK button.

Select the physical port where the modem is being connected.

Select 0.

Select Recv.

Set a password up to 8 characters long.

Set the access right for the transmitting station.

Normal: Read/write access
Read Only: Read-only access

5. Click the OK button in the Logical Port Setting window.

6. The modem information will be set in the Communication Process window.

7. Select File − Save from the menus.

8. The following confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to save the settings.
Appendices

App

A-29
 Appendices
E.3 Communication Process Setup

9. Select File − Exit from the menus.

10. The following confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to close.

After the Communication Process window is closed, the new Communication Process settings will become
effective the next time that the Communication Process is started.
When the MPE720 is started, the Communication Process is started at the same time so it is not necessary to
restart the Communication Process before starting the MPE720.

(2) Settings in the Transmitting MPE720

Make the Communication Process settings in the transmitting MPE720.
(a) Opening the Communication Process Window
1. Double-click the Communication Manager icon.

A-30
 E Remote Operation Function

2. The Communication Process window will be displayed.

In this case, no devices have been set as devices connected to the Machine Controller.

(b) Communication Process Settings (Modem)

Make the following settings to enable modem communication in the communication process.
1. Click an unused logical port number (logical port 1 in this example).

2. Select File − Setting... from the menus.

Appendices

App

A-31
 Appendices
E.3 Communication Process Setup

3. In the Logical Port Setting window, set the Port Kind to Modem and then click the Detail button.

4. Make the modem settings as shown below in the Modem Port Settings window and click the OK button.

Select the physical port where the modem is being connected.

Select 0.
Select Send.

Set the logical port number that the receiving

MPE720 is using for communication with the
Machine Controller.

5. Click the OK button in the Logical Port Setting window.

6. The modem information will be set in the Communication Process window.

A-32
 E Remote Operation Function

7. Select File − Save from the menus.

8. The following confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to save the settings.

9. Select File − Exit from the menus.

10.The following confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes button to close.

After the Communication Process window is closed, the new Communication Process settings will become
effective the next time that the Communication Process is started.
When the MPE720 is started, the Communication Process is started at the same time so it is not necessary to
restart the Communication Process before starting the MPE720.
Appendices

App

A-33
 Appendices
E.4 Remote Operations

E.4 Remote Operations

(1) Connecting the Circuit
When connecting the communication circuit, perform the following operations in the receiving MPE720 and
then the transmitting MPE720.
(a) Operations for the Receiving MPE720
1. Double-click the Communication Manager icon.

2. The Communication Process window will be displayed.

This completes the receiving MPE720 settings.

(b) Operations for the Transmitting MPE720

1. Double-click the Communication Manager icon.

A-34
 E Remote Operation Function

2. The Communication Process window will be displayed.

3. Click the logical port number allocated to the modem (logical port 1 in this example) and select Modem −
Connect... from the menus.

4. In the Dialing window, input the receiving MPE720’s phone number (Dial Number) and the password set
for the receiving MPE720, and click the OK button.

Appendices

App

A-35
 Appendices
E.4 Remote Operations

5. The Communication Process window will be displayed. The modem will start dialing the receiving
MPE720. The Status display will change from PROCEED to CONNECTED when the connection is
established.

6. Double-click the MPE720 icon and start the MPE720.

7. The File Manager window will be displayed. Click the PLC folder of the Machine Controller that will
perform remote operations.

A-36
 E Remote Operation Function

8. Select File − Properties from the menus.

9. Click the Network tab in the Controller Configuration window, make the settings shown below, and
click the OK button.

10.Logon from the File Manager. After logging on, the same operations as the MPE720 can be performed.

(2) Disconnecting the Circuit

When disconnecting the communication circuit, perform the following operations in the transmitting MPE720
and then the receiving MPE720.
Furthermore, when communication has been disconnected in the transmitting MPE720, always disconnect com-
munication in the receiving MPE720 as well.
(a) Operations for the Transmitting MPE720
Appendices

1. Exit the MPE720.

2. Open the Communication Process window.

App

A-37
 Appendices
E.4 Remote Operations

3. Click the logical port number allocated to the modem (logical port 1 in this example), and select Modem −
Disconnect from the menus.

4. The Status display will change from CONNECTED to IDLE and the circuit will be disconnected.

At this point, the Status display in the receiving MPE720’s Communication Process window will change
from CONNECTED to DISCONNECTED.

(b) Operations for the Receiving MPE720

1. Open the Communication Process window.
2. Click the logical port number allocated to the modem (logical port 4 in this example) and select Modem −
Disconnect from the menus.

A-38
 E Remote Operation Function

3. The Status display will change from DISCONNECTED to IDLE and the circuit will be disconnected.

Appendices

App

A-39
 Appendices
F.1 Error List

F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

This appendix describes the list of errors and warnings that can occur when executing conversion with the Appli-
cation Converter.

F.1 Error List

The details of the errors are as follows.
No. Message
1000 Failed to read the file.
1001 Failed to write the file.
1007 Since a function was lost, the parameter was deleted.
1009 Since function was supported by other parameters, the parameter was deleted.
1014 The parameter was divided into two or more parameters.
1015 As for the parameters, two or more parameters were integrated.
1016 The setting value is less than maximum value of the destination.
1017 The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid.
1025 Failed to allocate memory.
1028 The model of the source and destination are not compatible models.
1044 The servo model of the source and destination are not compatible of the servo amplifier models.
1046 Undefined the source information. (fixed parameter)
1047 Undefined the source information. (setting parameter)
1048 Undefined the source information.
1049 Cannot convert the object PLC model.
1057 There are insufficient read privileges, it cannot be converted.
1058 There are insufficient write privileges, it cannot be converted.
1061 The bit type parameter is referred as word/long type. It can't be converted as the bit type order is changed.
Since the setting range (a) of a conversion destination was exceeded, value (b) was not convertible.
1062 Default value "c" is set up.
• (a) is setting range, (b) is value and "c" is default value are displayed.
1063 It could not be converted, since an empty slot was insufficient.
1064 It could not be converted, since the line of becoming empty was insufficient.
1066 Not supported module is defined. It could not be converted.
1067 Since the motion module could not be specified, it converted it into M register.
1069 The target program of register replacement does not exist.
1070 The converted D register number exceeds the maximum D register number of target DWG.
1071 The "linear motor" is set in the source, but it is not available in the target module.
1072 The working register for the MSEE instruction is out of range.

A-40
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

F.2 Error Detail

The details of each error are explained below.
error 1000: Failed to read the file.
Cause Remedy
The probable causes of the failure to read a file are as fol- This is an error relating to folder or file access. Notify us of
lows. the mode of occurrence, the controller environment and the
• The file doesn't exist. computer environment.
• You don't have a high enough privilege level to read the
file.
• The data is corrupted.
• Internal error

error 1001: Failed to write the file.

Cause Remedy
The probable causes of the failure to write a file are as fol- This is an error relating to folder or file access. Notify us of
lows. the mode of occurrence, the controller environment and the
• The location you are attempting to write to is read only. computer environment.
• You don't have a high enough privilege level to write to
the file.
• There is insufficient free space in the hard disc.
• Internal error etc.

error 1007: Since a function was lost, the parameter was deleted.
Cause Remedy
The relevant parameter is invalid with the MP2000 series Check the converted data.
and has therefore been deleted.
1. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01B/emergency stop/ 1. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01B/emergency stop/
deceleration to stop signal cancel) deceleration to stop signal cancel)
2. Setting parameter No. 19 (OLxx12/Position buffer No.) 2. Setting parameter No. 19 (OLxx12/Position buffer No.)
3. Setting parameter No. 39 (OLxx26/Stop distance) 3. Setting parameter No. 39 (OLxx26/Stop distance)
4. Setting parameter No. 57 (OLxx38/Position buffer 4. Setting parameter No. 57 (OLxx38/Position buffer
access No.) access No.)
5. Setting parameter No. 59 (OLxx3A/Position buffer 5. Setting parameter No. 59 (OLxx3A/Position buffer
write data) write data)
6. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx250/SIO [general use 6. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx250/SIO [general use
input signal]) input signal])

error 1009: Since function was supported by other parameters, the parameter was deleted.
Cause Remedy
The function of the relevant parameter is supported by Use latch detection signal selection (OWxx04 Bit 0 to Bit
another parameter so it has been deleted. 3).
1. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00C/Counting value pre- 1. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00C/Counting value pre-
setting request) setting request)
2. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00E/DI latch signal 2. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00E/DI latch signal
selection) selection)
Appendices

App

A-41
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1014: The parameter was divided into two or more parameters.
Cause Remedy
The setting method for the relevant registers has been Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series SVA-01
changed and their functions have also been dispersed to Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
other registers, so conversion was not performed. SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000 Series
Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (man-
ual no.: SIEPC88070033).
1. Setting parameter No. 54 (OWxx35/Servo driver user 1. Setting parameter No. 54 (OWxx35/servo driver user
constant No.) constant No.)
The relevant registers have been dispersed to OWxx4F, <Example remedies>
OWxx50 and OWxx51 and were therefore not con- • When 17: "Read user constant" has been set for OWxx20
verted. (motion command code)
OWxx4F: Servo driver alarm monitor With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
No. OWxx50: Servo driver user constant OWxx50 (servo driver user constant No.) and OWxx51
No. OWxx51: Servo driver user constant size (servo driver user constant size). Delete the relevant regis-
Note: Output when the value of setting parameter ters and change the program.
No. 33 is 17 or 18. • When 18: "Write user constant" has been set for OWxx20
(motion command code)
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OWxx50 (servo driver user constant No.) and OWxx51
(servo driver user constant size). Delete the relevant regis-
ters and change the program.

error 1015: As for the parameters, two or more parameters were integrated.
Cause Remedy
With the MP2000 series the relevant parameters have been Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series SVA-01
merged, so conversion was not performed. Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000 Series
Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (man-
ual no.: SIEPC88070033).
1. Setting parameter No. 54 (OWxx35/Servo driver current <Example remedies>
alarm monitor No. specification) • When 19: "Current alarm monitor" has been set for
⇒ When converting from SVB to SVB, or when OWxx20 (motion command code)
OWxx20 = 19 With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
2. Setting parameter No. 54 (OWxx35/Servo driver alarm OWxx4F (servo driver alarm monitor number). Delete the
history monitor No. specification) relevant registers and change the program.
⇒ When converting from SVB to SVB, or when • When 20: "Alarm history monitor" has been set for
OWxx20 = 20 OWxx20 (motion command code)
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OWxx4F (servo driver alarm monitor number). Delete the
relevant registers and change the program.

error 1016: The setting value is less than maximum value of the destination.
Cause Remedy
Conversion was not possible because the setting at the set- Reduce the value set for the relevant parameter at the setting
ting source exceeded the setting range at the conversion des- source.
tination.

A-42
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid.

Cause Remedy
The parameter cannot be converted since it is invalid at the Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series SVA-01
destination. Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000 Series
Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (man-
ual no.: SIEPC88070033).
1. Fixed parameter No. 10 (D/A output voltage when 1. Fixed parameter No. 10 (D/A output voltage when
the torque clamp is 100%) the torque clamp is 100%)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
2. Fixed parameter No. 11 (input voltage when the 2. Fixed parameter No. 11 (input voltage when the
high-speed monitor (A/D) is at 100%) high-speed monitor (A/D) is at 100%)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
3. Fixed parameter No. 14 (Bit 2) (Limit switch signal 3. Fixed parameter No. 14 (Bit 2) (Limit switch signal
selection) selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
4. Fixed parameter No. 14 (Bit 5) (Emergency stop (DI) 4. Fixed parameter No. 14 (Bit 5) (Emergency stop (DI)
signal selection) signal selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
5. Fixed parameter No. 17 (Bit 6) (Backlash compensa- 5. Fixed parameter No. 17 (Bit 6) (Backlash compensa-
tion validity selection) tion validity selection)
Conversion was not performed because the function
is invalid at the conversion destination.
6. Fixed parameter No. 17 (Bit 10) (Deceleration limit 6. Fixed parameter No. 17 (Bit 10) (Deceleration limit
switch reversal selection) switch reversal selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
7. Fixed parameter 36 (Bias speed for index accelera- 7. Fixed parameter 36 (Bias speed for index accelera-
tion/deceleration filter) tion/deceleration filter)
Appendices

Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series

SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
App

A-43
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
8. Setting parameter No. 1 (OWxx00/Operation mode 8. Setting parameter No. 1 (OWxx00/Operation mode
setting) setting)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to OWxx00, OWxx08 SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
and OWxx09 or deleted. Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Bit 2 (Position control mode):
With the MP2000 series, the control mode is
switched with motion commands. Delete the rele-
vant registers.
Bit 6 (Alarm clear):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx00F. Delete the relevant register and make
the setting with OBxx00F.
Bit 8 (Motion command validity selection):
With the MP2000 series, motion commands are
always valid. Delete the relevant register.
Bit 9 (Zero point return direction selection):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx093. Delete the relevant register and make
the setting with OBxx093.
9. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx000/Velocity refer- 9. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx000/Velocity refer-
ence output mode) ence output mode)
The control mode has been eliminated and the com- Change to the appropriate parameter.
mand is issued with motion command 23: Velocity
reference.
10. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx001/Torque command 10. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx001/Torque command
output mode) output mode)
The control mode has been eliminated and the com- Change to the appropriate parameter.
mand is issued with motion command 24: Torque
command.
11. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx002/Position control 11. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx002/Position control
mode) mode)
With the MP2000 series, the relevant parameter is Since the control mode is switched with motion com-
automatically selected so this setting parameter has mands, delete the relevant registers.
been deleted.
12. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx003/Phase control 12. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx003/Phase control
mode) mode)
The control mode has been eliminated and the com- Change to the appropriate parameter.
mand is issued with motion command 25: Phase
command.
13. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx004/Zero point return 13. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx004/Zero point return
mode) mode)
The control mode has been eliminated and the com- Change to the appropriate parameter.
mand is issued with motion command 8: Zero point
return.
14. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx005/Phase control test 14. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx005/Phase control test
signal) signal)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-44
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
15. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx007/Phase command 15. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx007/Phase command
generation calculation invalid) generation calculation invalid)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
16. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx008/Motion com- 16. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx008/Motion com-
mand code validity selection) mand code validity selection)
With the MP2000 series, the relevant parameter is Delete the relevant register.
always valid so this parameter has been deleted.
17. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx009/Zero point return 17. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx009/Zero point return
direction selection) direction selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
18. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00A/Absolute posi- 18. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00A/Absolute posi-
tion read request) tion read request)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
19. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00B/Feed forward 19. Setting parameter No. 1 (OBxx00B/Feed forward
compensation when switching control mode) compensation when switching control mode)
With the MP900 series the default setting was OFF, If this parameter was used with the MP900 series it
but with the MP2000 series it is always valid. will become always valid so no remedies are
required.

Appendices

App

A-45
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
20. Setting parameter No. 2 (OWxx01/Operation com- 20. Setting parameter No. 2 (OWxx01/Operation com-
mand setting) mand setting)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to OWxx00 and SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
OWxx09 or deleted. Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Bit 0 (Servo ON):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed
to OBxx000. Delete the relevant register and
make the setting with OBxx000.
Bit C (Position command value selection):
With the MP2000 series, the position buffer
function doesn't exist. Delete the relevant
register. If a "valid" setting has been made for
the position buffer, change the control so that
the position buffer is not used.
Bit D (Velocity reference value selection):
The previous two types of velocity reference
register, OLxx22 and OWxx15, have been
merged as OLxx10 in the MP2000 series.
Delete the relevant register.
Set the units for velocity references in speed
unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Specified unit/min.
2: % specification
Bit E (Position command type):
With the MP2000 series, the definition for the
position command type has been changed. Set
the position command type with the position
command type (OWxx09 Bit 5) of the motion
command control flag.
Position command type (OWxx09 Bit 5)
0: Incremental value addition system
1: Absolute value specification system
21. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx011/DO1) 21. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx011/DO1)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
22. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx011/P-CON) 22. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx011/P-CON)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-46
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
23. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx012/DO2) 23. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx012/DO2)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
24. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx012/G-SEL) 24. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx012/G-SEL)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
25. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx013/DO3) 25. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx013/DO3)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
26. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx013/P-CL) 26. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx013/P-CL)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
27. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx014/ROC) 27. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx014/ROC)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
28. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx014/DO04) 28. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx014/DO04)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
29. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx014/N-CL) 29. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx014/N-CL)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
30. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx015/ZCLAMP) 30. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx015/ZCLAMP)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
Appendices

SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000

Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

App

A-47
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
31. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx016/Position control 31. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx016/Position control
mode: Synchronous scan selection) mode: Synchronous scan selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
32. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx017/Position control 32. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx017/Position control
mode: Parameter synchronous scan selection) mode: Parameter synchronous scan selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
33. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx018/Position control 33. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx018/Position control
mode: Acceleration/deceleration not used selection) mode: Acceleration/deceleration function not used
selection for simple positioning)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
34. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx019/Position control 34. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx019/Position control
mode: Segment division function not used selection) mode: Segment division function not used selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
35. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01B/emergency stop/ 35. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01B/emergency stop/
deceleration to stop signal cancel) deceleration to stop signal cancel)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
36. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01B/Magnetic pole 36. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01B/Magnetic pole
detection command) detection command)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
37. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01C/Position com- 37. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01C/Position com-
mand value selection) mand value selection)
With the MP2000 series, the position buffer function Set position commands with OLxx1C.
has been eliminated.

A-48
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
38. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01D/Velocity refer- 38. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01D/Velocity refer-
ence value selection) ence value selection)
The velocity reference setting range is fixed by Delete the relevant register. Set the units for velocity
OLxx10. references by speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to
Bit 3).
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Specified unit/min.
2: % specification
39. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01F/Zero point return 39. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01F/Zero point return
deceleration point limit switch signal) deceleration point limit switch signal)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
40. Setting parameter No. 5 (OWxx04/Positive side 40. Setting parameter No. 5 (OWxx04/Positive side
speed limiter value setting) speed limiter value setting)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
41. Setting parameter No. 6 (OWxx05/Negative side 41. Setting parameter No. 6 (OWxx05/Negative side
speed limiter value setting) speed limiter value setting)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
42. Setting parameter No. 18 (OWxx11/Feed forward 42. Setting parameter No. 18 (OWxx11/Feed forward
compensation setting) gain)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
43. Setting parameter No. 29 (OWxx1C/Velocity limit) 43. Setting parameter No. 29 (OWxx1C/Velocity limit)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
44. Setting parameter No. 31 (OLxx1E/Compensation 44. Setting parameter No. 31 (OLxx1E/Compensation
pulse setting) pulse setting)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Appendices

Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s

Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

App

A-49
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
45. Setting parameter No. 34 (OWxx21/Motion com- 45. Setting parameter No. 34 (OWxx21/Motion com-
mand control flag) mand control flag)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to OWxx01, OWxx03 SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
and OWxx09 or deleted. Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Bit 0 (Pause a command):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx090. Delete the relevant register and make
the setting with OBxx090.
Bit 1 (Interrupt a command):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx091. Delete the relevant register and make
the setting with OBxx091.
Bit 2 (Direction of travel (for JOG/STEP)):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx092. Delete the relevant register and make
the setting with OBxx092.
Bit 3 (Speed loop P/PI switching):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx013. Delete the relevant register and make
the setting with OBxx013.
Bit 4 to Bit 7 (Filter type selection):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OBxx038 to OBxx03B. Delete the relevant register
and make the setting with OBxx038 to OBxx03B.
Bit E (Position buffer write):
With the MP2000 series, the position buffer func-
tion doesn't exist. Delete the relevant register and
switch the control so that the position buffer is not
used.
Bit F (Position buffer read):
With the MP2000 series, the position buffer func-
tion doesn't exist. Delete the relevant register and
switch the control so that the position buffer is not
used.
46. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx213/No primary lag) 46. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx213/No primary lag)
To set "no primary lag" with the MP2000 series,
make the following setting: Primary lag constant
(OWxx33) = 0.
47. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx213/No feed speed 47. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx213/No feed speed
excess compensation selection) excess compensation selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
48. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx218/Position loop P/ 48. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx218/Position loop P/
PI switching) PI switching)
With the MP900 series the default was "P", but with When using "P" with the MP2000 series, make the
the MP2000 series the default has become "PI." following setting: Position integral time constant
(OWxx32) = 0 (default).

A-50
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
49. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21A/Speed compen- 49. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21A/Speed compen-
sation during position control (OWxx18) valid) sation during position control (OWxx18) valid)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
50. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21B/SGDH serial 50. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21B/SGDH serial
command valid flag) command valid flag)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
51. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21C/Reverse rota- 51. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21C/Reverse rota-
tion side limit signal for zero point return) tion side limit signal for zero point return)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
52. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21D/Forward rota- 52. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21D/Forward rota-
tion side limit signal for zero point return) tion side limit signal for zero point return)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
53. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21E/Position buffer 53. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21E/Position buffer
write) write)
With the MP2000 series, the position buffer function When "valid" has been set for the position buffer,
does not exist. change the control so that the position buffer is not
used.
54. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21F/Position buffer 54. Setting parameter No. 34 (OBxx21F/Position buffer
read) read)
With the MP2000 series, the position buffer function When "valid" has been set for the position buffer,
does not exist. change the control so that the position buffer is not
used.
Appendices

App

A-51
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
55. Setting parameter No. 46 (OWxx2D/Position man- 55. Setting parameter No. 46 (OWxx2D/Position man-
agement control flag) agement control flag)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to OWxx00. SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Bit 0 (Machine lock mode setting):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed
to OBxx001. Delete the relevant register and
make the setting with OBxx001.
Bit 1 (POSMAX number of turns preset request):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed
to OBxx006. Delete the relevant register and
make the setting with OBxx006.
Bit 2 (ABS unlimited length position management
information load request):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed
to OBxx007. Delete the relevant register and
make the setting with OBxx007.
56. Setting parameter No. 46 (OBxx2D3/Position moni- 56. Setting parameter No. 46 (OBxx2D3/Position moni-
tor 2 (ILxx34) unit selection) tor 2 (ILxx34) unit selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
57. Setting parameter No. 46 (OBxx2DC/Servo driver 57. Setting parameter No. 46 (OBxx2DC/Servo driver
user monitor information selection) user monitor information selection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
58. Setting parameter No. 55 (OWxx36/Integral upper/ 58. Setting parameter No. 55 (OWxx36/Integral upper/
lower limit for position control) lower limit for position control)
With the MP2000 series, the limits have been Make adjustments with the position integral time
removed. constant (OWxx32).
59. Setting parameter No. 56 (OWxx37/Time constant 59. Setting parameter No. 56 (OWxx37/Time constant
for primary lag) for primary lag)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
60. Setting parameter No. 57 (OWxx38/SGDH serial 60. Setting parameter No. 57 (OWxx38/SGDH serial
command setting (for system use)) command setting (for system use))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-52
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
61. Setting parameter No. 57 (OLxx38/Position buffer 61. Setting parameter No. 57 (OLxx38/Position buffer
access No.) access No.)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
62. Setting parameter No. 57 (OWxx39/SGDH serial 62. Setting parameter No. 57 (OWxx39/SGDH serial
command address setting (for system use)) command address setting (for system use))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
63. Setting parameter No. 59 (OWxx3A/SGDH serial 63. Setting parameter No. 59 (OWxx3A/SGDH serial
command data setting) command data setting)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
64. Setting parameter No. 59 (OLxx3A/Position buffer 64. Setting parameter No. 59 (OLxx3A/Position buffer
write data) write data)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

Appendices

App

A-53
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
65. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IWxx00/Operating status) 65. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IWxx00/Operating status)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to IWxx00, ILxx02 and SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
IWxx0C. Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Bit 1 (Motion setting parameter setting error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
ILxx02 Bit 1: Setting parameter error. Delete the
relevant register and change the program.
Bit 2 (Motion fixed parameter setting error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
ILxx02 Bit 2: Fixed parameter error. Delete the rel-
evant register and change the program.
Bit 7 (Servo controller ready for operation):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx00 Bit 0: Motion controller ready. Delete the
relevant register and change the program.
Bit 8 (Servo controller operating):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx00 Bit 1: Running. Delete the relevant regis-
ter and change the program.
Bit D (Positioning completed signal):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 1: Positioning completed. Delete the
relevant register and change the program.
66. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx004/Cumulative num- 66. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx004/Cumulative num-
ber of rotations reception error (when using an abso- ber of rotations reception error (when using an abso-
lute encoder)) lute encoder))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
67. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx009/Report on direc- 67. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx009/Report on direc-
tion of rotation when using an absolute encoder) tion of rotation when using an absolute encoder)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
68. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00A/Absolute posi- 68. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00A/Absolute posi-
tion reading completed) tion reading completed)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-54
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
69. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00C/Feedback pulse 69. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00C/Feedback pulse
0) 0)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
70. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00E/Motor type) 70. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00E/Motor type)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
71. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00E/Match detection 71. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00E/Match detection
signal) signal)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
72. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00F/Zero point return 72. Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx00F/Zero point return
completed) completed)
With the MP2000 series, there is no zero point return Execute zero point return by motion command code
mode. (OWxx08) and monitor IBxx0C5 for zero point
return completion.
73. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx011/DI1) 73. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx011/DI1)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
74. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx011/WARN (Warn- 74. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx011/WARN (Warn-
ing)) ing))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
75. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/DI2 (Brake 75. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/DI2 (Brake
input)) input))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
76. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/DI2) 76. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/DI2)
Appendices

Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series

SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter. App

A-55
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
77. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/V-CMP (Speed 77. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/V-CMP (Speed
match)) match))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
78. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx013/PG disconnec- 78. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx013/PG disconnec-
tion status (OFF: Disconnected)) tion status (OFF: Disconnected))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
79. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx013/TGON (Motor 79. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx013/TGON (Motor
running detection)) running detection))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
80. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx014/S-RDY (Servo 80. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx014/S-RDY (Servo
ready)) ready))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
81. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx015/CLT (Torque 81. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx015/CLT (Torque
clamp detection) clamp detection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
82. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx016/VLT (Speed 82. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx016/VLT (Speed
restriction detection) restriction detection)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
83. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx017/BK (Brake inter- 83. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx017/BK (Brake inter-
lock) lock)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-56
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
84. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx017/D16 (ZERO sig- 84. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx017/D16 (ZERO sig-
nal) nal)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
85. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx019/D18) 85. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx019/D18)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
86. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx019/PON (Main cir- 86. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx019/PON (Main cir-
cuit ready)) cuit ready))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
87. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01A/D19) 87. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01A/D19)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
88. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01A/Latch com- 88. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01A/Latch com-
pleted) pleted)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
89. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01B/Positioning 89. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01B/Positioning
vicinity) vicinity)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
90. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01C/Forward rotation 90. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01C/Forward rotation
software limit) software limit)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Appendices

Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change

to the appropriate parameter.

App

A-57
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
91. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01D/Reverse rotation 91. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx01D/Reverse rotation
software limit) software limit)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
92. Monitor parameter No. 5 (ILxx04/Target position 92. Monitor parameter No. 5 (ILxx04/Target position
incremental monitor) incremental monitor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
93. Monitor parameter No. 17 (ILxx10/Cumulative num- 93. Monitor parameter No. 17 (ILxx10/Cumulative num-
ber of rotations received from the absolute encoder) ber of rotations received from the absolute encoder)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
94. Monitor parameter No. 19 (ILxx12/Number of initial 94. Monitor parameter No. 19 (ILxx12/Number of initial
incremental pulses received from the absolute incremental pulses received from the absolute
encoder) encoder)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-58
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
95. Monitor parameter No. 22 (IWxx15/Motion com- 95. Monitor parameter No. 22 (IWxx15/Motion com-
mand status) mand status)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to IWxx09 and SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
IWxx0C. Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Bit 0 (Command execution in progress flag):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx09 Bit 0: Command execution in progress
flag. Delete the relevant register and change the
program.
Bit 1 (Command pause completed flag):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx09 Bit 1: Command pause completed flag.
Delete the relevant register and change the pro-
gram.
Bit 2 (Distribution completed):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 0: Distribution completed. Delete the
relevant register and change the program.
Bit 3 (Zero point setting completed):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 5: Zero point return (setting) com-
pleted. Delete the relevant register and change the
program.
Bit 4 (External positioning signal latching com-
pleted):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 2: Latching completed. Delete the rel-
evant register and change the program.
Bit 5 (Command abnormal termination signal):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx09 Bit 3: Command abnormal termination
signal. Delete the relevant register and change the
program.
Bit 6 (Zero point return completion status):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 5: Zero point return (setting) com-
pleted. Delete the relevant register and change the
program.
96. Monitor parameter No. 23 (IWxx16/Number of 96. Monitor parameter No. 23 (IWxx16/Number of
places after decimal point monitor) places after decimal point monitor)
With the MP2000 series, this parameter has been To monitor the number of places after the decimal
eliminated and a fixed parameter is monitored using point, set "5" for the fixed parameter number
a motion subcommand instead. (OWxx5C) of the setting parameter and "5" for the
motion subcommand (OWxx0A): the "number of
places after the decimal point" will then be reported
in the fixed parameter monitor (ILxx56).
Appendices

App

A-59
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
97. Monitor parameter No. 24 (IWxx17/Position man- 97. Monitor parameter No. 24 (IWxx17/Position man-
agement status) agement status)
Conversion was not performed because the functions Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
in the content of the bit parameters of the relevant SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
registers have been dispersed to IWxx0C or the spec- SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
ification has been changed. Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
<Example remedies>
Delete the relevant register and change the program.
Bit 0 (Machine lock in effect):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 6: Machine lock in effect.
Bit 1 (Zero point position):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 4: Zero point position.
Bit 2 (2nd INP completed):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 3: Positioning completed 2.
Bit 3 (Absolute unlimited length position manage-
ment information load completed):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 8: Absolute unlimited length position
management information load completed.
Bit 4 (Number of POSMAX turns preset completed):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
IWxx0C Bit 9: Number of POSMAX turns preset
completed.
Bit 5 (Electronic gear ON/OFF selection):
With the MP2000 series, whether the electronic
gear is ON or OFF is automatically selected in
accordance with the command unit selection. To
monitor the electronic gear ON/OFF selection, set
"4" for fixed parameter number (OWxx5C) of the
setting parameter and "5" for motion subcommand
(OWxx0A): the "command unit selection" will
then be reported in the fixed parameter monitor
(ILxx56). If this value is 0 (the specified unit is
"Pulse"), the electronic gear is OFF.
Bit 6 (Axis selection):
A change has been made such that the fixed param-
eter is monitored using a motion subcommand. To
monitor the axis type selection, set "1" for fixed
parameter number (OWxx5C) of the setting param-
eter and "5" for motion subcommand (OWxx0A):
the "axis type selection" will then be reported in the
fixed parameter monitor (ILxx56 Bit 0).

A-60
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
98. Monitor parameter No. 24 (IBxx175/Electronic gear 98. Monitor parameter No. 24 (IBxx175/Electronic gear
ON/OFF selection) ON/OFF selection)
With the MP2000 series, this parameter has been With the MP2000 series, whether the electronic gear
eliminated and a fixed parameter is monitored using is ON or OFF is automatically selected in accordance
a motion subcommand instead. with the command unit selection. To monitor the
electronic gear ON/OFF selection, set "4" fixed
parameter number (OWxx5C) of the setting parame-
ter and "5" for motion subcommand (OWxx0A): the
"command unit selection" will then be reported in the
fixed parameter monitor (ILxx56). If this value is 0
(the specified unit is "Pulse"), the electronic gear is
OFF.
99. Monitor parameter No. 24 (IBxx176/Axis selection) 99. Monitor parameter No. 24 (IBxx176/Axis selection)
With the MP2000 series, this parameter has been With the MP2000 series, a change has been made
eliminated and a fixed parameter is monitored using such that the fixed parameter is monitored using a
a motion subcommand instead. motion subcommand. To monitor the axis type selec-
tion, set "1" for fixed parameter number (OWxx5C)
of the setting parameter and "5" for motion subcom-
mand (OWxx0A): the "axis type selection" will then
be reported in the fixed parameter monitor (ILxx56
Bit 0).
100. Monitor parameter No. 27 (IWxx1A/Serial command 100. Monitor parameter No. 27 (IWxx1A/Serial command
answer monitor) answer monitor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
101. Monitor parameter No. 28 (IWxx1B/Serial command 101. Monitor parameter No. 28 (IWxx1B/Serial command
address monitor) address monitor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
102. Monitor parameter No. 29 (ILxx1C/POSMAX moni- 102. Monitor parameter No. 29 (ILxx1C/POSMAX moni-
tor) tor)
With the MP2000 series, this parameter has been With the MP2000 series, a change has been made
eliminated and a fixed parameter is monitored using such that the fixed parameter is monitored using a
a motion subcommand instead. motion subcommand. T monitor POSMAX, set "23"
for fixed parameter number (OWxx5C) of the setting
parameter and "5" for the motion subcommand
(OWxx0A): "POSMAX" will then be reported in the
fixed parameter monitor (ILxx56 Bit 0).
103. Monitor parameter No. 33 (IWxx20/SGDH serial 103. Monitor parameter No. 33 (IWxx20/SGDH serial
command data monitor) command data monitor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Appendices

Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change

to the appropriate parameter.

App

A-61
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
104. Monitor parameter No. 33 (ILxx20/Servo driver user 104. Monitor parameter No. 33 (ILxx20/Servo driver user
monitor information) monitor information)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
105. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx22A/Control mode 105. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx22A/Control mode
error) error)
The relevant register does not exist in the MP2000 Delete the relevant register.
series.
106. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx22C/Zero point set- 106. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx22C/Zero point set-
ting during travel) ting during travel)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
107. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx22E/Servo driver 107. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx22E/Servo driver
synchronous communication error) synchronous communication error)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
108. Monitor driver No. 35 (IBxx232/PG disconnection 108. Monitor driver No. 35 (IBxx232/PG disconnection
error) error)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
109. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx23E/Motor type set- 109. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx23E/Motor type set-
ting error) ting error)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
110. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx23F/Encoder type 110. Monitor parameter No. 35 (IBxx23F/Encoder type
mismatch) mismatch)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-62
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
111. Monitor parameter No. 37 (IWxx24/Servo driver 111. Monitor parameter No. 37 (IWxx24/Servo driver
alarm code) alarm code)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
112. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx251/DEC (decelera- 112. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx251/DEC (decelera-
tion limit switch signal)) tion limit switch signal))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
113. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx252/P-OT (forward 113. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx252/P-OT (forward
overtravel signal)) overtravel signal))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
114. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx253/N-OT (reverse 114. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx253/N-OT (reverse
overtravel signal)) overtravel signal))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
115. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx254/EXT1 (external 115. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx254/EXT1 (external
input signal 1) input signal 1)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
116. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx255/EXT2 (external 116. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx255/EXT2 (external
input signal 2)) input signal 2))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
117. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx256/EXT3 (external 117. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx256/EXT3 (external
input signal 3)) input signal 3))
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
Appendices

SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000

Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

App

A-63
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
118. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx259/Brake status 118. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IBxx259/Brake status
output) output)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
119. Monitor parameter No. 41 (ILxx28/Position buffer 119. Monitor parameter No. 41 (ILxx28/Position buffer
read data) read data)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
120. Monitor parameter No. 43 (ILxx2A/Position com- 120. Monitor parameter No. 43 (ILxx2A/Position com-
mand output value monitor) mand output value monitor)
With the MP900 series, the relevant register is used Delete the relevant register.
for system debugging. With the MP2000 series, there
is no parameter of the same kind.
121. Monitor parameter No. 43 (ILxx2A/Number of out- 121. Monitor parameter No. 43 (ILxx2A/Number of out-
put pulses) put pulses)
With the MP900 series, the relevant register is used Delete the relevant register.
for system debugging. With the MP2000 series, there
is no parameter of the same kind.
122. Monitor parameter No. 45 (ILxx2C/Integral output 122. Monitor parameter No. 45 (ILxx2C/Integral output
value monitor) value monitor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
123. Monitor parameter No. 49 (ILxx30/Primary lag mon- 123. Monitor parameter No. 49 (ILxx30/Primary lag mon-
itor) itor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
124. Monitor parameter No. 51 (ILxx32/Position loop 124. Monitor parameter No. 51 (ILxx32/Position loop
output value monitor) output value monitor)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.
125. Monitor parameter No. 53 (ILxx34/Position monitor 125. Monitor parameter No. 53 (ILxx34/Position monitor
2) 2)
Refer to the Machine Controller MP2000 Series
SVA-01 Motion Module User’s Manual (manual no.:
SIEPC88070032) and Machine Controller MP2000
Series Built-in SVB/SVB-01 Motion Module User’s
Manual (manual no.: SIEPC88070033) and change
to the appropriate parameter.

A-64
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1017: The parameter cannot convert, since it was invalid. (Cont’d)
Cause Remedy
126. Monitor parameter No. 55 (IWxx36/Serial converter 126. Monitor parameter No. 55 (IWxx36/Serial converter
resolution monitor) resolution monitor)
With the MP2000 series, this parameter has been It is possible to read the value using the fixed param-
eliminated and a fixed parameter is monitored using eter monitor function.
a motion subcommand instead.

error 1025: Failed to allocate memory.

Cause Remedy
There has been a failure to secure the memory area required Increase the memory size or virtual memory size of the com-
to run the Application Converter. puter that you are using.

error 1028: The model of the source and destination are not compatible models.
Cause Remedy
The combination of the models of the conversion source Check the models at the conversion source and conversion
controller and conversion destination controller is not sup- destination and execute the application conversion again.
ported by the Application Converter.

error 1044: The servo model of the source and destination are not compatible of the servo amplifier models.
Cause Remedy
A servo pack that has no compatibility at conversion has Allocate "stp,***" to the conversion source and the conver-
been allocated. sion destination. However, conversion is not possible in the
following cases.
• "stp,***" is allocated to the conversion source axis.
→ "stp,***" is not allocated to the conversion destination.
• "stp,***" is not allocated to the conversion source axis.
→ "stp,***" is allocated to the conversion destination.

error 1046: Undefined the source information. (fixed parameter)

Cause Remedy
The fixed parameter for the axis specified for the conversion Save the fixed parameter for the axis of the conversion
source has not been saved. source.
Note: If it is not necessary to convert the setting of the fixed
parameter of the conversion source, the parameter
does not need to be saved.

error 1047: Undefined the source information. (setting parameter)

Cause Remedy
The setting parameter for the axis specified for the conver- Save the setting parameter for the axis of the conversion
sion source has not been saved. source.
Note: If it is not necessary to convert the setting of the set-
ting parameter of the conversion source, the parame-
ter does not need to be saved.

error 1048: Undefined the source information.

Cause Remedy
No fixed parameter and setting parameter have been defined Check the conversion source definition status.
for the conversion source module.

error 1049: Cannot convert the object PLC model.

Appendices

Cause Remedy
The PLC model specified for the conversion source/destina- Select PLC models that can be the conversion source and
tion is not supported by the Application Converter. destination.

App

A-65
 Appendices
F.2 Error Detail

error 1057: There are insufficient read privileges, it cannot be converted.

Cause Remedy
The user privilege level used for logon doesn't give the Log on again with a user name that has a higher level of user
authority to access the relevant drawing. privilege.

error 1058: There are insufficient write privileges, it cannot be converted.

Cause Remedy
The user privilege level used for logon doesn't give the Log on again with a user name that has a higher level of user
authority to write the relevant drawing. privilege.

error 1061: The bit type parameter is referred as word/long type. It can't be converted as the bit type order is
changed.
Cause Remedy
A bit parameter has been used as a Word/Long type parame- –
ter.
The meaning of the bit parameter has been changed so it
cannot be converted.
1. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IWxx01/Servo driver status) 1. Create another ladder manually in accordance with the
specifications of the model at the conversion destina-
tion.
2. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IWxx01/General DI monitor) 2. Create another ladder manually in accordance with the
specifications of the model at the conversion destina-
tion.
3. Monitor parameter No. 38 (IWxx25/Servo driver I/O 3. Create another ladder manually in accordance with the
monitor) specifications of the model at the conversion destina-
tion.

error 1062: Since the setting range (a) of a conversion destination was exceeded, value (b) was not convertible.
Default value "c" is set up.
Cause Remedy
The data set for the parameter at the conversion source is The parameter at the conversion destination will be set to the
outside the setting range for the parameter at the conversion default value. Check the converted data.
destination.

error 1063: It could not be converted, since an empty slot was insufficient.
Cause Remedy
Conversion to the PLC model selected for the conversion Either convert to a PLC model with a greater number of
destination is not possible because it has insufficient slots. slots than the one currently specified for the conversion des-
tination or reduce the number of modules allocated at the
conversion source.

error 1064: It could not be converted, since the line of becoming empty was insufficient.
Cause Remedy
Conversion was not performed because there were insuffi- Remove the communication module and servo module defi-
cient line numbers to which communication modules and nitions that can be deleted from the conversion source mod-
servo modules of the conversion destination could be allo- ule configuration definitions, then execute the conversion
cated. again.

error 1066: Not supported module is defined. It could not be converted.

Cause Remedy
A module for MP900 defined at the conversion source is not Remove the allocation of the relevant module from the mod-
supported by MPE720 Ver. 5. ule configuration definitions and execute the conversion
again.

A-66
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

error 1067: Since the motion module could not be specified, it converted it into M register.
Cause Remedy
There is no allocation of the relevant motion module to the Take one of the following remedies.
motion register used by the application in the module con- • Perform the conversion manually for the parts converted
figuration definitions for the conversion source. to M registers at the conversion destination.
• Allocate the relevant motion module to the motion regis-
ter used in the program at the conversion source, then exe-
cute the conversion again.

error 1069: The target program of register replacement does not exist.
Cause Remedy
The drawings specified at the conversion source for the Review the names of the drawings specified at the conver-
Multi-register Replace function do not exist. sion source for the Multi-register Replace function.

error 1070: The converted D register number exceeds the maximum D register number of target DWG.
Cause Remedy
A local register specified for replacement is outside the reg- Review the size and address of the register to be replaced,
ister range at the replace destination. and change the settings so that the register after the replace-
ment is within the appropriate range.

error 1071: The "linear motor" is set in the source, but it is not available in the target module.
Cause Remedy
The servo module allocated at the conversion destination When making a conversion to "linear type", change to a
doesn't support "linear type" as a motor classification. servo module that supports linear motors at the conversion
destination.

error 1072: The working register for the MSEE instruction is out of range.
Cause Remedy
The working registers used with the MSEE command Correct the working registers used with the MSEE com-
exceed the range of registers that can be used for the speci- mand.
fied register classification. Note: With the M2000 series, the size of the working regis-
ters used with the MSEE command has been
expanded to four words.

Appendices

App

A-67
 Appendices
F.3 Warning List

F.3 Warning List

The details of the warnings are as follows.
No. Message
3001 D-Register Data was imported, but it is not compatible.
3005 Parameters are converted, but two parameters are merged. Please confirm.
Parameters are converted, but the parameter requires the unit configuration, so please change the unit to be same it
3006
with the source environment.
3007 The motion registers (set/monitor parameters) are used with index i, j.
3008 The scale is changed (10 = 1 Hz to 1 = 1 Hz). Please confirm the program.
3009 The degree speed unit is changed. Please check ACC, DCC, SCC command.
3010 The speed unit is changed. Please check VEL command.
3011 Line number was changed to empty line number Since line number overlapped.
3012 The line number was set by the empty line number.
3013 Transmission cycle 250 us/500 us/1 msec of the parameter definition was converted into 2 msec.
The conversion has been done. The meaning of parameter is changed "the acceleration (deceleration) time to feed
3015
speed" to "the acceleration time (deceleration) time to rated speed". Please check in the target program.
3016 The conversion has been done. The unit of the parameter is changed. Please check in the target program.
3017 The conversion has been done. The unit of the parameter can be changed. Please check in the target program.
3018 The register is converted to a bit for Alarm (IBxxx49). You can change it to a bit for Warning (IBxxx20) also.
3019 The conversion has been done. "DEC" and "EXT" bits are converted in a bit.
"Positioning completed" and "Speed coincidence" are assigned into a bit in the target. Please make notice in Speed
3020
control mode.
"Distribution completed" and "Zero speed" are assigned into a bit in the target. It is "Zero speed" in Speed control
3021
mode.
"Position proximity" and "Torque limit detection" are assigned into a bit in the target. It is "Position proximity" in
3022
Position control mode.
3023 The conversion has been done. Please set "0.01" to "Torque unit".
It is converted to "Torque Reference Monitor". You can change it to "General-Purpose AI Monitor 1" also. In the
3024
target program, set "0.01" to "Torque Unit Selection".
3025 The baud-rate which is set in the source is invalid in the target, so it is converted to 19.2 [kbps].
3026 Conversion failed because the circuit (module) does not apply in the target.
3027 The third and fourth working registers for the MSEE instruction are used.
3028 A MSEE instruction was found.
3032 The RS-232C of the source converted into the 217IF of 218IF-01 at destination.
3034 The row of Bit is different conversion ahead though it converted. Please check in the target program.
The motion register (setting parameter and monitor parameter) is used by index i and j though it converted. Please
3035
check in the target program. (i and j)
3036 The meaning of Bit reverses conversion ahead though it converted. Please check in the target program.
3037 The speed unit is changed. Please check VEL command.
3038 It is different from the type of the corresponding parameter though it converted. Please check in the target program.
3039 The station allocation of the source was changed by the destination.
3040 The SVA definition was converted into the MECHATROLINK servo of SVB.
3041 Transmission cycle 1 msec/4 msec of the parameter definition was converted into 2 msec.
3042 It was converted with MECHATROLINK-II (32 byte Mode), 0.5 msec.
3043 It was replaced with *****I/O, because the selected module does not exist.
3044 Because the set Motion Command is not supported in the target, this setting is ignored.
3045 Because the set Home Return Type is not supported in the target, this setting is ignored.

A-68
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

F.4 Details of Warnings

The details of each warning are explained below.

warning 3001: D-Register Data was imported, but it is not compatible.

Cause Remedy
Application register data that includes D-register data has Check the converted data.
been imported into the conversion source environment.

warning 3005: Parameters are converted, but two parameters are merged. Please confirm.
Cause Remedy
The relevant register has been converted but multiple Check the converted data.
parameters have been merged.
1. Setting parameter No. 3 (OWxx02/Forward torque 1. Setting parameter No. 3 (OWxx02/Forward torque
clamp setting) clamp setting)
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to
OLxx14 (torque clamp setting when a velocity reference
is given). It is not possible to make independent settings
for forward and reverse motion.
2. Setting parameter No. 17 (OWxx10/Position loop gain) 2. Setting parameter No. 17 (OWxx10/Position loop gain)
The conversion source parameters OWxx10 and The warning detected by the relevant register is only
OWxx19 have been merged as OWxx2E. The values detected when an MP900 series SVA is used.
and comments follow those of OWxx10.
3. Setting parameter No. 26 (OWxx19/Proportional gain) 3. Setting parameter No. 26 (OWxx19/Proportional gain)
The conversion source parameters OWxx10 and The warning detected by the relevant register is only
OWxx19 have been merged as OWxx2E. The values detected when an MP900 series SVA is used.
and comments follow those of OWxx10.

warning 3006: Parameters are converted, but the parameter requires the unit configuration, so please change the
unit to be same it with the source environment.
Cause Remedy
The relevant register has been converted but the unit system Check the converted data.
needs to be changed to match the existing settings.
1. Monitor parameter No. 39 (ILxx26/Velocity reference 1. Monitor parameter No. 39 (ILxx26/Velocity reference
output value monitor) output value monitor)
Set the unit for velocity references with "speed unit
selection" (OWxx03, Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification

warning 3007: The motion registers (set/monitor parameters) are used with index i, j.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but indices i and j have The settings for i and j are not automatically converted by
been specified with the relevant motion register. the Application Converter. Check the values of i and j of the
relevant motion register in the conversion results.

warning 3008: The scale is changed (10 = 1 Hz to 1 = 1 Hz). Please confirm the program.
Cause Remedy
The unit system of the relevant register has been converted Check the converted data.
(1 = 0.1 Hz to 1 = 1 Hz).
Appendices

1. Setting parameter No. 30 (OWxx1D/Speed loop gain) 1. Setting parameter No. 30 (OWxx1D/Speed loop gain)
The unit has been changed from 0.1 Hz to Hz.

App

A-69
 Appendices
F.4 Details of Warnings

warning 3009: The degree speed unit is changed. Please check ACC, DCC, SCC command.
Cause Remedy
The unit of acceleration has been changed. Check the ACC, DCC and SCC commands.
1. Setting parameter No. 3 (Bit 4 to Bit 7) (OWxx03/ 1. Setting parameter No. 3 (Bit 4 to Bit 7) (OWxx03/
Acceleration unit selection) Acceleration unit selection)
If the value for speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 4 to
Bit 7) is other than 1, the operation of the acceleration/
deceleration commands (ACC, DCC, SCC) in the
motion program changes. To ensure the same operation
as in the conversion source motion program, change to
acceleration unit selection = 1 (ms).

warning 3010: The speed unit is changed. Please check VEL command.
Cause Remedy
The unit of speed has been changed. Check the VEL command.
1. Setting parameter No. 3 (Bit 0 to Bit 3) (OWxx03/Speed 1. Setting parameter No. 3 (Bit 0 to Bit 3) (OWxx03/Speed
unit selection) unit selection)
If the value for speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to
Bit 3) is other than 1, the operation of the speed change
command (VEL) in the motion program changes. To
ensure the same operation as in the conversion source
motion program, change to speed unit selection = 1
(command unit/min.).

warning 3011: Line number was changed to empty line number Since line number overlapped.
Cause Remedy
The line number was changed to an empty line number since Check the converted data.
line numbers overlapped.

warning 3012: The line number was set by the empty line number.
Cause Remedy
Because conversion was performed for multiple modules, it Check the assigned line numbers.
wasn't possible to assign the same line numbers as were
used at the conversion source. For this reason, empty line
numbers were assigned.

warning 3013: Transmission cycle 250 us/500 us/1 msec of the parameter definition was converted into 2 msec.
Cause Remedy
Because a transmission cycle that was invalid for MECHA- Check whether there is no problem even if the cycle is
TROLINK was set, it was changed to one that is valid with changed.
MECHATROLINK.

warning 3015: The conversion has been done. The meaning of parameter is changed "the acceleration (decelera-
tion) time to feed speed" to "the acceleration time (deceleration) time to rated speed". Please check in the target
program.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but the parameter informa- Check the converted data.
tion has been changed.
1. Setting parameter No. 13 (OWxx0C/Constant for linear 1. Setting parameter No. 13 (OWxx0C/Constant for linear
acceleration) acceleration)
The relevant register has been converted to OLxx36, but The setting has been changed from the time required to
the method for setting the unit system has been changed, reach the feed speed to the time required to reach the
so the unit system has been changed to ms. rated speed.
2. Setting parameter No. 14 (OWxx0D/Constant for linear 2. Setting parameter No. 14 (OWxx0D/Constant for linear
deceleration) deceleration)
The relevant register has been converted to OLxx38, but The setting has been changed from the time required to
the method for setting the unit system has been changed, reach the feed speed to the time required to reach the
so the unit system has been changed to ms. rated speed.

A-70
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

warning 3016: The conversion has been done. The unit of the parameter is changed. Please check in the target
program.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but the parameter units Check the converted data.
have been changed.
1. Setting parameter No. 11 (OWxx0A/Approach speed) 1. Setting parameter No. 11 (OWxx0A/Approach speed)
Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification
2. Setting parameter No. 12 (OWxx0B/Creep speed) 2. Setting parameter No. 12 (OWxx0B/Creep speed)
Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification
3. Setting parameter No. 21 (OWxx14/Filter time constant)
3. Setting parameter No. 21 (OWxx14/Filter time constant)
Check the converted data.
4. Setting parameter No. 23 (OLxx16/Phase compensation
4. Setting parameter No. 23 (OLxx16/Phase compensation
setting)
setting)
Check the converted data.
5. Setting parameter No. 31 (OLxx1E/Compensation pulse
5. Setting parameter No. 31 (OLxx1E/Compensation pulse
setting)
setting)
Check the converted data.
6. Setting parameter No. 35 (OLxx22/Fast speed) 6. Setting parameter No. 35 (OLxx22/Fast speed)
The previous two types of velocity reference register - Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
OLxx22 and OWxx15 - have been merged as OLxx10 in tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
the MP2000 series. Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification
7. Monitor parameter No. 13 (IWxx0C/Velocity reference 7. Monitor parameter No. 13 (IWxx0C/Velocity reference
output value monitor) output value monitor)
Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification
Or [pulse/sec.], or "command unit/H scan"
8. Monitor parameter No. 14 (IWxx0D/Speed monitor) 8. Monitor parameter No. 14 (IWxx0D/Speed monitor)
Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification
9. Monitor parameter No. 39 (ILxx26/Velocity reference 9. Monitor parameter No. 39 (ILxx26/Velocity reference
output value monitor) output value monitor)
Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Appendices

Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)

0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification

App

A-71
 Appendices
F.4 Details of Warnings

warning 3017: The conversion has been done. The unit of the parameter can be changed. Please check in the tar-
get program.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but the units for the param- Check the converted data.
eters may have been changed.
1. Monitor parameter No. 39 (ILxx26/Velocity reference 1. Monitor parameter No. 39 (ILxx26/Velocity reference
output value monitor) output value monitor)
Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification

warning 3018: The register is converted to a bit for Alarm (IBxxx49). You can change it to a bit for Warning
(IBxxx20) also.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed in such a way that the rele- Check the converted data.
vant parameter generates an alarm.
Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx000/Abnormal deviation) Monitor parameter No. 1 (IBxx000/Abnormal deviation)
An alarm or warning can be selected by changing the setting
for the abnormal deviation error level setting (OWxx01 Bit
0).

warning 3019: The conversion has been done. "DEC" and "EXT" bits are converted in a bit.
Cause Remedy
At the MP2000 series, conversion has been performed so Check the converted data.
that the DEC/EXT signals of the registers below are used in
common.
1. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx015/DI5 (external latch
signal))
2. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx016/DI5)
3. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx018/DI7 (external latch
signal)

warning 3020: "Positioning completed" and "Speed coincidence" are assigned into a bit in the target. Please make
notice in Speed control mode.
Cause Remedy
At the MP2000 series, "V-CMP (speed match)" and "Posi- Check the converted data.
tioning completed" have been converted to "Positioning
completed/speed match".
1. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx012/V-CMP (Speed
match))
2. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx017/Positioning com-
pleted)

warning 3021: "Distribution completed" and "Zero speed" are assigned into a bit in the target. It is "Zero speed" in
Speed control mode.
Cause Remedy
At the MP2000 series, "Distribution completed" has been Check the converted data.
converted to "Distribution completed/zero speed".
1. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx018/Distribution com-
pleted)

A-72
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

warning 3022: "Position proximity" and "Torque limit detection" are assigned into a bit in the target. It is "Position
proximity" in Position control mode.
Cause Remedy
At the MP2000 series, "VLT (velocity limit detection)" has Check the converted data.
been converted to "Positioning vicinity/velocity limit".
1. Monitor parameter No. 2 (IBxx016/VLT (Velocity limit
detection)

warning 3023: The conversion has been done. Please set "0.01" to "Torque unit".
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but the units have been Check the converted data.
changed.
1. Monitor parameter No. 15 (IWxx0E/Torque monitor) 1. Monitor parameter No. 15 (IWxx0E/Torque monitor)
Set the torque unit selection (OWxx03 Bit C to Bit F) to
0.01%.

warning 3024: It is converted to "Torque Reference Monitor". You can change it to "General-Purpose AI Monitor 1"
also. In the target program, set "0.01" to "Torque Unit Selection".
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but the units have been Check the converted data.
changed.
1. Monitor parameter No. 15 (IWxx0E/Torque monitor) 1. Monitor parameter No. 15 (IWxx0E/Torque monitor)
Since the analog input voltage is reported as [0.001 V],
unit conversion is necessary. Set torque unit selection
(OWxx03 Bit C to Bit F) to 0.01%.

warning 3025: The baud-rate which is set in the source is invalid in the target, so it is converted to 19.2 [kbps].
Cause Remedy
The baud rate specified by the module setting at the conver- Check the converted data.
sion source is not supported at the conversion destination.
Therefore, it is converted to the default baud rate of 19.2
k[bps].

warning 3026: Conversion failed because the circuit (module) does not apply in the target.
Cause Remedy
Conversion was not performed because the circuit of the rel- Check the converted data.
evant module is not applicable to conversion in automatic
conversion.

warning 3027: The third and fourth working registers for the MSEE instruction are used.
Cause Remedy
With the MP900 series the working register area that MSEE Check the converted data. If the area is not being used for its
commands use was 2 words but with the MP2000 series this intended purpose, change the application so that there is no
area has been expanded to 4 words. The relevant location overlap with the working register area.
overlaps the area for the third and fourth words generated by
this expansion.

warning 3028: A MSEE instruction was found.

Cause Remedy
A location where MSEE commands are used has been Check the location that is using MSEE commands.
detected inside the application.
Appendices

App

A-73
 Appendices
F.4 Details of Warnings

warning 3032: The RS-232C of the source converted into the 217IF of 218IF-01 at destination.
Cause Remedy
The RS-232C definition of the conversion source has been Since the device type has been changed, check if there is any
converted into the 217IF definition of the 218IF-01 module location that accesses the relevant communication module
at the MP2000 series conversion destination. using the MSG-RCV/SND function, etc., in the application.
And, if necessary, change the device type of the MSG-RCV/
SND function.

warning 3034: The row of Bit is different conversion ahead though it converted. Please check in the target pro-
gram.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed but there is a difference in Check the converted data by referring to the Guide to
the order of the bits between the register at the conversion Parameter Conversion Specifications.
source and the register at the conversion destination.

A-74
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

warning 3034: The row of Bit is different conversion ahead though it converted. Please check in the target pro-
gram.
Cause Remedy
1. Monitor parameter No. 35 (ILxx22/Alarm) 1. Monitor parameter No. 35 (ILxx22/Alarm)
Conversion has been performed but there is a difference Check the converted data by referring to the Guide to
in the order of the bits between the register at the con- Parameter Conversion Specifications below.
version source and the register at the conversion destina- <Guide to Parameter Conversion Specifications>
tion. Bit 0 (Servo amplifier error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 0: Servo driver error.
Bit 1 (Positive overtravel):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 1: Positive overtravel.
Bit 2 (Negative overtravel):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 2: Negative overtravel.
Bit 3 (Positive software limit):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 3: Positive software limit.
Bit 4 (Negative software limit):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 4: Negative software limit.
Bit 5 (Servo OFF/excitation OFF):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 5: Servo OFF.
Bit 6 (Positioning time limit exceeded):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 6: Positioning time limit exceeded.
Bit 7 (Excessive positioning travel/Excessive speed):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 7: Excessive positioning travel, and ILxx04 Bit 8:
Excessive speed.
Bit 8 (Filter type change error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 10: Filter type change error.
Bit 9 (Filter time constant change error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 11: Filter time constant change error.
Bit 10 (Control mode error):
With the MP2000 series, the relevant register has been
deleted. Change the program.
Bit 11 (Zero point not set):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 13: Zero point not set.
Bit 12 (Zero point set during travel):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 14: Zero point set during travel.
Bit 13: (Servo pack Cn constant setting error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 15: Servo driver user constant setting error.
Bit 14 (Servo driver synchronous communication error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Appendices

Bit 16: Servo driver synchronous communication error.

App

A-75
 Appendices
F.4 Details of Warnings

warning 3034: The row of Bit is different conversion ahead though it converted. Please check in the target pro-
gram.
Cause Remedy
1. Monitor parameter No. 35 (ILxx22/Alarm) Bit 15 (Servo driver communication error):
Conversion has been performed but there is a difference With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
in the order of the bits between the register at the con- Bit 17: Servo driver communication error.
version source and the register at the conversion destina- Bit 16 (Servo driver command timeout error):
tion. With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 18: Servo driver command timeout error.
Bit 17 (Excessive absolute encoder rotation):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 19: Excessive absolute encoder rotation.
Bit 18 (PG disconnection error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 20: PG disconnection error.
Bit 30 (Motor type setting error):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 31: Motor type setting error.
Bit 31 (Encoder type mismatch):
With the MP2000 series, this has been changed to ILxx04
Bit 30: Linear motor connection error.

warning 3035: The motion register (setting parameter and monitor parameter) is used by index i and j though it
converted. Please check in the target program. (i and j)
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but indices i and j have The settings for i and j are not automatically converted by
been specified with the relevant motion register. the Application Converter. Check the values of i and j of the
relevant motion register in the conversion results.

warning 3036: The meaning of Bit reverses conversion ahead though it converted. Please check in the target pro-
gram.
Cause Remedy
The meanings of the bits in the register at the conversion Check the converted data.
destination are inverted with respect to the relevant register
that was used at the conversion source.
1. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01E/Position command 1. Setting parameter No. 2 (OBxx01E/Position command
type) type)
If the relevant register is used by the application, check
its setting.

warning 3037: The speed unit is changed. Please check VEL command.
Cause Remedy
The conversion source parameters OLxx22 and OWxx15 Check the converted data.
have been merged as OLxx10.
1. Setting parameter No. 22 (OWxx15/Velocity reference) 1. Setting parameter No. 22 (OWxx15/Velocity reference)
The conversion source parameters OLxx22 and Set the unit for velocity references with speed unit selec-
OWxx15 have been merged as OLxx10. The values and tion (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3).
comments follow those of OLxx22. The unit system set- Speed unit selection (OWxx03 Bit 0 to Bit 3)
ting must be checked. 0: Command unit/sec.
1: Command unit/min.
2: % specification

warning 3038: It is different from the type of the corresponding parameter though it converted. Please check in the
target program.
Cause Remedy
Conversion has been performed, but there is a discrepancy Check the converted data.
between the type of the register and the type of the relevant
parameter.

A-76
 F Error and Warning List for the Application Converter

warning 3039: The station allocation of the source was changed by the destination.
Cause Remedy
The SVA axis of MP940 has been allocated as the SVB Check the converted data.
MECHATROLINK servo at the conversion destination,
which means that, if there is already an allocation to station
#1 in the MECHATROLINK definition at the conversion
source, the station allocation at the conversion destination
will change.

warning 3040: The SVA definition was converted into the MECHATROLINK servo of SVB.
Cause Remedy
The SVA definition at the conversion source has been con- Check the converted data.
verted to the SVB MECHATROLINK servo.

warning 3041: Transmission cycle 1 msec/4 msec of the parameter definition was converted into 2 msec.
Cause Remedy
The MLINK transmission cycle at the conversion source Check the converted data.
(1 ms/4 ms) has been converted to a transmission cycle of
2 ms at the conversion destination.

warning 3042: It was converted with MECHATROLINK-II (32 byte Mode), 0.5 msec.
Cause Remedy
The MLINK definition at the conversion source MP940M Check the converted data.
has been converted to MECHATROLINK-II (32-byte mode)
with a communication cycle of 0.5 ms at the conversion des-
tination.

warning 3043: It was replaced with *****I/O, because the selected module does not exist.
Cause Remedy
No selectable module exists at the conversion destination so Check the converted data.
it has been replaced with ****I/O.

warning 3044: Because the set Motion Command is not supported in the target, this setting is ignored.
Cause Remedy
The module at the conversion destination is not compatible Check the converted data.
with the motion command codes set at the conversion source
and therefore this setting is ignored.

warning 3045: Because the set Home Return Type is not supported in the target, this setting is ignored.
Cause Remedy
The module at the conversion destination is not compatible Check the converted data.
with the zero point return method set at the conversion
source and therefore this setting is ignored.
Appendices

App

A-77
 Appendices
G.1 Cancelling Display in Red of Conversion Errors

G Operations Possible with the Application Converter

G.1 Cancelling Display in Red of Conversion Errors
This is a function for canceling the display in red of registers where a conversion error has occurred.
It is used when there are some registers that can be left as they are without problems after the details of conver-
sion errors have been checked and necessary corrections made.
When this operation is performed all of the registers that are indicated in red due to conversion errors are reset
and the original font color is reinstated.

IMPORTANT Note that once the display of conversion errors has been cancelled, it is not possible to display them again.

The procedure for cancellation is given below.

1. Right-click the PLC folder and select Hide Conversion Error Display from the pop-up menu.

2. The color of all the registers and symbols that have been subject to a conversion error changes from red to
the standard color.

G.2 Rules for Module Conversion

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP900-
series Machine Controllers to the MP2000-series Machine Controllers are presented in the table below.
Conversion Procedure
MP900-Series Models Compatible M2000-Series Models
(Reference Section)
MP920/MP920-02 MP2200/MP2200-02 G.2 (1)
MP920/MP920-02 MP2300/MP2310 G.2 (2)
MP930/MP930-02/MP930-03 MP2300/MP2310 G.2 (3)
MP930/MP930-02/MP930-03 MP2300S G.2 (4)
MP940M MP2300S G.2 (5)
MP940M MP2300 G.2 (6)
MP940M MP2310 G.2 (7)
MP940D MP2300 G.2 (8)
MP940D MP2310 G.2 (9)

A-78
 G Operations Possible with the Application Converter

(1) Conversion from MP920/MP920-02 to MP2200/MP2200-02

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP920-
series or MP920-02-series Machine Controllers to the MP2200-series or MP2200-02-series Machine Controllers
are presented in the table below.
MP920/MP920-02 Conver- MP2200/MP2200-02
Conversion of
No. sion
Module (Before Conversion) Module (After Conversion) Detailed Definitions
→
→ CPU –
– SVR –
CPU
– CARD (MP2200-02 only) –
– USB (MP2200-02 only) –
1
Communication function (built-in → 218IF-01 –
CPU) – 218IF –
CIR#01: RS-232 × Cannot be converted. Not possible
CIR#02: RS-232 → 217IF Possible
Multi CPU (MP920-02 only) × Cannot be converted. –
Communication function (built-in
× Cannot be converted. –
2 CPU)
RS-232C × Cannot be converted. Not possible
RS-232C × Cannot be converted. Not possible
Converts axes 1 and 2 of SVA-01 (2
→ Possible
axes).
3 SVA-01 (4 axes, 2-slot width)
Converts axes 3 and 4 of SVA-01 (2
→ Possible
axes).
4 SVA-02 (2 axes) → SVA-01 (2 axes) Possible
5 PO-01 (4 axes) → PO-01 (4 axes) Possible
→ SVB-01 Possible
6 SVB-01 216IF-01 (in CP216 transmission
→ Possible
mode)
CNTR-01 (2 channels)
→ Not possible
Converts channels 1 and 2
7 CNTR-01 (4 channels)
CNTR-01 (2 channels)
→ Not possible
Converts channels 3 and 4
8 LIO-01 (32 inputs/32 outputs) → LIO-04 (32 inputs/32 outputs) Possible
9 AI-01 (4 channels) → AI-01 (8 channels) Not possible
10 AO-01 (4 channels) → AO-01 (4 channels) Possible
→ LIO-04 (32 inputs/32 outputs) Not possible
11 DI-01 (64 inputs)
→ LIO-04 (32 inputs/32 outputs) Not possible
12 DO-01 (64 outputs) → DO-01 (64 outputs) Possible
217IF → 217IF-01 –
CIR#01: RS-232 → RS-232 Possible
13
CIR#02: RS-232 × Cannot be converted. Not possible
CIR#03: RS-485 → RS-485 Possible
→ 217IF-01 –
217IFT1
− RS-232 –
14 CIR#01: RS-485 → RS-485 Possible
CIR#02: RS-485 × Cannot be converted. Not possible
Appendices

CIR#03: RS-485 × Cannot be converted. Not possible

→ 218IF-01 –
15 218IF → 218IF Possible
– 217IF –
→ 260IF-01 –
16 260IF → 260IF Possible App
– 217IF –

A-79
 Appendices
G.2 Rules for Module Conversion

MP920/MP920-02 Conver- MP2200/MP2200-02

Conversion of
No. sion
Module (Before Conversion) Module (After Conversion) Detailed Definitions
→
→ 261F-01 –
17 261IF → 261IFS Possible
– 217IF –
→ 215AIF-01 –
18 215IF → MPLINK Possible
– RS-232 –
→ CSIF-01 –
19 CSIF
→ CSIF Possible
20 EXIO → EXIO –

(2) Conversion from MP920/MP920-02 to MP2300/MP2310

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP920-
series or MP920-02-series Machine Controllers to the MP2300-series or MP2310-series Machine Controllers are
presented in the table below.
MP920/MP920-02 Conver- MP2300/MP2310
Conversion of
No. sion
Module (Before Conversion) Module (After Conversion) Detailed Definitions
→
CPU → CPU –
Communication function (built-in → 218IF-01 –
1 CPU) – 218IF –
CIR#01: RS-232 × Cannot be converted. Not possible
CIR#02: RS-232 → 217IF Possible
Multi CPU (MP920-02 only) × Cannot be converted. –
Communication function (built-in
× Cannot be converted. –
2 CPU)
RS-232C × Cannot be converted. Not possible
RS-232C × Cannot be converted. Not possible
Built-in CPU –
→ MECHATROLINK Possible
3 SVB-01
216IF-01 (in the CP216 transmission
→ Possible
mode)
4 EXIO → EXIO –
Same pattern of conversion as
described in G.2 (1) Conversion from
5 Other modules → –
MP920/MP920-02 to MP2200/
MP2200-02.

A-80
 G Operations Possible with the Application Converter

(3) Conversion from MP930/MP930-02/MP930-03 to MP2300/MP2310

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP930-
series, MP930-02-series, or MP930-03-series Machine Controllers to the MP2300-series or MP2310-series
Machine Controllers are presented in the table below.
Conver-
MP930/MP930-02/MP930-03 MP2300/MP2310 Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) → Module (After Conversion)
→ 218IF-01 –
RS232C
– 218IF –
1
CIR#01: RS-232 × Cannot be converted. Not possible
CIR#02: RS-232 → 217IF Possible
2 MC-350IO (16 inputs/16 outputs) → LIO-01 (16 inputs/16 outputs) Possible
– Built-in CPU –
3 MC-350NET
→ MECHATROLINK Possible

(4) Conversion from MP930/MP930-02/MP930-03 to MP2300S

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP930-
series, MP930-02-series or MP930-03-series Machine Controllers to the MP2300S-series Machine Controllers
are presented in the table below.
Conver-
MP930/ MP930-02/ MP930-03 MP2300S Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) → Module (After Conversion)
→ Built-in CPU –
RS232C
– 218IF –
1
CIR#01: RS-232 × No conversion Not possible
CIR#02: RS-232 × No conversion Not possible
2 MC-350IO (16 inputs/16 outputs) → LIO-01 (16 inputs/16 outputs) Possible
MC-350NET – Built-in CPU –
3
→ MECHATROLINK Possible

Appendices

App

A-81
 Appendices
G.2 Rules for Module Conversion

(5) Conversion from MP940/MP940M to MP2300S

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP940-
series or MP940M-series Machine Controllers to the MP2300S-series Machine Controllers are presented in the
table below.
Conver-
MP940/MP940M MP2300S Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) Module (After Conversion)
Serial × No conversion –
1 CIR#01: RS-232 × No conversion Not possible
CIR#02: RS-485 × No conversion Not possible
LIO → LIO-06 –
Discrete input → MIXIO (Discrete input) Possible
Discrete output → MIXIO (Discrete output) Possible
2
Interrupt input → MIXIO (Interrupt input) Possible
Analog input → MIXIO (Analog input) Possible
Analog output → MIXIO (Analog output) Possible
→ Built-in CPU Possible
3 SVA (1 axis)
MECHATROLINK –
→ LIO-06 (Same module as No. 2) –
4 CNTR
CNTR-A Possible
– Built-in CPU –
5 MLINK (C)
→ MECHATROLINK Possible

For details on the conversion of the MLINK definitions of MP940/MP940M, refer to (a) Cautions on conversion
of MLINK definitions.
Note: 1. S drawings cannot be converted for use with the MP2000 series.
2. When definitions allocated to S scans are converted for use with the MP2000 series, they are allocated to H
scans.
3. When a 261IFS is selected for the sixth slot of an MP940, it will not be applicable for conversion.

A-82
 G Operations Possible with the Application Converter

(a) Cautions on conversion of MLINK definitions

The MLINK definitions of MP940/MP940M are converted to MECHATROLINK-II (32-byte mode/0.5 ms)
with MP2300S. When such a conversion is performed, since the I/O modules allocated in the MLINK defini-
tions cannot be used with MECHATROLINK-II, if there are no modules compatible with MECHA-
TROLINK-II that can be converted, they are converted to *****I/O.
The rules for conversion of I/O modules that have been allocated in MLINK definitions are presented in the
table below.
MP940/MP940M MLINK Definitions MP2300S MECHATROLINK-II
Conver-
Output sion Input Output
Model Name Input Size Model Name
Size Size Size
JEPMC-IO350 4 4 → JEPMC-IO2310 4 4
MP940 8 8 → SVB-01 8 8
CP-216: RIO-01 1 1 → *****I/O 1 1
ABS_CODER 8 8 → *****I/O 8 8
*****I/O 0 to 8 0 to 8 → *****I/O 0 to 16 0 to 16
JAMSC-120DRA83030 0 1 → *****I/O 0 1
JAMSC-120DAI53330 1 0 → *****I/O 1 0
JAMSC-120DAI73330 1 0 → *****I/O 1 0
JAMSC-120DDI34330 1 0 → *****I/O 1 0
JAMSC-120DDO34330 0 1 → *****I/O 0 1
JAMSC-120AVI02030 7 2 → JEPMC-AN2900 7 2
JAMSC-120AVO01030 2 4 → JEPMC-AN2910 2 4
JAMSC-120DAO83330 0 1 → *****I/O 0 1

(6) Conversion from MP940/MP940M to MP2300

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP940-
series or MP940M-series Machine Controllers to the MP2300-series Machine Controllers are presented in the
table below.
Conver-
MP940/MP940M MP2300 Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) → Module (After Conversion)
→ 218IF-01 –
Serial
– 218IF –
1
CIR#01: RS-232 → No conversion Not possible
CIR#02: RS-485 × No conversion Not possible
LIO → LIO-06 Possible
Discrete input → MIXIO (Discrete input) Possible
Discrete output → MIXIO (Discrete output) Possible
2
Interrupt input → MIXIO (Interrupt input) Possible
Analog input → MIXIO (Analog input) Possible
Analog output → MIXIO (Analog output) Possible
3 SVA (1 axis) → SVA-01 (2 axes) Possible
→ LIO-06 (Same module as No. 2) –
4 CNTR
CNTR-A Possible
– Built-in CPU –
5 MLINK (C)
→ MECHATROLINK Possible
Appendices

Note: 1. S drawings cannot be converted for use with the MP2000 series.
2. When definitions allocated to S scans are converted for use with the MP2000 series, they are allocated to H
scans.
3. When a 261IFS is selected for the sixth slot of an MP940, it will not be applicable for conversion.

App

A-83
 Appendices
G.2 Rules for Module Conversion

(7) Conversion from MP940/MP940M to MP2310

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the MP940-
series or MP940M-series Machine Controllers to the MP2310-series Machine Controllers are presented in the
table below.
Conver-
MP940/MP940M MP2310 Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) → Module (After Conversion)
Serial × No conversion –
1 CIR#01: RS-232 × No conversion Not possible
CIR#02: RS-485 × No conversion Not possible
LIO → LIO-06 Possible
Discrete input → MIXIO (Discrete input) Possible
Discrete output → MIXIO (Discrete output) Possible
2
Interrupt input → MIXIO (Interrupt input) Possible
Analog input → MIXIO (Analog input) Possible
Analog output → MIXIO (Analog output) Possible
3 SVA (1 axis) → SVA-01 (2 axes) Possible
→ LIO-06 (Same module as No. 2) –
4 CNTR
CNTR-A Possible
– Built-in CPU –
5 MLINK (C)
→ MECHATROLINK Possible

Note: 1. S drawings cannot be converted for use with the MP2000 series.
2. When definitions allocated to S scans are converted for use with the MP2000 series, they are allocated to H
scans.
3. When a 261IFS is selected for the sixth slot of an MP940, it will not be applicable for conversion.

(8) Conversion from MP940D to MP2300

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the
MP940D-series Machine Controllers to the MP2300-series Machine Controllers are presented in the table below.
Conver-
MP940D MP2300 Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) → Module (After Conversion)
→ 260IF-01 –
Serial
– 260IF –
1
CIR#01: RS-232 → 217IF Possible
CIR#02: RS-485 × No conversion Not possible
LIO → LIO-06 Possible
Discrete input → MIXIO (Discrete input) Possible
Discrete output → MIXIO (Discrete output) Possible
2
Interrupt input → MIXIO (Interrupt input) Possible
Analog input → MIXIO (Analog input) Possible
Analog output → MIXIO (Analog output) Possible
3 SVA (1 axis) → SVA-01 (2 axes) Possible
→ LIO-06 (Same module as No. 2) –
4 CNTR
CNTR-A Possible
→ 260IF-01 (Same module as No. 1) –
5 260IF → 260IF Possible
– 217IF –

Note: 1. S drawings cannot be converted for use with the MP2000 series.
2. When definitions allocated to S scans are converted for use with the MP2000 series, they are allocated to H
scans.
3. When a 261IFS is selected for the sixth slot of an MP940, it will not be applicable for conversion.

A-84
 G Operations Possible with the Application Converter

(9) Conversion from MP940D to MP2310

The rules for conversion of modules when the Automatic Conversion Wizard is used to convert from the
MP940D-series Machine Controllers to the MP2310-series Machine Controllers are presented in the table below.
Conver-
MP940D MP2310 Conversion of
No. sion
Detailed Definitions
Module (Before Conversion) → Module (After Conversion)
Serial × No conversion –
1 CIR#01: RS-232 × No conversion Not possible
CIR#02: RS-485 × No conversion Not possible
LIO → LIO-06 Possible
Discrete input → MIXIO (Discrete input) Possible
Discrete output → MIXIO (Discrete output) Possible
2
Interrupt input → MIXIO (Interrupt input) Possible
Analog input → MIXIO (Analog input) Possible
Analog output → MIXIO (Analog output) Possible
SVA (1 axis) → SVA-01 (2 axes) Possible
→ LIO-06 (Same module as No. 2) –
CNTR
CNTR-A Possible
3
→ 260IF-01 (Same module as No. 1) –
260IF → 260IF Possible
– 217IF –

Note: 1. S drawings cannot be converted for use with the MP2000 series.
2. When definitions allocated to S scans are converted for use with the MP2000 series, they are allocated to H
scans.
3. When a 261IFS is selected for the sixth slot of an MP940, it will not be applicable for conversion.

Appendices

App

A-85
Index

INDEX data trace operations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4

Debugging Tool- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
default values setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
disable coil lists
configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-31
A Disable Coil List Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
Disable Coil List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
application converter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
disabling coils - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-38
automatic conversion wizard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-44
error and warning list - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-40 displaying current values using the REFER command - - - - - - - - 9-40
drawing and function instructions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21
manual conversion wizard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-56
DWG programs
multi-register replace - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-43 copying DWG program files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
enabling and disabling DWG programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
application information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
Application Information Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2 E
Application Information Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
editing Quick Reference data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15
closing application information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
editing a page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15
opening the Application Information Window - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
editing Time Chart Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-20
saving application information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
editing Watch Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-19
setting application information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
editing with the DWG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-16
application program
registers that can be input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15
development procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
editing table programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-57
environment settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-8
cutting and pasting table data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-58
B inserting and deleting columns- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-59
basic individual module definition operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-9 inserting and deleting rows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-58
moving the cursor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-57
C selecting table cells to edit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-57
calling the communication process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3 Engineering Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
changing Machine Controller status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6 automatic startup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63
comment lists basic functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-64
Comment List Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32 basic menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-65
Comment List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32 function windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66
creating comments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33 error messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33
F
editing comments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33
file components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
exiting the comment creation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-33
Communication Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2 File Manager- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
command menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
Communication Manager operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
File Manager Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
starting the Communication Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
Communication Process Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 tree - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
File Manager menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
communication process timeout value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-42
common menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
compare function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25
Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39 individual menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
flash compare - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-26
configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39
folder configuration example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11
creating branch circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-32
branch points- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-32 function bar display modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
connection points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-33 G
parallel connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-33
Get Current Value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-41
pulse generation circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-34
Group 01 Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-6
series connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-36
group definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
timer circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-35
closing group definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
cross references
deleting group definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
Cross Reference Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-27
Group Definition Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
Cross Reference Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26
Group Definition Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-27
outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
D saving group definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
data trace definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
closing data trace definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19 group folder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12, 2-10
Group List Tab Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
Data Trace Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3
group registration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
Data Trace Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
Data Trace Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5 groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
Graph Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
I
operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4 interlock table - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47

Index-1
 Index

L display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-51
Motion Alarm Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-51
ladder instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21
Motion Alarm Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-50
input methods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21
motion control ladder programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
inputting instructions
Motion Editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-15
conditional instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-24
END instruction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-27 closing the motion editor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-25
functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-24 editing functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-20
inline comments- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-27 adding a semicolon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-21
math, logic, and comparison instructions - - - - - - - - - 9-23 error list - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-23
MOVW, XCHG and other instructions - - - - - - - - - - 9-26 export function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-25
SEE instructions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-26 import function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-24
structure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21 jumping to a specified row - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-20
jumping to the end row of the program - - - - - - - - - -10-20
ladder programming system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3
jumping to the first row of the program - - - - - - - - - -10-20
ladder programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15
replacing a character string - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-20
creating comments- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-40
searching for a character string- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-20
creating ladder programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15 specifying fonts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-23
display mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20 teaching positions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-21
displaying current values - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-39 expansion commands- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-24
DWG Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-15 Motion Editor Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-17
editing programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-27 opening the Motion Editor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-15
changing instructions and operands - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30 motion parameter settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
copying - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30
motion program monitoring
cutting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30
opening the motion program monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12-39
deleting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28
inserting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28 stopping and restarting the monitoring display - - - - - - - - - -12-41
jumping to a particular step number - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-31 motion programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
opening DWG Windows used by SEE and compiling motion programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-26
FSTART instructions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-31 compile execution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-26
pasting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30 compile execution steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-26
returning to previous windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-32 error completion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-27
UNDELETE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-29 creating motion programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-11
LADDER Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-18 Debug Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-29
number of open ladder program editing windows - - - - - - - - 2-41 debug operations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-31
printing ladder programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42 abort - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-36
saving ladder programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-41 break points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-32
List and Print Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3 current value update - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-37
editing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-39
List Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69
editing during debug operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-38
outline - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68
hold ON/OFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-36
Print Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-70 multi step run - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-34
List Manager Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69 operation cursor- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-32
logging online - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15 start points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-31
logoff- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14 starting and stopping debug operations - - - - - - - - - -10-31
logon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13 step in - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-33
logon communication timeout value - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-42 step over- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-32
step run - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-32
M Debug Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-28
Machine Controller module configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 debugging motion programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-28
MP2100 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 group definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
MP2200 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 motion program development flow - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-11
MP2200 CPU-01 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 restrictions during debug operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-41
MP2200 CPU-02 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 motion properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-13
MP2300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 MPE720 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
MP2300S - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 function tree - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
MP2310 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 installation disk- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
MP910- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 installer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
MP920- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 main functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
MP930- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 procedure for installing the MPE720 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
MP940- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2 recommended PC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
MECHATROLINK devices- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-26 system configuration example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
module configuration definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12, 3-2 version applicability - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
basic flowchart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-5
basic module configuration definition operation - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
N
Module Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-7 number of groups and tasks- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-3
Module Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6 O
setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-8
offline mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
motion alarm monitor
online mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21

Index-2
Index

online monitor animation file - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-42 setting the CP-218/Ethernet (LP) communication port - - - - - - - - - 2-6
operand - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-22 setting the number of common registers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12
input methods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-22 setting the serial communication port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
operations possible with the application converter - - - - - - - - - - - 1-78 setting the system scan time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
order folder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12, 2-10 SFC- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7
switching display between subroutines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23
P switching the CPU status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-22
PLC folder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12, 2-10 symbol display modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
creating new folders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15 system configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
PLC Import Tool closing system configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
PLC Import Tool Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61 saving system configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
PLC Import Tool operations- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61 setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-4
PLC Import Tool Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59 System Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-3
starting the PLC Import Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-60 System Configuration Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
position monitor system configuration definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43 System Configuration Definitions Windows- - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
Position Monitor Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-43 types of system configuration definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
Position Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42
pre-import- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59 T
program development procedure- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2 table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-2
program display modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20 Column Attributes Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
properties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5 Column Attributes Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-7
DWG Properties Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-6 editing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-9
DWG Properties Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-7 saving- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-10
setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-8
DWG Properties Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5
saving and closing table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
I/O Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-8
opening DWG Properties Windows- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-5 Table Data Definition List Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-3
manipulating tables- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
Register List Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-12
Table Data Definition List Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-4
saving property information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-14
Table Data Windows - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-5
Symbol Definition Tab Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9 editing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
Update History Tab Page- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-13 setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-12
Table Data Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11-11
Q
table programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
Quick Reference entering # register constant table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45
opening the Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
entering data in C constant tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-51
Quick Reference Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-9
entering I/O conversion table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47
Quick Reference operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-11 entering interlock table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47
deleting all data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14
entering M register constant table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-46
page operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-11
entering part composition table data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49
resetting all data- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-15 printing table programs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-60
setting a register- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-14
saving and closing table programs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-60
R switching input modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-45
Table Program Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-44
register lists
Table Program Windows- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-43
configuration of the Register Data Window - - - - - - - - - - - 12-23
Task Monitor
Register List and Register Data Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-22
configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-48
Register List Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21
display modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-47
registering shortcut icons- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-78
Task Monitor Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-47
relationship between user and file privileges- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18
Task Monitor Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46
remote operation function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-27
tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-3
replacing register numbers
comment lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-32
configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-36
cross references - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-26
Register No. Replacement Cross Reference Window - - - - - 12-34
disable coil lists- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-30
Register Number Replacement Cross Reference Menu- - - - 12-35
motion alarm- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-50
root folder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
motion program monitoring- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-39
S position monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-42
saving to flash memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15, 2-26 Quick Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-8
scan time definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-12, 3-2 register lists - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-21
closing scan time definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 replacing register numbers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-34
saving scan time definitions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 Task Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-46
Scan Time Menus- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3 tuning panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
Scan Time Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2 Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5 graph - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-24
self-configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9 list- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30
setting Machine Controller’s definitions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12 other functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-47

Index-3
 Index

starting the Trace Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21

trace operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
trace time axis - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
tracing D registers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
Transfer From Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25
Transfer To Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25
transferring all files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-26, 2-27
transferring files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
All Files Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-29
CF card transfer- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-37
outline of file transfers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-25
Transfer Window- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-26
transferring all files - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-27
transferring files continuously - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-35
transferring individual file- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31
transferring files continuously - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-26, 2-35
transferring individual file- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-26
trigger conditions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
Tuning Panel
setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4
Tuning Panel Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-5
Tuning Panel Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 12-4

U
user management - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
User Management Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
User Menu Manager- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3, 2-78

Index-4
Revision History

The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO.‫ޓ‬SIEP C880700 05C
Published in Japan December 200903-08 7 -1
WEB revision number
Date of Revision number
publication
Date of original publication

WEB
Date of Rev.
Publication No. Rev. Section Revised Contents
No.
August 2013 11 0 – SIEP C880700 05D<10>-1, available on the Web.
Back cover Revision: Address
July 2013 10 1 1.1.1, 1.1.2 Revision: Related information on recommended PC of MPE720
Back cover Revision: Address
July 2012 0 Back cover Revision: Address
January 2012 9 0 Back cover Revision: Address

February 2011 8 0 – SIEP C880700 05C<7>-1, available on the Web.

Front cover Revision: Format
Back cover Revision: Address, format
December 2009 7 1 A.1 (5) Addition: CPDH_COM_048
Back cover Revision: Address
August 2008 – All chapters All revised
Back cover Revision: Address
December 2007 6 – Back cover Revision: Address

October 2007 5 – Back cover Revision: Address

September 2005 4 – 2.2.5 Revision: Description on the User Privilege

Back cover Revision: Address
June 2005 3 – Back cover Revision: Address

February 2005 2 – All sections Revision: Many screens replaced

Back cover Revision: Address
April 2004 1 – Back cover Revision: Address

August 2003 – – – First edition

Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series
MPE720
Software for Programming Device
USER'S MANUAL

IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER (SOLUTION CENTER)

480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5151 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
http://www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7310
http://www.yaskawa.com
YASKAWA ELÉTRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.
Avenida Piraporinha 777, Diadema, São Paulo, 09950-000, Brasil
Phone 55-11-3585-1100 Fax 55-11-3585-1187
http://www.yaskawa.com.br
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH
Hauptstraβe 185, Eschborn 65760, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
http://www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
9F, Kyobo Securities Bldg. 26-4, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 150-737, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
http://www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-02A, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
http://www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.
12F, Carlton Bld., No.21 HuangHe Road, HuangPu District, Shanghai 200003, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
http://www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No.1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing 100738, China
Phone 86-10-8518-4086 Fax 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei 104, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture
thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure
to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
© 2003-2013 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.

MANUAL NO. SIEP C880700 05E

Published in Japan August 2013 03-8 11 -0
13-6-9